.. 439. 4.3.8. Sample program 9 (measuring range combination) ...................................................... 440. 4.3.9.
Measurement terminals. 2021-01-12 | Version: 2.5. Notes to short documentation. ... Manual Control There are particular reasons why it may be appropriate to control the...
Short documentation | EN
ELM3xxx
Measurement terminals
2021-02-25 | Version: 2.6
Notes to short documentation
1
Notes to short documentation
NOTE
Within this short documentation some chapters are only available in a shortened version. For the complete documentation please contact the Beckhoff sales department responsible for you.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
3
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Notes to short documentation.................................................................................................................. 3
2 Foreword .................................................................................................................................................... 7 2.1 Notes on the documentation.............................................................................................................. 7 2.2 Safety instructions ............................................................................................................................. 8 2.3 Documentation issue status .............................................................................................................. 9 2.4 Version identification of EtherCAT devices ....................................................................................... 9 2.4.1 General notes on marking ................................................................................................. 9 2.4.2 Version identification of ELM terminals............................................................................ 10 2.4.3 Beckhoff Identification Code (BIC)................................................................................... 11 2.4.4 Electronic access to the BIC (eBIC) ................................................................................ 12
3 Product overview..................................................................................................................................... 15 3.1 Description....................................................................................................................................... 15 3.2 Common technical data ................................................................................................................... 17 3.3 Process data interpretation.............................................................................................................. 18 3.4 General information on measuring accuracy/measurement uncertainty ......................................... 19 3.5 ELM300x ......................................................................................................................................... 23 3.5.1 ELM300x - Introduction.................................................................................................... 23 3.5.2 ELM300x - Technical data ............................................................................................... 25 3.6 ELM310x ......................................................................................................................................... 52 3.6.1 ELM310x - Introduction.................................................................................................... 52 3.6.2 ELM310x - Technical data ............................................................................................... 53 3.7 ELM314x ......................................................................................................................................... 59 3.7.1 ELM314x - Introduction.................................................................................................... 59 3.7.2 ELM314x - Technical data ............................................................................................... 61 3.8 ELM350x ......................................................................................................................................... 83 3.8.1 ELM350x - Introduction.................................................................................................... 83 3.8.2 ELM350x - Technical data ............................................................................................... 84 3.9 ELM354x ....................................................................................................................................... 120 3.9.1 ELM354x - Introduction.................................................................................................. 120 3.9.2 ELM354x - Technical data ............................................................................................. 121 3.10 ELM360x ....................................................................................................................................... 124 3.10.1 ELM360x - Introduction.................................................................................................. 124 3.10.2 ELM360x - Technical data ............................................................................................. 126 3.11 ELM370x ....................................................................................................................................... 161 3.11.1 ELM370x - Introduction.................................................................................................. 161 3.11.2 ELM370x - Technical data ............................................................................................. 163 3.12 Start ............................................................................................................................................... 305 3.13 Similar products ............................................................................................................................. 306
4 Commissioning...................................................................................................................................... 310 4.1 Notes to short documentation........................................................................................................ 310 4.2 CoE overview ................................................................................................................................ 310 4.2.1 ELM30xx........................................................................................................................ 310 4.2.2 ELM310x........................................................................................................................ 322
4
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Table of contents
4.2.3 ELM314x........................................................................................................................ 333 4.2.4 ELM350x........................................................................................................................ 345 4.2.5 ELM354x........................................................................................................................ 365 4.2.6 ELM36xx........................................................................................................................ 384 4.2.7 ELM37xx........................................................................................................................ 396 4.3 Sample programs .......................................................................................................................... 417 4.3.1 Sample program 1 and 2 (offset/gain) ........................................................................... 418 4.3.2 Sample program 3 (write LookUp table) ........................................................................ 424 4.3.3 Sample program 4 (generate LookUp table) ................................................................. 426 4.3.4 Sample program 5 (write filter coefficients) ................................................................... 427 4.3.5 Sample program 6 (interlacing of measured values) ..................................................... 430 4.3.6 Sample program 7 (general decimation in the PLC)...................................................... 434 4.3.7 Sample program 8 (diagnosis messages) ..................................................................... 439 4.3.8 Sample program 9 (measuring range combination) ...................................................... 440 4.3.9 Sample program 10 (reading and writing TEDS data)................................................... 444 4.3.10 Sample program 11 (FB for real time diagnosis) .......................................................... 446 4.3.11 Sample program 12 (scripts for generation and transformation of filter coefficients) .... 449 4.3.12 Sample program 13 (R/W signature of calibration)........................................................ 450
5 ELM Features ......................................................................................................................................... 452
6 Commissioning on EtherCAT Master .................................................................................................. 453 6.1 General Notes - EtherCAT Slave Application ................................................................................ 453 6.2 TwinCAT Quick Start ..................................................................................................................... 461 6.2.1 TwinCAT 2 ..................................................................................................................... 463 6.2.2 TwinCAT 3 ..................................................................................................................... 473 6.3 TwinCAT Development Environment ............................................................................................ 486 6.3.1 Installation of the TwinCAT real-time driver................................................................... 487 6.3.2 Notes regarding ESI device description......................................................................... 492 6.3.3 TwinCAT ESI Updater ................................................................................................... 496 6.3.4 Distinction between Online and Offline.......................................................................... 496 6.3.5 OFFLINE configuration creation .................................................................................... 497 6.3.6 ONLINE configuration creation ...................................................................................... 502 6.3.7 EtherCAT subscriber configuration................................................................................ 510 6.3.8 Import/Export of EtherCAT devices with SCI and XTI ................................................... 519 6.4 EtherCAT basics............................................................................................................................ 525 6.5 EtherCAT cabling wire-bound..................................................................................................... 525 6.6 General notes for setting the watchdog ......................................................................................... 526 6.7 EtherCAT State Machine ............................................................................................................... 528 6.8 CoE Interface................................................................................................................................. 530 6.9 Distributed Clock ........................................................................................................................... 535
7 Housing .................................................................................................................................................. 536 7.1 Housing data ................................................................................................................................. 537 7.2 Notes on connection technology ................................................................................................... 538 7.3 Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 541 7.3.1 Shield connection ZS9100-0002.................................................................................... 541 7.3.2 Shielding hood ZS9100-0003 ........................................................................................ 542
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
5
Table of contents
7.3.3 Replacement push-in ZS2001-000x .............................................................................. 546
8 Mounting and wiring.............................................................................................................................. 548 8.1 Common notes to the power contacts ........................................................................................... 548 8.2 Installation positions ...................................................................................................................... 548 8.3 Mounting of Passive Terminals ..................................................................................................... 549 8.4 Notes regarding connectors and wiring ......................................................................................... 550 8.5 Shielding concept .......................................................................................................................... 552 8.6 Power supply, potential groups ..................................................................................................... 554 8.7 ELM/EKM terminal mounting on DIN rail ....................................................................................... 558 8.8 Protective earth (PE) ..................................................................................................................... 560 8.9 Connection notes for 20 mA measurement ................................................................................... 562 8.9.1 Configuration of 0/4..20 mA differential inputs............................................................... 562 8.10 LED indicators - meanings ............................................................................................................ 566 8.11 Power contacts ELM314x .............................................................................................................. 567
9 Appendix ................................................................................................................................................ 568 9.1 Diagnostics basic principles of diag messages .......................................................................... 568 9.2 TcEventLogger and IO .................................................................................................................. 575 9.3 UL notice ....................................................................................................................................... 579 9.4 Continuative documentation for ATEX and IECEx ........................................................................ 581 9.5 EtherCAT AL Status Codes ........................................................................................................... 581 9.6 Firmware Update EL/ES/EM/ELM/EPxxxx .................................................................................... 581 9.6.1 Device description ESI file/XML..................................................................................... 582 9.6.2 Firmware explanation .................................................................................................... 585 9.6.3 Updating controller firmware *.efw................................................................................. 586 9.6.4 FPGA firmware *.rbf....................................................................................................... 588 9.6.5 Simultaneous updating of several EtherCAT devices.................................................... 592 9.7 Firmware compatibility ................................................................................................................... 593 9.8 Firmware compatibility - passive terminals .................................................................................... 595 9.9 Restoring the delivery state ........................................................................................................... 595 9.10 Notes on analog measured values ................................................................................................ 596 9.10.1 Notices on analog specifications ................................................................................... 596 9.10.2 Notes regarding analog equipment - shielding and earth .............................................. 607 9.10.3 Notes on analog aspects dynamic signals .................................................................. 616 9.10.4 Notes on analog aspects to EL3751/ ELM3xxx ............................................................. 637 9.10.5 Note on Beckhoff calibration certificates........................................................................ 637 9.10.6 Readjusting the specification ......................................................................................... 638 9.11 Support and Service ...................................................................................................................... 642 9.12 Reshipment and return .................................................................................................................. 643
6
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
2
Foreword
Foreword
2.1
Notes on the documentation
Intended audience
This description is only intended for the use of trained specialists in control and automation engineering who are familiar with the applicable national standards. It is essential that the documentation and the following notes and explanations are followed when installing and commissioning these components. It is the duty of the technical personnel to use the documentation published at the respective time of each installation and commissioning.
The responsible staff must ensure that the application or use of the products described satisfy all the requirements for safety, including all the relevant laws, regulations, guidelines and standards.
Disclaimer
The documentation has been prepared with care. The products described are, however, constantly under development.
We reserve the right to revise and change the documentation at any time and without prior announcement.
No claims for the modification of products that have already been supplied may be made on the basis of the data, diagrams and descriptions in this documentation.
Trademarks
Beckhoff®, TwinCAT®, EtherCAT®, EtherCAT G®, EtherCAT G10®, EtherCAT P®, Safety over EtherCAT®, TwinSAFE®, XFC®, XTS® and XPlanar® are registered trademarks of and licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH. Other designations used in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Patent Pending
The EtherCAT Technology is covered, including but not limited to the following patent applications and patents: EP1590927, EP1789857, EP1456722, EP2137893, DE102015105702 with corresponding applications or registrations in various other countries.
EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.
Copyright
© Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG, Germany. The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its contents to others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
7
Foreword
2.2
Safety instructions
Safety regulations
Please note the following safety instructions and explanations! Product-specific safety instructions can be found on following pages or in the areas mounting, wiring, commissioning etc.
Exclusion of liability
All the components are supplied in particular hardware and software configurations appropriate for the application. Modifications to hardware or software configurations other than those described in the documentation are not permitted, and nullify the liability of Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG.
Personnel qualification
This description is only intended for trained specialists in control, automation and drive engineering who are familiar with the applicable national standards.
Description of instructions
In this documentation the following instructions are used. These instructions must be read carefully and followed without fail!
DANGER Serious risk of injury!
Failure to follow this safety instruction directly endangers the life and health of persons.
WARNING Risk of injury!
Failure to follow this safety instruction endangers the life and health of persons.
CAUTION Personal injuries!
Failure to follow this safety instruction can lead to injuries to persons.
NOTE Damage to environment/equipment or data loss
Failure to follow this instruction can lead to environmental damage, equipment damage or data loss.
Tip or pointer
This symbol indicates information that contributes to better understanding.
8
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Foreword
2.3
Documentation issue status
Version Comment
2.6
· Section "Specification of the RTD measurement" within chapter "RTD measurement" to the
technical data of ELM370x added
· Further various supplements to technical data
· Addenda within Chapter "Notices on analog specifications" with chapter "Long-term use"
· Addenda within Chapter "TwinCAT Development Environment" with chapter "Import/Export of EtherCAT devices by using of SCI and XTI"
· Chapter "similar products" within chapter "product overview" structural revised
· Update of chapter "Firmware compatibility"
· Update of chapter "Power supply, potential groups" within chapter "Mounting and wiring"
· Update of chapter "Firmware Update EL/ES/EM/ELM/EPxxxx"
· Update of "Sample program 1 and 2 (offset/gain)" within chapter "Sample programs"
2.5
· Addenda and update of chapters "Technical Data" (summary of all current and voltage
measurement ranges)
· Terminal specific CoE overview added
· Update chapter "Configuration of 0/4..20 mA differential inputs (Mounting and wiring)
· Update of description and addenda of chapter "Similar products" within the product overview
2.4
· Description and specifications for ELM3542 and ELM3544 added (provisionally)
· Chapter "Common technical data", subsection "General information on measuring accuracy/ measurement uncertainty" updated
· Addenda of technical data for ELM36xx and ELM35xx and additionally within chapter "Firmware Update"
· Adaption of each specification of technical data for ELM30xx to ELM37xx carried out
2.3
· First publication
2.4
Version identification of EtherCAT devices
2.4.1 General notes on marking
Designation
A Beckhoff EtherCAT device has a 14-digit designation, made up of · family key · type · version · revision
Example
Family
Type
Version
Revision
EL3314-0000-0016
EL terminal
3314 (4-channel thermocouple
(12 mm, non-
terminal)
pluggable connection
level)
0000 (basic type) 0016
ES3602-0010-0017 ES terminal (12 mm, pluggable connection level)
3602 (2-channel voltage measurement)
0010 (high-
0017
precision version)
CU2008-0000-0000 CU device
2008 (8-port fast ethernet switch) 0000 (basic type) 0000
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
9
Foreword
Notes · The elements mentioned above result in the technical designation. EL3314-0000-0016 is used in the example below. · EL3314-0000 is the order identifier, in the case of "-0000" usually abbreviated to EL3314. "-0016" is the EtherCAT revision. · The order identifier is made up of - family key (EL, EP, CU, ES, KL, CX, etc.) - type (3314) - version (-0000) · The revision -0016 shows the technical progress, such as the extension of features with regard to the EtherCAT communication, and is managed by Beckhoff. In principle, a device with a higher revision can replace a device with a lower revision, unless specified otherwise, e.g. in the documentation. Associated and synonymous with each revision there is usually a description (ESI, EtherCAT Slave Information) in the form of an XML file, which is available for download from the Beckhoff web site. From 2014/01 the revision is shown on the outside of the IP20 terminals, see Fig. "EL5021 EL terminal, standard IP20 IO device with batch number and revision ID (since 2014/01)". · The type, version and revision are read as decimal numbers, even if they are technically saved in hexadecimal.
2.4.2 Version identification of ELM terminals
The serial number/ data code for Beckhoff IO devices is usually the 8-digit number printed on the device or on a sticker. The serial number indicates the configuration in delivery state and therefore refers to a whole production batch, without distinguishing the individual modules of a batch.
Structure of the serial number: KK YY FF HH
KK - week of production (CW, calendar week) YY - year of production FF - firmware version HH - hardware version
Example with Ser. no.: 12063A02: 12 - production week 12 06 - production year 2006 3A - firmware version 3A 02 hardware version 02
Fig. 1: ELM3002-0000 with BTN 0000wwww and unique serial number 09200506
10
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Foreword
2.4.3 Beckhoff Identification Code (BIC)
The Beckhoff Identification Code (BIC) is increasingly being applied to Beckhoff products to uniquely identify the product. The BIC is represented as a Data Matrix Code (DMC, code scheme ECC200), the content is based on the ANSI standard MH10.8.2-2016.
Fig. 2: BIC as data matrix code (DMC, code scheme ECC200)
The BIC will be introduced step by step across all product groups.
Depending on the product, it can be found in the following places: · on the packaging unit · directly on the product (if space suffices) · on the packaging unit and the product
The BIC is machine-readable and contains information that can also be used by the customer for handling and product management.
Each piece of information can be uniquely identified using the so-called data identifier (ANSI MH10.8.2-2016). The data identifier is followed by a character string. Both together have a maximum length according to the table below. If the information is shorter, spaces are added to it. The data under positions 1 to 4 are always available.
The following information is contained:
Item Type of no. information
Explanation
Data identifier
1 Beckhoff order number
Beckhoff order number 1P
2 Beckhoff Traceability Unique serial number, S
Number (BTN)
see note below
3 Article description Beckhoff article
1K
description, e.g.
EL1008
4 Quantity
Quantity in packaging Q unit, e.g. 1, 10, etc.
5 Batch number
Optional: Year and week 2P of production
6 ID/serial number Optional: Present-day 51S serial number system, e.g. with safety products
Number of digits incl. data identifier 8 12 32
6 14 12
Example 1P072222 SBTNk4p562d7 1KEL1809
Q1 2P401503180016 51S678294104
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
11
Foreword
Item Type of no. information 7 Variant number
...
Explanation
Data identifier
Optional: Product variant 30P number on the basis of standard products
Number of digits incl. data identifier
32
Example 30PF971, 2*K183
Further types of information and data identifiers are used by Beckhoff and serve internal processes.
Structure of the BIC
Example of composite information from item 1 to 4 and 6. The data identifiers are marked in red for better display:
BTN
An important component of the BIC is the Beckhoff Traceability Number (BTN, item no. 2). The BTN is a unique serial number consisting of eight characters that will replace all other serial number systems at Beckhoff in the long term (e.g. batch designations on IO components, previous serial number range for safety products, etc.). The BTN will also be introduced step by step, so it may happen that the BTN is not yet coded in the BIC.
NOTE
This information has been carefully prepared. However, the procedure described is constantly being further developed. We reserve the right to revise and change procedures and documentation at any time and without prior notice. No claims for changes can be made from the information, illustrations and descriptions in this information.
2.4.4 Electronic access to the BIC (eBIC)
Electronic BIC (eBIC) The Beckhoff Identification Code (BIC) is applied to the outside of Beckhoff products in a visible place. If possible, it should also be electronically readable. Decisive for the electronic readout is the interface via which the product can be electronically addressed.
K-bus devices (IP20, IP67) Currently, no electronic storage and readout is planned for these devices.
EtherCAT devices (IP20, IP67) All Beckhoff EtherCAT devices have a so-called ESI-EEPROM, which contains the EtherCAT identity with the revision number. Stored in it is the EtherCAT slave information, also colloquially known as ESI/XML configuration file for the EtherCAT master. See the corresponding chapter in the EtherCAT system manual (chapter 3) for the relationships. The eBIC is also stored in the ESIEEPROM. The eBIC was introduced into the Beckhoff I/O production (terminals, boxes) from 2020; widespread implementation is expected in 2021. The user can electronically access the eBIC (if existent) as follows:
· With all EtherCAT devices, the EtherCAT master (TwinCAT) can read the eBIC from the ESIEEPROM From TwinCAT 4024.11, the eBIC can be displayed in the online view.
12
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
To do this, check the checkbox "Show Beckhoff Identification Code (BIC)" under EtherCAT Advanced Settings Diagnostics:
Foreword
The BTN and its contents are then displayed:
Note: as can be seen in the illustration, the production data HW version, FW version and production date, which have been programmed since 2012, can also be displayed with "Show Production Info".
· In the case of EtherCAT devices with CoE directory, the object 0x10E2:01 can additionally by used to display the device's own eBIC; the PLC can also simply access the information here: The device must be in SAFEOP/OP for access:
the object 0x10E2 will be introduced into stock products in the course of a necessary firmware revision.
· Note: in the case of electronic further processing, the BTN is to be handled as a string(8); the identifier "SBTN" is not part of the BTN.
· Technical background The new BIC information is additionally written as a category in the ESIEEPROM during the device production. The structure of the ESI content is largely dictated by the ETG specifications, therefore the additional vendor-specific content is stored with the help of a category according to ETG.2010. ID 03 indicates to all EtherCAT masters that they must not overwrite these data in case of an update or restore the data after an ESI update. The structure follows the content of the BIC, see there. This results in a memory requirement of approx. 50..200 bytes in the EEPROM.
· Special cases
If multiple, hierarchically arranged ESCs are installed in a device, only the top-level ESC carries the eBIC Information.
If multiple, non-hierarchically arranged ESCs are installed in a device, all ESCs carry the eBIC Information.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
13
Foreword
If the device consists of several sub-devices with their own identity, but only the top-level device is accessible via EtherCAT, the eBIC of the top-level device is located in the CoE object directory 0x10E2:01 and the eBICs of the sub-devices follow in 0x10E2:nn.
Profibus/Profinet/DeviceNet... Devices Currently, no electronic storage and readout is planned for these devices.
14
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
3
Product overview
Product overview
3.1
Description
The analog input terminals of the ELM3xxx series can be used for measuring electrical parameters in several measuring ranges. They forward the measured values to the controller via the EtherCAT fieldbus. The measuring ranges that can be covered include currently:
· voltage bipolar ±20 mV ... ±60 V, unipolar 0..10 V, 0..5 V · thereby together with the detection of the cold junction also temperature with thermocouple calculation
(type K, E, T, ...) · current in the ranges ±20 mA , 4..20 mA, 0..20 mA, fault indication based on NAMUR NE43 · Resistor bridge, strain gauge (SG) with 2 to 6 wire connection up to 32 mV/V
¼ bridge (quarter bridge) 1000 , 350 , 120 , ½ bridge (half bridge) and 1/1 bridge (full bridge) in 2 to 6-wire connection · electrical resistance R: 0...5 k in 2 to 4-wire connection · as a result, also temperature with RTD conversion in the corresponding resistance range (PT100, PT1000, etc.) · Potentiometer · Vibration sensors with current feeding in conforming to IEPE standard (with charge output on request) · Temperature measurement with thermocouples (TC), including integrated cold junction measurement
· LVDT/carrier frequency on request, also see EL5072 optionally to this
The measurement terminals are currently divided into three series · ELM3x0x the basic series (refer to the terminal specification for the specific properties) This is the universal device class for dynamic (fast) applications Max. sampling rates each channel 10,000 ... 50,000 Sps Simultaneous sampling of the channels in the terminal (channels measure on the same time) In general, basic accuracy of 100 ppmFSV @ 23 °C · ELM3x4x - the economy series (refer to the terminal specification for the specific properties) This is the cost-effective device class for multichannel applications and slowly changing signals Max. sampling rates each channel up to 1,000 Sps
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
15
Product overview
Multiplex sampling of the channels in the terminal (in succession) In general, basic accuracy of 100 ppmFSV @ 10..40 °C simple self-supply through 24 V power contacts and connection for 24 V sensor supply · The system components EKM1101, ELM9410 The EKM1101 EtherCAT coupler and the ELM9410 power feed terminal are comparable to the
standard components EK1101 or EL9410 respectively in terms of operation, but they additionally offer - extensive real-time diagnostics: incoming/outgoing voltages and currents, temperature, vibrations, etc. - Electrical isolation of E bus and power contact supply for trouble-free measurement operation They can be used as supplements to the ELM3xxx terminals if their properties are of advantage, but there is no obligation to do so. ELM3xxx terminals can also be used with the standard couplers and EL9410. Accordingly, EKM1101/ELM9410 can also be used on standard EL/ES terminals. Specific properties: see documentation for the system components
The name key for the ELM3xxx terminals is as follows
Note: ELM3xxx-1xxx are variants of which naming differ from the above scheme.
The devices have several technical features that facilitate the measurement operation. Availability depends on the device and series; please refer to the specific documentation.
· The channels of a terminal are fully independent and can be parameterized separately.
· Various pluggable connection levels are offered ex-factory; currently BNC, PushIn and LEMO and IEC thermocouple connector.
· An analog channel can measure beyond the nominal range specified above. This simplifies commissioning and troubleshooting. The resulting technical measuring range is approx. 107% of the nominal range. The "extended range" property can be disabled, in order to make the behavior compatible with the EL30/31/36xx "legacy range".
· Continuously the ELM3xxx terminals operate with 24 bit resolution. The data transfer is done IEC conforming via 32 bit (4 byte) variables which have to be considered for busload calculations. A reduced resolution of 8 or 16 bit can be set by some terminals.
· Each channel operates with EtherCAT Distributed Clocks. Each measured value therefore has a specific timestamp with ns resolution.
· There are terminals with a singular function, e.g. only voltage measurement, but also multi-function terminals, which support several or all of the measuring ranges listed above.
16
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
· Even the singular types offer high measuring range flexibility, for example the ELM35xx for strain gauges/weighing applications. The integrated supply and the switchable auxiliary resistors enable direct connection of a resistor bridge (strain gauge SG) or load cell with 2-/3-/4-/6-wire connection technology, a fixed resistor, a PTC/NTC element or a potentiometer.
· The terminals/channels operate with a fixed sampling rate; currently 1,000 ... 50,000 Sps (samples per second) depending on the model. If a lower rate is required in the application, each channel can decimate independently.
· hardware filtering is designed for the 3 dB point to avoid aliasing
· Each channel has two configurable numeric software filters up to FIR 39th order (40 taps) or IIR 6th order. Both filters can be set based on an integrated list (a number of low-pass, high-pass, mean value filters) or a freely selectable coefficient table. the filter design can be done with the TwinCAT FilterDesigner or usual tools (Matlab®, Octave), instructions here in the document
· Non-linear characteristic sensor curves can be corrected flexibly through an integrated sampling points table. Simple mathematical operations are also possible.
· Sensor commissioning is facilitated by the AutoScale function at two measuring points.
· Each terminal has a unique ID number, which is printed and electronically readable (BIC/BTN)
· Calibration certificates are possible for the ELM3xxx as an orderable option as factory calibration certificate Beckhoff or ISO17025 external calibrated or DAkks. Re-calibration can be carried out by Beckhoff service. Details can be delivered by sales.
The individual terminals are presented below.
3.2
Common technical data
Technical data Distributed Clocks
Special features
Functional diagnosis Electrical isolation bus/channel Electrical isolation channel /channel Current consumption power contacts Configuration Note on wire length
Note on mounting
Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Permissible operating altitude range Permissible relative humidity Vibration/shock resistance EMC immunity/emission Protection class Installation position Approval
ELM3xxx Yes, with oversampling (n = 1...100, accuracy << 1 µs) Extended range 107 %, freely configurable numeric filters, TrueRMS, integrator/differentiator, non-linear scaling, PeakHold Yes 500 V DC (1 min. typical test voltage) No address or configuration set up Signal cable lengths to the sensor / encoder over 3 m must be shielded, the shield design must be in line with the state of the art and be effective. For larger cable lengths > 30 m, a suitable surge protection should be provided if appropriate interference could affect the signal cable.
Connector not in scope of supply, see section Notes to connection technology [} 538]
See section Housing [} 536] on 35 mm rail conforms to EN 60715 0 to 2000 m (derating at higher altitudes on request) 95 %, no condensation conforms to EN 60068-2-6 / EN 60068-2-27 conforms to EN 61000-6-2 / EN 61000-6-4 IP20 variable CE
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
17
Product overview
3.3
Process data interpretation
With regard to the output of the cyclic process data, the whole measuring range presents itself as follows:
Fig. 3: Basic range of a process data value
The channel for this terminal features an option to set the measuring range either to the conventional Beckhoff type: "nominal full-scale value = PDO end value: Legacy Range" or the new method "technical fullscale value = PDO end value: Extended Range".
· For Extended Range mode applies:
Technical full scale value = PDO end value 0x007FFFFF.
For information purposes, the channel can measure up to approx. 107% beyond the nominal range, although accuracy specifications etc. are then no longer valid.
Outside the nominal measuring range, the Overrange or Underrange bit is set.
For further diagnosis, the error bit and the error LED are set, if configurable limits are exceeded. By default the limits are set to the technical measuring range, although they can be narrowed by the customer. Example: In 4...20 mA measuring mode, the limit is set to 0 mA, although it can be customized in the CoE, e.g. to 3.6 mA, in order to enable earlier detection of sensor faults.
The Extended Range mode is the default setting for the terminal.
The mode is defined through the non-periodic rational LSB step size and an integer end value. The step size can therefore be used in a PLC program without rounding error.
· For Legacy Range mode applies:
Nominal full scale value = PDO end value.
Compatible with existing interface from EL30xx/EL31xx/EL36xx.
Overrange/Underrange, Error bit and Error LED are set simultaneously if the nominal/technical measuring range is exceeded.
Can be optionally activated in the terminal.
The mode is defined by an integer end value; not a whole number of the LSB step is accepted for it.
18
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.4
General information on measuring accuracy/
measurement uncertainty
For basic information regarding the explanatory notes below, please refer to chapter "Notes on analog measured values [} 596]", particularly full scale value.
This guidance could be worth to read for saving effort, time and perhaps money, too.
Basic information on measurement technology:
Using measuring devices an attempt is made with a greater or lesser degree of expenditure to determine the "true value" of a measured variable, for example the ambient temperature. For various practical reasons this is not conclusively possible. Depending on the expenditure, the measurement/measured value is subject to a random measuring error that cannot be eliminated. With its practically determined specification data, Beckhoff provides an approach with which the residual measurement uncertainty can theoretically be calculated in the individual case. The following paragraphs serve this purpose.
General notes
No special maintenance required, although an annual inspection is recommended for the terminal.
If a factory calibration certificate is available for the device, a recalibration interval recommendation of 1 year applies, unless otherwise specified.
Notes regarding the specification data:
· Measurement specifications are usually specified as "% of nominal full scale value" = "% full scale value (%FSV)", unless otherwise specified.
· In conjunction with each individual value "typical" means that on average this parameter has the specified value. For individual terminals the parameter may deviate from the typical value. Once example is the current consumption.
· In the context of a limit (parameter is typically max./min. X) or with two limits (parameter is typically between X and Y) "typical" means that this parameter tends to be between the limits for individual terminals. Deviations are possible, however; see confidence level. Once example is noise. Usually no measurements are made, in order to be able to make statements about standard deviations or result frequencies. A typical value is usually indicated as such after the unit.
· The confidence level is 95%, unless otherwise specified.
· When operating in EMC-disturbed environments, twisted and shielded signal cables, grounded at least at one end, must be used in order to comply with the specification. The use of Beckhoff shielding accessories ZB8511 or ZS9100-0002 is recommended:
The ZB8520 DIN rail fastening is not recommended with regard to the analog protective effect:
· If not other specified, measurement errors etc. will be stated in electrical DC operation (no use of AC values). Measurement of an AC value influences the frequency slope of the analog input and therefore the measurement itself.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
19
Product overview
Note on the temperature
The temperature within/outside the device affects the measurement through the electronics. A measuring setup is generally characterized by a temperature dependence, which is specified in the form of a temperature drift, for example. The specifications are based on a constant ambient temperature. Variable conditions (e.g. heating of the control cabinet, sudden temperature drop due to opening of the control cabinet in cold weather) resulting in a temperature change may alter the measured values through dynamic and heterogeneous temperature distribution. To rectify such effects, the temperature inside the device can be read online from the CoE and used for compensation. Some devices indicate electrically that they have thermally stabilized as well; see diagnosis features.
The specification data apply: · after a warm-up time under operating voltage and in fieldbus mode of least 60 minutes at constant ambient temperature Practical note: after power-on the device already warms up exponentially such that the major part of the warming depending on the device within a short time of approximately 10 to 15 minutes is passing through and the measuring characteristics moving within the specification limits. For clarification: typical trend of an inner temperature (no significance for a particular device):
Some devices displays by the CoE object 0xF900:02 [} 321] that they are thermally stabilized and T within the device is very small. This can be evaluated by application,
· in horizontal installation position, taking account of the minimum distances, · at free convection (no forced ventilation), · provided the specification data are adhered to.
Under different conditions, a user-specific compensation is required.
Notes on calculation with the specification data:
The independent specification data can be divided into two groups: · the data on offset/gain deviation, non-linearity, repeatability whose effect on the measurement cannot be influenced by the user. These are summarized by Beckhoff according to the calculation below to the so-called "basic accuracy at 23°C". · the specification data whose effect on the measurement can be influenced by the user, namely the noise: Effect influenced by sample rate, filtering and the temperature: Effect influenced by air conditioning, shielding, control cabinet cooling, ...
The independent individual accuracy data are to be added quadratically according to the formula below in order to determine a total measurement accuracy - if there are no special conditions that that contradict a uniform distribution and thus the quadratic approach (RSS - root of the sum of the squares).
For measurement ranges where the temperature coefficient is given as TcTerminal only:
20
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
EOffset EGain ENoise, PtP MV FSV ELin ERep TcOffset TcGain TcTerminal T EAge NYears ETotal
: Offset specification (at 23°C) : Gain/scale specification (at 23°C) : Noise specification as a peak-to-peak value (applies to all temperatures) : Measured value : Full scale value : Non-linearity error over the entire measuring range (applies to all temperatures) : Repeatability (applies to all temperatures) : Temperature coefficient offset : Temperature coefficient gain : Temperature coefficient of the terminal : Difference between the ambient temperature and the specified basic temperature (23°C unless specified otherwise) : Error coefficient of ageing : Number of years : Theoretical calculated total error
Let's say, for example, we have the following values by a determined measurement value of 8.13 V and 10 V measurement mode (FSV = 10 V) and NYears = 0:
· Gain specification: EGain = 60 ppmFSV · Offset specification: EOffset = 70 ppmFSV · Non-linearity: ELin = 25 ppmFSV · Repeatability: ERep = 20 ppmFSV · Noise (without filtering): ENoise, PtP = 100 ppmpeak-to-peak · Temperature coefficients:
TcGain = 8 ppm/K TcOffset = 5 ppmFSV/K
Then the theoretical possible total measurement accuracy at T = 12K to the basic temperature can be calculated as follows:
or = ±0.0143.. %FSV
Remarks: ppm 10-6
% 10-2
In general, you can calculate as follows:
· If only the application at 23°C is to be considered: Total measurement accuracy = basic accuracy & noise according to above formula
· If the application at 23°C is to be considered with slow measurement (=average value formation/ filtering): Total measurement accuracy = basic accuracy
· If the general use is to be considered with known temperature range and incl. noise: Total measurement accuracy = basic accuracy & noise & temperature values according to above formula
Beckhoff usually gives the specification data symmetrically in [±%], i.e. for example ±0.01% or ±100 ppm. Accordingly, therefore, the unsigned total window would be double the value. A peak-to-peak specification is also a total window specification; the symmetrical value is thus half of it. In the quadratic calculation below, the symmetrical "one-sided" value is to be inserted without a sign. Noise is usually specified in peak-to-peak form, therefore the equation for the noise value already contains the divisor factor 2.
Example:
· symmetrical specification: ±0.01% (equivalent to ±100 ppm) e.g. in case of offset specification
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
21
Product overview
· Total window: 0.02% (200 ppm)
· To be used in the equation: 0.01% (100 ppm)
The total measurement accuracy calculated in this way is to be regarded again as a symmetrical maximum value and thus to be provided with ± and for further use.
Example:
· ETotal = 100 ppm · For further use: " ± 100 ppm"
To put it in words: "The offset of the individual accuracy specifications under the given conditions produced a window of 200 ppm that lies symmetrically around the individual measured value. The measured value specification x thus has an uncertainty of x ±100 ppm; the true value thus lies 95% in this range".
The noise component can be omitted
The noise component FNoise can be omitted from the above equation (= 0 ppm) if the average value of a set of samples is considered instead of a single sample. The averaging can take place in the PLC, or it can be done by a filter in the analog channel. The output value of a moving average of many samples has an almost eliminated noise component. The achievable accuracy increases if the noise component is decreasing.
NOTE
Error coefficient of ageing
If the specification value for the aging of Beckhoff is not (yet) specified, it must be assumed to be 0 ppm when considering measurement uncertainty, as in the above example, even if in reality it can be assumed over the operating time that the measurement uncertainty of the device under consideration changes, colloquially the measured value "drifts".
Experience has shown that the order of magnitude for an annual change (10,000 h) can be assumed to be the basic accuracy of the instrument under consideration if it is operated according to specification. This is an informative statement, without specification character, exceptions are possible. In general, the change in ageing will be very application-specific. A general ageing specification from Beckhoff will therefore be a guideline rather than a guaranteed upper limit when published.
If the measurement uncertainty consideration in the application shows that aging over the desired operating time can endanger the measurement success, Beckhoff recommends a cyclical check (recalibration) of the measurement channel, both with regard to sensor, cabling and Beckhoff measurement terminal. In this way, potential long-term changes in the measurement chain can be detected early and, if necessary, even the trigger (e.g. overtemperature) can be eliminated. See also the further notes in the chapter "Metrology and EtherCAT terminals - basic concepts".
Basic accuracy, extended basic accuracy and averaging
ü The basic accuracy will be designated separate for simplified usage.
a) The basic accuracy includes the offset/gain error, non-linearity and repeatability, but not the temperature coefficient nor the noise and is thereby a subset of the above given complete calculation. It is possible to increase the measurement accuracy beyond the basic accuracy by means of the offset correction. Note: the "extended basic accuracy" additionally includes the temperature behavior over the specified operating temperature range e.g. 0...60 °C by the temperature coefficient.
b) "Averaging" means that the value was obtained from the arithmetic average of usually 100,000 values for the elimination of the noise. Besides, the terminals internal averaging process need not be used absolutely. If resources available, accumulation of average can be executed within the PLC also.
22
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement accuracy of the measurement value (of reading)
In several cases the ,,Accuracy related to the up-to-date measurement value" (percentage of reading) i.e. ,,Accuracy of value" is requested instead of the ,,Accuracy related to the full scale value (FSV)" (percentage of range). This value could easily be calculated from the data given by the specification, as the total accuracy consists of a measurement value and full scale value depending part and an exclusive full scale value depending part:
3.5
ELM300x
3.5.1 ELM300x - Introduction
Fig. 4: ELM3002-0000, ELM3004-0000
2 and 4 channel analog input terminal ±30 V...±20 mV, 24 bit, 10/ 20 ksps
The ELM300x EtherCAT terminals are designed for flexible voltage measurement from 20 mV to 30 V in eleven measuring ranges. The measuring range is selected in the CoE, as are the other setting options such as the filter parameters. Irrespective of the signal configuration, all ELM3xxx terminals have the same technological properties. The ELM300x terminals for voltage measurement offer a maximum sampling rate of 10,000 or 20,000 samples per second. The 2-pin plug (push-in) can be removed for maintenance purposes without releasing the individual wires.
Optional calibration certificate: · with factory calibration certificate as ELM300x-0020: on request · external calibrated (ISO17025 or DAkks) as ELM300x-0030: on request · Re-calibration service via the Beckhoff service: on request
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
23
Product overview
Quick-Links · EtherCAT basics · Mounting and wiring · Process data overview · Connection view · Object description and parameterization [} 310]
24
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.5.2 ELM300x - Technical data
Technical data
ELM3002-000x
ELM3004-000x
Analog inputs
2 channel (differential)
4 channel (differential)
Time relation between channels to each other Simultaneous conversion of all channels in the terminal, synchronous conversion between terminals, if DistributedClocks will be used
ADC conversion method
(deltaSigma) with internal sample rate
5.12 MSps
8 MSps
Limit frequency input filter hardware (see information in section ELM Features/ Firmware filter concept)
Before AD converter: hardware low pass -3 dB @ 30 kHz type butterworth 3th order
Within ADC after conversion:
low pass -3 dB @ 5.3 kHz, low pass -3 dB @ 2.6 kHz,
ramp-up time 150 µs
ramp-up time 300 µs
type sinc3/average filter The ramp-up time/ settling time/ delay caused by the filtering will be considered within the DistributedClocks-Timestamp.
Resolution
24 Bit (including sign)
Connection technology
2 wire
Connection type
push-in cageclamp, service plug, 2-pin
Sampling rate (per channel, simultaneous) 50 µs/20 kSps
100 µs/10 kSps
free down sampling by Firmware via decimation factor
Oversampling
1...100 selectable
Supported EtherCAT cycle time
DistributedClocks: min. 100 µs, max. 10 ms
(depending on the operation mode)
FrameTriggered/Synchron: min. 200 µs, max. 100 ms
FreeRun: not yet supported
Connection diagnosis
Wire break/short cut
Surge voltage protection of the inputs related +IN1, -IN1: at approx. 12 ±0.5 V (within 30 V-Mode at
to Uv (internal ground)
approx. 37 ±1 V)
Current consumption via E-bus
typ. 330 mA
typ. 470 mA
Thermal power dissipation
typ. 3 W
Dielectric strength - destruction limit
max. permitted short-term/continuous voltage between contact points ±I1, ±I2, +Uv and Uv: non-supplied ±40 V, supplied ±36 V
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
Recommended operation voltage range to compliance with specification
max. permitted voltage during specified normal operation between ±I1 and ±I2: typ. ±10 V against Uv
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
Electrical isolation channel/channel *)
no
Electrical isolation channel/Ebus *)
yes, 500V/1min.typ. test
Electrical isolation channel/SGND *)
yes, 500V/1min.typ. test
Weight
approx. 350 g
Permissible ambient temperature range during -25...+60 °C operation
Permissible ambient temperature range during -40...+85 °C storage
*) see notes to potential groups in chapter "Mounting and wiring/ Power supply, potential groups" [} 554]
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
25
Product overview
3.5.2.1 ELM300x overview measurement ranges
Measurement Voltage
Voltage
Connection tech- FSV nology
2 wire
±30 V
±10 V
±5 V
±2.5 V
±1.25 V
±640 mV
±320 mV
±160 mV
±80 mV
±40 mV
±20 mV
2 wire
+10 V
+5 V
Mode
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy
Maximum value/ value range ±32.212.. V ±30 V ±10.737.. V ±10 V ±5.368.. V ±5 V ±2.684.. V ±2.5 V ±1.342.. V ±1.25 V ±687.2.. mV ±640 mV ±343.6.. mV ±320 mV ±171.8.. mV ±160 mV ±85.9.. mV ±80 mV ±42.95.. mV ±40 mV ±21.474.. mV ±20 mV 0...10.737.. V 0...10 V 0...5.368.. V 0...5 V
26
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 5: Overview measurement ranges, Bipolar
Fig. 6: Overview measurement ranges, Unipolar
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
27
Product overview
3.5.2.2 Measurement ±30 V
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±30 V >500 k differentiell Value to follow -30...+30 V 30 V -32.212...+32.212 V 24 bit (including sign) 3.84 µV 3.576.. µV
16 bit (including sign) 983.04 µV 915.55.. µV
ELM3002 (20 kSps)
Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), typ.
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 3.60 < 9 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >100 dB DC: >100 dB
< 547 [digits] < 2.10 mV < 94 [digits] < 0.36 mV
< 70 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 270.0 mV < 45 µV
50 Hz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >60 dB
50 Hz: >100 1 kHz: >100 dB dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps)
Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), typ.
< 60 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 5.09 < 8 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >100 dB DC: >100 dB
< 469 [digits] < 1.80 mV < 94 [digits] < 0.36 mV
< 63 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 0.24 mV < 45 µV
50 Hz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >60 dB
50 Hz: >100 1 kHz: >100 dB dB
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/Scale/Verstärkungs-
EGain
Abweichung (at 23°C)
±30 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 65 ppmFSV
< 65 ppm
28
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical
interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
±30 V < 45 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 11 ppm/K typ. < 10 ppmFSV/K typ. ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
differential typ. 660 k || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 7: Representation ±30 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
29
Product overview
3.5.2.3 Measurement ±10 V, 0...10 V
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±10 V
0...10 V
>4 M differentiell
Value to follow
-10...+10 V
0...10 V
10 V
-10.737...+10.737 V
0...10.737 V
24 bit (including 16 bit (including 24 bit (including 16 bit (including
sign)
sign)
sign)
sign)
1.28 µV
327.68 µV
1.28 µV
327.68 µV
1.192.. µV
305.18.. µV 1.192.. µV
305.18.. µV
ELM3002 (20 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 1.20 < 9 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 547 [digits] < 0.70 mV < 94 [digits] < 0.12 mV
< 70 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 90 µV < 15 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 60 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 1.70 < 8 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 469 [digits] < 0.60 mV < 94 [digits] < 0.12 mV
< 63 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 80 µV < 15 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
±10 V, 0...10 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
30
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical
interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
±10 V, 0...10 V < 60 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ. < 5 ppmFSV/K typ. ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
differential typ. 4.1 M || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 8: Representation ±10 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
31
Product overview
Fig. 9: Representation 0...10 V measurement range
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
32
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.5.2.4 Measurement ±5 V, 0...5 V
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±5 V
0...5 V
>4 M differentiell
Value to follow
-5...+5 V
0...5 V
5 V
-5.368...+5.368 V
0... 5.368 V
24 bit (including 16 bit (including 24 bit (including 16 bit (including
sign)
sign)
sign)
sign)
640 nV
163.84 µV
640 nV
163.84 µV
596.. nV
152.59.. µV 596.. nV
152.59.. µV
ELM3002 (20 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.60 < 9 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 547 [digits] < 0.35 mV < 94 [digits] < 60 µV
< 70 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 45 µV < 7.5 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 60 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.85 < 8 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 469 [digits] < 0.30 mV < 94 [digits] < 60 µV
< 63 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 40 µV < 7.5 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
±5 V, 0...5 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
33
Product overview
Measurement mode
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical
interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
±5 V, 0...5 V < 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ. < 5 ppmFSV/K typ. ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
differential typ. 4.1 M || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 10: Representation ±5 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
34
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 11: Representation 0...5 V measurement range
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
35
Product overview
3.5.2.5 Measurement ±2.5 V
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±2.5 V >4 M differentiell Value to follow -2.5...+2.5 V 2.5 V -2.684...+2.684 V 24 bit (including sign) 320 nV 298.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 81.92 µV 76.29.. µV
ELM3002 (20 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.30 < 9 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 547 [digits] < 0.18 mV < 94 [digits] < 30 µV
< 70 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 22.50 µV < 3.75 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 60 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.42 < 8 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 469 [digits] < 0.15 mV < 94 [digits] < 30 µV
< 63 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 20 µV < 3.75 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
±2.5 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
36
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement mode
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified
electrical interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
Product overview
±2.5 V < 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ. < 5 ppmFSV/K typ. ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
differential typ. 4.1 M || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 12: Representation ±2.5 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
37
Product overview
3.5.2.6 Measurement ±1.25 V
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±1.25 V >4 M differentiell Value to follow -1.25...+1.25 V 1.25 V -1.342...+1.342 V 24 bit (including sign) 160 nV 149.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 40.96 µV 38.14.. µV
ELM3002 (20 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.15 < 9 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 547 [digits] < 87.50 µV < 94 [digits] < 15 µV
< 70 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 11.25 µV < 1.88 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 60 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.21 < 8 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 469 [digits] < 75 µV < 94 [digits] < 15 µV
< 63 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 10 µV < 1.88 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
±1.25 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
38
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical
interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
±1.25 V < 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ. < 5 ppmFSV/K typ. ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
differential typ. 4.1 M || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 13: Representation ±1.25 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
39
Product overview
3.5.2.7 Measurement ±640 mV
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±640 mV >4 M differentiell Value to follow -640...+640 mV 640 mV -687.2...+687.2 mV 24 bit (including sign) 81.92 nV 76.29.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 20.97152 µV 19.53.. µV
ELM3002 (20 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.08 < 9 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 547 [digits] < 44.80 µV < 94 [digits] < 7.68 µV
< 70 [digits] < 5.76 µV < 12 [digits] < 0.96 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 60 ppmFSV < 14 ppmFSV > 97.1 dB
< 0.13 < 8 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 547 [digits] < 44.80 µV < 109 [digits] < 8.96 µV
< 63 [digits] < 5.12 µV < 12 [digits] < 0.96 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
±640 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
40
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical
interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
±640 mV < 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ. < 5 ppmFSV/K typ. ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
differential typ. 4.1 M || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 14: Representation ±640 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
41
Product overview
3.5.2.8 Measurement ±320 mV
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±320 mV >4 M differentiell Value to follow -320...+320 mV 320 mV -343.6...+343.6 mV 24 bit (including sign) 40.96 nV 38.14.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 10.48576 µV 9.765.. µV
ELM3002 (20 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 80 ppmFSV < 14 ppmFSV > 97.1 dB
< 44.80 < 9 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 625 [digits] < 25.60 µV < 109 [digits] < 4.48 µV
< 70 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 2.88 µV < 0.48 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 80 ppmFSV < 16 ppmFSV > 95.9 dB
< 72.41 < 8 ppmFSV < 1.6 ppmFSV > 115.9 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 625 [digits] < 25.60 µV < 125 [digits] < 5.12 µV
< 63 [digits] < 13 [digits]
< 2.56 µV < 0.51 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
±320 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
42
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement mode
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified
electrical interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
Product overview
±320 mV < 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ. < 5 ppmFSV/K typ. ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
differential typ. 4.1 M || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 15: Representation ±320 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
43
Product overview
3.5.2.9 Measurement ±160 mV
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±160 mV >4 M differentiell Value to follow -160...+160 mV 160 mV -171.8...+171.8 mV 24 bit (including sign) 20.48 nV 19.07.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 5.24288 µV 4.882.. µV
ELM3002 (20 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 110 ppmFSV < 19 ppmFSV > 94.4 dB
< 30.40 < 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 859 [digits] < 17.60 µV < 148 [digits] < 3.04 µV
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 1.92 µV < 0.32 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 95 ppmFSV < 18 ppmFSV > 94.9 dB
< 40.73 < 10 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 742 [digits] < 15.20 µV < 141 [digits] < 2.88 µV
< 78 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 1.60 µV < 0.32 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
±160 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
44
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement mode
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified
electrical interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
Product overview
±160 mV < 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ. < 5 ppmFSV/K typ. ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
differential typ. 4.1 M || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 16: Representation ±160 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
45
Product overview
3.5.2.10 Measurement ±80 mV
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±80 mV >4 M differentiell Value to follow -80...+80 mV 80 mV -85.9...+85.9 mV 24 bit (including sign) 10.24 nV 9.536.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 2.62144 µV 2.441.. µV
ELM3002 (20 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 190 ppmFSV < 32 ppmFSV > 89.9 dB
< 25.60 < 20 ppmFSV < 4.0 ppmFSV > 108 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
DC: >115 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 1484 [digits] < 15.20 µV < 250 [digits] < 2.56 µV
< 156 [digits] < 1.60 µV < 31 [digits] < 0.32 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 150 ppmFSV < 27 ppmFSV > 91.4 dB
< 30.55 < 16 ppmFSV < 3.5 ppmFSV > 109.1 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 1172 [digits] < 12.0 µV < 211 [digits] < 2.16 µV
< 125 [digits] < 1.28 µV < 27 [digits] < 0.28 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
46
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified
electrical interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1 (Internal resistance)
Product overview
±80 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ. < 70 ppmFSV < 55 ppm < 25 ppmFSV < 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ. < 5 ppmFSV/K typ. ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
differential typ. 4.1 M || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 17: Representation ±80 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
47
Product overview
3.5.2.11 Measurement ±40 mV
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±40 mV >4 M differentiell Value to follow -40...+40 mV 40 mV -42.95...+42.95 mV 24 bit (including sign) 5.12 nV 4.768.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 1.31072 µV 1.220.. µV
ELM3002 (20 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 360 ppmFSV < 60 ppmFSV > 84.4 dB
< 24.0 < 40 ppmFSV < 8.0 ppmFSV > 101.9 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 2813 [digits] < 14.40 µV < 469 [digits] < 2.40 µV
< 313 [digits] < 1.60 µV < 63 [digits] < 0.32 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
< 280 ppmFSV < 50 ppmFSV > 86.0 dB
< 28.28 < 34 ppmFSV < 7.0 ppmFSV > 103.1 dB DC: >115 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), DC: >115 dB typ.
< 2188 [digits] < 11.20 µV < 391 [digits] < 2.0 µV
< 266 [digits] < 1.36 µV < 55 [digits] < 0.28 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
±40 mV < ±0.02% = 200 ppmFSV typ.
< 175 ppmFSV
48
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement mode
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified
electrical interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
Product overview
±40 mV < 65 ppm
< 45 ppmFSV
< 30 ppmFSV 8 ppm/K typ. 6 ppmFSV/K typ. Value to follow
differential typ. 4.1 M || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 18: Representation ±40 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
49
Product overview
3.5.2.12 Measurement ±20 mV
ELM300x
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±20 mV >4 M differentiell Value to follow -20...+20 mV 20 mV -21.474...+21.474 mV 24 bit (including sign) 2.56 nV 2.384.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 655.36 nV 610.37.. nV
ELM3002 (20 kSps)
Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), typ.
< 700 ppmFSV < 120 ppmFSV > 78.4 dB
< 24.0 < 80 ppmFSV < 16.0 ppmFSV > 95.9 dB DC: >115 dB
DC: >115 dB
< 5469 [digits] < 14.00 µV < 938 [digits] < 2.40 µV
< 625 [digits] < 1.60 µV < 125 [digits] < 0.32 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
ELM3004 (10 kSps)
Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), typ.
< 560 ppmFSV < 100 ppmFSV > 80.0 dB
< 28.28 < 70 ppmFSV < 14.0 ppmFSV > 97.1 dB DC: >115 dB
DC: >115 dB
< 4375 [digits] < 11.20 µV < 781 [digits] < 2.0 µV
547
< 1.40 µV
< 109 [digits] < 0.28 µV
50 Hz: >105 dB
50 Hz: >115 dB
1 kHz: >80 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
±20 mV < ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
< 260 ppmFSV
50
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement mode
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified
electrical interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
Product overview
±20 mV < 100 ppm
< 90 ppmFSV
< 35 ppmFSV < 12 ppm/K typ. < 12 ppmFSV/K typ. Value to follow
differential typ. 4.1 M || 11 nF CommonMode typ. 40 nF against SGND
Fig. 19: Representation ±20 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
51
Product overview
3.6
ELM310x
3.6.1 ELM310x - Introduction
Fig. 20: ELM3102-0000, ELM3104-0000
2 and 4 channel analog input terminal -20/0/+4...+20 mA, 24 bit, 10/ 20 ksps
The ELM310x EtherCAT terminals are designed for flexible current measurement in the range from -20 to +20 mA. They offer selectable measuring ranges of -20/0/4 to ±20 mA as well as current measurement according to NAMUR NE43.
The measuring range is selected in the CoE, as are the other setting options such as the filter parameters. Irrespective of the signal configuration, all ELM3xxx terminals have the same technological properties. The ELM310x terminals for current measurement offer a maximum sampling rate of 10,000 or 20,000 samples per second. The 2-pin plug (push-in) can be removed for maintenance purposes without releasing the individual wires.
Optional calibration certificate: · with factory calibration certificate as ELM310x-0020: on request · external calibrated (ISO17025 or DAkks) as ELM310x-0030: on request · Re-calibration service via the Beckhoff service: on request
Quick-Links
· EtherCAT basics · Mounting and wiring · Process data overview
· Connection view
· Object description and parameterization [} 322]
52
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.6.2 ELM310x - Technical data
Technical data
ELM3102-000x
ELM3104-000x
Analog inputs
2 channel (differential)
4 channel (differential)
Time relation between channels to each other Simultaneous conversion of all channels in the terminal, synchronous conversion between terminals, if DistributedClocks will be used
ADC conversion method
(deltaSigma) with internal sample rate
5.12 MSps
8 MSps
Limit frequency input filter hardware (see information in section ELM Features/ Firmware filter concept)
Before AD converter: hardware low pass -3 dB @ 30 kHz type butterworth 3th order
Within ADC after conversion:
low pass -3 dB @ 5.3 kHz, low pass -3 dB @ 2.6 kHz,
ramp-up time 150 µs
ramp-up time 300 µs
type sinc3/average filter
The ramp-up time/ settling time/ delay caused by the filtering will be considered within the DistributedClocksTimestamp.
Resolution
24 Bit (including sign)
Connection technology
2 wire
Connection type
push-in cageclamp, service plug, 2-pin
Sampling rate (per channel, simultaneous)
50 µs/20 kSps
100 µs/10 kSps
free down sampling by Firmware via decimation factor
Oversampling
1...100 selectable
Supported EtherCAT cycle time
DistributedClocks: min. 100 µs, max. 10 ms
(depending on the operation mode)
FrameTriggered/Synchron: min. 200 µs, max. 100 ms
FreeRun: not supported
Connection diagnosis
Recommended: 4...20 mA measurement range
Surge voltage protection of the inputs related to +IN1, -IN1: at approx. 12 ±0.5 V Uv (internal ground)
Current consumption via E-bus
typ. 340 mA
typ. 490 mA
Thermal power dissipation
typ. 3 W
Dielectric strength - destruction limit
max. permitted short-term/continuous voltage between contact points ±I1, ±I2, +Uv and Uv: non-supplied ±40 V, supplied ±36 V
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
Recommended operation voltage range to compliance with specification
max. permitted voltage during specified normal operation between ±I1 and ±I2: typ. ±10 V against Uv
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
Electrical isolation channel/channel *)
no
Electrical isolation channel/Ebus *)
yes, 500V/1min.typ. test
Electrical isolation channel/SGND *)
yes, 500V/1min.typ. test
Weight
approx. 350 g
Permissible ambient temperature range during -25...+60 °C operation
Permissible ambient temperature range during -40...+85 °C storage
*) see notes to potential groups in chapter "Mounting and wiring/ Power supply, potential groups" [} 554]
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
53
Product overview
3.6.2.1 ELM310x overview measurement ranges
Measurement Current
Connection tech- FSV nology
2 wire
±20 mA (-20...20 mA)
+20 mA (0...20 mA)
+20 mA (4...20 mA)
+20 mA (4...20 mA NAMUR)
Mode
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy
Maximum value/ value range ±21.474.. mA ±20 mA 0...21.474.. mA 0...20 mA 0...21.179 mA 4...20 mA 3.6...21 mA 4...20 mA
Fig. 21: Overview measurement ranges, Bipolar
54
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 22: Overview measurement ranges, Unipolar
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
3.6.2.2 Measurement ±20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, NE43
ELM310x
Measurement mode
Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable
PDO resolution (including sign) PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range) Common-mode voltage Ucm
±20 mA
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
150 typ. Value to follow 20...+20 mA
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
20 mA
21.474...+21.474 mA. 0 ...21.474 mA 0...21.179 mA overcurrent-protected
Internal overload limiting, continuous current resistant
24 bit
16 bit
24 bit 16 bit 24 bit 16 bit
2.56 nA
655.36 nA 2.56 nA
2.384.. nA 610.37.. 2.384..
nA
nA
max. ±10V
related to Uv (internal ground)
655.36 2.048
nA
nA
610.37.. 1.907..
nA
nA
524.288 nA
488.29.. nA
3.6...21 mA (NAMUR NE43)
4...20 mA
3.6...21 mA
24 bit 16 bit
2.048 nA
n.a.
524.288 nA
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
55
Product overview
ELM3102 (20 kSps)
Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
< 150 ppmFSV < 25 ppmFSV > 92.0 dB
< 1172 [digits] < 195 [digits]
< 3.00 µA < 0.50 µA
< 5.0
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ. DC: < 5.5 nA/V
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), typ.
DC: < 5.5 nA/V
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
50 Hz: < 70 nA/V 50 Hz: < 20 nA/V
< 0.24 µA < 40.0 nA
1 kHz: < 2 µA/V 1 kHz: < 20 nA/V
ELM3104 (10 kSps)
Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
< 118 ppmFSV < 19 ppmFSV > 94.4 dB
< 922 [digits] < 148 [digits]
< 2.36 µA < 0.38 µA
< 5.37
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering), typ. DC: < 5.5 nA/V
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering), typ.
DC: < 5.5 nA/V
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
50 Hz: < 70 nA/V 50 Hz: < 20 nA/V
< 0.24 µA < 40.0 nA
1 kHz: < 2 µA/V 1 kHz: < 20 nA/V
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
±20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, NE43
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset EGain
< ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ. < 65 ppmFSV < 50 ppm
Non-linearity over the whole measuring ELin range
< 40 ppmFSV
Repeatability Temperature coefficient
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
ERep
< 40 ppmFSV
TcGain
< 15 ppm/K typ.
TcOffset
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
Value to follow [ppm] typ. (FSV)
56
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Current measurement range ±20 mA
Product overview
Fig. 23: Representation current measurement range ±20 mA
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Current measurement range 0...20 mA
Fig. 24: Representation current measurement range 0...20 mA
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
57
Product overview Current measurement range 4...20 mA
Fig. 25: Representation current measurement range 4...20 mA
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
Current measuring range 3.6...21 mA (NAMUR)
Fig. 26: Chart: current measuring range 3.6...21 mA (NAMUR)
Only Extended Range mode for measuring range 4 mA NAMUR
Legacy Range mode is not available for this measurement range. The Extended Range Mode will be set automatically and although a corresponding write access to the CoE Object 0x8000:2E (Scaler) is not declined, the parameter is not changed.
58
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
3.7
ELM314x
3.7.1 ELM314x - Introduction
Product overview
Fig. 27: ELM314x
2, 4, 6 and 8-channel analog input, ±10...±1.25 V, ±20 mA, 24 bit, 1 ksps
The 2-, 4-, 6- or 8-channel ELM314x EtherCAT terminals in the Economy line can be set to current or voltage measurement channel by channel, offering sampling rates of up to 1 ksps per channel. Analog signals in the ranges from ±1.25 to ±10 V, 0 to 10 V, ±20 mA or 0/4 to 20 mA can be processed. The settings for U or I measurement mode and the desired measuring ranges can be selected via the control system and TwinCAT in the CoE interface. Here it is also possible to select the extensive diagnostics features for unattended long-term use. The 2-, 4- or 6-pin push-in connectors can be removed for maintenance purposes; they enable a direct supply of connected sensors. The power contacts on the side simplify the potential distribution directly on the DIN rail. The typical EtherCAT features are available: distributed clocks functionality with timestamp and the familiar data features of the basic line such as filtering, true RMS calculation and more. Variants with factory calibration certificate and recalibration service on request are in preparation for the ELM measurement terminals.
Optional calibration certificate:
· with factory calibration certificate as ELM314x-0020: on request
· external calibrated (ISO17025 or DAkks) as ELM314x-0030: on request
Re-calibration service via the Beckhoff service: on request
Quick-Links
· EtherCAT basics · Mounting and wiring · Process data overview
· Connection view measuring voltage
· Connection view measuring current
· Power contacts ELM314x [} 567]
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
59
Product overview · Object description and parameterization [} 322]
60
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.7.2 ELM314x - Technical data
Technical data
ELM3142-000x ELM3144-000x ELM3146-000x ELM3148-000x
Analog inputs
2 channel (differential)
4 channel (differential)
6 channel (differential)
8 channel (differential)
Time relation between channels to each other
Simultaneous conversion of all channels in the terminal (multiplex), synchronous conversion between terminals, if DistributedClocks will be used. Timestamp each channel, typ. sampling offset related to cannel 1:
Ch.1: 0 µs Ch.2: +200 µs
Ch.1: 0 µs Ch.2: +200 µs Ch.3: +400 µs Ch.4: +600 µs
Ch.1: 0 µs Ch.2: +100 µs Ch.3: +200 µs Ch.4: +300 µs Ch.5: +400 µs Ch.6: +500 µs
Ch.1: 0 µs Ch.2: +100 µs Ch.3: +200 µs Ch.4: +300 µs Ch.5: +400 µs Ch.6: +500 µs Ch.7: +600 µs Ch.8: +700 µs
ADC conversion method
deltaSigma with internal sample rate 8 MSps
Limit frequency input filter hardware Before AD converter:
(see information in section
hardware low pass -3dB @ 330 Hz
ELM Features/ Firmware filter concept) type butterworth 1th order
Within ADC after conversion: low pass -3dB @ 2.75 kHz
type sinc5/average filter The ramp-up time/ settling time/ delay caused by the filtering will be considered within the DistributedClocks-Timestamp.
Resolution
24 Bit (including sign)
Connection technology
2/3/4 wire
Connection type
push-in cageclamp, service plug, push-in cageclamp, service plug,
4-pin
6-pin
Sampling rate (per channel, simultaneous)
1 ms/ 1 kSps
free down sampling by Firmware via decimation factor, possible effective sampling interval each channel: 1 ms + n 25 µs
Oversampling
1...20 selectable
Supported EtherCAT cycle time (depending on the operation mode)
DistributedClocks: min. 100 µs + n 25 µs (n = 0, 1, 2..); max. 10 ms
FrameTriggered/Synchron: min. 200 µs + n 25 µs (n = 0, 1, 2..); max. 100 ms
FreeRun: not yet supported
Connection diagnosis
Wire break/short cut
Current consumption via E-bus
typ. 250 mA
typ. 300 mA
Current consumption via power contacts
Load-dependent (power contacts are only passed through for sensor supply)
Current output at 24 V sensor supply Max. 2 A total current over all output contacts of ELM314x
Thermal power dissipation
typ. 2 W
Dielectric strength - destruction limit max. permissible short-term / permanent voltage between the contact points: ± 30 V
Recommended operation voltage
max. permitted voltage during specified normal operation
range to compliance with specification tbd
Special features
Oversampling, switchable connection AGND / UP-
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
61
Product overview
Technical data EMC notes
Weight Permissible ambient temperature range during operation Permissible ambient temperature range during storage
ELM3142-000x ELM3144-000x ELM3146-000x ELM3148-000x ESD air discharge conforming to EN 61000-6-4 into the connectors X001 to X004 or to the lines connected there can lead to measurement deviations up to ±FSV within the respective channel or to other channels by crosstalk.
Peak voltages (surge) conforming to EN 61000-6-2 into the Up supply (power contact) during "Connect UP- to GNDA" is set by CoE 0xF800:01 can lead to measurement deviations up to ±FSV. approx. 350 g -25...+60 °C
-25...+85 °C
3.7.2.1 ELM314x overview measurement ranges
Measurement Voltage
Voltage Current
Connection tech- FSV nology
2 wire
±10 V
±5 V
±2.5 V
±1.25 V
2 wire
+10 V
+5 V
2 wire
±20 mA (-20...20 mA)
+20 mA (0...20 mA)
+20 mA (4...20 mA)
+20 mA (4...20 mA NAMUR)
Mode
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy
Maximum value/ value range ±10.737.. V ±10 V ±5.368.. V ±5 V ±2.684.. V ±2.5 V ±1.342.. V ±1.25 V 0...10.737.. V 0...10 V 0...5.368.. V 0...5 V ±21.474.. mA ±20 mA 0...21.474.. mA 0...20 mA 0...21.179 mA 4...20 mA 3.6...21 mA 4...20 mA
62
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 28: Overview measurement ranges, Bipolar
Fig. 29: Overview measurement ranges, Unipolar
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
63
Product overview
3.7.2.2 Measurement ±10 V, 0...10 V
ELM314x
Measurement mode
Internal resistance
Impedance
Measuring range, nominal
Measuring range, end value (FSV)
Measuring range, technically usable
PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR ENoise, PtP
filtering)
ENoise, RMS
Max. SNR
±10 V
0...10 V
>4 M differential
Value to follow
-10...+10 V
0...10 V
10 V
-10.737...+10.737 V
0...10.737 V
24 bit (including sign)
1.28 µV
1.192.. µV
< 90 ppmFSV < 15 ppmFSV > 96.5 dB
< 703 [digits] < 117 [digits]
< 0.90 mV < 0.15 mV
< 6.71 < 21 ppmFSV < 3.5 ppmFSV > 109.1 dB
< 164 [digits] < 27 [digits]
< 0.21 mV < 35.00 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Extended basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 0 to 60°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability Temperature coefficient
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
ERep TcGain TcOffset DC: 50 Hz:
1 kHz:
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
DC: 50 Hz:
1 kHz:
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±10 V, 0...10 V < ±0.005% = 50 ppmFSV typ.
< ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 60 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ. < 5 ppmFSV/K typ. >115 dB typ. >105 dB typ. >80 dB typ. >115 dB typ. >115 dB typ. >115 dB typ ±0.05% = 500 ppmFSV typ.
64
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 30: Representation ±10 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
65
Product overview
Fig. 31: Frequency response of measuring range ±10 V, fsampling = 1 kHz, integrated filters 1/2 deactivated
66
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 32: Representation 0...10 V measurement range
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
67
Product overview
Fig. 33: Frequency response of measuring range 0..10 V, fsampling = 1 kHz, integrated filters 1/2 deactivated
68
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.7.2.3 Measurement ±5 V, 0...5 V
Measurement mode
Internal resistance
Impedance
Measuring range, nominal
Measuring range, end value (FSV)
Measuring range, technically usable
PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR ENoise, PtP
filtering)
ENoise, RMS
Max. SNR
±5 V
0...5 V
>4 M differential
Value to follow
-5...+5 V
0...5 V
5 V
-5.368...+5.368 V
0... 5.368 V
24 bit (including sign)
640 nV
596.. nV
< 90 ppmFSV < 15 ppmFSV > 96.5 dB
< 703 [digits] < 117 [digits]
< 0.45 mV < 0.08 mV
< 3.35 < 21 ppmFSV < 3.5 ppmFSV > 109.1 dB
< 164 [digits] < 27 [digits]
< 0.11 mV < 17.50 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Extended basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 0 to 60°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±5 V, 0...5 V < ±0.005% = 50 ppmFSV typ. < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ. < 70 ppmFSV < 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.05% = 500 ppmFSV typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
69
Product overview
Fig. 34: Representation ±5 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
70
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 35: Frequency response of measuring range ±5 V, fsampling = 1 kHz, integrated filters 1/2 deactivated
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
71
Product overview
Fig. 36: Representation 0...5 V measurement range
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
72
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 37: Frequency response of measuring range 0..5 V, fsampling = 1 kHz, integrated filters 1/2 deactivated
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
73
Product overview
3.7.2.4 Measurement ±2.5 V
Measurement mode
Internal resistance
Impedance
Measuring range, nominal
Measuring range, end value (FSV)
Measuring range, technically usable
PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR ENoise, PtP
filtering)
ENoise, RMS
Max. SNR
±2.5 V
>4 M differential
Value to follow
-2.5...+2.5 V
2.5 V
-2.684...+2.684 V
24 bit (including sign)
320 nV
298.. nV
< 100 ppmFSV < 16 ppmFSV > 95.9 dB
< 781 [digits] < 125 [digits]
< 1.79 < 21 ppmFSV < 3.5 ppmFSV > 109.1 dB
< 164 [digits] < 27 [digits]
< 0.25 mV < 0.04 mV
< 0.05 mV < 8.75 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Extended basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 0 to 60°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±2.5 V < ±0.005% = 50 ppmFSV typ. < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ. < 70 ppmFSV < 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
±0.05% = 500 ppmFSV typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
74
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 38: Representation ±2.5 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
75
Product overview
Fig. 39: Frequency response of measuring range ±2.5 V, fsampling = 1 kHz, integrated filters 1/2 deactivated
76
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.7.2.5 Measurement ±1.25 V
Measurement mode
Internal resistance
Impedance
Measuring range, nominal
Measuring range, end value (FSV)
Measuring range, technically usable
PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR ENoise, PtP
filtering)
ENoise, RMS
Max. SNR
±1.25 V
>4 M differential
Value to follow
-1.25...+1.25 V
1.25 V
-1.342...+1.342 V
24 bit (including sign)
160 nV
149.. nV
< 100 ppmFSV < 16 ppmFSV > 95.9 dB
< 781 [digits] < 125 [digits]
< 0.89 < 21 ppmFSV < 3.5 ppmFSV > 109.1 dB
< 164 [digits] < 27 [digits]
< 0.13 mV < 0.02 mV
< 0.03 mV < 4.38 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Extended basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 0 to 60°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±1.25 V < ±0.005% = 50 ppmFSV typ. < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ. < 70 ppmFSV < 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.05% = 500 ppmFSV typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
77
Product overview
Fig. 40: Representation ±1.25 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
78
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 41: Frequency response of measuring range ±1.25 V, fsampling = 1 kHz, integrated filters 1/2 deactivated
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
79
Product overview
3.7.2.6 Measurement ±20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, NE43
Measurement mode ±20 mA
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Internal resistance
Impedance
Measuring range, nominal
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, technically usable
Fuse protection
PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Common-mode voltage Vcm
150 typ. Value to follow 20...+20 mA
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
20 mA
21.474...+21.474 mA, 0 ...21.474 mA 0...21.179 mA overcurrent-protected
Internal overload limiting, continuous current resistant
24 Bit
24 Bit
24 Bit
2.56 nA
2.56 nA
2.048 nA
2.384.. nA
2.384.. nA
1.907.. nA
max. ±10V related to -Uv (internal ground)
3,6...21 mA (NAMUR NE43)
4...20 mA
3.6...21 mA
24 Bit 2.048 nA n.a.
Measurement mode Noise (without filtering)
±20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 3.6...21 mA (NAMUR NE43)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 165 ppmFSV < 25 ppmFSV > 92.0 dB
< 1289 [digits] < 195 [digits]
< 3.30 µA < 0.50 µA
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 22.36 < 39 ppmFSV < 6.5 ppmFSV > 103.7 dB
< 305 [digits] < 51 [digits]
< 0.78 µA < 130.00 nA
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
±20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, NE43
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Extended basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 0 to 60°C, with averaging
< ±0.005% = 50 ppmFSV typ. < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset EGain
< 65 ppmFSV < 50 ppm
Non-linearity over the whole measuring ELin range
< 40 ppmFSV
Repeatability Temperature coefficient
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
ERep TcGain TcOffset DC: < 3 nA/V typ.
< 40 ppmFSV < 15 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ. 50 Hz: < 5 nA/V typ.
1 kHz: < 80 nA/V typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz DC:
FIR filtering)
< 3 nA/V typ.
50 Hz: < 3 nA/V typ.
1 kHz: < 3 nA/V typ.
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±0.05% = 500 ppmFSV typ.
80
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Current measurement range ±20 mA
Product overview
Fig. 42: Representation current measurement range ±20 mA
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Current measurement range 0...20 mA
Fig. 43: Representation current measurement range 0...20 mA
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
81
Product overview Current measurement range 4...20 mA
Fig. 44: Representation current measurement range 4...20 mA
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
Current measuring range 3.6...21 mA (NAMUR)
Fig. 45: Chart: current measuring range 3.6...21 mA (NAMUR)
Only Extended Range mode for measuring range 4 mA NAMUR
Legacy Range mode is not available for this measurement range. The Extended Range Mode will be set automatically and although a corresponding write access to the CoE Object 0x8000:2E (Scaler) is not declined, the parameter is not changed.
82
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
3.8
ELM350x
3.8.1 ELM350x - Introduction
Product overview
Fig. 46: ELM3502-0000, ELM3504-0000
2 and 4 channel measuring bridge analysis, full/half/quarter bridge, 24 bit, 10/ 20 ksps
The ELM350x EtherCAT terminals are designed for the evaluation of measuring bridges in full-bridge, halfbridge and quarter-bridge configuration. The terminals feature internally switchable supplementary resistors. The feed is integrated. Like all other parameters, the supply voltage is adjustable in the CoE. Irrespective of the signal configuration, all ELM3xxx terminals have the same technological properties. The ELM350x terminals for the evaluation of measuring bridges offer a maximum sampling rate of 10,000 or 20,000 samples per second. The 6-pin plug (push-in) can be removed for maintenance purposes without releasing the individual wires.
Optional calibration certificate: · with factory calibration certificate as ELM350x-0020: on request · external calibrated (ISO17025 or DAkks) as ELM350x-0030: on request
Re-calibration service via the Beckhoff service: on request
Quick-Links
· EtherCAT basics · Mounting and wiring · Process data overview
· Connection view
· Object description and parameterization [} 345]
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
83
Product overview
3.8.2 ELM350x - Technical data
Technical data
ELM3502
ELM3504
Analog inputs
2 channel (differential)
4 channel (differential)
Time relation between channels to each other Simultaneous conversion of all channels in the terminal, synchronous conversion between terminals, if DistributedClocks will be used
ADC conversion method
(deltaSigma) with internal sample rate
5.12 MSps
8 MSps
Limit frequency input filter hardware (see information in section ELM Features/ Firmware filter concept)
Before AD converter: hardware low pass -3 dB @ 30 kHz type butterworth 3th order
Within ADC after conversion:
low pass -3 dB @ 5.3 kHz, low pass -3 dB @ 2.6 kHz,
ramp-up time 150 µs
ramp-up time 300 µs
type sinc3/average filter
The ramp-up time/ settling time/ delay caused by the filtering will be considered within the DistributedClocks-Timestamp.
Resolution
24 Bit (including sign)
Connection technology
2/ 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 wire
Connection type
push-in cageclamp, service plug, 6-pin
Sampling rate (per channel, simultaneous) 50 µs/20 kSps
100 µs/10 kSps
free down sampling by Firmware via decimation factor
Oversampling
1...100 selectable
Operation range DMS
Quarter bridge (1 k, 350 , 120 ) half bridge, full bridge, internal bridge extension and feeding-in supply adjustable
Supported EtherCAT cycle time
DistributedClocks: min. 100 µs, max. 10 ms
(depending on the operation mode)
FrameTriggered/Synchron: min. 200 µs, max. 100 ms
FreeRun: not supported
Connection diagnosis
Wire break/short cut
Surge voltage protection of the inputs related tbd to Uv (internal ground)
Current consumption via E-bus
450 mA typ.
720 mA typ.
Thermal power dissipation
typ. 3 W
Dielectric strength - destruction limit
max. permitted short-term/continuous voltage between contact points ±I1, ±I2, +Uv and Uv: non-supplied ±40 V, supplied ±36 V
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
Recommended operation voltage range to max. permitted voltage during specified normal operation
compliance with specification
between ±I1 and ±I2: typ. ±10 V against Uv
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
Electrical isolation channel/channel *)
no
Electrical isolation channel/Ebus *)
yes, 500V/1min.typ. test
Electrical isolation channel/SGND *)
yes, 500V/1min.typ. test
Weight
approx. 350 g
Permissible ambient temperature range during operation
-25...+60 °C
-25...+55 °C
Permissible ambient temperature range during storage
-40...+85 °C
*) see notes to potential groups in chapter "Mounting and wiring/ Power supply, potential groups" [} 554]
84
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
3.8.2.1 ELM350x overview measurement ranges
Measurement Voltage PT1000 Potentiometer Full bridge
Half bridge
Quarter bridge 120/350/1000
Connection tech- FSV nology
2 wire
±10 V
±80 mV
2/3/4 wire 3/5 wire
2000 ±1 V/V
4/6 wire
±32 mV/V
±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
±2 mV/V
3/5 wire
±16 mV/V
±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
±2 mV/V
2/3 wire
±32 mV/V
±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
±2 mV/V
Mode
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy
Product overview
Maximum value/ value range ±10.737.. V ±10 V ±85.9.. mV ±80 mV 266 °C ±1 V/V
±34.359.. mV/V ±32 mV/V ±8.5899.. mV/V ±8 mV/V ±4.2949.. mV/V ±4 mV/V ±2.1474.. mV/V ±2 mV/V ±17.179.. mV/V ±16 mV/V ±8.5899.. mV/V ±8 mV/V ±4.2949.. mV/V ±4 mV/V ±2.1474.. mV/V ±2 mV/V ±34.359.. mV/V ±32 mV/V ±8.5899.. mV/V ±8 mV/V ±4.2949.. mV/V ±4 mV/V ±2.1474.. mV/V ±2 mV/V
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
85
Product overview
Fig. 47: Overview measurement ranges, Bipolar
Fig. 48: Overview measurement ranges, Unipolar
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
3.8.2.2 Measurement ±10 V
Measurement mode Internal resistance
±10 V >4 M differential
86
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±10 V Value to follow -10...+10 V 10 V -10.737...+10.737 V 24 bit (including sign) 1.28 µV 1.192.. µV
16 bit (including sign) 327.68 µV 305.18.. µV
ELM3502 (20 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 80 ppmFSV < 13 ppmFSV > 97.7 dB
< 1.30 < 9 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB
< 625 [digits] < 102 [digits]
< 70 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 0.80 mV < 130.00 µV
< 90.00 µV < 15.00 µV
ELM3504 (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 60 ppmFSV < 10 ppmFSV > 100.0 dB
< 1.41 < 9 ppmFSV < 1.5 ppmFSV > 116.5 dB
< 469 [digits] < 78 [digits]
< 70 [digits] < 12 [digits]
< 0.60 mV < 100.00 µV
< 90.00 µV < 15.00 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±10 V < ±0.01 % = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 60 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
87
Product overview
Fig. 49: Representation ±10 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
88
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.8.2.3 Measurement ±80 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±80 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -80...+80 mV 80 mV -85.9...+85.9 mV 24 bit (including sign) 10.24 nV 9.536.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 2.62144 µV 2.441.. µV
ELM3502 (20 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 190 ppmFSV < 32 ppmFSV > 89.9 dB
< 1484 [digits] < 250 [digits]
< 0.03 < 20 ppmFSV < 4.0 ppmFSV > 108.0 dB
< 156 [digits] < 31 [digits]
< 15.20 µV < 2.56 µV
< 1.60 µV < 0.32 µV
ELM3504 (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 150 ppmFSV < 25 ppmFSV > 92.0 dB
< 1172 [digits] < 195 [digits]
< 0.03 < 18 ppmFSV < 3.0 ppmFSV > 110.5 dB
< 141 [digits] < 23 [digits]
< 0.01 mV < 2.00 µV
< 1.44 µV < 0.24 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
±80 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
89
Product overview
Measurement mode
±80 mV
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ. interference test
Fig. 50: Representation ±80 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
90
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.8.2.4 RTD/PT1000 measurement
RTD specification and conversion
Temperature measurement with a resistance-dependent RTD sensor generally consists of two steps:
· Electrical measurement of the resistance, if necessary in several ohmic measuring ranges · Conversion (transformation) of the resistance into a temperature value by software means according to
the set RTD type (PT100, PT1000...).
Both steps can take place locally in the Beckhoff measurement device. The transformation in the device can also be deactivated if it is to be calculated on a higher level in the control. Depending on the device type, several RTD conversions can be implemented which only differs in software. This means for Beckhoff RTD measurement devices that
· a specification table of the electrical resistance measurement is given · and based on this, the effect for the temperature measurement is given below depending on the
supported RTD type. Note that RTD characteristic curves are always realized as higher-order equations or by a sampling points table in the software, therefore a linear RT transfer only makes sense in a narrow range.
Application on the ELM350x
The ELM350x supports the measurement of resistances up to 2 k in 2/3/4wire measurement and the conversion of PT1000 RTD sensors up to 2000 / 266 °C.
Although the ELM350x does not support a sole resistance measurement (without conversion to temperature), a resistance specification is given here because the temperature measurement is based on it.
Note on 2-/3-/4-wire connection in R/RTD mode
With 2wire measurement, the line resistance of the sensor supply lines influences the measured value. If a reduction of this systematic error component is desirable for 2wire measurements, the resistance of the supply line to the measuring resistance should be taken into account, in which case the resistance of the supply line has to be determined first. Taking into account the uncertainty associated with this supply line resistance, it can then be included statically in the calculation, in the EL3751 via 0x8000:13 [} 312] and in the ELM350x/ ELM370x via 0x80n0:13 [} 312]. Any change in resistance of the supply line due to ageing, for example, is not taken into account automatically.
A 3wire measurement enables the systematic component to be eliminated, assuming that the two supply lines are identical. With this type of measurement, the lead resistance of a supply line is measured continuously. The value determined in this way is then deducted twice from the measurement result, thereby eliminating the line resistance. Technically, this leads to a significantly more reliable measurement. However, taking into account the measurement uncertainty, the gain from the 3wire connection is less significant, since this assumption is subject to high uncertainty, in view of the fact that the individual line that was not measured may be damaged, or a varying resistance may have gone unnoticed.
Therefore, although technically the 3wire connection is a tried and tested approach, for measurements that are methodological assessed based on measurement uncertainty, we strongly recommend fullycompensated 4wire connection.
With both 2wire and 3wire connection, the contact resistances of the terminal contacts influence the measuring process. The measuring accuracy can be further increased by a userside adjustment with the signal connection plugged in.
NOTE Measurement of small resistances
Especially for measurements in the range < 10 , the 4wire connection is absolutely necessary due to the relatively high supply and contact resistances. It should also be considered that with such low resistances the relative measurement error in relation to the full scale value (FSV) can become high for such measurements resistance measurement terminals with small measuring ranges such as EL3692 in 4wire measurement should be used if necessary.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
91
Product overview
Corresponding considerations also lead to the common connection methods in bridge operation: · Full bridge: 4wire connection without line compensation, 6wire connection with full line compensation · Half bridge: 3wire connection without line compensation, 5wire connection with full line compensation · Quarter bridge: 2wire connection without line compensation, 3wire connection with theoretical line compensation and 4wire connection with full line compensation
92
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Resistance measurement 2 k 3 wire
4 wire
Operation mode Measuring range, nominal
3 V feed voltage, fixed setting on +Uv Internal 1 k reference resistance at I2 Supply current is given by: 3 V / (1 k + R ) measurement max. 3 mA
2 k (corresponds to PT1000 + 266°C)
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
2 k
Measuring range, technically usable 0...2 k
PDO resolution (Extended range) Extended range is not supported for resistance measurement
PDO resolution (Legacy range)
Resistance measurement not available as separate measuring range on ELM350x
Basic accuracy: Measuring error at < ± 0.012%FSV 23°C, with averaging, with offset < ± 120 ppmFSV
< ± 240 m
< ± 0.011%FSV < ± 110 ppmFSV < ± 220 m
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
< 40 ppm
< 30 ppm
Gain/scale/amplification EGain deviation (at 23°C)
< 90 ppmFSV
< 80 ppmFSV
Non-linearity over the ELin whole measuring range
< 65 ppmFSV
< 65 ppmFSV
Repeatability (at 23°C)
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ERep ENoise, PtP
< 10 ppmFSV
< 220 ppmFSV < 1719 digits < 440 m
< 10 ppmFSV
< 220 ppmFSV < 1719 digits < 440 m
ENoise, RMS
< 37 ppmFSV < 289 digits
< 74 m
< 37 ppmFSV < 289 digits
< 74 m
Max. SNR > 88.6 dB
> 88.6 dB
Noisedensi ty@1kHz < 1.05
< 1.05
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR ENoise, PtP filtering, at 23°C)
< 14 ppmFSV < 109 digits
< 28 m
< 14 ppmFSV < 109 digits
< 28 m
ENoise, RMS
< 2.3 ppmFSV < 18 digits
< 4.6 m
< 2.3 ppmFSV < 18 digits
< 4.6 m
Max. SNR > 112.8 dB
> 112.8 dB
Common-mode rejection ratio
tbd
tbd
(without filtering)3
Common-mode rejection ratio (with tbd
tbd
50 Hz FIR filtering)3
Temperature coefficient
TcGain < 10 ppm/K
TcOffset < 4 ppmFSV/K < 8 m/K
< 10 ppm/K
< 1.5 ppmFSV/K < 3 m/K
Largest short-term deviation during ±tbd%FSV = ±tbd ppmFSV typ. a specified electrical interference
test
±tbd%FSV = ±tbd ppmFSV typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
93
Product overview RTD measuring range
Fig. 51: Chart: RTD measuring range In temperature mode, only the legacy range is available, the extended range is not available. The temperature display in [°C/digit] (e.g. 0.1°/digit or 0.01°/digit) is independent from the electrical measurement. It is "just" a display setting and results from the PDO setting, see chapter "Comissioning".
Data for the sensor types in the following table
The values for the sensor types listed in the following table are shown here merely for informative purposes as an orientation aid. All data are given without guarantee and must be cross-checked against the data sheet for the respective sensor employed. The RTD measurement consists of a chain of measuring and computing elements that affect the attainable measurement deviation:
The given resistance specification is decisive for the attainable temperature measurement accuracy. It is applied to the possible RTD types in the following.
On account of
· the non-linearity existing in the RTD and thus the high dependency of the specification data on the sensor temperature Tsens and
· the influence of the ambient temperature on the analog input device employed (leads to a change in Tmeasured on account of Tambient although Tsens = constant)
no detailed temperature specification table is given in the following, but
· a short table specifying the electrical measuring range and orientation value for the basic accuracy · a graph of the basic accuracy over Tsens (this at two example ambient temperatures so that the
attainable basic accuracy is implied on account of the actual existing ambient temperature) · equations for calculating further parameters (offset/gain/non-linearity/repeatability/noise) if necessary
from the resistance specification at the desired operating point
94
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
RTD types supported by the ELM350x: · PT1000 according to DIN EN 60751/IEC751 with = 0.0039083 [1/C°]
RTD temperature measurement
PT1000 3-wire
PT1000 4-wire
Electrical measuring range used
2 k
Starting value
-200 °C 185.2
End value
266 °C 2000
PDO LSB (legacy range only)
0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting
Basic accuracy: Measurement deviation at 23 °C ter- ±0.043 K @ Tsens = 0 °C minal environment, with averaging
±0.042 K @ Tsens = 0 °C
Basic accuracy for PT1000, 3-wire connection:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
95
Product overview Basic accuracy for PT1000, 4-wire connection:
If further specification data are of interest, they can or must be calculated from the values given in the resistance specification.
The sequence:
· General: The conversion is explained here only for one measuring point (a certain input signal); the steps simply have to be repeated in case of several measuring points (up to the entire measuring range).
· If the measured resistance at the measured temperature measuring point is unknown, the measured value (MW) in [ ] must be determined: MW = RMeasuring point (TMeasuring ) point with the help of an RT table
· The deviation at this resistance value is calculated
Via the total equation
or a single value, e.g. ESingle = 15 ppmFSV
the measurement uncertainty in [] must be calculated: E (R Resistance Measuring ) point = E (R Total Measuring ) point * FSV or: E (R ) Resistance Measuring point = E (R Single Measuring ) point * FSV or (if already known) e.g.: E (R Resistance Measuring ) point = 0.03
· The slope at the point used must then be determined: RproK(TMeasuring ) point = [ R(TMeasuring point + 1 °C) R(TMeasuring point )] / 1 °C with the help of an RT table
· The temperature measurement uncertainty can be calculated from the resistance measurement uncertainty and the slope E (R Temp Measuring ) point = (E (T )) Resistance Measuring point / (RproK(TMeasuring ) point )
96
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
· To determine the error of the entire system consisting of RTD and ELM350x in [°C], the two errors must be added together quadratically:
The numerical values used in the following three examples are for illustration purposes. The specification values given in the technical data remain authoritative.
Example 1: Basic accuracy of an ELM3504 at 35 °C ambient temperature, measurement of -100 °C in the PT1000 interface (4-wire), without the influence of noise and aging: TMeasuring point = -100 °C MW = RPT1000, -100 °C = 602.56
= 86.238 ppmFSV E (R Resistance Measuring ) point = 86.238 ppmFSV * 2000 = 0.1725 RproK(TMeasuring ) point = (R(-99 °C) R(-100 °C)) / (1 °C) = 4.05 /°C EELM3504@35°C, PT1000, -100 °C = (0.1725 )/(4.05 /°C) 0.043 °C (means ±0.043 °C)
Example 2: Consideration of the repeatability alone under the above conditions: TMeasuring point = -100 °C MW = RMeasuring point (-100 °C) = 602.56 ESingle = 10 ppmFSV E = Resistance 10 ppmFSV * 2000 = 0.02 RproK(TMeasuring ) point = (R-99 °C R-100 °C) / 1 °C = 4.05 /°C E (R Temp Measuring ) point = 0.02 / 4.05 /°C 0.005 °C (means ±0.005 °C)
Example 3: Consideration of the RMS noise alone without filter under the above conditions: TMeasuring point = -100 °C MW = RMeasuring point (-100 °C) = 602.56 ESingle = 37 ppmFSV E = Resistance 37 ppmFSV * 2000 = 0.074 RproK(TMeasuring ) point = (R-99 °C R-100 °C) / 1 °C = 4.05 /°C E (R Temp Measuring ) point = 0.074 / 4.05 /°C 0.018 °C (means ± 0.018 °C)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
97
Product overview
Example 4: If the noise ENoise, PtP of the above example terminal is considered not for one sensor point -100 °C but in general, the following plot results:
98
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.8.2.5 Potentiometer measurement
The potentiometer should be supplied with the integrated power supply unit (max. 5 V, configurable). The slider voltage is then measured relative to the supply voltage and output in %. Technical, the measurement is similar to a strain gauge half bridge.
Potentiometers from 1 k can be used.
Diagnostics · Slider breakage: full-scale deflection or 0 display · Supply interruption: full-scale deflection or 0 display
Measurement mode Operation mode
Measuring range, nominal
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, technically usable
PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Basic accuracy: Measuring
without offset 2
deviation at 23°C, with averaging
with offset 2
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
Noise (peak-to-peak, without filtering, at 23°C)
ERep ENoise, PtP
ENoise, RMS
Noise (peak-to-peak, with 50Hz filtering, at 23°C)
Max. SNR Noisedensity @1kHz
ENoise, PtP
ENoise, RMS
Max. SNR Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)3
Potentiometer (5 wire) The supply voltage is configurable via CoE, 0.5...5 V -1...1 V/V 1 V/V -1...1 V/V 24 bit (incl. sign) 0.128 ppm 0.119... ppm < ± 0.0025 %FSV < ± 25 ppmFSV < ± 25 µV/V < ± 0.0075 %FSV < ± 75 ppmFSV < ± 75 µV/V < 70 ppmFSV
< 20 ppm
< 15 ppmFSV
< 1 ppmFSV < 105 ppmFSV < 820 digits < 18 ppmFSV < 137 digits > 95.1 dB
< 0.18
< 9 ppmFSV < 70 digits
< 1.5 ppmFSV < 12 digits
> 116.5 dB
DC:
50 Hz:
1 kHz:
tbd Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz filtering)3 DC:
typ. tbd
typ.
50 Hz:
tbd
typ.
1 kHz:
Temperature coefficient
TcGain TcOffset
tbd
typ. tbd
< 1 ppm/K
< 1 ppmFSV/K
typ. tbd
typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
99
Product overview
Measurement mode
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
Potentiometer (5 wire) tbd %FSV = tbd ppmFSV typ.
2) A regular offset adjustment with connected potentiometer is recommended. The given offset specification of the terminal is therefore practically irrelevant. Therefore, specification values with and without offset are given here. In practice, the offset component can be eliminated by the terminal functions Tare and also ZeroOffset or in the controller by a higher-level tare function. The offset deviation over time can change, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset adjustment or careful observation of the change.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
Potentiometer measurement range
Fig. 52: Representation potentiometer measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
100
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.8.2.6 Measurement SG 1/1 bridge (full bridge) 4/6-wire connection
To determine the measuring error:
The nominal/technical measuring range is specified in "mV/V"; the maximum permitted supply voltage is 5 V. The maximum nominal measuring range that can be used for the bridge voltage is therefore ±32 mV/V * 5 V = ±160 mV; the internal circuits are configured accordingly.
The internal measurement is ratiometric, i.e. the feed voltage and the bridge voltage are not measured absolutely, but as a ratio.
The integrated supply can be used as power supply. An external supply is permitted, as long as 5 V is not exceeded.
The following is the specification given for the 6 wire connection. External line resistances are compensated by the 6 wire connection and the full bridge is detected directly from the measuring channel.
In the 4 wire connection, the terminal generally has the same specification, but its view of the connected full bridge is clouded by the unclear and temperature-dependent lead resistances within cables and connectors. In this respect, the overall system "full bridge + leads + measurement channel" will practically not achieve specification values given below. The lead resistances (cables, connectors, ...) have an effect especially on the gain error, also depending on the temperature.
The gain error can be estimated by (R+uv (1+ T* TCCu) + R-uv(1+T* TCCu) )/Rnom with TCCu~3930 ppm/K, Rnom e.g. 350 and R+uv or R-uv lead resistances respectively.
NOTE Increase measurement accuracy: switcheable shunt
By a user-side adjustment with plugged signal connection, the measurement accuracy can be further increased. The ELM350x and ELM370x terminals also have a shunt resistor which can be switched from their CoE directory (0x80n0:08 [} 312]).
The use of the measurement channel in the 6 wire connection is recommended, especially when significant resistors such as a lightning arrester are put into the line.
Note: specifications apply for 5 V SG excitation and symmetric 350R SG.
Note: Data are valid from production week 01 / 2019 and · for ELM3502: HW03 · for ELM3504: HW04
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
101
Product overview
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/1 Bridge 4/6 wire
32 mV
8 mV
4 mV
2 mV
Integrated power supply 1...5 V adjustable, max. supply/excitation 21 mA (internal electronic overload protection) therefore 120R strain gauge: up to 2.5 V; 350R strain gauge: up to 5.0 V
Measuring range, nominal
-32 ... +32 mV/V -8 ... +8 mV/V -4 ... +4 mV/V
-2 ... +2 mV/V
Measuring range, end 32 mV/V value (FSV)
8 mV/V
4 mV/V
2 mV/V
Measuring range, technically usable
-34,359 ... +34,359 -8,590 ... +8,590 -4,295 ... +4,295 -2,147 ... +2,147
mV/V
mV/V
mV/V
mV/V
PDO resolution
24 Bit (incl. sign)
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
0.128 ppm
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
0.119... ppm
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
without offset 2)
< ±0,0025%MBE < ±25 ppmMBE < ±0,80 µV/V
with offset < ±0,0075%MBE
2)
< ±75 ppmMBE
< ±2,40 µV/V
< ±0,006%MBE < ±60 ppmMBE < ±0,48 µV/V
< ±0,015%MBE < ±150 ppmMBE < ±1,20 µV/V
< ±0,0085%MBE < ±85 ppmMBE < ±0,34 µV/V
< ±0,03%MBE < ±300 ppmMBE < ±1,20 µV/V typ
< ±0,013%MBE < ±130 ppmMBE < ±0,26 µV/V
< ±0,06%MBE < ±600 ppmMBE < ±1,20 µV/V typ
Offset/Zero EOffset Point deviation (at 23°C)
< 70 ppmMBE
< 140 ppmMBE
< 280 ppmMBE
< 580 ppmMBE
Gain/scale/ EGain amplification deviation (at 23°C)
< 20 ppm
< 50 ppm
< 70 ppm
< 110 ppm
Non-linearity ELin over the whole measuring range
< 15 ppmMBE
< 30 ppmMBE
< 45 ppmMBE
< 65 ppmMBE
Repeatabilit ERep y (at 23°C)
< 5 ppmMBE
< 10 ppmMBE
< 15 ppmMBE
< 20 ppmMBE
Common- DC
mode rejection
tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
ratio (without 50 Hz
filtering)3
tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
1 kHz
tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
Common- DC
mode rejection
tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
ratio (with 50 Hz
50Hz filtering)3
tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
1 kHz
Temperature TcGain coefficient TcOffset
tbd < 1 ppm/K < 1,2 ppmMBE/K
tbd < 2 ppm/K < 5 ppmMBE/K
tbd < 3 ppm/K < 12 ppmMBE/K
tbd < 5 ppm/K < 25 ppmMBE/K
< 0,04
< 0,04
< 0,05
< 0,05
102
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/1 Bridge 4/6 wire
32 mV
8 mV
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
Input
Differential tbd
tbd
impedance Common tbd
tbd
±Input 1
Mode
Input impedance ±Input 2
3 wire No usage of this input in this mode
Differential tbd typ.
tbd typ.
Common tbd typ. Mode
tbd typ.
4 mV tbd %FSV
tbd tbd
tbd typ. tbd typ.
2 mV tbd %FSV
tbd tbd
tbd typ. tbd typ.
2) In real bridge measurement, an offset adjustment is usually carried out after installation. The given offset specification of the terminal is therefore practically irrelevant. Therefore, specification values with and without offset are given here. In practice, the offset component can be eliminated by the terminal functions Tare and also ZeroOffset or in the controller by a higher-level tare function. The offset deviation of a bridge measurement over time can change, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset adjustment or careful observation of the change.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
ELM3502 (20 ksps)
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/1 Bridge 4/6 wire
32 mV
8 mV
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 125 ppmFSV < 977 digits < 4.00 µV/V
< 25 ppmFSV < 195 digits < 0.80 µV/V
< 425 ppmFSV < 3320 digits < 3.40 µV/V
< 70 ppmFSV < 547 digits < 0.56 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 92.0 dB
> 83.1 dB
Noiseden
sity@1kH z
< 11.31
< 7.92
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 12 ppmFSV < 94 digits < 0.38 µV/V
< 2.0 ppmFSV < 16 digits < 0.06 µV/V
< 30 ppmFSV < 234 digits < 0.24 µV/V
< 5.0 ppmFSV < 39 digits < 0.04 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 114.0 dB
> 106.0 dB
4 mV < 1050 ppmFSV < 8203 digits < 4.20 µV/V < 140 ppmFSV < 1094 digits < 0.56 µV/V > 77.1 dB
< 7.92
< 60 ppmFSV < 469 digits < 0.24 µV/V < 10.0 ppmFSV < 78 digits < 0.04 µV/V > 100.0 dB
2 mV < 1600 ppmFSV < 12500 digits < 3.20 µV/V < 270 ppmFSV < 2109 digits < 0.54 µV/V > 71.4 dB
< 7.64
< 120 ppmFSV < 938 digits < 0.24 µV/V < 20.0 ppmFSV < 156 digits < 0.04 µV/V > 94.0 dB
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
103
Product overview
ELM3504 (10 ksps)
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/1 Bridge 4/6 wire
32 mV
8 mV
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 85 ppmFSV < 664 digits < 2.72 µV/V
< 15 ppmFSV < 117 digits < 0.48 µV/V
< 300 ppmFSV < 2344 digits < 2.40 µV/V
< 50 ppmFSV < 391 digits < 0.40 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 96.5 dB
> 86.0 dB
Noiseden
sity@1kH z
< 6.79
< 5.66
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 12 ppmFSV < 94 digits < 0.38 µV/V
< 2.0 ppmFSV < 16 digits < 0.06 µV/V
< 30 ppmFSV < 234 digits < 0.24 µV/V
< 5.0 ppmFSV < 39 digits < 0.04 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 114.0 dB
> 106.0 dB
Full bridge calculation:
4 mV < 600 ppmFSV < 4688 digits < 2.40 µV/V < 100 ppmFSV < 781 digits < 0.40 µV/V > 80.0 dB
< 5.66
< 60 ppmFSV < 469 digits < 0.24 µV/V < 10.0 ppmFSV < 78 digits < 0.04 µV/V > 100.0 dB
2 mV < 1200 ppmFSV < 9375 digits < 2.40 µV/V < 200 ppmFSV < 1563 digits < 0.40 µV/V > 74.0 dB
< 5.66
< 120 ppmFSV < 938 digits < 0.24 µV/V < 20.0 ppmFSV < 156 digits < 0.04 µV/V > 94.0 dB
104
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
The strain relationship (µStrain, µ) is as follows:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
105
Product overview
3.8.2.7 Measurement SG 1/2 bridge (half bridge) 3/5-wire connection
To determine the measuring error:
The nominal/technical measuring range is specified in "mV/V"; the maximum permitted supply voltage is 5 V. The maximum nominal measuring range that can be used for the bridge voltage is therefore ±16 mV/V * 5V = ±80 mV; the internal circuits are designed for the 160 mV of the full bridge measurement.
The internal measurement is ratiometric, i.e. the feed voltage and the bridge voltage are not measured absolutely, but as a ratio.
The integrated supply can be used as power supply. An external supply is permitted, as long as 5 V is not exceeded.
The following is the specification given for the 5 wire connection. External line resistances are compensated by the 5 wire connection and the half-bridge is detected directly from the measuring channel.
In the 3 wire connection, the terminal generally has the same specification, but its view of the connected halfbridge is clouded by the unclear and temperature-dependent lead resistances within cables and connectors. In this respect, the overall system "half-bridge + leads + measurement channel" will practically not achieve specification values given below. The lead resistances (cables, connectors, ...) have an effect especially on the gain error, also depending on the temperature.
The gain error can be estimated by (R+uv (1+ T* TCCu) + R-uv(1+T* TCCu) )/Rnom with TCCu~3930 ppm/K, Rnom e.g. 350 and R+uv or R-uv lead resistances respectively.
The use of the measurement channel in the 5 wire connection is recommended.
Note: specifications apply for 3.5 V SG excitation and symmetric 350R SG.
Note: Adjustment of the half-bridge measurement and thus validity of the data from production week 2018/ 50 and
· for ELM3502: HW03 · for ELM3504: HW04
106
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/2 Bridge 3/5 wire
16 mV
8 mV
4 mV
2 mV
Integrated power supply 1...5 V adjustable, max. supply/excitation 21 mA (internal electronic overload protection) therefore 120R strain gauge: up to 2.5 V; 350R strain gauge: up to 5.0 V
Measuring range, nominal
-16 ... 16 mV/V -8 ... 8 mV/V
-4 ... 4 mV/V
-2 ... 2 mV/V
Measuring range, end 16 mV/V value (FSV)
8 mV/V
4 mV/V
2 mV/V
Measuring range, technically usable
-17.179 ... 17.179 -8.589 ... 8.589
mV/V
mV/V
-4.294 ... 4.294 mV/ -2.147 ... 2.147 mV/
V
V
PDO resolution
24 Bit (incl. sign)
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
0.128 ppm
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
0.119... ppm
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
without offset 2)
< ±0.011%FSV < ±110 ppmFSV < ±1.76 µV/V
with offset < ±0.04%FSV
2)
< ±400 ppmFSV
< ±6.40 µV/V
< ±0.022%FSV < ±220 ppmFSV < ±1.76 µV/V
< ±0.075%FSV < ±750 ppmFSV < ±6.00 µV/V
< ±0.044%FSV < ±440 ppmFSV < ±1.76 µV/V
< ±0.14%FSV < ±1400 ppmFSV < ±5.60 µV/V
< ±0.0925%FSV < ±925 ppmFSV < ±1.85 µV/V
< ±0.27%FSV < ±2700 ppmFSV < ±5.40 µV/V
Offset/Zero EOffset Point deviation (at 23°C)
< 385 ppmFSV
< 715 ppmFSV
< 1325 ppmFSV
< 2530 ppmFSV
Gain/scale/ EGain amplification deviation (at 23°C)
< 70 ppm
< 130 ppm
< 260 ppm
< 510 ppm
Non-linearity ELin over the whole measuring range
< 85 ppmFSV
< 175 ppmFSV
< 350 ppmFSV
< 760 ppmFSV
Repeatabilit ERep y (at 23°C)
< 12 ppmFSV
< 25 ppmFSV
< 50 ppmFSV
< 120 ppmFSV
Common-mode
tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
rejection ratio (without
filtering)3
Common-mode
tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
rejection ratio (with
50Hz filtering)3
Temperature TcGain coefficient TcOffset
< 5 ppm/K
< 15 ppmFSV/K < 0.24 µV/V/K
< 8 ppm/K
< 25 ppmFSV/K < 0.20 µV/V/K
< 15 ppm/K
< 45 ppmFSV/K < 0.18 µV/V/K
< 25 ppm/K
< 90 ppmFSV/K < 0.18 µV/V/K
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
Input
Differential tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
impedance Common tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
±Input 1
Mode
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
107
Product overview
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/2 Bridge 3/5 wire
16 mV
8 mV
Input impedance ±Input 2
3 wire No usage of this input in this mode
Differential tbd typ.
tbd typ.
Common tbd typ. Mode
tbd typ.
4 mV
tbd typ. tbd typ.
2 mV
tbd typ. tbd typ.
2) In real bridge measurement, an offset adjustment is usually carried out after installation. The given offset specification of the terminal is therefore practically irrelevant. Therefore, specification values with and without offset are given here. In practice, the offset component can be eliminated by the terminal functions Tare and also ZeroOffset or in the controller by a higher-level tare function. The offset deviation of a bridge measurement over time can change, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset adjustment or careful observation of the change.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
ELM3502 (20 ksps)
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/2 Bridge 3/5 wire
16 mV
8 mV
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 600 ppmFSV < 4688 digits < 9.60 µV/V
< 100 ppmFSV < 781 digits < 1.60 µV/V
< 1200 ppmFSV < 9375 digits < 9.60 µV/V
< 200 ppmFSV < 1563 digits < 1.60 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 80.0 dB
> 74.0 dB
Noiseden
sity@1kH z
< 22.63
< 22.63
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 35 ppmFSV < 273 digits < 0.56 µV/V
< 6.0 ppmFSV < 47 digits < 0.10 µV/V
< 70 ppmFSV < 547 digits < 0.56 µV/V
< 12.0 ppmFSV < 94 digits < 0.10 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 104.4 dB
> 98.4 dB
4 mV < 2400 ppmFSV < 18750 digits < 9.60 µV/V < 400 ppmFSV < 3125 digits < 1.60 µV/V > 68.0 dB
< 22.63
< 140 ppmFSV < 1094 digits < 0.56 µV/V < 22.0 ppmFSV < 172 digits < 0.09 µV/V > 93.2 dB
2 mV < 4800 ppmFSV < 37500 digits < 9.60 µV/V < 800 ppmFSV < 6250 digits < 1.60 µV/V > 61.9 dB
< 22.63
< 280 ppmFSV < 2188 digits < 0.56 µV/V < 45.0 ppmFSV < 352 digits < 0.09 µV/V > 86.9 dB
ELM3504 (10 ksps)
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/2 Bridge 3/5 wire
16 mV
8 mV
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 600 ppmFSV < 4688 digits < 9.60 µV/V
< 100 ppmFSV < 781 digits < 1.60 µV/V
< 1200 ppmFSV < 9375 digits < 9.60 µV/V
< 200 ppmFSV < 1563 digits < 1.60 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 80.0 dB
> 74.0 dB
Noiseden
sity@1kH z
< 22.63
< 22.63
4 mV < 2400 ppmFSV < 18750 digits < 9.60 µV/V < 400 ppmFSV < 3125 digits < 1.60 µV/V > 68.0 dB
< 22.63
2 mV < 4800 ppmFSV < 37500 digits < 9.60 µV/V < 800 ppmFSV < 6250 digits < 1.60 µV/V > 61.9 dB
< 22.63
108
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
Max. SNR
StrainGauge/SG 1/2 Bridge 3/5 wire
16 mV
8 mV
< 35 ppmFSV < 273 digits
< 0.56 µV/V
< 70 ppmFSV < 547 digits
< 0.56 µV/V
< 6.0 ppmFSV < 47 digits
< 0.10 µV/V
< 12.0 ppmFSV < 94 digits
< 0.10 µV/V
> 104.4 dB
> 98.4 dB
4 mV
< 140 ppmFSV < 1094 digits < 0.56 µV/V
< 22.0 ppmFSV < 172 digits < 0.09 µV/V
> 93.2 dB
2 mV
< 280 ppmFSV < 2188 digits < 0.56 µV/V
< 45.0 ppmFSV < 352 digits < 0.09 µV/V
> 86.9 dB
NOTE
Transition resistances of the terminal contacts
The transition resistance values of the terminal contacts affect the measurement. The measuring accuracy can be further increased by a user-side adjustment with the signal connection plugged in.
Validity of property values
The resistor of the bridge is positioned parallel to the internal resistor of the terminal and leads to an offset shifting respectively. The Beckhoff factory calibration will be carried out with the half bridge 350 , thus the values specified above are directly valid for the 350 half bridge. By connection of another dimensioned half-bridge is to:
· perform a balancing (offset correction) by the terminal itself or the control/PLC on application side
· or the abstract offset error have to be entered into the balancing parameter S0 of the terminal. Example: a 350 half bridge correlates by the compensated effect of the input resistor (2 M) during factory calibration 0.26545 %FSV (16 mV/V), that corresponds to 20738 digits.
Half bridge calculation:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
109
Product overview
R3/4 are the internal switchable input resistors of the terminal. Other configurations (e.g. R1/4 or R1/3 variable) of half bridges are not supported. The strain relationship (µStrain, µ) is as follows:
N should be chosen based on the mechanical configuration of the variable resistors (Poisson, 2 active uniaxial, ...). The channel value (PDO) is interpreted directly [mV/V]:
110
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.8.2.8 Measurement SG 1/4 bridge (quarter-bridge) 2/3-wire connection
Notes
· In practice, quarter-bridge measurement is not recommended in 2-wire mode. Common copper supply lines with inherent resistance (e.g. approx. 17 m/m with 1 mm² stranded wire) and very high temperature sensitivity (approx. 4000 ppm/K, approx. 0.4%/K) have a significant influence on the calculation, which can only be corrected through continuous offset and gain adjustment. Only 3-wire operation should be used.
· Specifications apply to 5 V strain gauge excitation. · Data valid from production week 21/2019 and for ELM3502: HW03, for ELM3504: HW04 · Specifications only apply when using ferrules and for cross-sections of 0.5 mm² or more. For smaller
cross-sections, increased transition resistance is to be expected. · Avoid repeated insertion/extraction of the push-in connectors in quarter-bridge operation, since this
may increase the contact resistance · Integrated power supply: 1...5 V adjustable, max. supply/excitation 21 mA (internal electronic overload
protection)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
111
Product overview
Measurement mode
StrainGauge/SG 1/4 Bridge 120 2/3 wire
32 mV/V FSV
8 mV/V FSV
4 mV/V 5) (comp.) 2 mV/V 5) (comp.)
Measuring range, nominal
±32 mV/V
±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
[corresponds to [corresponds to [corresponds to
±64,000 µ at K=2] ±16,000 µ at K=2] ±8,000 µ at K=2]
±2 mV/V [corresponds to ±4,000 µ at K=2]
120 ± 15.36
120 ± 3.84
120 ± 1.92
120 ± 0.96
Measuring range, end 32 mV/V value (FSV)
8 mV/V
4 mV/V
2 mV/V
Measuring range, technically usable
±34.359... mV/V ±8.589... mV/V
±4.294... mV/V
±2.147... mV/V
PDO resolution
24 Bit (incl. sign)
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
0.128 ppm 4.096 nV/V
0.128 ppm 1.024 nV/V
0.128 ppm 0.512 nV/V
0.128 ppm 0.256 nV/V
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
0.119... ppm 3.814.. nV/V
0.119... ppm 0.9535 nV/V
0.119... ppm 0.47675 nV/V
0.119... ppm 0.238375 nV/V
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
without offset 2)
< ±0.026%FSV < ±260 ppmFSV < ±8.3 µV/V
with offset < ±0.1%FSV
2)
< ±1000 ppmFSV
< ±32.0 µV/V
< ±0.08%FSV < ±800 ppmFSV < ±6.4 µV/V
< ±0.4%FSV < ±4000 ppmFSV < ±32.0 µV/V
< ±0.16%FSV < ±1600 ppmFSV < ±6.4 µV/V
< ±0.8%FSV < ±8000 ppmFSV < ±32.0 µV/V
< ±0.32%FSV < ±3200 ppmFSV < ±6.4 µV/V
< ±1.6%FSV < ±16000 ppmFSV < ±32.0 µV/V
Offset/Zero EOffset Point deviation (at 23°C)
< 960 ppmFSV
< 3920 ppmFSV
< 7840 ppmFSV < 15680 ppmFSV
Gain/scale/ EGain amplification deviation (at 23°C)
< 160 ppm
< 440 ppm
< 880 ppm
< 1760 ppm
Non-linearity ELin over the whole measuring range
< 200 ppmFSV
< 650 ppmFSV
< 1300 ppmFSV
< 2600 ppmFSV
Repeatabilit ERep y (at 23°C)
< 25 ppmFSV
< 100 ppmFSV
< 200 ppmFSV
< 400 ppmFSV
Common-mode
tbd
tbd
rejection ratio (without
filtering)3
tbd
tbd
Common-mode
tbd
tbd
rejection ratio (with
50Hz filtering)3
tbd
tbd
Temperature TcGain coefficient TcOffset
< 20 ppm/K
< 50 ppmFSV/K < 1.60 µV/V/K
< 48 ppm/K
< 180 ppmFSV/K < 1.44 µV/V/K
< 96 ppm/K
< 360 ppmFSV/K < 1.44 µV/V/K
< 192 ppm/K
< 720 ppmFSV/K < 1.44 µV/V/K
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
Input
Differential tbd
tbd
impedance Common tbd
tbd
±Input 1
Mode
tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
Input impedance ±Input 2
3 wire No usage of this input in this mode
Differential tbd typ.
tbd typ.
Common tbd typ. Mode
tbd typ.
tbd typ. tbd typ.
tbd typ. tbd typ.
112
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
ELM3502 (20 ksps)
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/4 Bridge 120 2/3 wire
32 mV
8 mV
4 mV
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 310 ppmFSV < 2422 digits < 9.92 µV/V
< 50 ppmFSV < 391 digits < 1.60 µV/V
< 1200 ppmFSV < 9375 digits < 9.60 µV/V
< 200 ppmFSV < 1563 digits < 1.60 µV/V
< 2400 ppmFSV < 18750 digits < 9.60 µV/V
< 400 ppmFSV < 3125 digits < 1.60 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 86.0 dB
> 74.0 dB
> 68.0 dB
Noiseden sity@1kH < 0.02 z
< 0.02
< 0.02
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 24 ppmFSV < 188 digits < 0.77 µV/V
< 4.0 ppmFSV < 31 digits < 0.13 µV/V
< 72 ppmFSV < 563 digits < 0.58 µV/V
< 12.0 ppmFSV < 94 digits < 0.10 µV/V
< 144 ppmFSV < 1125 digits < 0.58 µV/V
< 24.0 ppmFSV < 188 digits < 0.10 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 108.0 dB
> 98.4 dB
> 92.4 dB
ELM3504 (10 ksps)
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/4 Bridge 120 2/3 wire
32 mV
8 mV
4 mV
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 285 ppmFSV < 2227 digits < 9.12 µV/V
< 50 ppmFSV < 391 digits < 1.60 µV/V
< 1000 ppmFSV < 7813 digits < 8.00 µV/V
< 150 ppmFSV < 1172 digits < 1.20 µV/V
< 2000 ppmFSV < 15625 digits < 8.00 µV/V
< 300 ppmFSV < 2344 digits < 1.20 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 86.0 dB
> 76.5 dB
> 70.5 dB
Noiseden sity@1kH < 0.02 z
< 0.02
< 0.02
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 20 ppmFSV < 156 digits < 0.64 µV/V
< 4.0 ppmFSV < 31 digits < 0.13 µV/V
< 60 ppmFSV < 469 digits < 0.48 µV/V
< 12.0 ppmFSV < 94 digits < 0.10 µV/V
< 120 ppmFSV < 938 digits < 0.48 µV/V
< 24.0 ppmFSV < 188 digits < 0.10 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 108.0 dB
> 98.4 dB
> 92.4 dB
Product overview
2 mV < 4800 ppmFSV < 37500 digits < 9.60 µV/V < 800 ppmFSV < 6250 digits < 1.60 µV/V > 61.9 dB
< 0.02
< 288 ppmFSV < 2250 digits < 0.58 µV/V < 48.0 ppmFSV < 375 digits < 0.10 µV/V > 86.4 dB
2 mV < 4000 ppmFSV < 31250 digits < 8.00 µV/V < 600 ppmFSV < 4688 digits < 1.20 µV/V > 64.4 dB
< 0.02
< 240 ppmFSV < 1875 digits < 0.48 µV/V < 48.0 ppmFSV < 375 digits < 0.10 µV/V > 86.4 dB
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
113
Product overview
Measurement mode
StrainGauge/SG 1/4 Bridge 350 2/3 wire
32 mV/V FSV
8 mV/V FSV
4 mV/V 5) (comp.) 2 mV/V 5) (comp.)
Measuring range, nominal
±32 mV/V
±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
[corresponds to [corresponds to [corresponds to
±64,000 µ at K=2] ±16,000 µ at K=2] ±8,000 µ at K=2]
±2 mV/V [corresponds to ±4,000 µ at K=2]
120 ± 15.36
120 ± 3.84
120 ± 1.92
120 ± 0.96
Measuring range, end 32 mV/V value (FSV)
8 mV/V
4 mV/V
2 mV/V
Measuring range, technically usable
±34.359... mV/V ±8.589... mV/V
±4.294... mV/V
±2.147... mV/V
PDO resolution
24 Bit (incl. sign)
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
0.128 ppm 4.096 nV/V
0.128 ppm 1.024 nV/V
0.128 ppm 0.512 nV/V
0.128 ppm 0.256 nV/V
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
0.119... ppm 3.814.. nV/V
0.119... ppm 0.9535 nV/V
0.119... ppm 0.47675 nV/V
0.119... ppm 0.238375 nV/V
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
without offset 2)
< ±0.022%FSV < ±220 ppmFSV < ±7.0 µV/V
with offset < ±0.1%FSV
2)
< ±1000 ppmFSV
< ±32.0 µV/V
< ±0.08%FSV < ±800 ppmFSV < ±6.4 µV/V
< ±0.4%FSV < ±4000 ppmFSV < ±32.0 µV/V
< ±0.16%FSV < ±1600 ppmFSV < ±6.4 µV/V
< ±0.8%FSV < ±8000 ppmFSV < ±32.0 µV/V
< ±0.32%FSV < ±3200 ppmFSV < ±6.4 µV/V
< ±1.6%FSV < ±16000 ppmFSV < ±32.0 µV/V
Offset/Zero EOffset Point deviation (at 23°C)
< 970 ppmFSV
< 3920 ppmFSV
< 7840 ppmFSV < 15680 ppmFSV
Gain/scale/ EGain amplification deviation (at 23°C)
< 120 ppm
< 380 ppm
< 760 ppm
< 1520 ppm
Non-linearity ELin over the whole measuring range
< 180 ppmFSV
< 690 ppmFSV
< 1380 ppmFSV
< 2760 ppmFSV
Repeatabilit ERep y (at 23°C)
< 25 ppmFSV
< 100 ppmFSV
< 200 ppmFSV
< 400 ppmFSV
Common-mode
tbd
tbd
rejection ratio (without
filtering)3
tbd
tbd
Common-mode
tbd
tbd
rejection ratio (with
50Hz filtering)3
tbd
tbd
Temperature TcGain coefficient TcOffset
< 12 ppm/K
< 30 ppmFSV/K < 0.96 µV/V/K
< 50 ppm/K
< 110 ppmFSV/K < 0.88 µV/V/K
< 100 ppm/K
< 220 ppmFSV/K < 0.88 µV/V/K
< 200 ppm/K
< 440 ppmFSV/K < 0.88 µV/V/K
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
Input
Differential tbd
tbd
impedance Common tbd
tbd
±Input 1
Mode
tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
Input impedance ±Input 2
3 wire Differential tbd typ. Common tbd typ. Mode
tbd typ. tbd typ.
tbd typ. tbd typ.
tbd typ. tbd typ.
114
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
ELM3502 (20 ksps)
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/4 Bridge 350 2/3 wire
32 mV
8 mV
4 mV
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 320 ppmFSV < 2500 digits < 10.24 µV/V
< 55 ppmFSV < 430 digits < 1.76 µV/V
< 1200 ppmFSV < 9375 digits < 9.60 µV/V
< 200 ppmFSV < 1563 digits < 1.60 µV/V
< 2400 ppmFSV < 18750 digits < 9.60 µV/V
< 400 ppmFSV < 3125 digits < 1.60 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 85.2 dB
> 74.0 dB
> 68.0 dB
Noiseden sity@1kH < 0.02 z
< 0.02
< 0.02
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 18 ppmFSV < 141 digits < 0.58 µV/V
< 3.0 ppmFSV < 23 digits < 0.10 µV/V
< 72 ppmFSV < 563 digits < 0.58 µV/V
< 12.0 ppmFSV < 94 digits < 0.10 µV/V
< 144 ppmFSV < 1125 digits < 0.58 µV/V
< 24.0 ppmFSV < 188 digits < 0.10 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 110.5 dB
> 98.4 dB
> 92.4 dB
ELM3504 (10 ksps)
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/4 Bridge 350 2/3 wire
32 mV
8 mV
4 mV
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 290 ppmFSV < 2266 digits < 9.28 µV/V
< 50 ppmFSV < 391 digits < 1.60 µV/V
< 1000 ppmFSV < 7813 digits < 8.00 µV/V
< 160 ppmFSV < 1250 digits < 1.28 µV/V
< 2000 ppmFSV < 15625 digits < 8.00 µV/V
< 320 ppmFSV < 2500 digits < 1.28 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 86.0 dB
> 75.9 dB
> 69.9 dB
Noiseden sity@1kH < 0.02 z
< 0.02
< 0.02
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 15 ppmFSV < 117 digits < 0.48 µV/V
< 3.0 ppmFSV < 23 digits < 0.10 µV/V
< 50 ppmFSV < 391 digits < 0.40 µV/V
< 9.0 ppmFSV < 70 digits < 0.07 µV/V
< 100 ppmFSV < 781 digits < 0.40 µV/V
< 18.0 ppmFSV < 141 digits < 0.07 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 110.5 dB
> 100.9 dB
> 94.9 dB
Product overview
2 mV < 4800 ppmFSV < 37500 digits < 9.60 µV/V < 800 ppmFSV < 6250 digits < 1.60 µV/V > 61.9 dB
< 0.02
< 288 ppmFSV < 2250 digits < 0.58 µV/V < 48.0 ppmFSV < 375 digits < 0.10 µV/V > 86.4 dB
2 mV < 4000 ppmFSV < 31250 digits < 8.00 µV/V < 640 ppmFSV < 5000 digits < 1.28 µV/V > 63.9 dB
< 0.02
< 200 ppmFSV < 1563 digits < 0.40 µV/V < 36.0 ppmFSV < 281 digits < 0.07 µV/V > 88.9 dB
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
115
Product overview
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/4 Bridge 1 k (2/3 wire)
32 mV/V FSV 8 mV/V FSV
4 mV/V FSV 5) (comp.)
Measuring range, nominal
±32 mV/V [corresponds to ±64,000 µ at K=2]
1000 ± 128
±8 mV/V [corresponds to ±16,000 µ at K=2]
1000 ± 32
±4 mV/V [corresponds to ±8,000 µ at K=2]
1000 ± 16
Measuring range, end value (FSV)
32 mV/V 128
8 mV/V 32
4 mV/V 16
Measuring range, technically usable
±34.359... mV/V ±8.589... mV/V ±4.294... mV/V
PDO resolution
24 Bit (incl. sign)
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
0.128 ppm 4.096 nV/V
0.128 ppm 1.024 nV/V
0.128 ppm 0.512 nV/V
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
0.119... ppm 3.814.. nV/V
0.119... ppm 0.9535 nV/V
0.119... ppm 0.47675 nV/V
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
without offset 2)
< ±0.02 %FSV < ±200 ppmFSV < ±6.4 µV/V
with
< ±0.1%FSV
averaging < ±1000 ppmFSV
< ±32 µV/V
< ±0.065%FSV < ±650 ppmFSV < ±5.2 µV/V
< ±0.4%FSV < ±4000 ppmFSV < ±32 µV/V
< ±0.13%FSV < ±1300 ppmFSV < ±5.2 µV/V
< ±0.8%FSV < ±8000 ppmFSV < ±32 µV/V
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
< 980 ppmFSV
< 3940 ppmFSV < 7880 ppmFSV
Gain/scale/ EGain amplification deviation (at 23°C)
< 105 ppm
< 305 ppm
< 610 ppm
Non-linearity ELin over the whole measuring range
< 165 ppmFSV
< 560 ppmFSV
< 1120 ppmFSV
Repeatability ERep (at 23°C)
< 25 ppmFSV
< 120 ppmFSV
< 240 ppmFSV
Common-mode rejection tbd
tbd
tbd
ratio (without filtering)3
Common-mode rejection tbd
tbd
tbd
ratio (with 50Hz filtering)3
Temperature TcGain coefficient, typ TcOffset
< 13 ppm/K
< 60 ppmFSV/K < 1.92 µV/V/K
< 25 ppm/K
< 230 ppmFSV/K < 1.84 µV/V/K
< 50 ppm/K
< 460 ppmFSV/K < 1.84 µV/V/K
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
tbd %FSV
Input
Differentia tbd
tbd
tbd
impedance l
±Input 1
Common tbd
tbd
tbd
Mode
2 mV/V FSV 5) (comp.) ±2 mV/V [corresponds to ±4,000 µ at K=2] 1000 ± 8
2 mV/V 8 ±2.147... mV/V
0.128 ppm 0.256 nV/V 0.119... ppm 0.238375 nV/V < ±0.26%FSV < ±2600 ppmFSV < ±5.2 µV/V < ±1.6%FSV < ±16000 ppmFSV < ±32 µV/V < 15760 ppmFSV
< 1220 ppm
< 2240 ppmFSV
< 480 ppmFSV
tbd
tbd
< 100 ppm/K < 920 ppmFSV/K < 1.84 µV/V/K tbd %FSV
tbd
tbd
116
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/4 Bridge 1 k (2/3 wire)
32 mV/V FSV 8 mV/V FSV
4 mV/V FSV 5) (comp.)
Input impedance ±Input 2
3 wire No usage of this input in this mode
Differentia tbd typ. l
tbd typ.
tbd typ.
Common tbd typ. Mode
tbd typ.
tbd typ.
2 mV/V FSV 5) (comp.)
tbd typ.
tbd typ.
ELM3502 (20 ksps)
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/4 Bridge 1 k (2/3 wire)
32 mV
8 mV
4 mV
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 400 ppmFSV < 3125 digits < 12.80 µV/V
< 65 ppmFSV < 508 digits < 2.08 µV/V
< 1350 ppmFSV < 10547 digits < 10.80 µV/V
< 240 ppmFSV < 1875 digits < 1.92 µV/V
< 2700 ppmFSV < 21094 digits < 10.80 µV/V
< 480 ppmFSV < 3750 digits < 1.92 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 83.7 dB
> 72.4 dB
> 66.4 dB
Noiseden sity@1kH < 0.03 z
< 0.03
< 0.03
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 60 ppmFSV < 469 digits < 1.92 µV/V
< 10.0 ppmFSV < 78 digits < 0.32 µV/V
< 240 ppmFSV < 1875 digits < 1.92 µV/V
< 40.0 ppmFSV < 313 digits < 0.32 µV/V
< 480 ppmFSV < 3750 digits < 1.92 µV/V
< 80.0 ppmFSV < 625 digits < 0.32 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 100.0 dB
> 88.0 dB
> 81.9 dB
2 mV < 5400 ppmFSV < 42188 digits < 10.80 µV/V < 960 ppmFSV < 7500 digits < 1.92 µV/V > 60.4 dB
< 0.03
< 960 ppmFSV < 7500 digits < 1.92 µV/V < 160.0 ppmFSV < 1250 digits < 0.32 µV/V > 75.9 dB
ELM3504 (10 ksps)
Measurement mode StrainGauge/SG 1/4 Bridge 1 k (2/3 wire)
32 mV
8 mV
4 mV
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 350 ppmFSV < 2734 digits < 11.20 µV/V
< 70 ppmFSV < 547 digits < 2.24 µV/V
< 820 ppmFSV < 6406 digits < 6.56 µV/V
< 140 ppmFSV < 1094 digits < 1.12 µV/V
< 1640 ppmFSV < 12813 digits < 6.56 µV/V
< 280 ppmFSV < 2188 digits < 1.12 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 83.1 dB
> 77.1 dB
> 71.1 dB
Noiseden
sity@1kH z
< 0.03
< 0.02
< 0.02
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 85 ppmFSV < 664 digits < 2.72 µV/V
< 14.0 ppmFSV < 109 digits < 0.45 µV/V
< 48 ppmFSV < 375 digits < 0.38 µV/V
< 8.0 ppmFSV < 63 digits < 0.06 µV/V
< 96 ppmFSV < 750 digits < 0.38 µV/V
< 16.0 ppmFSV < 125 digits < 0.06 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 97.1 dB
> 101.9 dB
> 95.9 dB
2 mV < 3280 ppmFSV < 25625 digits < 6.56 µV/V < 560 ppmFSV < 4375 digits < 1.12 µV/V > 65.0 dB
< 0.02
< 192 ppmFSV < 1500 digits < 0.38 µV/V < 32.0 ppmFSV < 250 digits < 0.06 µV/V > 89.9 dB
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
117
Product overview
2) In real bridge measurement, an offset adjustment is usually carried out after installation. The given offset specification of the terminal is therefore practically irrelevant. Therefore, specification values with and without offset are given here. In practice, the offset component can be eliminated by the terminal functions Tare and also ZeroOffset or in the controller by a higher-level tare function. The offset deviation of a bridge measurement over time can change, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset adjustment or careful observation of the change.
3) Values refer to common-mode interference between SGND and internal GND.
4) The offset specification does not apply to 2-wire operation, since the offset is increased on the device side. Offset adjustment is recommended, see Tare or Zero offset function.
5) The channel measures electrically to 8 mV/V, but displays its measured value scaled to 2 or 4 mV/V. The Compensated function facilitates measurement of low levels even with high offset.
NOTE Transition resistances of the terminal contacts
The transition resistance values of the terminal contacts affect the measurement. The measuring accuracy can be further increased by a user-side adjustment with the signal connection plugged in.
The temperature sensitivity of the terminal and thus of the measurement setup can be reduced if an external, more temperature-stable supplementary resistor is used for terminal operation in half-bridge or even fullbridge mode instead of the internal supplementary resistor for quarter-bridge mode.
To calculate the quarter-bridge:
R2/3/4 are the terminal-internal switchable supplementary resistors, R1 is the (nominally equal-sized) variable quarter-bridge.
118
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
The strain relationship (µStrain, µ) is as follows:
For the quarter-bridge, N=1 always applies. The relationship between UBridge/UExc and R1 is non-linear:
Product overview
The ELM350x devices apply internal linearization so that the output is already linearized since the internal calculation is based on UExc'.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
119
Product overview
3.9
ELM354x
3.9.1 ELM354x - Introduction
Fig. 53: ELM3542-0000, ELM3544-0000
2 and 4 channel measuring bridge analysis, full/half/quarter bridge, 24 bit, 1 ksps, TEDS
The ELM3542 and ELM3544 EtherCAT terminals from the ELM3x4x economy series are designed for the evaluation of measuring bridges in full bridge, half bridge and quarter bridge configuration. With a maximum data rate of 1 ksps per channel they are ideally suited for the recording of less dynamic procedures, such as slow oscillations and corresponding weighing procedures. In return, they measure with low noise and are temperature-stable over the permitted ambient temperature. The integrated bridge supply can supply 1 to 12 V and, like all other parameters, is adjustable online in the CoE at runtime. In addition, the ELM3542 features a connection for one TEDSIC in the sensor per channel this way the SG can be electronically read, detected and also written immediately upon plugging in. Apart from that, the ELM354x have all the features familiar from the fast ELM350x basic series, such as internally switchable extension resistors and comprehensive sensor and function diagnostics for industrial 24/7 operation. The 6pin connector (push-in) is removable for maintenance purposes without releasing the individual wires.
Optional calibration certificate: · with factory calibration certificate as ELM354x-0020: on request · external calibrated (ISO17025 or DAkks) as ELM354x-0030: on request
Re-calibration service via the Beckhoff service: on request
Quick-Links
· EtherCAT basics · Mounting and wiring · Process data overview
· Connection view
· Object description and parameterization [} 345]
120
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.9.2 ELM354x - Technical data
Technical data
ELM3542
ELM3544
Analog inputs
2 channel (differential)
4 channel (differential)
Time relation between channels to each other Successive conversion of all channels in the terminal (multiplex), synchronous conversion between terminals, if DistributedClocks will be used. Timestamp each channel, typ. sampling offset related to cannel 1:
Ch.1: 0 ms Ch.2: +200 µs z (t.b.d.)
Ch.1: 0 ms Ch.2: +200 µs Ch.3: +400 µs Ch.4: +600 µs
ADC conversion method
(deltaSigma) with internal sample rate 8 msps
Limit frequency input filter hardware (see information in section ELM Features/ Firmware filter concept)
Before AD converter: hardware low pass -3dB @ 380 kHz (16.544 kHz for quarter bridge in 4 wire connection) (tbd.) type butterworth 1th order
Within ADC after conversion: low pass -3dB @ 2.75 kHz type sinc5/average filter or sinc3 (tbd.)
The ramp-up time/ settling time/ delay caused by the filtering will be considered within the DistributedClocks-Timestamp.
Resolution
24 Bit (including sign)
Connection technology
2/ 3 / 4 / 5 / 6/ 7 wire
2/ 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 wire
Connection type
push-in cageclamp, service plug, 6-pin
Sampling rate (per channel, simultaneous) 1 ms/1 kSps
free down sampling by Firmware via decimation factor, possible effective sampling interval each channel: 1 ms + n*25 µs (tbd.)
Oversampling
1...20 selectable
Supported EtherCAT cycle time
DistributedClocks: min. 100 µs, max. 10 ms (tbd.)
(depending on the operation mode)
FrameTriggered/Synchron: min. 200 µs, max. 100 ms (tbd.)
FreeRun: not yet supported
Operation range DMS
Quarter bridge (1 k, 350 , 120 ) half bridge, full bridge, internal bridge extension and feeding-in supply adjustable (tbd.)
Connection diagnosis
Preliminary information (tbd.):
Channel-by-channel open-circuit detection of the connection cables (running operation or triggered diagnosis, up to 6 wires) Channel by channel short-circuit detection of all lines among each other (triggered diagnosis, up to 6 lines) Additional process data and diagnostic evaluation of the connected sensor via TEDS interface
Surge voltage protection of the inputs related tbd to Uv (internal ground)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
121
Product overview
Technical data Special features
Current consumption via E-bus Current consumption via power contacts Thermal power dissipation Dielectric strength - destruction limit
Recommended operation voltage range to compliance with specification Electrical isolation channel/channel *) Electrical isolation channel/Ebus *) Electrical isolation channel/SGND *) Weight Permissible ambient temperature range during operation Permissible ambient temperature range during storage
ELM3542
ELM3544
Bridge feeding-in supply free Bridge feeding-in supply free
adjustable 1.5 V to 12 V
adjustable 1.5 V to 12 V
(electronic overload protection (electronic overload protection
120 mA each channel) tbd. 65 mA each channel) tbd.
2 wire TEDS interface (IEEE 1451.4 class 2 MMI, multiplex-operation)
External shunt calibration possible
100 mA typ. (tbd)
60 mA typ. + Load, total max. 70 mA typ. + Load, total max.
150 mA typ.
240 mA typ.
typ. 3 W
max. permitted short-term/continuous voltage between contact points ±I1, ±I2, +Uv and Uv: non-supplied ±30 V, supplied ±30 V (tbd.)
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
tbd.
no yes, 500V/1min.typ. test yes, 500V/1min.typ. test approx. 350 g -25...+60 °C
-25...+55 °C
-40...+85 °C
*) see notes to potential groups in chapter "Mounting and wiring/ Power supply, potential groups" [} 554]
3.9.2.1 ELM354x overview measurement ranges
Measurement Voltage
PT1000 Potentiometer Full bridge
Connection tech- FSV nology
2 wire
±10 V
±80 mV
2/3/4 wire 3/5 wire
2000 ±1 V/V
4/6 wire
±32 mV/V
±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
±2 mV/V
Mode
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy
Maximum value/ value range ±10.737.. V ±10 V ±85.9.. mV ±80 mV 266 °C ±1 V/V
±34.359.. mV/V ±32 mV/V ±8.5899.. mV/V ±8 mV/V ±4.2949.. mV/V ±4 mV/V ±2.1474.. mV/V ±2 mV/V
122
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement Half bridge
Quarter bridge 120/350/1000
Connection tech- FSV nology
3/5 wire
±16 mV/V
±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
±2 mV/V
2/3/4 wire
±32 mV/V
±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
±2 mV/V
Mode
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy
Product overview
Maximum value/ value range ±17.179.. mV/V ±16 mV/V ±8.5899.. mV/V ±8 mV/V ±4.2949.. mV/V ±4 mV/V ±2.1474.. mV/V ±2 mV/V ±34.359.. mV/V ±32 mV/V ±8.5899.. mV/V ±8 mV/V ±4.2949.. mV/V ±4 mV/V ±2.1474.. mV/V ±2 mV/V
Fig. 54: Overview measurement ranges, Bipolar
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
123
Product overview
Fig. 55: Overview measurement ranges, Unipolar
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
3.10 ELM360x
3.10.1 ELM360x - Introduction
Fig. 56: ELM3602-0002, ELM3604-0002, ELM3602-0000, ELM3604-0000
124
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
2 and 4 channel IEPE analysis, 24 bit, 20/ 50 ksps, BNC
The ELM360x EtherCAT terminals are designed for the evaluation of IEPE sensors (Integrated Electronics Piezo-Electric) with and without TEDS, which are mainly used for vibration diagnostics and acoustics. The constant current feed can be set to 0/2/4 mA. The input characteristics are also flexibly adjustable from DC to 10 Hz as high pass filter. The ELM360x basically measures sensor voltages (single ended) up to 20 V AC/ DC, but the internal scaler function can be used if, for example, an output in acceleration [m/s²] is desired. The TEDS data of a sensor can be read out and written.
Possible applications: · Acquisition of AC voltage from IEPE sensors (oscillation measurement, acustics) · Measurement of mV voltages over current shunts (AC/DC) Note: due to single ended configuration possible on low side shunts only · Common measurement of voltages up to 20 V single ended (AC/DC)
Irrespective of the signal configuration, all ELM3x0x terminals have the same functional properties. The ELM360x terminals for IEPE evaluation offer a maximum sampling rate of 20,000 or 50,000 samples per second.
Two connector variants were offered: due to IEPE sensors are often connected via coaxial cables, the ELM360x-0002 terminals features BNC connectors; the ELM360x-0000 provides the controlcabinetfriendly PushIn. In strong EMC burdened environments, the PushIn connector can be preferred because here shield and signal ground can be performed separately.
Optional calibration certificate: · with factory calibration certificate as ELM360x-0020: on request · external calibrated (ISO17025 or DAkks) as ELM360x-0030: on request
Re-calibration service via the Beckhoff service: on request
Quick-Links
· EtherCAT basics · Mounting and wiring · Process data overview
· Connection view
· Object description and parameterization [} 384]
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
125
Product overview
3.10.2 ELM360x - Technical data
Technical data
ELM3602-000x
ELM3604-000x
Analog inputs
2 channel (single ended) 4 channel (single ended)
Time relation between channels to each other Simultaneous conversion of all channels in the terminal, synchronous conversion between terminals, if DistributedClocks will be used
ADC conversion method
(deltaSigma) with internal sample rate
8 MSps
5.12 MSps
Limit frequency input filter hardware (see information in section ELM Features/ Firmware filter concept)
Before AD converter: hardware low pass -3 dB @ 30 kHz type butterworth 3th order
Within ADC after conversion:
low pass -3 dB @ 13.6 kHz, low pass -3 dB @ 5.3 kHz,
ramp-up time 60 µs
ramp-up time 150 µs
type sinc3/average filter
The ramp-up time/ settling time/ delay caused by the filtering will be considered within the DistributedClocksTimestamp.
Resolution
24 Bit (including sign)
Connection technology
2 wire
Connection type
Variant ELM360x-0000: push-in cageclamp, service plug, 2-pin
Variant ELM360x-0002: BNC, shielded (shield is the analog ground, electrically isolated from housing)
Sampling rate (per channel)
20 µs/50 kSps
50 µs/20 kSps
free down sampling by Firmware via decimation factor
Oversampling
1...100 selectable
Type of sampling
Simultaneous (all channels simultaneously)
Supported EtherCAT cycle time
DistributedClocks: min. 100 µs, max. 10 ms
(depending on the operation mode)
FrameTriggered/Synchron: min. 200 µs, max. 100 ms
FreeRun: not supported
Internal resistance
>2 M
Operation range IEPE
Current feeding 2 + 4 mA, which can be switched off
TEDS supported
Acquiring of the modulated AC voltage
AC/DC Coupling (configurable parameters of high pass)
Connection diagnosis
Wire break/short cut
Surge voltage protection of the inputs related to Input1: at > +24 V and < -8 V respectively GND
Current consumption via E-bus
typ. 460 mA
typ. 650 mA
Thermal power dissipation
typ. 3 W
Dielectric strength - destruction limit
max. permitted short-term/continuous voltage
· Voltage between each contact point ±I1, ±I2, +Uv and Uv: non-supplied ±40 V, supplied ±36 V
· Voltage between every contact point and SGND (shield, mounting rail): ±36 V
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
126
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Technical data
ELM3602-000x
ELM3604-000x
Recommended operation voltage range to compliance with specification
max. permitted voltage during specified normal operation · ±I1 and ±I2: typ. ±10 V against Uv
· For ELM360x related to GND: -5...+21.5 V
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
Electrical isolation channel/channel *)
no
Electrical isolation channel/Ebus *)
yes, 500V/1min.typ. test
Electrical isolation channel/SGND *)
no
Weight
approx. 350 g
Permissible ambient temperature range during -25...+60 °C operation
Permissible ambient temperature range during -40...+85 °C storage
*) see notes to potential groups in chapter "Mounting and wiring/ Power supply, potential groups" [} 554]
3.10.2.1 ELM360x overview measurement ranges
For an explanation of the terms AC and DC, refer to the chapter "Analog notes dynamic signals" [} 616].
The input channels can be operated in principle in the operation mode AC coupling or DC coupling, see chapter "IEPE AC Coupling":
· AC coupling: the arbitrary input signal is fed via a high-pass filter, after which only the corresponding alternating component (AC) remains for the digital processing inside the terminal.
· DC coupling: the arbitrary input signal is digitally processed "as it is", irrespective of whether or not it has an alternating component (AC).
NOTE Reference to GND
The ELM360x can measure with respect to GND in the range of -5 V...+21.5 V.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
127
Product overview
Measurement Voltage
Connection tech- FSV nology
2 wire
±10 V )*
±5 V
±2.5 V
±1.25 V
±640 mV
±320 mV
±160 mV
±80 mV
±40 mV
±20 mV
Mode
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy
Maximum value/ value range ±10.737.. V ±10 V ±5.368.. V ±5 V ±2.684.. V ±2.5 V ±1.342.. V ±1.25 V ±687.2.. mV ±640 mV ±343.6.. mV ±320 mV ±171.8.. mV ±160 mV ±85.9.. mV ±80 mV ±42.95.. mV ±40 mV ±21.474.. mV ±20 mV
*) The input voltage must not fall below -5 V with respect to GND, the measuring accuracy is then no longer given. This means a measurement down to -10 V with respect to GND is only possible if at the same time an offset of at least +5 V is applied, as is usual with IEPE supply.
Measurement Voltage
Connection tech- FSV nology
2 wire
+10 V
+20 V
Mode
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy
Maximum value/ value range 0...10.737.. V 0...10 V 0...21.474.. V 0...20 V
128
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 57: Overview measurement ranges, Bipolar
Fig. 58: Overview measurement ranges, Unipolar
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
3.10.2.2 IEPE high pass properties
For optional regulation of the IEPE bias voltage, the ELM360x has an adjustable 1 st order high-pass filter. For an explanation of the terms AC and DC, refer to the chapter "Analog notes dynamic signals" [} 616].
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
129
Product overview
The input channels can be operated in principle in the operation mode AC coupling or DC coupling, see chapter "IEPE AC Coupling":
· AC coupling: the arbitrary input signal is fed via a high-pass filter, after which only the corresponding alternating component (AC) remains for the digital processing inside the terminal.
· DC coupling: the arbitrary input signal is digitally processed "as it is", irrespective of whether or not it has an alternating component (AC).
DC restriction
Only AC coupling is possible in the three measuring ranges "IEPE ±10 V" (97), "IEPE ±5 V" (98) and "IEPE ±2.5 V" (99). If voltages with a DCcomponent (offset) are to be measured, the voltage measuring ranges "U ±10 V" (2), "U ±5 V" (3) and "U ±2.5 V" (4) must be used instead. The respective measuring range index number is given in the brackets.
The typical frequency behavior in the measuring range 2.5 V is as follows:
130
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
131
Product overview
Note: if other dynamic filter properties are desired, you can proceed as follows: · Operate the ELM370x terminal in the measuring range "0..20 V" · Deactivate IEPE AC coupling in the respective channel
· The channel now measures with 23 bits + sign over 20 V, i.e. including the bias voltage, which is normally 10..16 V. With the implementation of a high-pass on the user side by means of TwinCAT programming (inside the PLC), the bias component (DC component) is now consequently to be suppressed on the controller side. The now reduced signal resolution of the measuring range ±2.5 V with 24 bits to 20 V with 23 bits must be considered. In return for that, the user obtains full digital control over the measuring behavior in the lower frequency range.
3.10.2.3 Measurement ±10 V, 0...10 V
Measurement mode
±10 V
Internal resistance
>4 M differential
Impedance
Value to follow
Measuring range, nominal
-10...+10 V *)
Measuring range, end value (full scale 10 V value)
Measuring range, technically usable -10.737...+10.737 V
132
Version: 2.6
0...10 V 0...10 V 0...10.737 V
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±10 V
0...10 V
24 Bit (including 16 Bit (including 24 Bit (including 16 Bit (including
sign)
sign)
sign)
sign)
1.28 µV
327.68 µV
1.28 µV
327.68 µV
1.192.. µV
305.18.. µV 1.192.. µV
305.18.. µV
*) For IEPE measurement applies: The input voltage must not fall below -5 V with respect to GND, the measuring accuracy is then no longer given. This means a measurement down to -10 V with respect to GND is only possible if at the same time an offset of at least +5 V is applied, as is usual with IEPE supply.
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±10 V, 0...10 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 60 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 100 ppmFSV < 18 ppmFSV > 94.9 dB
< 781 [digits] < 141 [digits]
< 2.55
< 10 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 78 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
133
Product overview
Fig. 59: Representation ±10 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
134
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 60: Frequency response ELM3604, ±10 V measuring range, fsampling = 20 ksps, integrated filter 1 and 2 deactivated
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
135
Product overview
Fig. 61: Representation 0...10 V measurement range
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
136
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.10.2.4 Measurement ±5 V
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±5 V >4 M differential Value to follow -5...+5 V 5 V -5.368...+5.368 V 24 bit (including sign) 640 nV 596.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 163.84 µV 152.59.. µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±5 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 100 ppmFSV < 18 ppmFSV > 94.9 dB
< 781 [digits] < 141 [digits]
< 1.27
< 10 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 78 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
137
Product overview
Fig. 62: Representation ±5 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
138
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 63: Frequency response ELM3604, ±5 V measuring range, fsampling = 20 ksps, integrated filter 1 and 2 deactivated
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
139
Product overview
3.10.2.5 Measurement ±2.5 V
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±2.5 V >4 M differential Value to follow -2.5...+2.5 V 2.5 V -2.684...+2.684 V 24 bit (including sign) 320 nV 298.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 81.92 µV 76.29.. µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±2.5 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 90 ppmFSV < 17 ppmFSV > 95.4 dB
< 703 [digits] < 133 [digits]
< 0.60
< 9 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 70 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
140
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 64: Representation ±2.5 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
141
Product overview
Fig. 65: Frequency response ELM3604, ±2.5 V measuring range, fsampling = 20 ksps, integrated filter 1 and 2 deactivated
142
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 66: Frequency response ELM3602, ±2.5 V measuring range, fsampling = 50 ksps, integrated filter 1 and 2 deactivated
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
143
Product overview
3.10.2.6 Measurement ±1.25 V
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±1.25 V >4 M differential Value to follow -1.25...+1.25 V 1.25 V -1.342...+1.342 V 24 bit (including sign) 160 nV 149.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 40.96 µV 38.14.. µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
±1.25 V
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
< ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
< 70 ppmFSV
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
< 55 ppm
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
< 25 ppmFSV
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 20 ppmFSV < 90 ppmFSV < 17 ppmFSV > 95.4 dB
< 703 [digits] < 133 [digits]
Noisedensity@1kHz
< 0.30
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 9 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 70 [digits] < 16 [digits]
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering) DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ. interference test
144
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 67: Representation ±1.25 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
145
Product overview
Fig. 68: Frequency response ELM3604, ±1.25 V measuring range, fsampling = 20 ksps, integrated filter 1 and 2 deactivated
146
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.10.2.7 Measurement ±640 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±640 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -640...+640 mV 640 mV -687.2...+687.2 mV 24 bit (including sign) 81.92 nV 76.29.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 20.97152 µV 19.53.. µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±640 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 90 ppmFSV < 17 ppmFSV > 95.4 dB
< 703 [digits] < 133 [digits]
< 0.15
< 9 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 70 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
147
Product overview
Fig. 69: Representation ±640 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Frequency response: see specification of ±10 V measurement range [} 135]
148
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.10.2.8 Measurement ±320 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±320 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -320...+320 mV 320 mV -343.6...+343.6 mV 24 bit (including sign) 40.96 nV 38.14.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 10.48576 µV 9.765.. µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
±320 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 90 ppmFSV < 17 ppmFSV > 95.4 dB
< 703 [digits] < 133 [digits]
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
76.93
< 9 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 70 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
149
Product overview
Fig. 70: Representation ±320 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Frequency response: see specification of ±10 V measurement range [} 135]
150
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.10.2.9 Measurement ±160 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±160 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -160...+160 mV 160 mV -171.8...+171.8 mV 24 bit (including sign) 20.48 nV 19.07.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 5.24288 µV 4.882.. µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
±160 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 120 ppmFSV < 22 ppmFSV > 93.2 dB
< 938 [digits] < 172 [digits]
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
< 49.78
< 13 ppmFSV < 2.5 ppmFSV > 112.0 dB
< 102 [digits] < 20 [digits]
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
151
Product overview
Fig. 71: Representation ±160 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Frequency response: see specification of ±10 V measurement range [} 135]
152
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.10.2.10 Measurement ±80 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±80 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -80...+80 mV 80 mV -85.9...+85.9 mV 24 bit (including sign) 10.24 nV 9.536.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 2.62144 µV 2.441.. µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
±80 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 160 ppmFSV < 37 ppmFSV > 88.6 dB
< 1250 [digits] < 289 [digits]
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
< 41.86
< 18 ppmFSV < 3.5 ppmFSV > 109.1 dB
< 141 [digits] < 27 [digits]
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
153
Product overview
Fig. 72: Representation ±80 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Frequency response: see specification of ±10 V measurement range [} 135]
154
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.10.2.11 Measurement ±40 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±40 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -40...+40 mV 40 mV -42.95...+42.95 mV 24 bit (including sign) 5.12 nV 4.768.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 1.31072 µV 1.220.. µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
±40 mV < ±0.02% = 200 ppmFSV typ.
< 175 ppmFSV
< 65 ppm
< 45 ppmFSV
< 30 ppmFSV < 375 ppmFSV < 75 ppmFSV > 82.5 dB
< 2930 [digits] < 586 [digits]
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
< 42.43
< 40 ppmFSV < 5.5 ppmFSV > 105.2 dB
< 313 [digits] < 43 [digits]
8 ppm/K typ.
6 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
Value to follow
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
155
Product overview
Fig. 73: Representation ±40 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Frequency response: see specification of ±10 V measurement range [} 135]
156
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.10.2.12 Measurement ±20 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±20 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -20...+20 mV 20 mV -21.474...+21.474 mV 24 bit (including sign) 2.56 nV 2.384.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 655.36 nV 610.37.. nV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
±20 mV < ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
< 260 ppmFSV
< 100 ppm
< 90 ppmFSV
< 35 ppmFSV < 750 ppmFSV < 150 ppmFSV > 76.5 dB
< 5859 [digits] < 1172 [digits]
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
< 42.43
< 75 ppmFSV < 11.5 ppmFSV > 98.8 dB
< 586 [digits] < 90 [digits]
< 12 ppm/K typ.
< 12 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
Value to follow
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
157
Product overview
Fig. 74: Representation ±20 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Frequency response: see specification of ±10 V measurement range [} 135]
158
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.10.2.13 Measurement 0...20 V
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range)
0...20 V >4 M differential Value to follow 0...20 V 20 V 0...+21.474 V 23 bit (unsigned) 2.56 µV
15 bit (unsigned) 655.36 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
0...20 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 60 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 100 ppmFSV < 18 ppmFSV > 94.9 dB
< 781 [digits] < 141 [digits]
< 2.55
< 10 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 78 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
159
Product overview
Fig. 75: Representation 0...20 V measurement range
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
Frequency response: see specification of ±10 V measurement range [} 135]
160
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
3.11 ELM370x
3.11.1 ELM370x - Introduction
Product overview
Fig. 76: ELM3702-0000, ELM3704-0000, ELM3704-0001
2 and 4 channel multi-functional input, 24 bit, 10 ksps
The EtherCAT terminals from the ELM series were developed in order to enable the high-quality measurement of common electrical signals in the industrial environment. Flexibly usable measurement devices are especially useful in laboratory and testing technology environments. Therefore the ELM370x multifunction terminals feature an input circuit that can be set to over 70 different types of electrical connection via EtherCAT: from voltages of ±60 V to ±20 mV, thus supporting thermocouples and IEPE, a current of ±20 mA, a resistance measurement of 5 k and thus also temperature RTDs (PT100, etc.), measuring bridges and potentiometers, and all of this with a 2- to 6-wire connection, depending on the type. Thus, most electrical measuring tasks can be solved with just a single terminal. There is a choice of different connection types:
· The ELM3704-0001 with its high-quality LEMO connectors is mainly designed for laboratory use, where sensor configurations are changed on a daily basis, but a stable and reliable plug connection is nevertheless required.
· The 6-pin version with push-in (ELM3704-0000/ELM3702-0000) on the other hand is ideal for industrial use where a plug is unplugged less frequently for maintenance purposes and fast wiring is much more important.
The other ELM3x0x terminals are price-optimized versions of the ELM370x basic class and thus ideal for use in machines with planned and foreseeable usage scenarios in which the measurement method of an analog input channel does not need to be changed at runtime. In return, they may have advanced features, like the ELM360x terminals (IEPE evaluation), which offer a switchable feed.
Optional calibration certificate:
· with factory calibration certificate as ELM370x-0020: on request
· external calibrated (ISO17025 or DAkks) as ELM370x-0030: on request
· Re-calibration service via the Beckhoff service: on request
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
161
Product overview
Quick-Links · EtherCAT basics · Mounting and wiring · Process data overview · Connection view · Object description and parameterization [} 396]
162
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.11.2 ELM370x - Technical data
Technical data Analog inputs Time relation between channels to each other
ADC conversion method Limit frequency input filter hardware (see information in section ELM Features/ Firmware filter concept)
Resolution Connection technology Connection type
Sampling rate (per channel, simultaneous) Oversampling Supported EtherCAT cycle time (depending on the operation mode) Internal resistance Operation range voltage measurement
Operation range current measurement Operation range DMS
ELM3702
ELM3704
2 channel (differential)
4 channel (differential)
Simultaneous conversion of all channels in the terminal, synchronous conversion between terminals, if DistributedClocks will be used
(deltaSigma) with internal sample rate
5.12 MSps
5.12 MSps
Before AD converter: hardware low pass -3 dB @ 30 kHz type butterworth 3th order
Within ADC after conversion:
low pass -3 dB @ 5.3 kHz, low pass -3 dB @ 5.3 kHz,
ramp-up time 150 µs
ramp-up time 150 µs
type sinc3/average filter
The ramp-up time/ settling time/ delay caused by the filtering will be considered within the DistributedClocksTimestamp.
24 Bit (including sign)
2/ 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 wire
push-in cageclamp, service ELM3704-0000:
plug, 6-pin
push-in cageclamp, service
plug, 6-pin
ELM3704-0001:
8 pol. LEMO 1B
100 µs/10 kSps
free down sampling by Firmware via decimation factor
1...100 selectable
DistributedClocks: min. 100 µs, max. 10 ms
FrameTriggered/Synchron: min. 200 µs, max. 100 ms
FreeRun: not yet supported
> 500 k (60 V); > 4 M (other); 150 (current)
±60/10/5/2.5/1.25 V, ±640/320/160/80/40/20 mV, 0... 5/10 V, (2 wire connection)
±20 mA, 0/4...20 mA, NAMUR NE43, (2 wire connection)
Full bridge (±2/4/8/32 mV/V), feeding-in supply adjustable up to 5V (4/ 6 wire connection)
Half bridge (±2/16 mV/V), internal switched bridge extension, feeding-in supply adjustable up to 5V (3/ 5 wire connection)
Quarter bridge 120 and 350 (±2/4/8/32 mV/V), internal switched bridge extension, feeding-in supply adjustable up to 2.5V (2/ 3 wire connection)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
163
Product overview
Technical data
ELM3702
ELM3704
Operation range IEPE
Measurement ranges ±2.5/5/10 V adjustable, current feeding 2 mA,
acquiring of the modulated AC voltage
AC/DC Coupling (configurable parameters of high pass, 2 wire connection)
Note: TEDS Class 1 not supported
Operation range potentiometer
Potentiometer 1 k, supply integrated and adjustable 0... 5 V, (3/ 5 wire connection)
Operation range resistance
0...50 , 0...200 , 0...500 , 0...2 k, 0...5 k
(2/3/4 wire connection)
Operation range temperature (RTD)
PT100, PT200, PT500, PT1000, Ni100, Ni120, Ni1000, div. KT/KTY (2/ 3/ 4 wire connection)
Operation range temperature (thermocouple)
Type K, J, L, E, T, N, U, B, R, S, C; cold junction measurement internal/ external (2 wire connection)
Connection diagnosis
Wire break/short cut
Surge voltage protection of the inputs related to tbd GND
Current consumption via E-bus
typ. 530 mA
typ. 890 mA
Thermal power dissipation
typ. 3 W
Dielectric strength - destruction limit
max. permitted short-term/continuous voltage between contact points ±I1, ±I2, +Uv and Uv: non-supplied ±40 V, supplied ±36 V
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
Recommended operation voltage range to compliance with specification
max. permitted voltage during specified normal operation between ±I1 and ±I2: typ. ±35 V against Uv in measurement range 60 V
typ. ±10 V against Uv in all other measurement ranges than 60 V
Note: -Uv corresponds to internal AGND
Electrical isolation channel/channel *)
no
Electrical isolation channel/Ebus *)
yes, 500V/1min.typ. test
Electrical isolation channel/SGND *)
yes, 500V/1min.typ. test
Weight
approx. 350 g
Permissible ambient temperature range during -25...+60 °C operation
Permissible ambient temperature range during -40...+85 °C storage
*) see notes to potential groups in chapter "Mounting and wiring/ Power supply, potential groups" [} 554]
NOTE Extended Range mode not available
The Extended Range mode is not available for RTD measurement. · Until FW07: Object 0x8000:2E (Scaler) will be ignored by this setting. The "Legacy Range Mode" applies
in the background. · Since FW08: Object 0x8000:2E (Scaler) will then be set to the "Legacy Range Mode". A change is not
possible as long RTD measurement range is selected.
164
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
3.11.2.1 ELM370x overview measurement ranges
Measurement Voltage
Voltage Current Resistance
Connection tech- FSV nology
2 wire
±60 V
±10 V
±5 V
±2.5 V
±1.25 V
±640 mV
±320 mV
±160 mV
±80 mV
±40 mV
±20 mV
2 wire
+10 V
+5 V
2 wire 2 wire
±20 mA (-20...20 mA)
+20 mA (0...20 mA)
+20 mA (4...20 mA)
+20 mA (4...20 mA NAMUR) 5 k
2 k
500
200
50
Mode
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy
Product overview
Maximum value/ value range ±64.414.. V ±60 V ±10.737.. V ±10 V ±5.368.. V ±5 V ±2.684.. V ±2.5 V ±1.342.. V ±1.25 V ±687.2.. mV ±640 mV ±343.6.. mV ±320 mV ±171.8.. mV ±160 mV ±85.9.. mV ±80 mV ±42.95.. mV ±40 mV ±21.474.. mV ±20 mV 0...10.737.. V 0...10 V 0...5.368.. V 0...5 V ±21.474.. mA ±20 mA 0...21.474.. mA 0...20 mA 0...21.179 mA 4...20 mA 3.6...21 mA 4...20 mA
0 ...5.368 k 0...5 k 0 ...2.147 k 0...2 k 0 ...536.8 0...500 0 ...214.7 0...200 0 ...53.68 0...50
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
165
Product overview
Measurement Potentiometer
Connection tech- FSV nology
3/5 wire
±1 V/V
Full bridge
4/6 wire
±32 mV/V
±4 mV/V
±2 mV/V
Half bridge
3/5 wire
±16 mV/V
±2 mV/V
Quarter bridge 120/350/1000
2/3 wire
±32 mV/V ±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
±2 mV/V
Voltage (IEPE)
2 wire
±10 V
±5 V
±2.5 V
+20 V
+10 V
Temperature thermo couple (TC)
Temperature RTD
2 wire 2/3/4 wire
±80 mV
5 k 2 k 500 200 50
Mode
Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Extended Legacy Legacy
Legacy
Maximum value/ value range ±1 V/V
±34.359.. mV/V ±32 mV/V ±4.2949.. mV/V ±4 mV/V ±2.1474.. mV/V ±2 mV/V ±17.179.. mV/V ±16 mV/V ±2.1474.. mV/V ±2 mV/V ±34.359.. mV/V ±32 mV/V ±8.5899.. mV/V ±8 mV/V ±4.2949.. mV/V ±4 mV/V ±2.1474.. mV/V ±2 mV/V ±10.737.. V ±10 V ±5.368.. V ±5 V ±2.684.. V ±2.5 V 0...21.474.. V 0...20 V 0...10.737.. V 0...10 V Depending on type up to 2320°C Depending on type up to 300°C
166
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 77: Overview measurement ranges, Bipolar
Fig. 78: Overview measurement ranges, Unipolar
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
167
Product overview
3.11.2.2 Measurement 5V/ 10V/ ±20 mV..±60 V
3.11.2.2.1 Measurement ±60 V
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±60 V >500 k differential Value to follow -60...+60 V 60 V -64.414...+64.414 V 24 bit (including sign) 7.68 µV 7.152.. µV
16 bit (including sign) 1.966 mV 1.831.. mV
ELM3702 (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 75 ppmFSV < 13 ppmFSV > 98.1 dB
< 10.61 < 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 586 [digits] < 98 [digits]
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 4.50 mV < 0.75 mV
< 0.72 mV < 0.12 mV
ELM3704 (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 75 ppmFSV < 13 ppmFSV > 98.1 dB
< 10.61 < 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 586 [digits] < 98 [digits]
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 4.50 mV < 0.75 mV
< 0.72 mV < 0.12 mV
Specifications (continued):
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability Temperature coefficient
ERep TcGain TcOffset
±60 V < ±(tbd)% = (tbd)ppmFSV typ.
< (tbd)ppmFSV
< (tbd)ppm
< (tbd)ppmFSV
< (tbd)ppmFSV < (tbd) ppm/K typ. < (tbd) ppmFSV/K typ.
168
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±60 V
DC: >(tbd) dB 50 Hz: >(tbd) dB 1 kHz: >(tbd) dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >(tbd) dB 50 Hz: >(tbd) dB 1 kHz: >(tbd) dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±(tbd)% = (tbd) ppmFSV typ.
Fig. 79: Representation ±60 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
169
Product overview
3.11.2.2.2 Measurement ±10 V, 0...10 V
Measurement mode
±10 V
0...10 V
Internal resistance
>4 M differential
Impedance
Value to follow
Measuring range, nominal
-10...+10 V
0...10 V
Measuring range, end value (full scale 10 V value)
Measuring range, technically usable -10.737...+10.737 V
0...10.737 V
PDO resolution
24 Bit (including 16 Bit (including 24 Bit (including 16 Bit (including
sign)
sign)
sign)
sign)
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
1.28 µV
327.68 µV
1.28 µV
327.68 µV
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
1.192.. µV
305.18.. µV 1.192.. µV
305.18.. µV
ELM370x (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 1.70 < 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 547 [digits] < 94 [digits]
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 0.70 mV < 0.12 mV
< 120.00 µV < 20.00 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±10 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 60 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
170
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 80: Representation ±10 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Fig. 81: Representation 0...10 V measurement range
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot.
If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
171
Product overview
3.11.2.2.3 Measurement ±5 V, 0...5 V
Measurement mode
±5 V
0...5 V
Internal resistance
>4 M differential
Impedance
Value to follow
Measuring range, nominal
-5...+5 V
0...5 V
Measuring range, end value (full scale 5 V value)
Measuring range, technically usable -5.368...+5.368 V
0... 5.368 V
PDO resolution
24 Bit (including 16 Bit (including 24 Bit (including 16 Bit (including
sign)
sign)
sign)
sign)
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
640 nV
163.84 µV
640 nV
163.84 µV
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
596.. nV
152.59.. µV 596.. nV
152.59.. µV
ELM370x (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.85 < 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 547 [digits] < 94 [digits]
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 0.35 mV < 60.00 µV
< 60.00 µV < 10.00 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±5 V, 0...5 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
172
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 82: Representation ±5 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Fig. 83: Representation 0...5 V measurement range
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot.
If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
173
Product overview
3.11.2.2.4 Measurement ±2.5 V
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±2.5 V >4 M differential Value to follow -2.5...+2.5 V 2.5 V -2.684...+2.684 V 24 bit (including sign) 320 nV 298.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 81.92 µV 76.29.. µV
ELM370x (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.42 < 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 547 [digits] < 94 [digits]
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 0.18 mV < 30.00 µV
< 30.00 µV < 5.00 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±2.5 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
174
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 84: Representation ±2.5 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
175
Product overview
3.11.2.2.5 Measurement ±1.25 V
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±1.25 V >4 M differential Value to follow -1.25...+1.25 V 1.25 V -1.342...+1.342 V 24 bit (including sign) 160 nV 149.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 40.96 µV 38.14.. µV
ELM370x (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.21 < 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 547 [digits] < 94 [digits]
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 87.50 µV < 15.00 µV
< 15.00 µV < 2.50 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±1.25 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
176
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 85: Representation ±1.25 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
177
Product overview
3.11.2.2.6 Measurement ±640 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±640 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -640...+640 mV 640 mV -687.2...+687.2 mV 24 bit (including sign) 81.92 nV 76.29.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 20.97152 µV 19.53.. µV
ELM370x (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.11 < 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 547 [digits] < 94 [digits]
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 44.80 µV < 7.68 µV
< 7.68 µV < 1.28 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±640 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
178
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 86: Representation ±640 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
179
Product overview
3.11.2.2.7 Measurement ±320 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±320 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -320...+320 mV 320 mV -343.6...+343.6 mV 24 bit (including sign) 40.96 nV 38.14.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 10.48576 µV 9.765.. µV
ELM370x (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 70 ppmFSV < 12 ppmFSV > 98.4 dB
< 0.05 < 12 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 547 [digits] < 94 [digits]
< 94 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 22.40 µV < 3.84 µV
< 3.84 µV < 0.64 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±320 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
180
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 87: Representation ±320 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
181
Product overview
3.11.2.2.8 Measurement ±160 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±160 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -160...+160 mV 160 mV -171.8...+171.8 mV 24 bit (including sign) 20.48 nV 19.07.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 5.24288 µV 4.882.. µV
ELM370x (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 90 ppmFSV < 15 ppmFSV > 96.5 dB
< 0.03 < 18 ppmFSV < 3.0 ppmFSV > 110.5 dB
< 703 [digits] < 117 [digits]
< 141 [digits] < 23 [digits]
< 14.40 µV < 2.40 µV
< 2.88 µV < 0.48 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±160 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
182
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 88: Representation ±160 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
183
Product overview
3.11.2.2.9 Measurement ±80 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±80 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -80...+80 mV 80 mV -85.9...+85.9 mV 24 bit (including sign) 10.24 nV 9.536.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 2.62144 µV 2.441.. µV
ELM370x (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 150 ppmFSV < 25 ppmFSV > 92.0 dB
< 1172 [digits] < 195 [digits]
< 0.03 < 24 ppmFSV < 4.0 ppmFSV > 108.0 dB
< 188 [digits] < 31 [digits]
< 12.00 µV < 2.00 µV
< 1.92 µV < 0.32 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±80 mV < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 55 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
184
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 89: Representation ±80 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
185
Product overview
3.11.2.2.10 Measurement ±40 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±40 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -40...+40 mV 40 mV -42.95...+42.95 mV 24 bit (including sign) 5.12 nV 4.768.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 1.31072 µV 1.220.. µV
ELM370x (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 270 ppmFSV < 45 ppmFSV > 86.9 dB
< 2109 [digits] < 352 [digits]
< 0.03 < 48 ppmFSV < 8.0 ppmFSV > 101.9 dB
< 375 [digits] < 63 [digits]
< 10.80 µV < 1.80 µV
< 1.92 µV < 0.32 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±40 mV < ±0.02% = 200 ppmFSV typ.
< 175 ppmFSV
< 65 ppm
< 45 ppmFSV
< 30 ppmFSV 8 ppm/K typ.
6 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
Value to follow
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
186
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 90: Representation ±40 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
187
Product overview
3.11.2.2.11 Measurement ±20 mV
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±20 mV >4 M differential Value to follow -20...+20 mV 20 mV -21.474...+21.474 mV 24 bit (including sign) 2.56 nV 2.384.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 655.36 nV 610.37.. nV
ELM370x (10 ksps) Noise (without filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 540 ppmFSV < 90 ppmFSV > 80.9 dB
< 4219 [digits] < 703 [digits]
< 0.03 < 80 ppmFSV < 13.0 ppmFSV > 97.7 dB
< 625 [digits] < 102 [digits]
< 10.80 µV < 1.80 µV
< 1.60 µV < 0.26 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±20 mV < ±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
< 260 ppmFSV
< 100 ppm
< 90 ppmFSV
< 35 ppmFSV < 12 ppm/K typ.
< 12 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
Value to follow
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
188
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 91: Representation ±20 mV measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
189
Product overview
3.11.2.3 Measurement ±20 mA/ 0..20 mA/ 4..20 mA/NAMUR
3.11.2.3.1 Measurement ±20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, NE43
Measurement mode
Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable Fuse protection PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range) Common-mode voltage Vcm
±20 mA
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
150 typ. Value to follow 20...+20 mA
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
20 mA
21.474...+21.474 mA, 0 ...21.474 mA 0...21.179 mA overcurrent-protected
Internal overload limiting, continuous current resistant
24 Bit
16 Bit
24 Bit 16 Bit 24 Bit 16 Bit
2.56 nA
655.36 nA 2.56 nA
655.36 2.048 524.288
nA
nA
nA
2.384.. nA 610.37.. 2.384.. 610.37.. 1.907.. 488.29..
nA
nA
nA
nA
nA
max. ±10V
related to -Uv (internal ground)
3,6...21 mA (NAMUR NE43)
4...20 mA
3.6...21 mA
24 Bit 2.048 nA n.a.
16 Bit
524.288 nA
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
±20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, NE43
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset EGain
< ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ. < 65 ppmFSV < 50 ppm
Non-linearity over the whole measuring ELin range
< 40 ppmFSV
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 40 ppmFSV < 100 ppmFSV < 18 ppmFSV > 94.9 dB
< 781 [digits] < 141 [digits]
Noisedensity@1kHz
< 5.09
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 10 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
Temperature coefficient
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
TcGain TcOffset DC: < 3 nA/V typ.
< 15 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ. 50 Hz: < 5 nA/V typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz DC:
FIR filtering)
< 3 nA/V typ.
50 Hz: < 3 nA/V typ.
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
Value to follow [ppm] typ. (FSV)
< 78 [digits] < 16 [digits]
1 kHz: < 80 nA/V typ. 1 kHz: < 3 nA/V typ.
190
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Current measurement range ±20 mA
Product overview
Fig. 92: Representation current measurement range ±20 mA
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Current measurement range 0...20 mA
Fig. 93: Representation current measurement range 0...20 mA
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
191
Product overview Current measurement range 4...20 mA
Fig. 94: Representation current measurement range 4...20 mA
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
Current measuring range 3.6...21 mA (NAMUR)
Fig. 95: Chart: current measuring range 3.6...21 mA (NAMUR)
Only Extended Range mode for measuring range 4 mA NAMUR
Legacy Range mode is not available for this measurement range. The Extended Range Mode will be set automatically and although a corresponding write access to the CoE Object 0x8000:2E (Scaler) is not declined, the parameter is not changed.
192
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.11.2.4 Measurement resistance
Note on measuring resistances or resistance ratios
With 2wire measurement, the line resistance of the sensor supply lines influences the measured value. If a reduction of this systematic error component is desirable for 2wire measurements, the resistance of the supply line to the measuring resistance should be taken into account, in which case the resistance of the supply line has to be determined first. Taking into account the uncertainty associated with this supply line resistance, it can then be included statically in the calculation, in the EL3751 via 0x8000:13 [} 312] and in the ELM350x/ ELM370x via 0x80n0:13 [} 312]. Any change in resistance of the supply line due to ageing, for example, is not taken into account automatically.
A 3wire measurement enables the systematic component to be eliminated, assuming that the two supply lines are identical. With this type of measurement, the lead resistance of a supply line is measured continuously. The value determined in this way is then deducted twice from the measurement result, thereby eliminating the line resistance. Technically, this leads to a significantly more reliable measurement. However, taking into account the measurement uncertainty, the gain from the 3wire connection is less significant, since this assumption is subject to high uncertainty, in view of the fact that the individual line that was not measured may be damaged, or a varying resistance may have gone unnoticed.
Therefore, although technically the 3wire connection is a tried and tested approach, for measurements that are methodological assessed based on measurement uncertainty, we strongly recommend fullycompensated 4wire connection.
With both 2wire and 3wire connection, the contact resistances of the terminal contacts influence the measuring process. The measuring accuracy can be further increased by a userside adjustment with the signal connection plugged in.
NOTE
Measurement of small resistances
Especially for measurements in the range < 10 , the 4wire connection is absolutely necessary due to the relatively high supply and contact resistances. It should also be considered that with such low resistances the relative measurement error in relation to the full scale value (FSV) can become high for such measurements resistance measurement terminals with small measuring ranges such as EL3692 in 4wire measurement should be used if necessary.
Corresponding considerations also lead to the common connection methods in bridge operation:
· Full bridge: 4wire connection without line compensation, 6wire connection with full line compensation
· Half bridge: 3wire connection without line compensation, 5wire connection with full line compensation
· Quarter bridge: 2wire connection without line compensation, 3wire connection with theoretical line compensation and 4wire connection with full line compensation
Measurement electrical resistance 5 k
Measurement mode Operation mode
Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Measurement mode Basic accuracy: typ. Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
2/3 wire < ±80 ppmFSV < ±400 m
Electrical resistance 0..5 k 2.5 V feed voltage, fixed setting n +Uv 5 k reference resistance at I2 Supply current is given by: 2.5 V / (5 k + R ) measurement 0...5 k 5 k 0 ...5.368 k 23 Bit (unsigned) 640 µ 596.. µ
4 wire < ±60 ppmFSV < ±300 m
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
193
Product overview
Measurement mode
Offset/Zero Point de- EOffset viation (at 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplifica- EGain tion deviation (at
23°C)
Non-linearity over the ELin whole measuring
range
Repeatability
ERep
2/3 wire < 25 ppmFSV < 60 ppmFSV
< 45 ppmFSV
< 10 ppmFSV
4 wire < 5 ppmFSV < 54 ppmFSV
< 25 ppmFSV
< 5 ppmFSV
Temperature coefficient, typ.
Noise (without filtering)
TcOffset
TcGain ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz
< 2 ppmFSV/K < 10 m/K < 12 ppm/K < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< 0.5 ppmFSV/K < 2.5 m/K < 5 ppm /K < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< (tbd)
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filter- DC:
50 Hz:
ing)3
< (tbd) /V < (tbd) k/V
typ.
typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)3
DC: < (tbd) /V typ.
50 Hz: < (tbd) /V typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) /V typ.
Largest short-term deviation during a speci- ±(tbd)%FSV = ±(tbd) ppmFSV typ. fied electrical interference test
< (tbd)
< (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
DC: < (tbd) /V typ.
50 Hz: < (tbd) k/ V typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
DC: < (tbd) /V typ.
50 Hz: < (tbd) k/ V typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
±(tbd)%FSV = ±(tbd) ppmFSV typ.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
Resistance measurement range 5 k
Fig. 96: Representation resistance measurement range 5 k
194
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot.
If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE.
In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Measurement electrical resistance 2 k
Measurement mode Operation mode
Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: typ. Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point EOffset deviation (at
23°C)
Gain/scale/ amplification
EGain
deviation (at
23°C)
Non-linearity
ELin
over the whole
measuring range
Repeatability ERep
2/3 wire < ±100 ppmFSV < ±200 m
< 60 ppmFSV < 60 ppmFSV
< 50 ppmFSV < 20 ppmFSV
Electrical resistance 0..2 k 2.5 V feed voltage, fixed setting n +Uv 5 k reference resistance at I2 Supply current is given by: 2.5 V / (5 k + R ) measurement 0...2 k 2 k 0 ... 2.147 k 23 Bit (unsigned) 256 µ 238.. µ
4 wire < ±50 ppmFSV < ±100 m
< 8 ppmFSV
< 44 ppmFSV
< 22 ppmFSV
< 5 ppmFSV
Temperature coefficient, typ.
Noise (without filtering)
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
TcOffset
< 5 ppmFSV/K
< 10 m/K
TcGain ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 10 ppm/K < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
Noisedensity@1
kHz
< (tbd)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< 0.5 ppmFSV/K < 1.0 m/K < 5 ppm /K < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< (tbd) < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
195
Product overview
Measurement mode
2/3 wire
4 wire
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)3
DC:
50 Hz:
1 kHz:
DC:
50 Hz:
< (tbd) / < (tbd) k/V < (tbd) k/V < (tbd) /V < (tbd)
V
typ.
typ.
typ.
k/V
typ.
typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with DC:
50 Hz FIR filtering)3
< (tbd) /
V
typ.
50 Hz: < (tbd) /V typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) /V typ.
DC:
50 Hz:
< (tbd) /V < (tbd)
typ.
k/V
typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
Largest short-term deviation during ±(tbd)%FSV = ±(tbd) ppmFSV typ. a specified electrical interference
test
±(tbd)%FSV = ±(tbd) ppmFSV typ.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
Fig. 97: Representation Widerstandsmeasurement range 2 k
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Measurement electrical resistance 500 Measurement mode Operation mode
Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV)
Electrical resistance 0..500 4.5 V feed voltage, fixed setting n +Uv
5 k reference resistance at I2
Supply current is given by: 4.5 V / (5 k + R ) measurement 0...500 500
196
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: typ. Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point EOffset deviation (at
23°C)
Gain/scale/ amplification
EGain
deviation (at
23°C)
Non-linearity
ELin
over the whole
measuring range
Repeatability ERep
2/3 wire < ±200 ppmFSV < ±100 m
< 145 ppmFSV < 100 ppmFSV
< 75 ppmFSV < 50 ppmFSV
Electrical resistance 0..500 0 ...536.8 23 Bit (unsigned) 64 µ 59.6.. µ
4 wire < ±50 ppmFSV < ±25 m
< 15 ppmFSV
< 40 ppmFSV
< 25 ppmFSV
< 5 ppmFSV
Temperature
TcOffset
coefficient, typ.
< 2 ppmFSV/K < 10 m/K
< 0.5 ppmFSV/K < 2.5 m/K
Noise (without filtering)
TcGain ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 12 ppm/K < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< 5 ppm /K < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
Noisedensity@1
kHz
< (tbd)
< (tbd)
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)3
DC:
50 Hz:
1 kHz:
DC:
50 Hz:
< (tbd) / < (tbd) k/V < (tbd) k/V < (tbd) /V < (tbd)
V
typ.
typ.
typ.
k/V
typ.
typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with DC:
50 Hz FIR filtering)3
< (tbd) /
V
typ.
50 Hz: < (tbd) /V typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) /V typ.
DC:
50 Hz:
< (tbd) /V < (tbd)
typ.
k/V
typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
Largest short-term deviation during ±(tbd)%FSV = ±(tbd) ppmFSV typ. a specified electrical interference
test
±(tbd)%FSV = ±(tbd) ppmFSV typ.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
197
Product overview
Fig. 98: Representation Widerstandsmeasurement range 500
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Measurement electrical resistance 200
Measurement mode Operation mode
Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: typ. Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
2/3 wire < ±350 ppmFSV < ±70 m
Electrical resistance 0..200 4.5 V feed voltage, fixed setting n +Uv 5 k reference resistance at I2 Supply current is given by: 4.5 V / (5 k + R ) measurement 0...200 200 0 ...214.7 23 Bit (unsigned) 25.6 µ 23.8.. µ
4 wire < ±70 ppmFSV < ±14 m
198
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode
Offset/Zero Point EOffset deviation (at
23°C)
Gain/scale/ amplification
EGain
deviation (at
23°C)
Non-linearity
ELin
over the whole
measuring range
Repeatability ERep
2/3 wire < 290 ppmFSV < 130 ppmFSV
< 125 ppmFSV < 75 ppmFSV
4 wire < 45 ppmFSV < 45 ppmFSV
< 25 ppmFSV < 5 ppmFSV
Temperature
TcOffset
coefficient, typ.
< 20 ppmFSV/K < 4 m/K
< 1.5 ppmFSV/K < 0.3 m/K
Noise (without filtering)
TcGain ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 10 ppm/K < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< 5 ppm /K < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
Noisedensity@1
kHz
< (tbd)
< (tbd)
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)3
DC:
50 Hz:
1 kHz:
DC:
50 Hz:
< (tbd) / < (tbd) k/V < (tbd) k/V < (tbd) /V < (tbd)
V
typ.
typ.
typ.
k/V
typ.
typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with DC:
50 Hz FIR filtering)3
< (tbd) /
V
typ.
50 Hz: < (tbd) /V typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) /V typ.
DC:
50 Hz:
< (tbd) /V < (tbd)
typ.
k/V
typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
Largest short-term deviation during ±(tbd)%FSV = ±(tbd) ppmFSV typ. a specified electrical interference
test
±(tbd)%FSV = ±(tbd) ppmFSV typ.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
199
Product overview
Fig. 99: Representation Widerstandsmeasurement range 200
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Measurement electrical resistance 50
Measurement mode Operation mode
Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (FSV) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: typ. Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
2/3 wire < ±2000 ppmFSV < ±100 m
Electrical resistance 0..50 4.5 V feed voltage, fixed setting n +Uv 5 k reference resistance at I2 Supply current is given by: 4.5 V / (5 k + R ) measurement 0...50 50 0 ...53.68 23 Bit (unsigned) 6.4 µ 5.96.. µ
4 wire < ±200 ppmFSV < ±10 m
200
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode
Offset/Zero Point EOffset deviation (at
23°C)
Gain/scale/ amplification
EGain
deviation (at
23°C)
Non-linearity
ELin
over the whole
measuring range
Repeatability ERep
2/3 wire < 1500 ppmFSV < 1000 ppmFSV
< 750 ppmFSV < 400 ppmFSV
4 wire < 175 ppmFSV < 80 ppmFSV
< 50 ppmFSV < 10 ppmFSV
Temperature
TcOffset
coefficient, typ.
< 80 ppmFSV/K < 4 m/K
< 5 ppmFSV/K < 0.25 m/K
Noise (without filtering)
TcGain ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< 40 ppm/K < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< 5 ppm /K < (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
Noisedensity@1
kHz
< (tbd)
< (tbd)
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
< (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
< (tbd) [ppmFSV] < (tbd) [ppmFSV] > (tbd) [dB]
< (tbd) [digits] < (tbd) [digits]
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)3
DC:
50 Hz:
1 kHz:
DC:
50 Hz:
< (tbd) / < (tbd) k/V < (tbd) k/V < (tbd) /V < (tbd)
V
typ.
typ.
typ.
k/V
typ.
typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
Common-mode rejection ratio (with DC:
50 Hz FIR filtering)3
< (tbd) /
V
typ.
50 Hz: < (tbd) /V typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) /V typ.
DC:
50 Hz:
< (tbd) /V < (tbd)
typ.
k/V
typ.
1 kHz: < (tbd) k/V typ.
Largest short-term deviation during ±(tbd)%FSV = ±(tbd) ppmFSV typ. a specified electrical interference
test
±(tbd)%FSV = ±(tbd) ppmFSV typ.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
201
Product overview
Fig. 100: Representation Widerstandsmeasurement range 50
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher. Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
202
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.11.2.5 RTD measurement
Application on ELM370x Basically the electrical resistance measurement range is independent adjustable of the RTD transformation. Thus achievable temperature measuring accuracy depending on the electrical resistance measuring ranges are given in the following. When choosing the combination, make sure that the correct and sufficient electrical resistance measurement range depending on application selection is made, e.g. would be the 50 range in combination with a PT1000 sensor rarely useful only. So a setting have to be chosen for
· electrical resistance measurement range in [] within CoE 0x80n0:01 · the transformation/conversion R within CoE 0x80n0:14
RTD measuring range
Fig. 101: Chart: RTD measuring range
In temperature mode, only the legacy range is available, the extended range is not available. The temperature display in [°C/digit] (e.g. 0.1°/digit or 0.01°/digit) is independent from the electrical measurement. It is "just" a display setting and results from the PDO setting, see chapter "Comissioning".
Implemented characteristics, overview
Supported RTD types and transformations supported by the ELM370x from FW01 on: · None (no transformation) · PT100 (-200...850°C) · PT200 (-200...850°C) · PT500 (-200...850°C) · PT1000 (-200...850°C) · NI100 (-60...250°C) · NI120 (-60...320°C) · NI1000 (-60...250°C) · NI1000 TK5000 (-30...160°C) · KT100/110/130/210/230 KTY10/11/13/16/19 (-50...150°C) · KTY81/82-110,120,150 (-50...150°C) · KTY81-121 (-50...150°C) · KTY81-122 (-50...150°C) · KTY81-151 (-50...150°C) · KTY81-152 (-50...150°C) · KTY81/82-210,220,250 (-50...150°C) · KTY81-221 (-50...150°C) · KTY81-222 (-50...150°C) · KTY81-251 (-50...150°C)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
203
Product overview
· KTY81-252 (-50...150°C) · KTY83-110,120,150 (-50...175°C) · KTY83-121 (-50...175°C) · KTY83-122 (-50...175°C) · KTY83-151 (-50...175°C) · KTY83-152 (-50...175°C) · KTY84-130,150 (-40...300°C) · KTY84-151 (-40...300°C) · KTY21/23-6 (-50...150°C) · KTY1x-5 (-50...150°C) · KTY1x-7 (-50...150°C) · KTY21/23-5 (-50...150°C) · KTY21/23-7 (-50...150°C) · B-Parameter · DIN IEC 60751 · Steinhart Hart
The PT types are implemented according to DIN EN 60751/IEC751 with · A = 0.0039083 °C-1 · B = -5.775 * 10-7 °C-2 · C = -4.183 * 10-12 °C-3
and therefore = 0.003851 °C-1. If other coefficients are required, they have to be inserted directly into the CoE via the setting "DIN IEC 60751". For calculation with only, the CoE Scaler 0x80n0:2E "linear" have to be used.
RTD measurement with Beckhoff terminals
RTD specification and conversion
Temperature measurement with a resistance-dependent RTD sensor generally consists of two steps: · Electrical measurement of the resistance, if necessary in several ohmic measuring ranges · Conversion (transformation) of the resistance into a temperature value by software means according to the set RTD type (PT100, PT1000...).
Both steps can take place locally in the Beckhoff measurement device. The transformation in the device can also be deactivated if it is to be calculated on a higher level in the control. Depending on the device type, several RTD conversions can be implemented which only differs in software. This means for Beckhoff RTD measurement devices that
· a specification table of the electrical resistance measurement is given · and based on this, the effect for the temperature measurement is given below depending on the
supported RTD type. Note that RTD characteristic curves are always realized as higher-order equations or by a sampling points table in the software, therefore a linear RT transfer only makes sense in a narrow range.
Notes to 2/3/4 wire connection within R/RTD operation
With 2wire measurement, the line resistance of the sensor supply lines influences the measured value. If a reduction of this systematic error component is desirable for 2wire measurements, the resistance of the supply line to the measuring resistance should be taken into account, in which case the resistance of the supply line has to be determined first. Taking into account the uncertainty associated with this supply line
204
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
resistance, it can then be included statically in the calculation, in the EL3751 via 0x8000:13 [} 312] and in the ELM350x/ ELM370x via 0x80n0:13 [} 312]. Any change in resistance of the supply line due to ageing, for example, is not taken into account automatically.
A 3wire measurement enables the systematic component to be eliminated, assuming that the two supply lines are identical. With this type of measurement, the lead resistance of a supply line is measured continuously. The value determined in this way is then deducted twice from the measurement result, thereby eliminating the line resistance. Technically, this leads to a significantly more reliable measurement. However, taking into account the measurement uncertainty, the gain from the 3wire connection is less significant, since this assumption is subject to high uncertainty, in view of the fact that the individual line that was not measured may be damaged, or a varying resistance may have gone unnoticed.
Therefore, although technically the 3wire connection is a tried and tested approach, for measurements that are methodological assessed based on measurement uncertainty, we strongly recommend fullycompensated 4wire connection.
With both 2wire and 3wire connection, the contact resistances of the terminal contacts influence the measuring process. The measuring accuracy can be further increased by a userside adjustment with the signal connection plugged in.
NOTE Measurement of small resistances
Especially for measurements in the range < 10 , the 4wire connection is absolutely necessary due to the relatively high supply and contact resistances. It should also be considered that with such low resistances the relative measurement error in relation to the full scale value (FSV) can become high for such measurements resistance measurement terminals with small measuring ranges such as EL3692 in 4wire measurement should be used if necessary.
Corresponding considerations also lead to the common connection methods in bridge operation:
· Full bridge: 4wire connection without line compensation, 6wire connection with full line compensation · Half bridge: 3wire connection without line compensation, 5wire connection with full line compensation · Quarter bridge: 2wire connection without line compensation, 3wire connection with theoretical line
compensation and 4wire connection with full line compensation
Data for the sensor types in the following table
The values for the sensor types listed in the following table are shown here merely for informative purposes as an orientation aid. All data are given without guarantee and must be cross-checked against the data sheet for the respective sensor employed.
The RTD measurement consists of a chain of measuring and computing elements that affect the attainable measurement deviation:
The given resistance specification is decisive for the attainable temperature measurement accuracy. It is applied to the possible RTD types in the following.
On account of
· the non-linearity existing in the RTD and thus the high dependency of the specification data on the sensor temperature Tsens and
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
205
Product overview
· the influence of the ambient temperature on the analog input device employed (leads to a change in Tmeasured on account of Tambient although Tsens = constant)
no detailed temperature specification table is given in the following, but · a short table specifying the electrical measuring range and orientation value for the basic accuracy · a graph of the basic accuracy over Tsens (this at two example ambient temperatures so that the attainable basic accuracy is implied on account of the actual existing ambient temperature) · equations for calculating further parameters (offset/gain/non-linearity/repeatability/noise) if necessary from the resistance specification at the desired operating point
206
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Notes on the calculation of detailed specification data
If further specification data are of interest, they can or must be calculated from the values given in the resistance specification.
The sequence: · General: The conversion is explained here only for one measuring point (a certain input signal); the steps simply have to be repeated in case of several measuring points (up to the entire measuring range). · If the measured resistance at the measured temperature measuring point is unknown, the measured value (MW) in [ ] must be determined: MW = RMeasuring point (TMeasuring ) point with the help of an RT table · The deviation at this resistance value is calculated Via the total equation
or a single value, e.g. ESingle = 15 ppmFSV the measurement uncertainty in [] must be calculated:
E (R Resistance Measuring ) point = E (R Total Measuring ) point * FSV or: E (R ) Resistance Measuring point = E (R Single Measuring ) point * FSV or (if already known) e.g.: E (R Resistance Measuring ) point = 0.03 · The slope at the point used must then be determined: RproK(TMeasuring ) point = [ R(TMeasuring point + 1 °C) R(TMeasuring point )] / 1 °C with the help of an RT table · The temperature measurement uncertainty can be calculated from the resistance measurement uncertainty and the slope E (R Temp Measuring ) point = (E (T )) Resistance Measuring point / (RproK(TMeasuring ) point ) · To determine the error of the entire system consisting of RTD and ELM350x in [°C], the two errors must be added together quadratically:
The numerical values used in the following three examples are for illustration purposes. The specification values given in the technical data remain authoritative.
Example 1: Basic accuracy of an ELM3504 at 35 °C ambient temperature, measurement of -100 °C in the PT1000 interface (4-wire), without the influence of noise and aging: TMeasuring point = -100 °C MW = RPT1000, -100 °C = 602.56
= 86.238 ppmFSV E (R Resistance Measuring ) point = 86.238 ppmFSV * 2000 = 0.1725 RproK(TMeasuring ) point = (R(-99 °C) R(-100 °C)) / (1 °C) = 4.05 /°C EELM3504@35°C, PT1000, -100 °C = (0.1725 )/(4.05 /°C) 0.043 °C (means ±0.043 °C)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
207
Product overview
Example 2: Consideration of the repeatability alone under the above conditions: TMeasuring point = -100 °C MW = RMeasuring point (-100 °C) = 602.56 ESingle = 10 ppmFSV E = Resistance 10 ppmFSV * 2000 = 0.02 RproK(TMeasuring ) point = (R-99 °C R-100 °C) / 1 °C = 4.05 /°C E (R Temp Measuring ) point = 0.02 / 4.05 /°C 0.005 °C (means ±0.005 °C)
Example 3: Consideration of the RMS noise alone without filter under the above conditions: TMeasuring point = -100 °C MW = RMeasuring point (-100 °C) = 602.56 ESingle = 37 ppmFSV E = Resistance 37 ppmFSV * 2000 = 0.074 RproK(TMeasuring ) point = (R-99 °C R-100 °C) / 1 °C = 4.05 /°C E (R Temp Measuring ) point = 0.074 / 4.05 /°C 0.018 °C (means ± 0.018 °C)
Example 4: If the noise ENoise, PtP of the above example terminal is considered not for one sensor point -100 °C but in general, the following plot results:
208
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
"B-parameter equation" setting for NTC sensors The B-parameter equation can be used for NTC sensors (thermistors), i.e. RTD elements with negative coefficient k.
The coefficient RT0 indicates the resistance at temperature T0. The B-parameter can be taken from the information provided by the sensor manufacturer, or it can be determined by measuring the resistance at two known temperatures. A helpful Excel file can be found for this in the documentation for the EL3204-0200. The parameters must then be entered in the CoE 0x80n7
with RT0 0x80n7:01 B 0x80n7:04 T0 0x80n7:02 "DIN IEC 60751" setting for PT sensors The calculation for T > 0°C according to
is implemented; the parameters must then be entered in the CoE 0x80n7
with A or 0x80n7:03 B or 0x80n7:04 R0 0x80n7:01
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
209
Product overview
"Steinhart-Hart" setting for NTC sensors The Steinhart-Hart equation can be used for NTC sensors (thermistors), i.e. RTD elements with negative coefficient k.
The coefficients C1, C2, and C4 can either be taken directly from the manufacturer data or calculated. A sample file for the calculation of the Steinhart-Hart parameters is also available in the EL3204-0200 documentation. For determining the parameters the resistance values at three known temperatures are required. These can either be taken from the manufacturer data or measured directly at the sensor. In most cases the parameter C3 is close to zero, i.e. negligible. It is therefore not used in the sample file calculation. The parameters must then be entered in the CoE 0x80n7
with A 0x80n7:03 B 0x80n7:04 C 0x80n7:05 D 0x80n7:06
Specification of the RTD measurement
For some frequently used RTD types, you will find below an overview of the achievable measurement uncertainties for each RTD type and measuring range used. The graphic illustrations offer fast orientation so that the best possible setting can be chosen for the respective measuring task.
The measurement uncertainty of the RTD sensor itself (accuracy class) still has to be added for the final result.
PT100 specification
Electrical mea- 200 suring range used
500
Connection
4-wire
2/3-wire *) 4-wire
2/3-wire *)
Starting value -200 °C
-200 °C
End value
266 °C
850 °C
Basic accuracy: < ±0.038 K Measurement deviation at 23 °C terminal environment, with averaging, typ.
< ±0.19 K < ±0.073 K < ±0.32 K
Temperature coefficient **), typ.
< 1.5 mK/K
< 11 mK/K < 1.8 mK/K < 10 mK/K
PDO LSB (legacy range only)
0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting
2000
4-wire -200 °C 850 °C < ±0.17 K
2/3-wire *) < ±0.56 K
< 2.9 mK/K < 26 mK/K
5000
4-wire -200 °C 850 °C < ±0.45 K
2/3-wire *) < ±0.9 K
< 6.5 mK/K < 26 mK/K
210
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
*) See initial remarks about 2/3-wire operation. The offset specification does not apply in 2-wire operation, as the offset is increased due to the connection. In 2-wire operation, an offset compensation is to be carried out after installation; refer to the ELM's internal functions Tare (chapter "ELM Features" / "Tare") or Zero Offset (chapter "ELM Features" / "ZeroOffset"). The given offset specification of the terminal thus plays practically no further part. The offset deviation of a resistance measurement can change over time, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset compensation or attentive monitoring of the change.
**) The temperature coefficient, i.e. the change in the measured temperature value in relation to the change in the ambient temperature of the terminal, is not constant, as can be seen in the following plot. The value at a sensor temperature of 0 °C is given here as an orientation value. Further values can be taken from the plot.
Measurement uncertainty for PT100, 200 , 4-wire connection:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
211
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT100, 200 , 3-wire connection:
212
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for PT100, 500 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
213
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT100, 500 , 3-wire connection:
214
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for PT100, 2000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
215
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT100, 2000 , 3-wire connection:
216
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for PT100, 5000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
217
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT100, 5000 , 3-wire connection:
PT200 specification
Electrical measuring 500 range used
2000
Connection
4-wire
2/3-wire *)
4-wire
Starting value
-200 °C
-200 °C
End value
408 °C
850 °C
Basic accuracy: Mea- < ±0.036 K surement deviation at 23 °C terminal environment, with averaging, typ.
< ±0.14 K
< ±0.1 K
Temperature coefficient < 1.4 mK/K **), typ.
< 5.5 mK/K
< 1.8 mK/K
PDO LSB (legacy range only)
0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting
2/3-wire *) < ±0.29 K < 13 mK/K
5000
4-wire -200 °C 850 °C < ±0.23 K
2/3-wire *) < ±0.45 K
< 3.4 mK/K
< 13 mK/K
*) See initial remarks about 2/3-wire operation. The offset specification does not apply in 2-wire operation, as the offset is increased due to the connection. In 2-wire operation, an offset compensation is to be carried out after installation; refer to the ELM's internal functions Tare (chapter "ELM Features" / "Tare") or Zero Offset (chapter "ELM Features" / "ZeroOffset"). The given offset specification of the terminal thus plays practically no further part. The offset deviation of a resistance measurement can change over time, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset compensation or attentive monitoring of the change.
**) The temperature coefficient, i.e. the change in the measured temperature value in relation to the change in the ambient temperature of the terminal, is not constant, as can be seen in the following plot. The value at a sensor temperature of 0 °C is given here as an orientation value. Further values can be taken from the plot.
218
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for PT200, 500 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
219
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT200, 500 , 3-wire connection:
220
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for PT200, 2000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
221
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT200, 2000 , 3-wire connection:
222
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for PT200, 5000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
223
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT200, 5000 , 3-wire connection:
PT500 specification
Electrical measuring range used
2000
5000
Connection
4-wire
3-wire
4-wire
Starting value
-200 °C
-200 °C
End value
850 °C
850 °C
Basic accuracy: Measurement < ±0.067 K deviation at 23 °C terminal environment, with averaging, typ.
< ±0.14 K
< ±0.11 K
Temperature coefficient **), typ. < 1.4 mK/K
< 5.7 mK/K
< 1.8 mK/K
PDO LSB (legacy range only) 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting
3-wire < ±0.2 K < 6 mK/K
*) See initial remarks about 2/3-wire operation. The offset specification does not apply in 2-wire operation, as the offset is increased due to the connection. In 2-wire operation, an offset compensation is to be carried out after installation; refer to the ELM's internal functions Tare (chapter "ELM Features" / "Tare") or Zero Offset (chapter "ELM Features" / "ZeroOffset"). The given offset specification of the terminal thus plays practically no further part. The offset deviation of a resistance measurement can change over time, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset compensation or attentive monitoring of the change.
**) Change in the measured value in relation to the change in the ambient temperature of the terminal
224
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for PT500, 2000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
225
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT500, 2000 , 3-wire connection:
226
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for PT500, 5000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
227
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT500, 5000 , 3-wire connection:
PT1000 specification
Electrical measuring range used
2000
5000
Connection
4-wire
2/3-wire *)
4-wire
Starting value
-200 °C
-200 °C
End value
266 °C
850 °C
Basic accuracy: Measurement < ±0.028 K deviation at 23 °C terminal environment, with averaging, typ.
< ±0.056 K
< ±0.085 K
Temperature coefficient **), typ. < 1.3 mK/K
< 3.6 mK/K
< 1.4 mK/K
PDO LSB (legacy range only) 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting
2/3-wire *) < ±0.12 K < 4 mK/K
*) See initial remarks about 2/3-wire operation. The offset specification does not apply in 2-wire operation, as the offset is increased due to the connection. In 2-wire operation, an offset compensation is to be carried out after installation; refer to the ELM's internal functions Tare (chapter "ELM Features" / "Tare") or Zero Offset (chapter "ELM Features" / "ZeroOffset"). The given offset specification of the terminal thus plays practically no further part. The offset deviation of a resistance measurement can change over time, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset compensation or attentive monitoring of the change.
**) The temperature coefficient, i.e. the change in the measured temperature value in relation to the change in the ambient temperature of the terminal, is not constant, as can be seen in the following plot. The value at a sensor temperature of 0 °C is given here as an orientation value. Further values can be taken from the plot.
228
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for PT1000, 2000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
229
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT1000, 2000 , 3-wire connection:
230
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for PT1000, 5000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
231
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for PT1000, 5000 , 3-wire connection:
NI100 specification
Electrical mea- 200 suring range used
500
2000
Connection
4-wire
2/3-wire *) 4-wire
2/3-wire *) 4-wire
Starting value -60 °C
-60 °C
-60 °C
End value
151 °C
250
250
Basic accuracy: < ±0.023 K Measurement deviation at 23 °C terminal environment, with averaging, typ.
< ±0.14 K < ±0.032 K < ±0.18 K < ±0.1 K
Temperature coefficient **), typ.
< 1.1 mK/K
< 7.5 mK/K < 1.3 mK/K < 7.4 mK/K < 2 mK/K
PDO LSB (legacy range only)
0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting
5000
2/3-wire *) < ±0.35 K
4-wire -60 °C 250 < ±0.28 K
2/3-wire *) < ±0.56 K
< 18 mK/K < 4.6 mK/K < 18 mK/K
*) See initial remarks about 2/3-wire operation. The offset specification does not apply in 2-wire operation, as the offset is increased due to the connection. In 2-wire operation, an offset compensation is to be carried out after installation; refer to the ELM's internal functions Tare (chapter "ELM Features" / "Tare") or Zero Offset (chapter "ELM Features" / "ZeroOffset"). The given offset specification of the terminal thus plays practically no further part. The offset deviation of a resistance measurement can change over time, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset compensation or attentive monitoring of the change.
**) The temperature coefficient, i.e. the change in the measured temperature value in relation to the change in the ambient temperature of the terminal, is not constant, as can be seen in the following plot. The value at a sensor temperature of 0 °C is given here as an orientation value. Further values can be taken from the plot.
232
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI100, 200 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
233
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI100, 200 , 3-wire connection:
234
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI100, 500 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
235
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI100, 500 , 3-wire connection:
236
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI100, 2000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
237
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI100, 2000 , 3-wire connection:
238
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI100, 5000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
239
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI100, 5000 , 3-wire connection:
NI120 specification
Electrical measuring 500 range used
2000
Connection
4-wire
2/3-wire *)
4-wire
Starting value
-60 °C
-60 °C
End value
250 °C
250 °C
Basic accuracy: Mea- < ±0.036 K surement deviation at 23 °C terminal environment, with averaging, typ.
< ±0.027 K
< ±0.086 K
Temperature coefficient < 1.2 mK/K **), typ.
< 6.2 mK/K
< 1.8 mK/K
PDO LSB (legacy range only)
0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting
2/3-wire *) < ±0.29 K < 15 mK/K
5000
4-wire -60 °C 250 °C < ±0.23 K
2/3-wire *) < ±0.47 K
< 3.9 mK/K
< 15 mK/K
*) See initial remarks about 2/3-wire operation. The offset specification does not apply in 2-wire operation, as the offset is increased due to the connection. In 2-wire operation, an offset compensation is to be carried out after installation; refer to the ELM's internal functions Tare (chapter "ELM Features" / "Tare") or Zero Offset (chapter "ELM Features" / "ZeroOffset"). The given offset specification of the terminal thus plays practically no further part. The offset deviation of a resistance measurement can change over time, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset compensation or attentive monitoring of the change.
**) The temperature coefficient, i.e. the change in the measured temperature value in relation to the change in the ambient temperature of the terminal, is not constant, as can be seen in the following plot. The value at a sensor temperature of 0 °C is given here as an orientation value. Further values can be taken from the plot.
240
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI120, 500 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
241
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI120, 500 , 3-wire connection:
242
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI120, 2000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
243
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI120, 2000 , 3-wire connection:
244
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI120, 5000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
245
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI120, 5000 , 3-wire connection:
NI1000 specification
Electrical measuring range used
2000
5000
Connection
4-wire
2/3-wire *)
4-wire
Starting value
-60 °C
-200 °C
End value
151 °C
850 °C
Basic accuracy: Measurement < ±0.013 K deviation at 23 °C terminal environment, with averaging, typ.
< ±0.036 K
< ±0.029 K
Temperature coefficient **), typ. < 0.93 mK/K
< 2.6 mK/K
< 1 mK/K
PDO LSB (legacy range only) 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting
2/3-wire *) < ±0.057 K < 2.8 mK/K
*) See initial remarks about 2/3-wire operation. The offset specification does not apply in 2-wire operation, as the offset is increased due to the connection. In 2-wire operation, an offset compensation is to be carried out after installation; refer to the ELM's internal functions Tare (chapter "ELM Features" / "Tare") or Zero Offset (chapter "ELM Features" / "ZeroOffset"). The given offset specification of the terminal thus plays practically no further part. The offset deviation of a resistance measurement can change over time, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset compensation or attentive monitoring of the change.
**) The temperature coefficient, i.e. the change in the measured temperature value in relation to the change in the ambient temperature of the terminal, is not constant, as can be seen in the following plot. The value at a sensor temperature of 0 °C is given here as an orientation value. Further values can be taken from the plot.
246
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI1000, 2000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
247
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI1000, 2000 , 3-wire connection:
248
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI1000, 5000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
249
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI1000, 5000 , 3-wire connection:
NI1000 TK5000 specification
Electrical measuring range used
2000
5000
Connection
4-wire
2/3-wire *)
4-wire
Starting value
-30 °C
-30 °C
End value
151 °C
160 °C
Basic accuracy: Measurement < ±0.013 K deviation at 23 °C terminal environment, with averaging, typ.
< ±0.033 K
< ±0.027 K
Temperature coefficient **), typ. < 0.93 mK/K
< 2.6 mK/K
< 1 mK/K
PDO LSB (legacy range only) 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting
2/3-wire *) < ±0.052 K < 2.8 mK/K
*) See initial remarks about 2/3-wire operation. The offset specification does not apply in 2-wire operation, as the offset is increased due to the connection. In 2-wire operation, an offset compensation is to be carried out after installation; refer to the ELM's internal functions Tare (chapter "ELM Features" / "Tare") or Zero Offset (chapter "ELM Features" / "ZeroOffset"). The given offset specification of the terminal thus plays practically no further part. The offset deviation of a resistance measurement can change over time, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset compensation or attentive monitoring of the change.
**) The temperature coefficient, i.e. the change in the measured temperature value in relation to the change in the ambient temperature of the terminal, is not constant, as can be seen in the following plot. The value at a sensor temperature of 0 °C is given here as an orientation value. Further values can be taken from the plot.
250
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI1000 TK5000, 2000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
251
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI1000 TK5000, 2000 , 3-wire connection:
252
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Measurement uncertainty for NI1000 TK5000, 5000 , 4-wire connection:
Product overview
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
253
Product overview Measurement uncertainty for NI1000 TK5000, 5000 , 3-wire connection:
254
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.11.2.6 Potentiometer measurement
The potentiometer should be supplied with the integrated power supply unit (max. 5 V, configurable). The slider voltage is then measured relative to the supply voltage and output in %. Technical, the measurement is similar to a strain gauge half bridge.
Potentiometers from 1 k can be used.
Diagnostics · Slider breakage: full-scale deflection or 0 display · Supply interruption: full-scale deflection or 0 display
Measurement mode Operation mode
Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range) Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging Input impedance ±Input 1 (Internal resistance)
Input impedance ±Input 2 (Internal resistance)
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability
Noise (peak-to-peak, without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity @1kHz
Noise (peak-to-peak, with 50Hz filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
Max. SNR
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)3
Potentiometer (3/ 5 wire) The supply voltage is configurable via CoE, 0.5...5 V -1...1 V/V 1 V/V -1...1 V/V 24 bit (incl. sign) 0.128 ppm 0.119... ppm tbd %FSV = tbd ppmFSV
Differential tbd typ. CommonMode tbd typ. Methodology: Resistor against -UV, capacitance against SGND Differential tbd typ. CommonMode tbd typ. Methodology: Resistor against -UV (+2.5V), capacitance against SGND tbd [ppmFSV]
tbd [ppm]
tbd [ppmFSV]
tbd [ppmFSV] tbd [ppmFSV] tbd [ppmFSV] tbd [dB]
tbd [digits] tbd [digits]
tbd tbd [ppmFSV] tbd [ppmFSV] tbd [dB] DC:
tbd [digits] tbd [digits]
50 Hz:
1 kHz:
tbd Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz filtering)3 DC:
typ. tbd
typ.
50 Hz:
tbd
typ.
1 kHz:
tbd
typ. tbd
typ. tbd
typ.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
255
Product overview
Measurement mode
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified
electrical interference test
Potentiometer (3/ 5 wire) tbd ppm/K typ. tbd ppmFSV/K typ. tbd %FSV = tbd ppmFSV typ.
2) A regular offset adjustment with connected potentiometer is recommended. The given offset specification of the terminal is therefore practically irrelevant. Therefore, specification values with and without offset are given here. In practice, the offset component can be eliminated by the terminal functions Tare and also ZeroOffset or in the controller by a higher-level tare function. The offset deviation over time can change, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset adjustment or careful observation of the change.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
Potentiometer measurement range
Fig. 102: Representation potentiometer measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
256
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.11.2.7 Measurement SG 1/1 bridge (full bridge) 4/6-wire connection
To determine the measuring error:
The nominal/technical measuring range is specified in "mV/V"; the maximum permitted supply voltage is 5 V. The maximum nominal measuring range that can be used for the bridge voltage is therefore ±32 mV/V * 5 V = ±160 mV; the internal circuits are configured accordingly.
The internal measurement is ratiometric, i.e. the feed voltage and the bridge voltage are not measured absolutely, but as a ratio.
The integrated supply can be used as power supply. An external supply is permitted, as long as 5 V is not exceeded.
The following is the specification given for the 6 wire connection. External line resistances are compensated by the 6 wire connection and the full bridge is detected directly from the measuring channel.
In the 4 wire connection, the terminal generally has the same specification, but its view of the connected full bridge is clouded by the unclear and temperature-dependent lead resistances within cables and connectors. In this respect, the overall system "full bridge + leads + measurement channel" will practically not achieve specification values given below. The lead resistances (cables, connectors, ...) have an effect especially on the gain error, also depending on the temperature.
The gain error can be estimated by (R+uv (1+ T* TCCu) + R-uv(1+T* TCCu) )/Rnom with TCCu~3930 ppm/K, Rnom e.g. 350 and R+uv or R-uv lead resistances respectively.
NOTE Increase measurement accuracy: switcheable shunt
By a user-side adjustment with plugged signal connection, the measurement accuracy can be further increased. The ELM350x and ELM370x terminals also have a shunt resistor which can be switched from their CoE directory (0x80n0:08 [} 312]).
The use of the measurement channel in the 6 wire connection is recommended, especially when significant resistors such as a lightning arrester are put into the line.
Note: specifications apply for 5 V SG excitation and symmetric 350R SG.
ELM370x (10 ksps)
Measurement mode
StrainGauge/SG/1/1 bridge 4/6 wire
32 mV
4 mV
Noise (without ENoise, PtP filtering, at
23°C)
< 90 ppmFSV < 703 digits
< 2.88 µV/V
< 600 ppmFSV < 4688 digits
< 2.40 µV/V
ENoise, RMS
< 15 ppmFSV < 117 digits
< 0.48 µV/V
< 100 ppmFSV < 781 digits
< 0.40 µV/V
Max. SNR > 96.5 dB
> 80.0 dB
Noisedensity@
1kHz
< 6.79
< 5.66
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS
< 12 ppmFSV < 94 digits < 0.38 µV/V
< 2.0 ppmFSV < 16 digits < 0.06 µV/V
< 60 ppmFSV < 469 digits < 0.24 µV/V
< 10.0 ppmFSV < 78 digits < 0.04 µV/V
Max. SNR > 114.0 dB
> 100.0 dB
2 mV < 1200 ppmFSV < 9375 digits < 2.40 µV/V < 200 ppmFSV < 1563 digits < 0.40 µV/V > 74.0 dB
< 5.66 < 120 ppmFSV < 938 digits < 0.24 µV/V < 20.0 ppmFSV < 156 digits < 0.04 µV/V > 94.0 dB
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
257
Product overview
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode Integrated power supply
Measuring range, nominal
Measuring range, end value (FSV)
Measuring range, technically usable
PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging, typ.
without Offset ²)
with Offset ²)
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/ amplification
EGain
deviation (at
23°C)
Non-linearity ELin over the whole
measuring range
Repeatability
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)3
ERep DC
50 Hz
StrainGauge/SG/SG 1/1 Bridge 4/6 wire
32 mV
4 mV
2 mV
1...5V adjustable, max. supply/Excitation 21 mA (internal electronic overload protection) therefore 120R DMS: up to 2.5 V; 350R DMS: up to 5.0 V
-32 ... +32 mV/V -4 ... +4 mV/V
-2 ... +2 mV/V
32 mV/V
4 mV/V
2 mV/V
-34.359 ... +34.359 -4.295 ... +4.295 mV/V -2.147 ... +2.147 mV/V mV/V
24 bit (including sign)
0.128 ppm
0.119... ppm
< ±0.0025%FSV < ±25 ppmFSV < ±0.80 µV/V
< ±0.0085%FSV < ±85 ppmFSV < ±0.34 µV/V
< ±0.013%FSV < ±130 ppmFSV < ±0.26 µV/V
< ±0.0075%FSV < ±75 ppmFSV < ±2.40 µV/V
< ±0.03%FSV < ±300 ppmFSV < ±1.20 µV/V typ
< ±0.06%FSV < ±600 ppmFSV < ±1.20 µV/V typ
< 70 ppmFSV
< 280 ppmFSV
< 580 ppmFSV
< 20 ppm
< 70 ppm
< 110 ppm
< 15 ppmFSV < 5 ppmFSV tbd
< 45 ppmFSV < 15 ppmFSV tbd
< 65 ppmFSV < 20 ppmFSV tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
1 kHz
tbd
tbd
Common-mode DC
rejection ratio (with 50 Hz FIR
tbd
tbd
filtering)3
50 Hz
tbd
typ
tbd
tbd
tbd
tbd
1 kHz
Temperature TcGain coefficient, typ. TcOffset
tbd < 1 ppm/K < 1.2 ppmFSV/K
tbd < 3 ppm/K < 12 ppmFSV/K
tbd < 5 ppm/K < 25 ppmFSV/K
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
< 0.04 tbd
< 0.05 tbd
< 0.05 tbd
258
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Measurement mode
StrainGauge/SG/SG 1/1 Bridge 4/6 wire
32 mV
4 mV
Input impedance Differential tbd
tbd
±Input 1
CommonMode tbd
tbd
Input impedance 4 wire
±Input 2
Differential
No usage of this input in this mode
tbd
tbd
CommonMode tbd
tbd
2 mV tbd tbd
tbd tbd
2) In real bridge measurement, an offset adjustment is usually carried out after installation. The given offset specification of the terminal is therefore practically irrelevant. Therefore, specification values with and without offset are given here. In practice, the offset component can be eliminated by the terminal functions Tare and also ZeroOffset or in the controller by a higher-level tare function. The offset deviation of a bridge measurement over time can change, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset adjustment or careful observation of the change.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
Full bridge calculation:
The strain relationship (µStrain, µ) is as follows:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
259
Product overview
260
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
3.11.2.8 Measurement SG 1/2 bridge (half bridge) 3/5-wire connection
To determine the measuring error:
The nominal/technical measuring range is specified in "mV/V"; the maximum permitted supply voltage is 5 V. The maximum nominal measuring range that can be used for the bridge voltage is therefore ±16 mV/V * 5V = ±80 mV; the internal circuits are designed for the 160 mV of the full bridge measurement.
The internal measurement is ratiometric, i.e. the feed voltage and the bridge voltage are not measured absolutely, but as a ratio.
The integrated supply can be used as power supply. An external supply is permitted, as long as 5 V is not exceeded.
The following is the specification given for the 5 wire connection. External line resistances are compensated by the 5 wire connection and the half-bridge is detected directly from the measuring channel.
In the 3 wire connection, the terminal generally has the same specification, but its view of the connected halfbridge is clouded by the unclear and temperature-dependent lead resistances within cables and connectors. In this respect, the overall system "half-bridge + leads + measurement channel" will practically not achieve specification values given below. The lead resistances (cables, connectors, ...) have an effect especially on the gain error, also depending on the temperature.
The gain error can be estimated by (R+uv (1+ T* TCCu) + R-uv(1+T* TCCu) )/Rnom with TCCu~3930 ppm/K, Rnom e.g. 350 and R+uv or R-uv lead resistances respectively.
The use of the measurement channel in the 5 wire connection is recommended.
Measurement mode Integrated power supply
SG 1/2 bridge 1...5 V adjustable, max. supply/excitation 21 mA (internal electronic overload protection) therefore
· 120R strain gauge: up to 2.5 V
· 350R strain gauge: up to 5.0 V
Note: specifications apply for 3.5 V SG excitation and symmetric 350R SG.
Note: Adjustment of the half-bridge measurement and thus validity of the data from production week 2018/ 50
ELM370x (10 ksps)
Measurement mode Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
Noise (with 50 Hz FIR filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR Noisedensity@1kHz ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
StrainGauge/SG/ 1/2 bridge 3/5 wire 16 mV < 500 ppmFSV < 3906 digits < 8.00 µV/V < 85 ppmFSV < 664 digits < 1.36 µV/V > 81.4 dB
< 19.23 < 35 ppmFSV < 273 digits < 0.56 µV/V < 6.0 ppmFSV < 47 digits < 0.10 µV/V > 104.4 dB
2 mV < 4000 ppmFSV < 31250 digits < 8.00 µV/V < 660 ppmFSV < 5156 digits < 1.32 µV/V > 63.6 dB
< 18.67 < 280 ppmFSV < 2188 digits < 0.56 µV/V < 46.0 ppmFSV < 359 digits < 0.09 µV/V > 86.7 dB
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
261
Product overview
(Preliminary information)
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
without offset with offset
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability
ERep
Common-mode rejection ratio DC:
(without filtering)3
50 Hz:
1 kHz:
Common-mode rejection ratio DC: (with 50 Hz FIR filtering)3
50 Hz:
1 kHz:
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Largest short-term deviation during a specified
electrical interference test
Input impedance ±Input 1
(Internal resistance)
Input impedance ±Input 2
(Internal resistance)
SG 1/2-Bridge (16 mV) < ±120 [ppmFSV] typ. < ±500 [ppmFSV] typ. < 485 [ppmFSV]
< 70 [ppm]
< 90 [ppmFSV]
< 40 [ppmFSV]
SG 1/2-Bridge (2 mV) <±900 [ppmFSV] typ. < ±2700 [ppmFSV] typ. < 2550 [ppmFSV]
< 500 [ppm]
< 740 [ppmFSV]
< 120 [ppmFSV]
tbd
typ.
tbd
typ.
tbd
typ.
tbd
typ.
tbd
typ.
tbd
typ.
tbd
typ.
tbd
typ.
tbd
typ.
tbd
typ.
tbd
typ.
tbd ppm/K typ.
tbd ppmFSV/K typ. tbd
tbd
typ.
tbd ppm/K typ.
tbd ppmFSV/K typ. tbd
Differential: tbd typ.
Differential: tbd typ.
CommonMode: tbd typ. CommonMode: tbd typ.
3 wire:
3 wire:
No usage of this input in this No usage of this input in this
mode
mode
Differential: tbd typ.
Differential: tbd typ.
CommonMode: tbd typ. CommonMode: tbd typ.
3) Values related to a common mode interference between SGND and internal ground.
NOTE Transition resistances of the terminal contacts
The transition resistance values of the terminal contacts affect the measurement. The measuring accuracy can be further increased by a user-side adjustment with the signal connection plugged in.
262
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Validity of property values
The resistor of the bridge is positioned parallel to the internal resistor of the terminal and leads to an offset shifting respectively. The Beckhoff factory calibration will be carried out with the half bridge 350 , thus the values specified above are directly valid for the 350 half bridge. By connection of another dimensioned half-bridge is to: · perform a balancing (offset correction) by the terminal itself or the control/PLC on application
side · or the abstract offset error have to be entered into the balancing parameter S0 of the terminal.
Example: a 350 half bridge correlates by the compensated effect of the input resistor (2 M) during factory calibration 0.26545 %FSV (16 mV/V), that corresponds to 20738 digits.
Half bridge calculation:
R3/4 are the internal switchable input resistors of the terminal. Other configurations (e.g. R1/4 or R1/3 variable) of half bridges are not supported.
The strain relationship (µStrain, µ) is as follows:
N should be chosen based on the mechanical configuration of the variable resistors (Poisson, 2 active uniaxial, ...). The channel value (PDO) is interpreted directly [mV/V]:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
263
Product overview
3.11.2.9 Measurement SG 1/4 bridge (quarter-bridge) 2/3-wire connection
Notes
· In practice, quarter-bridge measurement is not recommended in 2-wire mode. Common copper supply lines with inherent resistance (e.g. approx. 17 m/m with 1 mm² stranded wire) and very high temperature sensitivity (approx. 4000 ppm/K, approx. 0.4%/K) have a significant influence on the calculation, which can only be corrected through continuous offset and gain adjustment. Only 3-wire operation should be used.
· Specifications apply to 5 V strain gauge excitation. · Specifications only apply when using ferrules and for cross-sections of 0.5 mm² or more. For smaller
cross-sections, increased transition resistance is to be expected. · Avoid repeated insertion/extraction of the push-in connectors in quarter-bridge operation, since this
may increase the contact resistance · Integrated power supply: 1...5 V adjustable, max. supply/excitation 21 mA (internal electronic overload
protection)
264
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
(Preliminary information)
Measurement mode SG 1/4-Bridge 120 (3 wire)
32 mV/V FSV
8 mV/V FSV
4 mV/V 5) FSV (comp.)
Measuring range, nominal
±32 mV/V
±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
[corresponds to [corresponds to [corresponds to
±64,000 µ at K=2] ±16,000 µ at K=2] ±8,000 µ at K=2]
120 ± 15.36
120 ± 3.84
120 ± 1.92
Measuring range, end 32 mV/V value (FSV)
8 mV/V
4 mV/V
Measuring range, technically usable
±34.359... mV/V ±8.589... mV/V
±4.294... mV/V
PDO resolution
24 Bit (incl. sign)
PDO LSB (Extended 0,128 ppm
Range)
4,096 nV/V
0,128 ppm 1,024 nV/V
0,128 ppm 0,512 nV/V
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
0,119... ppm 3,814.. nV/V
0,119... ppm 0,9535 nV/V
0,119... ppm 0,47675 nV/V
Basic accuracy:
< ±0,026%MBE
Measuring deviation at < ±260 ppmMBE
23°C, with averaging, < ±8,3 µV/V
without offset 2)
< ±0,08%MBE < ±800 ppmMBE < ±6,4 µV/V
< ±0,16%MBE < ±1600 ppmMBE < ±6,4 µV/V
Basic accuracy:
< ±0,1%MBE
Measuring deviation at < ±1000 ppmMBE
23°C, with averaging, < ±32,0 µV/V
with offset 2)
< ±0,4%MBE < ±4000 ppmMBE < ±32,0 µV/V
< ±0,8%MBE < ±8000 ppmMBE < ±32,0 µV/V
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
< 960 ppmMBE
< 3920 ppmMBE
< 7840 ppmMBE
Gain/scale/ EGain amplification deviation (at 23°C)
< 160 ppm
< 440 ppm
< 880 ppm
Non-linearity ELin over the whole measuring range
< 200 ppmMBE
< 650 ppmMBE
< 1300 ppmMBE
Repeatability ERep (at 23°C)
< 25 ppmMBE
< 100 ppmMBE
< 200 ppmMBE
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP < 310 ppmMBE < 2422 digits < 9,92 µV/V
ENoise, RMS < 50 ppmMBE < 391 digits < 1,60 µV/V
< 1200 ppmMBE < 9375 digits < 9,60 µV/V
< 200 ppmMBE < 1563 digits < 1,60 µV/V
< 2400 ppmMBE < 18750 digits < 9,60 µV/V
< 400 ppmMBE < 3125 digits < 1,60 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 86,0 dB
> 74,0 dB
> 68,0 dB
Noisede
nsity@1 kHz
< 0.02
< 0.02
< 0.02
2 mV/V 5) FSV (comp.) ±2 mV/V [corresponds to ±4,000 µ at K=2] 120 ± 0.96 2 mV/V
±2.147... mV/V
0,128 ppm 0,256 nV/V 0,119... ppm 0,238375 nV/V < ±0,32%MBE < ±3200 ppmMBE < ±6,4 µV/V
< ±1,6%MBE < ±16000 ppmMBE < ±32,0 µV/V
< 15680 ppmMBE
< 1760 ppm
< 2600 ppmMBE
< 400 ppmMBE
< 4800 ppmMBE < 37500 digits < 9,60 µV/V < 800 ppmMBE < 6250 digits < 1,60 µV/V > tbd dB
< 0.02
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
265
Product overview
Measurement mode SG 1/4-Bridge 120 (3 wire)
32 mV/V FSV
8 mV/V FSV
Noise (with ENoise, PtP < 24 ppmMBE
50 Hz FIR
< 188 digits
filter, at 23°C)
< 0,77 µV/V
ENoise, RMS < 4,0 ppmMBE < 31 digits
< 0,13 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 108,0 dB
Common-mode
tbd
rejection ratio (without
filtering)3
Common-mode
tbd
rejection ratio (with
50Hz filtering)3
Temperature TcGain coefficient TcOffset
< 20 ppm/K
< 50 ppmMBE/K < 1,60 µV/V/K
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
tbd %FSV typ.
< 72 ppmMBE < 563 digits < 0,58 µV/V < 12,0 ppmMBE < 94 digits < 0,10 µV/V > 98,4 dB
tbd
tbd
< 48 ppm/K < 180 ppmMBE/K < 1,44 µV/V/K tbd %FSV typ.
4 mV/V 5) FSV (comp.) < 144 ppmMBE < 1125 digits < 0,58 µV/V < 24,0 ppmMBE < 188 digits < 0,10 µV/V > 92,4 dB
tbd
tbd
< 96 ppm/K < 360 ppmMBE/K < 1,44 µV/V/K tbd %FSV typ.
2 mV/V 5) FSV (comp.) < 288 ppmMBE < 2250 digits < 0,58 µV/V < 48,0 ppmMBE < 375 digits < 0,10 µV/V > 86,4 dB
tbd
tbd
< 192 ppm/K < 720 ppmMBE/K < 1,44 µV/V/K tbd %FSV typ.
266
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
(Preliminary information)
Measurement mode SG 1/4-Bridge 350 (3 wire)
32 mV/V FSV
8 mV/V FSV
4 mV/V FSV (comp.)
Measuring range, nominal
±32 mV/V
±8 mV/V
±4 mV/V
[corresponds to [corresponds to [corresponds to
±64,000 µ at K=2] ±16,000 µ at K=2] ±8,000 µ at K=2]
350 ± 44.8
350 ± 11.2
350 ± 15.6
Measuring range, end 32 mV/V value (FSV)
8 mV/V
4 mV/V
Measuring range, technically usable
±34.359... mV/V ±8.589... mV/V
±4.294... mV/V
PDO resolution
24 Bit (incl. sign) 24 Bit (incl. sign) 24 Bit (incl. sign)
PDO LSB (Extended 4.096 nV/V Range)
1.024 nV/V
0.512 nV/V
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
3.814.. nV/V
0.9535 nV/V
0.47675 nV/V
Basic accuracy:
< ±0,022%MBE
Measuring deviation at < ±220 ppmMBE
23°C, with averaging, < ±7,0 µV/V
without offset 2)
< ±0,08%MBE < ±800 ppmMBE < ±6,4 µV/V
< ±0,16%MBE < ±1600 ppmMBE < ±6,4 µV/V
Basic accuracy:
< ±0,1%MBE
Measuring deviation at < ±1000 ppmMBE
23°C, with averaging, < ±32,0 µV/V
with offset 2)
< ±0,4%MBE < ±4000 ppmMBE < ±32,0 µV/V
< ±0,8%MBE < ±8000 ppmMBE < ±32,0 µV/V
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
< 970 ppmMBE
< 3920 ppmMBE
< 7840 ppmMBE
Gain/scale/ EGain amplification deviation (at 23°C)
< 120 ppm
< 380 ppm
< 760 ppm
Non-linearity ELin over the whole measuring range
< 180 ppmMBE
< 690 ppmMBE
< 1380 ppmMBE
Repeatability ERep (at 23°C)
< 25 ppmMBE
< 100 ppmMBE
< 200 ppmMBE
Noise (without filtering, at 23°C)
ENoise, PtP < 320 ppmMBE < 2500 digits < 10,24 µV/V
ENoise, RMS < 55 ppmMBE < 430 digits < 1,76 µV/V
< 1200 ppmMBE < 9375 digits < 9,60 µV/V
< 200 ppmMBE < 1563 digits < 1,60 µV/V
< 2400 ppmMBE < 18750 digits < 9,60 µV/V
< 400 ppmMBE < 3125 digits < 1,60 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 85,2 dB
> 74,0 dB
> 68,0 dB
Noisede
nsity@1 kHz
<0.02
< 0.02
< 0.02
2 mV/V FSV (comp.) ±2 mV/V [corresponds to ±4,000 µ at K=2] 350 ± 2.8 2 mV/V
±2.147... mV/V
24 Bit (incl. sign) 0.256 nV/V
0.238375 nV/V
< ±0,32%MBE < ±3200 ppmMBE < ±6,4 µV/V
< ±1,6%MBE < ±16000 ppmMBE < ±32,0 µV/V
< 15680 ppmMBE
< 1520 ppm
< 2760 ppmMBE
< 400 ppmMBE
< 4800 ppmMBE < 37500 digits < 9,60 µV/V < 800 ppmMBE < 6250 digits < 1,60 µV/V > 61,9 dB
< 0.02
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
267
Product overview
Measurement mode SG 1/4-Bridge 350 (3 wire)
32 mV/V FSV
8 mV/V FSV
Noise (with ENoise, PtP < 18 ppmMBE
50 Hz FIR
< 141 digits
filter, at 23°C)
< 0,58 µV/V
ENoise, RMS < 3,0 ppmMBE < 23 digits
< 0,10 µV/V
Max. SNR
> 110,5 dB
Common-mode
tbd
rejection ratio (without
filtering)3
Common-mode
tbd
rejection ratio (with
50Hz filtering)3
Temperature TcGain coefficient TcOffset
< 12 ppm/K
< 30 ppmMBE/K < 0,96 µV/V/K
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
tbd %FSV typ.
< 72 ppmMBE < 563 digits < 0,58 µV/V < 12,0 ppmMBE < 94 digits < 0,10 µV/V > 98,4 dB
tbd
tbd
< 50 ppm/K < 110 ppmMBE/K < 0,88 µV/V/K tbd %FSV typ.
4 mV/V FSV (comp.) < 144 ppmMBE < 1125 digits < 0,58 µV/V < 24,0 ppmMBE < 188 digits < 0,10 µV/V > 92,4 dB
tbd
tbd
< 100 ppm/K < 220 ppmMBE/K < 0,88 µV/V/K tbd %FSV typ.
2 mV/V FSV (comp.) < 288 ppmMBE < 2250 digits < 0,58 µV/V < 48,0 ppmMBE < 375 digits < 0,10 µV/V > 86,4 dB
tbd
tbd
< 200 ppm/K < 440 ppmMBE/K < 0,88 µV/V/K tbd %FSV typ.
2) In real bridge measurement, an offset adjustment is usually carried out after installation. The given offset specification of the terminal is therefore practically irrelevant. Therefore, specification values with and without offset are given here. In practice, the offset component can be eliminated by the terminal functions Tare and also ZeroOffset or in the controller by a higher-level tare function. The offset deviation of a bridge measurement over time can change, therefore Beckhoff recommends a regular offset adjustment or careful observation of the change.
3) Values refer to common-mode interference between SGND and internal GND.
4) The offset specification does not apply to 2-wire operation, since the offset is increased on the device side. Offset adjustment is recommended, see Tare or Zero offset function.
5) The channel measures electrically to 8 mV/V, but displays its measured value scaled to 2 or 4 mV/V. The Compensated function facilitates measurement of low levels even with high offset.
NOTE
Transition resistances of the terminal contacts
The transition resistance values of the terminal contacts affect the measurement. The measuring accuracy can be further increased by a user-side adjustment with the signal connection plugged in.
The temperature sensitivity of the terminal and thus of the measurement setup can be reduced if an external, more temperature-stable supplementary resistor is used for terminal operation in half-bridge or even fullbridge mode instead of the internal supplementary resistor for quarter-bridge mode.
To calculate the quarter-bridge:
268
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
R2/3/4 are the terminal-internal switchable supplementary resistors, R1 is the (nominally equal-sized) variable quarter-bridge. The strain relationship (µStrain, µ) is as follows:
For the quarter-bridge, N=1 always applies. The relationship between UBridge/UExc and R1 is non-linear:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
269
Product overview
The ELM350x devices apply internal linearization so that the output is already linearized since the internal calculation is based on UExc'.
270
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
3.11.2.10 Measurement IEPE 10 V/ 20 V/ ±2,5 V..±10 V
Product overview
3.11.2.10.1 IEPE high pass properties
For optional regulation of the IEPE bias voltage, the ELM370x has an adjustable 1 st order high-pass filter.
For an explanation of the terms AC and DC, refer to the chapter "Analog notes dynamic signals" [} 616].
The input channels can be operated in principle in the operation mode AC coupling or DC coupling, see chapter "IEPE AC Coupling":
· AC coupling: the arbitrary input signal is fed via a high-pass filter, after which only the corresponding alternating component (AC) remains for the digital processing inside the terminal.
· DC coupling: the arbitrary input signal is digitally processed "as it is", irrespective of whether or not it has an alternating component (AC).
DC restriction
Only AC coupling is possible in the three measuring ranges "IEPE ±10 V" (97), "IEPE ±5 V" (98) and "IEPE ±2.5 V" (99). If voltages with a DCcomponent (offset) are to be measured, the voltage measuring ranges "U ±10 V" (2), "U ±5 V" (3) and "U ±2.5 V" (4) must be used instead. The respective measuring range index number is given in the brackets.
The typical frequency behavior in the measuring range 2.5 V is as follows:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
271
Product overview
272
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Note: if other dynamic filter properties are desired, you can proceed as follows: · Operate the ELM370x terminal in the measuring range "0..20 V" · Deactivate IEPE AC coupling in the respective channel
· The channel now measures with 23 bits + sign over 20 V, i.e. including the bias voltage, which is normally 10..16 V. With the implementation of a high-pass on the user side by means of TwinCAT programming (inside the PLC), the bias component (DC component) is now consequently to be suppressed on the controller side. The now reduced signal resolution of the measuring range ±2.5 V with 24 bits to 20 V with 23 bits must be considered. In return for that, the user obtains full digital control over the measuring behavior in the lower frequency range.
3.11.2.10.2 Measurement ±10 V, 0...10 V
Measurement mode
±10 V
Internal resistance
>4 M differential
Impedance
Value to follow
Measuring range, nominal
-10...+10 V *)
Measuring range, end value (full scale 10 V value)
Measuring range, technically usable -10.737...+10.737 V
0...10 V 0...10 V 0...10.737 V
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
273
Product overview
Measurement mode PDO resolution
PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
±10 V
0...10 V
24 Bit (including 16 Bit (including 24 Bit (including 16 Bit (including
sign)
sign)
sign)
sign)
1.28 µV
327.68 µV
1.28 µV
327.68 µV
1.192.. µV
305.18.. µV 1.192.. µV
305.18.. µV
*) For IEPE measurement applies: The input voltage must not fall below -5 V with respect to GND, the measuring accuracy is then no longer given. This means a measurement down to -10 V with respect to GND is only possible if at the same time an offset of at least +5 V is applied, as is usual with IEPE supply.
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at 23°C)
EOffset
Gain/scale/amplification deviation EGain (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole
ELin
measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
±10 V, 0...10 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 60 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 100 ppmFSV < 18 ppmFSV > 94.9 dB
< 781 [digits] < 141 [digits]
< 2.55
< 10 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 78 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB 1 kHz: >80 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB 1 kHz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
274
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 103: Representation ±10 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
Fig. 104: Representation 0...10 V measurement range
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot.
If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
275
Product overview
3.11.2.10.3 Measurement ±5 V
Measurement mode
±5 V
0...5 V
Internal resistance
>4 M differential
Impedance
Value to follow
Measuring range, nominal
-5...+5 V
0...5 V
Measuring range, end value (full scale 5 V value)
Measuring range, technically usable -5.368...+5.368 V
0... 5.368 V
PDO resolution
24 Bit (including 16 Bit (including 24 Bit (including 16 Bit (including
sign)
sign)
sign)
sign)
PDO LSB (Extended Range)
640 nV
163.84 µV
640 nV
163.84 µV
PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
596.. nV
152.59.. µV 596.. nV
152.59.. µV
Fig. 105: Representation ±5 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
276
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
3.11.2.10.4 Measurement ±2.5 V
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range) PDO LSB (Legacy Range)
Product overview
±2.5 V >4 M differential Value to follow -2.5...+2.5 V 2.5 V -2.684...+2.684 V 24 bit (including sign) 320 nV 298.. nV
16 bit (including sign) 81.92 µV 76.29.. µV
Fig. 106: Representation ±2.5 V measurement range
Note: In Extended Range Mode the Underrange/Overrange display in the PDO status has the character of an information/warning when the nominal measuring range is exceeded, i.e. no Error is displayed in the PDO status and LED. If the technical measuring range is also exceeded, Error = TRUE is also displayed. The detection limit for Underrange/Overrange Error can be set in the CoE. In Legacy Range mode, an Underrange/Overrange event also leads to an Error in the PDO status.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
277
Product overview
3.11.2.10.5 Measurement 0...20 V
Measurement mode Internal resistance Impedance Measuring range, nominal Measuring range, end value (full scale value) Measuring range, technically usable PDO resolution PDO LSB (Extended Range)
0...20 V >4 M differential Value to follow 0...20 V 20 V 0...+21.474 V 23 bit (unsigned) 2.56 µV
15 bit (unsigned) 655.36 µV
Preliminary specifications:
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measuring deviation at 23°C, with averaging
Offset/Zero Point deviation (at EOffset 23°C)
Gain/scale/amplification
EGain
deviation (at 23°C)
Non-linearity over the whole ELin measuring range
Repeatability Noise (without filtering)
ERep ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Noisedensity@1kHz
Noise (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
ENoise, PtP ENoise, RMS Max. SNR
Temperature coefficient
TcGain
TcOffset
Common-mode rejection ratio (without filtering)
Common-mode rejection ratio (with 50Hz FIR filtering)
Largest short-term deviation during a specified electrical interference test
0...20 V < ±0.01% = 100 ppmFSV typ.
< 70 ppmFSV
< 60 ppm
< 25 ppmFSV
< 20 ppmFSV < 100 ppmFSV < 18 ppmFSV > 94.9 dB
< 781 [digits] < 141 [digits]
< 2.55
< 10 ppmFSV < 2.0 ppmFSV > 114.0 dB
< 78 [digits] < 16 [digits]
< 8 ppm/K typ.
< 5 ppmFSV/K typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >105 dB
typ.
typ.
DC: >115 dB 50 Hz: >115 dB
typ.
typ.
±0.03% = 300 ppmFSV typ.
1 kHz: >80 dB typ.
1 kHz: >115 dB typ.
278
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Fig. 107: Representation 0...20 V measurement range
Note: The channel also works in electrically bipolar mode and records negative values in the unipolar measuring ranges (measurement from 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA, 0 ). This enables the channel to provide a precise diagnosis even with signals < 0. In these measuring ranges the limit value for the "Underrange Error" in Extended Mode is -1% of the full scale value (FSV). The limit value can be set in CoE object 0x80n0:32 [} 312]. This avoids irritating error messages if the channel is not wired (e.g. without sensor) or the electrical signal fluctuates slightly around zero. The process data value of 0x00000000 is not undershot. If the "UnderrangeError" detection is to be set even less sensitive, the magnitude of the negative limit value in the CoE object referred to above can be set even higher.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
279
Product overview
3.11.2.11 Thermocouple measurement NOTE
Thermocouple basics
The following sections assume that the reader is familiar with the contents of the chapter on "Fundamentals of thermocouple technology".
Application to ELM370x The ELM370x supports voltage measurement and conversion of various thermocouple types, see following list. For voltage measurement, the specified electrical measuring range specified for the respective TC type is used.
TC measuring range
Fig. 108: Chart: TC measuring range
In temperature mode, only the legacy range is available, the extended range is not available.
The temperature display in [°C/digit] (e.g. 0.1°/digit or 0.01°/digit) is independent from the electrical measurement. It is "just" a display setting and results from the PDO setting, see chapter "Comissioning".
TC types supported by the ELM370x (from FW02): · A-1 0...2500°C · A-2 0...1800°C · A-3 0...1800°C · Au/Pt 0...1000°C · B 200...1820°C · C 0...2320°C · D 0...2490°C · E -270...1000°C · G 1000...2300°C · J -210...1200°C · K -270...1372°C · L -50...900°C · N -270...1300°C · P (PLII) 0...1395°C · Pt/Pd 0...1500°C · R -50...1768°C · S -50...1768°C · T -270...400°C · U -50...600°C
280
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
The specification data for each type are listed below.
Product overview
3.11.2.11.1 TC measurement with Beckhoff terminals
Thermocouple specification and conversion
Temperature measurement with thermocouples generally comprises three steps: · Measuring the electrical voltage, · optional: Temperature measurement of the internal cold junction, · optional: Software-based conversion of the voltage into a temperature value according to the set thermocouple type (K, J, ...).
All three steps can take place locally in the Beckhoff measuring device. Device-based transformation can be disabled if the conversion is to take place in the higher-level control system. Depending on the device type, several thermocouple conversions are available, which differ in terms of their software implementation.
For Beckhoff thermocouple measuring devices this means that · a specification of the electrical voltage measurement is provided and · based on this, the effect on temperature measurement is specified depending on the supported thermocouple type. Note that thermocouple characteristic curves are always realized as higher-order equations or by a sampling points table in the software, therefore a direct, linear U T transfer only makes sense in a narrow range.
Data for the sensor types in the following table
The values for the sensor types listed in the following table are shown here merely for informative purposes as an orientation aid. All data are given without guarantee and must be cross-checked against the data sheet for the respective sensor employed.
The thermocouple measurement consists of a chain of measuring and computing elements that affect the attainable measurement deviation:
The given voltage specification is decisive for the achievable temperature measuring accuracy. It is applied to the possible thermocouple types in the following.
On account of
· the strong non-linearity that exists with thermocouple, which suggests a meaningful use of a thermocouple in a limited temperature range (if possible)
· influence of the possibly used internal cold junction · the possible use of an external cold junction, the specification of which is not known at this point, and · the influence of the ambient temperature on the analog input device used in the voltage and cold
junction measurement (leads to a change in Tmeasured due to Tambient)
detailed temperature specification tables are not given below, but rather
· one short table per thermocouple type
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
281
Product overview
indicating the electrical measuring range used in the voltage measurement
indicating the entire technically usable measuring range supported by the device. This is also the linearization range of the temperature transformation, usually the application range of the respective thermocouple specified in the standards. Note: the electrical measuring range is designed to cover the entire linearization range. The entire temperature measuring range can therefore be used
with specification of the measuring range recommended by Beckhoff for this type. It is a subset of the technically usable measuring range and covers the measuring range commonly used in industry in which a relatively good measurement uncertainty is achieved. Since thermocouples have a non-linear characteristic curve across the entire implemented linearization range as shown in the chapter on thermocouple principles, the specification of measurement uncertainty over this entire range as the so-called basic accuracy would be unrealistic and even misleading. A much better uncertainty is achieved in the temperature range commonly used in industry. Nevertheless, it is of course possible to use the device outside of the "recommended measuring range" (but within the "technically usable measuring range")
with the specified measurement uncertainty in the "recommended measuring range" at an ambient temperature of 23 °C and 55 °C, where the measurement uncertainty at 55 °C corresponds to the value for 23 °C ±32 °C. Thus, the measurement uncertainty at other ambient temperatures in the recommended measuring range can be approximately interpolated or extrapolated. The values can also be taken from the specification plot. Attention when determining the TC [K/Kamb] (temperature coefficient): the specified values do not necessarily have to be available for the same Tsens! To determine TC, read the measurement uncertainty values from the plot at Tsens and calculate TC.
· the "Specification Plot": a comprehensive specification statement as a graphical representation of the measurement uncertainty for Tsens at the two aforementioned ambient temperatures and additionally 39 °C in the entire technically usable measuring range. The representation of the measurement uncertainty at 39 °C ambient temperatures (mean temperature between 23 °C and 55 °C) shows the non-linear influence of the temperature on the measurement uncertainty. If accuracy values outside of the "recommended measuring range" are required, they can thus be read graphically here.
· some formulas to calculate further parameters (offset/gain/non-linearity/repeatability/nois) from the specification at the desired operation point if required
Notes on the calculation of detailed specifications
If further specifications are of interest, they can or must be calculated from the values given in the voltage specification.
The sequence:
· General: The conversion is explained here only for one measuring point (a certain input signal); the steps simply have to be repeated in case of several measuring points (up to the entire measuring range).
· The determination of the entire temperature error at a measuring point results from two steps
Determination of the temperature error from the error of the voltage measurement
Determination of the error by the cold junction measurement at the temperature of the measuring point
Note: Due to the non-linearity of the thermocouples, it is not possible to easily add the temperature errors
· If the measured voltage is not known at the measured temperature measuring point, the measured value (MV) must be determined in [mV]: MW = RMeasuring point (TMeasuring ) point with the help of an UT table
· The deviation is calculated at this voltage value
Via the total equation
or a single value, e.g. FSingle = 15 ppmFSV
282
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
the measurement uncertainty in [mV] must be calculated: F (U voltage measuring ) point =FTotal(Umeasuring ) point *FSV or: F (U voltage measuring ) point =FSingle(Umeasuring ) point *FSV or (if already known) e.g.: F (U voltage measuring ) point =0.003 mV
Also, for the calculation of the cold junction error required for further calculations, the entire error must be calculated using the above equation.
· The slope at the point used must then be determined: UproK(Tmeasuring ) point = [U(Tmeasuring point + 1 °C) - U(Tmeasuring point )] / 1 °C with the help of an UT table
· The cold junction error is given as a temperature in °C. The temperature error must then be converted into a voltage error in [mV] via the slope at the temperature measuring point: F (T ) CJC, U measuring point =FCJC, T * UproK(Tmeasuring ) point
· The combined error in [mV] must then be calculated using a square addition of the voltage error and the cold junction error:
· For calibrated thermocouples, the thermocouple error can also be included at this point in order to determine the combined error of the entire system in [mV]. For this purpose, all three error influences in [mV] (voltage, cold junction, thermocouple) must be added squarely.
· The temperature measurement uncertainty can be calculated via the voltage measurement uncertainty and the slope F (U Temp measuring ) point = (F (T )) voltage+CJC measuring point / (UproK(Tmeasuring point))
The numerical values used in the following three examples are for illustration purposes. The specification values given in the technical data remain authoritative.
Sample 1:
Basic accuracy of an ELM3704 at 35 °C ambient, measurement of 400 °C with thermocouple type K, without noise and aging influences:
Tmeasuring point = 400 °C
MW = UType K, 400°C = 16.397 mV
= 100.196 ppmFSV F (U Voltage measuring ) point = 100.196 ppmFSV * 80 mV = 8.016 µV UperK(Tmeasuring ) point = (U(401 °C) - U(400 °C)) / (1 °C) = 42.243 µV/°C FCJC, T = tbd. FCJC, (T U measuring ) point = tbd °C * 42.243 µV/°C = tbd µV FVoltage+CJC = tbd. FELM3704@35°C, type K, 400°C = (Fvoltage+CJC µV)/( 42.243 µV/°C) tbd °C (means ±tbd °C)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
283
Product overview
Sample 2: Consideration of the repeatability alone under the above conditions: Tmeasuring point = 400 °C MW=Umeasuring point (400 °C) = 16.397 mV FSingle = 20 ppmFSV FVoltage = 20 ppmFSV * 80 mV = 1.6 µV UperK(Tmeasuring ) point = (U(401 °C) - U(400 °C)) / (1 °C) = 42.243 µV/°C FCJC, single = tbd °C FCJC, Single, (T U measuring ) point = tbd °C * 42.243 µV/°C = tbd µV FVoltage+CJC = tbd. F (U Temp measuring ) point = (Fvoltage+CJC µV)/( 42.243 µV/°C) tbd °C (means ±tbd °C)
Sample 3: Consideration of the RMS noise alone without filter under the above conditions: Tmeasuring point = 400 °C MW=Umeasuring point (400 °C) = 16.397 mV FSingle = 37 ppmFSV FVoltage = 37 ppmFSV * 80 mV = 2.96 µV UperK(Tmeasuring ) point = (U(401 °C) - U(400 °C)) / (1 °C) = 42.243 µV/°C FCJC, single = tbd °C FCJC, Single, (T U measuring ) point = tbd °C * 42.243 µV/°C = tbd µV FVoltage+CJC = tbd. F (U Temp measuring ) point = (Fvoltage+CJC µV)/( 42.243 µV/°C) tbd °C (means ±tbd °C)
3.11.2.11.2 Specification of the thermocouple measurement
The following tables with the TC specification apply only when using the internal cold junction. In the ELM370x, each channel has its own cold junction sensor. The ELM370x can also be used with an external cold junction if required. The uncertainties must then be determined for the external cold junction on the application side. The temperature value of the external cold junction must then be communicated to the ELM370x via the process data for its own calculation. The effect on the TC measurement must then be calculated on the system side. Thermal stabilization The specification values for the measurement of the cold junction given here apply only if the following times are adhered to for thermal stabilization at constant ambient temperature
· after switching on: 60 min · after changing wiring/connectors: 15 min Ambient air in motion
284
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
For a constant TC measurement, thermally stable environmental conditions around the ELM terminal are important. Air movements around the terminal with a possibly varying air temperature must be avoided. If these are unavoidable, the separately available ZS91000003 shielding hood should be used for thermal shielding. The following specification was created without a shielding hood in a quiet environment.
Fig. 109: ZS9100-0003 shielding hood
Wire cross-section
Depending on the temperature gradient, the TC wire supplies heat to the ELM connector or removes heat from it. Even under thermally constant conditions, this leads to an offset deviation. If very accurate measurement is required, this can have a disruptive effect. The above values apply to a wire thickness of 0.2 mm (0.0314 mm²). For thicker wires up to 0.4 mm, up to 0.5 °C measurement uncertainty can additional arise, see the following sample measurement series:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
285
Product overview
Fig. 110: Additional deviation over TC wire diameter, with shielding hood
Specification of the internal cold junction measurement
Measurement mode
Basic accuracy: Measurement deviation at 23 °C, with averaging
Repeatability
ERep
Temperature coefficient
Tc
Cold junction < ±0.6 °C
< tbd °C < tbd K/K typ.
286
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
In the following, the achievable temperature measurement uncertainty is now specified for the individual TC types, listed by type in ascending order.
Note: Preliminary values printed in italics
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type A-1 ± 80 mV 0°C ... +250°C +2500 °C
+100°C ... +2000°C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.83 K ± 0.03 %FSV
± 2.7 K ± 0.11 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type A-1:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
287
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type A-2 ± 80 mV 0 °C ... +1800 °C +1800 °C
+100°C ... +1600°C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.76 K ± 0.04 %FSV
± 2.3 K ± 0.13 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type A-2:
288
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type A-3 ± 80 mV +0 °C ... +1800 °C +1800 °C
+100°C ... +1600°C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.76 K ± 0.04 %FSV
± 2.3 K ± 0.13 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type A-3:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
289
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type Au/Pt ± 80 mV +0 °C ... +1000 °C +1000 °C
+250°C ... +1000°C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.64 K ± 0.06 %FSV
± 1.3 K ± 0.13 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type Au/Pt:
290
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Measurement uncertainty for TC type B:
Type B ± 80 mV +200 °C 0.178 mV ... +1820 °C 13.820 mV +1820 °C
750 °C ... +1800 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.98 K ± 0.05 %FSV
± 3.7 K ± 0.20 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
291
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type C ± 80 mV 0 °C 0 mV ... +2320 °C 37.107 mV +2320 °C
0 °C ... +2000 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.78 K ± 0.03 %FSV
± 2.4 K ± 0.10 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type C:
292
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type D ± 80 mV +0 ° ... +2490 °C +2490 °C
+0°C ... +2200°C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.6 K ± 0.02 %FSV
± 0.81 K ± 0.03 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type D:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
293
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Measurement uncertainty for TC type E:
Type E ± 80 mV -270 °C -9.835 mV ... +1000 °C 76.373 mV +1000 °C
-100 °C ... +1000 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.61 K ± 0.06 %FSV
± 0.96 K ± 0.10 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
294
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type G ± 80 mV +1000 ° ... +2300 °C +2300 °C
+1000°C ... +2300°C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.6 K ± 0.026 %FSV
± 0.79 K ± 0.034 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type G:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
295
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Measurement uncertainty for TC type J:
Type J ± 80 mV -210 °C -8.095 mV ... +1200 °C +69.553 mV +1200 °C
-100 °C ... +1200 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.62 K ± 0.05 %FSV
± 1.0 K ± 0.08 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
296
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Measurement uncertainty for TC type K:
Type K ± 80 mV -270 °C -6.458 mV ... 1372 °C 54.886 mV +1372 °C
-100 °C ... +1000 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.63 K ± 0.05 %FSV
± 1.1 K ± 0.08 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
297
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Measurement uncertainty for TC type L:
Type L ± 80 mV -50 °C -2.510 mV ... +900 °C 52.430 mV +900 °C
0 °C ... +900 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.61 K ± 0.07 %FSV
± 0.92 K ± 0.10 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
298
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type N ± 80 mV -270 °C -4.346 mV ... +1300 °C 47.513 mV +1300 °C
0 °C ... +1200 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.64 K ± 0.05 %FSV
± 1.3 K ± 0.10 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type N:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
299
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Measurement uncertainty for TC type P:
Type P ± 80 mV +0 °C ... +1395 °C +1395 °C
+0°C ... +1300°C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.63 K ± 0.05 %FSV
± 1.2 K ± 0.09 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
300
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type Pt/Pd ± 80 mV +0 °C ... +1500 °C +1500 °C
+500°C ... +1500°C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.65 K ± 0.04 %FSV
± 1.4 K ± 0.09 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type Pt/Pd:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
301
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type R ± 80 mV -50 °C -0.226 mV ... +1768 °C 21.101 mV +1768 °C
250 °C ... +1700 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.85 K ± 0.05 %FSV
± 2.9 K ± 0.16 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type R:
302
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Measurement uncertainty for TC type S:
Type S ± 80 mV -50 °C -0.236 mV ... +1768 °C 18.693 mV +1768 °C
250 °C ... +1700 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.87 K ± 0.05 %FSV
± 3.1 K ± 0.18 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
303
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Measurement uncertainty for TC type T:
Type T ± 80 mV -270 °C -6.258 mV .... +400 °C 20.872 mV +400 °C
-100 °C ... +400 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.63 K ± 0.16 %FSV
± 1.2 K ± 0.30 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
304
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Temperature measurement TC
Electrical measuring range used
Measuring range, technically usable
Measuring range, end value (full scale value)
Measuring range, recommended
PDO LSB
Uncertainty in the recommended measuring range, with averaging
@ 23 °C ambient temperature
@ 55 °C ambient temperature
Temperature coefficient (Change of the measured value by changing of the terminal ambient temperature)
Type U ± 80 mV -50 °C -1.850 mV ... +600 °C 33.600 mV +600 °C
0 °C ... +600 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C/digit, depending on PDO setting ± 0.62 K ± 0.10 %FSV
± 1.0 K ± 0.17 %FSV
Because the value is strongly dependent by the sensor temperature as shown on the bottom given specification plot, it has to be basically derived by the specification plot. For a better approach the measurement uncertainty at Tambient=39°C as the middle between 23°C and 55°C is additionally informative represented in order to clarify the non-linear course.
Measurement uncertainty for TC type U:
3.12 Start
For commissioning: · The terminal is to be mounted as described in the chapter Mounting and wiring. · The terminal in TwinCAT is to be configured as described in the chapter Commissioning.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
305
Product overview
3.13 Similar products
Comparative overview of Beckhoff SG devices
The following table is intended to provide a quick overview of the available Beckhoff EtherCAT devices for the direct connection of mV/V sensors (strain gauges, scales, vibration sensors). The values may be shortened extracts from the respective documentation, which is decisive and recommended for detailed analysis.
Version: 2020/12. For a possibly more up-to-date overview, please consult www.beckhoff.com.
KL3351
Design K-bus terminal IP20
Number of SG channels
1
Connection technology
Cage Clamp
Resolution Oversampling
16 bit
-
KL3356
K-bus terminal IP20
1
Cage Clamp
16 bit
-
EL3351
EtherCAT terminal IP20 1
Cage Clamp
16 bit
-
EL3356
EtherCAT terminal IP20 1
Cage Clamp
16 bit
-
EL3356-0010 EtherCAT terminal IP20 1
Cage Clamp
24 bit
-
EL3356-0090 EtherCAT terminal IP20 1
Cage Clamp
24 bit
-
EL3751
EtherCAT terminal IP20 1
Cage Clamp
24 bit
X
ELM3502, ELM3504
ELM3702, ELM3704
ELM3542, ELM3544
EP3356-0022
EtherCAT terminal IP20 2/4
EtherCAT terminal IP20 2/4
EtherCAT Box IP67
1
K-bus terminal IP20
1
Push-In, LEMO
24 bit
X
Push-In
24 bit
X
M8
24 bit
-
Cage Clamp
16 bit
-
ELX3351
K-bus terminal IP20
1
Cage Clamp
16 bit
-
Continuation:
Full bridge
KL3351
X
KL3356
X
EL3351
X
EL3356
X
EL3356-0010 X
EL3356-0090 X
EL3751
X
Half bridge
Quarter bridge Maximum sampling rate per channel for control
only with external only with external 15 sps
supplement
supplement
only with external only with external 250 sps
supplement
supplement
only with external only with external 400 sps
supplement
supplement
only with external only with external 100 sps
supplement
supplement
only with external only with external 10,000 sps
supplement
supplement
only with external only with external 10,000 sps
supplement
supplement
X
X
10,000 sps
Measurement uncertainty of the FSV in the SG modes *) < ±0.1 %
< ±0.1 %
< ±0.1 %
< ±0.01 % for the calculated load value **) < ±0.01 % for the calculated load value **) < ±0.01 % for the calculated load value **) up to < ±0.05 %
ELM3502,
X
ELM3504
ELM3702,
X
ELM3704
ELM3542,
X
ELM3544
EP3356-0022 X
ELX3351
X
X
X
10,000 / 20,000 sps
X
X
1,000 sps
only with external only with external 10,000 sps
supplement
supplement
only with external only with external 15 sps
supplement
supplement
only with external only with external 625 sps
supplement
supplement
up to < ±0.0025 %
up to < ±0.01 %
< ±0.01 % for the calculated load value < ±0.1 %
< ±0.5 % for the calculated load value
306
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
*) on this point in particular, the additional information in the respective device documentation must be evaluated. **) remaining linearity uncertainty after costumer made offset and gain adjustment.
Continuation:
KL3351
Bridge voltage
Feed voltage
up to ±16 mV up to ±10 V
KL3356
up to ±20 mV up to ±12 V
Supported nominal characteristic values
all, conversion must be carried out in the controller / PLC
Adjustable in steps of 1 mV/V
Bridge supply integrated Yes, 5 V
-
Distributed Clocks for timestamp operation -
-
EL3351
up to ±20 mV up to ±12 V all, conversion must be carried Yes, 5 V
-
out in the controller / PLC
EL3356
up to ±27 mV up to ±13.8 V Adjustable 0.5 to 4 mV/V
-
-
EL3356-0010 up to ±27 mV up to ±13.8 V Adjustable 0.5 to 4 mV/V
-
X
EL3356-0090 up to ±27 mV up to ±13.8 V Adjustable 0.5 to 4 mV/V
-
X
EL3751
ELM3502, ELM3504 ELM3702, ELM3704 ELM3542, ELM3544 EP3356-0022
ELX3351
up to ±160 mV up to ±5 V up to ±160 mV up to ±5 V up to ±160 mV up to ±5 V up to ±160 mV up to ±5 V
32/16 mV/V 32/8/4/2 mV/V 32/8/4/2 mV/V Adjustable 0.5 to 4 mV/V
Yes, adjustable up to X 5 V
Yes, adjustable up to X 5 V
Yes, adjustable up to X 12 V
Yes, 10 V
X
up to ±16 mV up to ±10 V all, conversion must be carried Yes, 5 V
-
out in the controller / PLC
up to ±18 mV up to ±10 V Adjustable 0.5 to 4 mV/V
Yes, 10 V
-
Continuation:
KL3351
TwinSAFE SC Extended diagnosis
-
-
Various predefined Other digital filters internal digital filters
X
-
Special features -
KL3356
-
-
X
-
Auto-calibration
EL3351
-
-
X
-
-
EL3356
-
-
X
-
Auto-calibration
EL3356-0010 EL3356-0090 X
-
X
-
X
Dynamic filter -
Auto-calibration, various dynamic functions, calibrated version EL33560030 available
Auto-calibration
EL3751
-
ELM3502,
-
ELM3504
ELM3702,
-
ELM3704
ELM3542,
-
ELM3544
EP3356-0022 -
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
Freely parameterizable with TwinCAT Filter Designer
Freely parameterizable Calibrated version
with TwinCAT
ELM350x-0030 available
Filter Designer
Freely parameterizable with TwinCAT Filter Designer
-
Auto-calibration
-
-
ELX3351
-
-
X
-
-
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
307
Product overview
Comparative overview of Beckhoff thermocouple (TC) devices
The following table is intended to provide a quick overview of the available Beckhoff EtherCAT devices for the direct connection of thermocouples for temperature and mV measurement. The values may be shortened extracts from the respective documentation, which is decisive and recommended for detailed analysis.
All devices feature:
· transformation of the best-known TC types; Note: the measuring ranges implemented can vary slightly in the endpoints,
· wire break detection, · internal cold junction.
NOTE Measurement uncertainty in TC measurement
The measurement uncertainty in the table is only a rough orientating value, since it depends strongly on the TC type and the measuring temperature; details in the respective documentation.
Version: 2020/12. For a possibly more up-to-date overview, please consult www.beckhoff.com.
Design
KL3311, KL3312, K-bus terminal IP20 KL3314
Number of TC Connection technology Resolution channels
1-4
Cage Clamp
0.1 °C
Maximum sampling rate per channel for control
4 sps
EL3311, EL3312, EtherCAT terminal IP20 1-8 EL3314, EL3318
EL3314-0090 EtherCAT terminal IP20 4
EL3314-0010 EtherCAT terminal IP20 4
EL3314-0002 EtherCAT terminal IP20 4
ELM3344, ELM3348
EtherCAT terminal IP20 2/4
ELM3344-0003, EtherCAT terminal IP20 2/4 ELM3348-0003
ELM3702, ELM3704, ELM3704-0001
EtherCAT terminal IP20 2/4
EP3314-0002 EtherCAT Box IP67
4
EPP3314-0002 EtherCAT P Box IP67 4
Cage Clamp
Cage Clamp Cage Clamp Cage Clamp Push-In
Mini-TC
Push-In, LEMO
M8 M12
0.1/0.01 °C
50 sps
0.1/0.01 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C 0.1/0.01/0.001 °C
50 sps 50 sps 200 sps 1,000 sps
0.1/0.01/0.001 °C 1,000 sps
0.1/0.01/0.001 °C 10,000 sps
0.1/0.01 °C 0.1/0.01 °C
50 sps 50 sps
Continuation:
Measurement uncertainty of temperature measurement incl. internal cold junction
KL3311, KL3312, < ±0.5 % KL3314
Measuring ranges - mV measurement
30/60/120 mV
Oversampling -
Operation with external cold junction is possible
Distributed Clocks for timestamp operation
-
-
EL3311, EL3312, < ±0.3 %
30/75 mV
-
X
-
EL3314, EL3318
EL3314-0090
< ±0.3 %
30/75 mV
-
X
-
EL3314-0010
< ±0.2 %
78 mV
-
X
-
EL3314-0002
< ±0.2 %
78 mV / 2.5 V -
X
-
ELM3344,
< ±0.1 %
20 mV to 10 V X
X
X
ELM3348
ELM3344-0003, < ±0.05 %
20 mV to 10 V X
X
X
ELM3348-0003
ELM3702,
< ±0.1 %
20 mV to 10 V X
X
X
ELM3704,
ELM3704-0001
EP3314-0002 < ±0.3 %
30/60/75 mV
-
X
-
EPP3314-0002 < ±0.3 %
30/60/75 mV
-
X
-
308
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Product overview
Continuation:
Electrically isolated channels KL3311, KL3312, KL3314
TwinSAFE SC Measured value filtering
-
-
Extended diagnosis
-
Special features -
EL3311, EL3312, -
-
EL3314, EL3318
EL3314-0090
-
X
EL3314-0010
-
-
EL3314-0002
ELM3344, ELM3348
Yes, 2500 V functional isolation
-
-
ELM3344-0003, -
-
ELM3348-0003
ELM3702,
-
-
ELM3704,
ELM3704-0001
EP3314-0002 -
-
EPP3314-0002 -
-
Various predefined internal digital filters
Various predefined internal digital filters
Various predefined internal digital filters
Various predefined internal digital filters
Various predefined internal Yes, with
digital filters
CommonMode
Freely parameterizable with measurement
TwinCAT Filter Designer
Various predefined internal Yes, with
digital filters
CommonMode
Freely parameterizable with measurement
TwinCAT Filter Designer
Various predefined internal Yes digital filters
Freely parameterizable with TwinCAT Filter Designer
Various predefined internal digital filters
Various predefined internal digital filters
TSC variant of the EL3314-0000 Calibrated version EL3314-0030 available -
-
Multi-function terminal
-
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
309
Commissioning
4
Commissioning
4.1
Notes to short documentation
NOTE
This short documentation does not contain any further information within this chapter. For the complete documentation please contact the Beckhoff sales department responsible for you.
4.2
CoE overview
4.2.1 ELM30xx
4.2.1.1 0x10F3 Diagnosis History
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
10F3:0 Diagnosis History
Max. Subindex
10F3:01 Maximum Messages
Maximum Messages
10F3:02 Newest Message Newest Message
10F3:03 Newest Acknowledged Message
Subindex of last Acknowledged Message
10F3:04 New Messages True: New Messages Available Available
10F3:05 Flags
Diagnosis message options (see ETG specification)
10F3:06 Diagnosis .10F3:15 Message 001...
Diagnosis Message 016
Diagnosis Message No. 01...16
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RW
BOOLEAN RO
UINT16
RW
OCTET-
RO
STRING[22]
Default 0x15 (21dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec) {0}
4.2.1.2 0x60n0 PAI Status Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex) 60n0:0 PAI Status
Ch.[n+1] 60n0:01 No of Samples
60n0:09 Error 60n0:0A Underrange 60n0:0B Overrange 60n0:0D Diag
Meaning
Number of valid samples within the PDO samples TRUE: General error TRUE: Measurement event underflow TRUE: Measurement event overflow TRUE: New diagnostic message available
Data type
UINT8
UINT8
BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN
Flags
RO
RO
RO RO RO RO
Default
0x0F (15dec)
0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
310
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index Name (hex)
60n0:0E TxPDO State
60n0:0F Input cycle counter
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
TRUE: data invalid
BOOLEAN RO
Incremented by one when values have BIT2
RO
changed
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.1.3 0x60n1 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (24 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
ELM3x0x:
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:64 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
ELM3x4x:
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:20 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x20 (32dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.1.4 0x60n2 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (16 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels (not ELM3x4x):
Index Name (hex)
60n2:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n2:01 Sample
...
...
60n2:64 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT16 ... INT16
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x0000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.1.5 0x60n5 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n5:0 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
60n5:01 Low
Meaning Timestamp (low)
Data type UINT8 UINT32
Flags RO RO
Default
0x02 (2dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
311
Commissioning
Index Name (hex) 60n5:02 Hi
Meaning Timestamp (hi)
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RO
0x00000000
(0dec)
4.2.1.6 0x60n6 PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n6:0
PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
60n6:01 Internal Buffer
Meaning
Data type RO
RO
Flags Default UINT8 0x01 (1dec)
UINT16 0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.1.7 0x70n0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
70n0:0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
70n0:01 Integrator Reset Restart of the integration with each edge
70n0:02 Peak Hold Reset
Start new peak value detection with each edge
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
BOOLEAN RO
BOOLEAN RO
Default 0x02 (2dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.1.8 0x80n0 PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 80n0:0
80n0:01
Name
PAI Settings Ch.[n+1] Interface
Meaning
Selection of the measurement configuration: 0 None 1 - U ±30 V 2 - U ±10 V 3 - U ±5 V 4 - U ±2.5 V 5 - U ±1.25 V 6 - U ±640 mV 7 - U ±320 mV 8 - U ±160 mV 9 - U ±80 mV 10 - U ±40 mV 11 - U ±20 mV 14 - U 0...10 V 15 - U 0...5 V
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x41 (65dec)
UINT16
RW
0x0000 (0dec)
312
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:04 80n0:06 80n0:16
80n0:17 80n0:18 80n0:19
80n0:1A 80n0:1B 80n0:1C 80n0:1D
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
Start
Start connection test with rising
Connection Test edge (see section "Broken wire
detection/ optional connection
diagnosis")
BOOLEAN RW
Enable Autorange
Autorange (Enable/ Disable)
BOOLEAN RW
Filter 1
Options for filter 1:
UINT16 RW
0 None 1 - FIR Notch 50 Hz 2 - FIR Notch 60 Hz 3 - FIR LP 100 Hz 4 - FIR LP 1000 Hz 5 - FIR HP 150 Hz 16 - IIR Notch 50 Hz 17 - IIR Notch 60 Hz 18 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1 Hz 19 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 25 Hz 20 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 100 Hz 21 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 250 Hz 22 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1000 Hz 32 - User defined FIR Filter 33 - User defined IIR Filter 34 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 1 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 1
UINT16 RW
Decimation Factor
Factor of the individual sampling UINT16 RW rate (min. 1)
Filter 2
Options for filter 2:
UINT16 RW
0 None
1 - IIR 1
2 - IIR 2
3 - IIR 3
4 - IIR 4
5 - IIR 5
6 - IIR 6
7 - IIR 7
8 - IIR 8
16 - User defined FIR Filter
17 - User defined IIR Filter
18 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 2 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 2
UINT16 RW
True RMS No. Number of samples for "True RMS" UINT16 RW
of Samples
calculation (min. 1, max. 1000);
also see chapter TrueRMS
(extended maximum values for
ELM36xx)
Enable True RMS
Activation of "True RMS" calculation
BOOLEAN RW
Enable Frequency Counter
Enable Frequency Counter
BOOLEAN RW
Default 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x0001 (1dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
313
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:2B
80n0:2C
80n0:2D
80n0:2E
80n0:2F 80n0:30 80n0:31 80n0:32 80n0:33 80n0:34 80n0:40 80n0:41
Name
Meaning
Data type
Extended Functions
Integrator/ Differentiator
Differentiator Samples Delta Scaler
Lookup Table Length Low Limiter
Options for future functions/settings UINT16 0 Disabled
ELM35xx: 1 Load Cell Analysis
Options: 0 Off 1 Integrator 1x 2 Integrator 2x (* 3 Differentiator 1x 4 Differentiator 2x (*
UINT16
Distance of samples for the differentiation; max. value = 1000; except ELM36xx with max value = 5000
UINT16
Scaling (enum): 0 Extended Range 1 Linear 2 Lookup Table 3 Legacy Range 4 Lookup Table (additive)
UINT16
Optional: 5 Extended Functions
Anzahl Stützstellen der LookUpTabelle
UINT16
Smallest PDO output value
INT32
High Limiter Largest PDO output value
INT32
Low Range Error High Range Error Timestamp Correction
Filter 1 Type Info Filter 2 Type Info
Lowest limit at which the error bit and the error LED are set
Highest limit at which the error bit and the error LED are set
Value for correcting StartNextLatchTime (timestamp of the first sample)
Filter 1 type information
INT32 INT32 INT32
STRING
Filter 2 type information
STRING
Flags RW
RW
RW RW
RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0001 (1dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0064 (100dec) 0x80000000 (2147483648dec) 0x7FFFFFFF (2147483647dec) 0xFF800000 (8388608dec) 0x007FFFFF (8388607dec) 0xFFFB6C20 (300000dec) N/A N/A
(* Functionality is only available from FW03
4.2.1.9 0x80n1 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n1:0 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n1:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 1 ...
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32 ...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
314
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex)
80n1:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning Coefficients for filter 1
Commissioning
Data type Flags Default
INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.1.10 0x80n3 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n3:0 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n3:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n3:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 2 ... Coefficients for filter 2
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.1.11 0x80n5 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n5:0 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n5:01 Scaler Offset/ Scaler Value 1
80n5:02 Scaler-Gain/ Scaler Value 2
80n5:03 Scaler Value 3
80n5:04 Scaler Value 4
..
..
80n5:63 Scaler Value 99
80n5:64 Scaler Value 100
Meaning
Scaling values offset/gain or LookUp table with 50 x/y value pairs Scaling offset oder LookUp x value 1 Scaling gain oder LookUp y value 1 LookUp x value 2 LookUp y value 2 .. LookUp x value 50 LookUp y value 50
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x64 (100dec)
INT32
INT32
INT32 INT32 .. INT32 INT32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
..
..
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.1.12 0x80nE PAI User Calibration Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nE:0 PAI User Calibration Data Ch.1
80nE:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nE:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
Default 0x0C (12dec)
-
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
315
Commissioning Index Name (hex) 80nE:03 S0 80nE:04 S1 80nE:05 S2 80nE:06 S3 80nE:07 T1
80nE:08 T1S1
80nE:09 T2
80nE:0A T2S1
80nE:0B T3
80nE:0C T3S1
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Offset
REAL32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
Coefficient for first-order samples
REAL32
RW
0x3F800000
(S1 * sample)
(1.0dec)
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
0x00000000
(S2 * sample²)
(0.0dec)
Coefficient for third-order samples
REAL32
RW
0x00000000
(S3 * sample³)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T1 * temp)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
0x00000000
and temperature values (T1S1 * temp * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
0x00000000
order temperature value (T2 * temp²)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T2S1 * temp² * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.1.13 0x80nF PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nF:0 PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.1
80nF:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nF:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nF:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nF:04 S1 80nF:05 S2 80nF:06 S3 80nF:07 T1
80nF:08 T1S1
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Coefficient for third-order samples (S3 * sample³)
REAL32
RW
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T1 * temp)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
and temperature values
(T1S1 * temp * sample)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
316
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex) 80nF:09 T2
80nF:0A T2S1
80nF:0B T3
80nF:0C T3S1
Commissioning
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
0x00000000
order temperature value (T2 * temp²)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T2S1 * temp² * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.1.14 0x90n0 PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 90n0:0
90n0:02
Name
Meaning
PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
ADC Raw Value ADC Raw Value
Data type UINT8
INT32
90n0:03 90n0:04 90n0:07 90n0:08 90n0:09
90n0:0A
90n0:0B
Calibration Value
Value after calibration
Zero Offset Value
Zero offset value
Actual Negative Current absolute minimum value Peak Hold
Actual Positive Current absolute maximum value Peak Hold
Previous
Absolute minimum value up to last
Negative Peak rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Hold
Previous Positive Peak Hold
Absolute maximum value up to last rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Filter 1 Value Value after filter 1
INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32
INT32
INT32
90n0:0C Filter 2 Value Value after filter 2
INT32
90n0:0D True RMS Value Value after "True RMS" calculation INT32
90n0:0E 90n0:0F
90n0:10
Extended
Value after advanced (optional)
Functions Value function
INT32
Integrator/ Differentiator Value
Value after integration or differentiation INT32
Scaler Value Value after scaling
INT32
90n0:11 Limiter Value Value after limitation
INT32
Flags RO
RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO RO RO RO
RO RO
Default
0x22 (34dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
317
Commissioning
Index (hex) 90n0:21
90n0:22
Name
Signal Frequency Signal Duty Cycle
Meaning Frequency of the input signal Duty Cycle of the input signal
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RO
0x00000000
(0dec)
UINT8
RO
0x00 (0dec)
Note: For ELM3004-0000-0016 the subindices 03 and 04 are arranged as follows:
Index (hex) 90n0:03
90n0:04
Name
Zero Offset Value Calibration Value
Meaning Zero offset value Value after calibration
Data type INT32 INT32
Flags RO RO
Default
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.1.15 0x90n2 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
90n2:0 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
90n2:01 Effective Sample Effective Sample Rate Rate
90n2:02 Channel Temperature
Temperature of the channel
90n2:03 Min. Channel Temperature
Minimal temperature of the channel
90n2:04 Max. Channel Maximal temperature of the channel Temperature
90n2:05 Overload Time Absolute time during overload
Data type UINT8 UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 UINT32
"Overload" means that the channel is electrically overloaded. This is a nonrecommendable condition that may eventually lead to atypical aging or even damage. This condition should be avoided.
Its accumulated duration is displayed here informatively.
Flags RO RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x12 (18dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
318
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
90n2:06 Saturation Time Absolute time during saturation
Data type UINT32
"Saturation" means that the measuring range of the ADC of the channel is fully utilized, the ADC thus outputs its maximum value and the measured value can no longer be used. "Saturation" is therefore a prederegistration, with further signal increase it comes to "overload".
The saturation state is not fundamentally harmful, but it indicates an insufficient dimensioning of the measurement channel.
Its accumulated response time is displayed here informatively.
90n2:07 Overtemperature Time of exceeded temperature of the UINT32 Time (Channel) channel
90n2:11 Vendor Calibration Counter
Counter of the vendor calibration
UINT16
(related to the selected interface)
The counter counts +1 when data has
changed and the memory code word is
written. Depending on the adjustment
method, the counter may therefore
count several times.
90n2:12
User Calibration Counter
Counter of the user calibration (related to the selected interface) The counter counts +1 when data has changed and the memory code word is written. Depending on the adjustment method, the counter may therefore count several times.
UINT16
Flags RO
RO RO RO
Default 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.1.16 0x90nF PAI Calibration Dates Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels:
Index (hex)
90nF:0
Name PAI Calibration Dates
Meaning
Data type UINT8
90nF:01 90nF:02 90nF:03 90nF:04 90nF:05 90nF:06 90nF:07 90nF:08 90nF:09 90nF:0A 90nF:0B
Vendor U ±30V Vendor U ±10V Vendor U ±5V Vendor U ±2.5V Vendor U ±1.25V Vendor U ±640mV Vendor U ±320mV Vendor U ±160mV Vendor U ±80mV Vendor U ±40mV Vendor U ±20mV
OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4]
Flags Default
RO 0x8F (143dec)
RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
319
Commissioning
Index (hex) 90nF:0E 90nF:0F 90nF:81 90nF:82 90nF:83 90nF:84 90nF:85 90nF:86 90nF:87 90nF:88 90nF:89 90nF:8A 90nF:8B 90nF:8E 90nF:8F
Name
Vendor U 0...10 V Vendor U 0...5 V User ±30V User ±10V User ±5V User ±2.5V User ±1.25V User ±640mV User ±320mV User ±160mV User ±80mV User ±40mV User ±20mV User 0...10V User 0...5V
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
4.2.1.17 0xF000 Modular device profile
Index Name (hex)
F000:0 Modular device profile
F000:01 Module index distance
F000:02 Maximum number of modules
Meaning
General information for the modular device profile Index distance of the objects of the individual channels Number of channels
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x02 (2dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0010 (16dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0004 (4dec)
4.2.1.18 0xF008 Code word
Index (hex)
F008:0
Name Code word
Meaning
4.2.1.19 0xF009 Password Protection
Index (hex)
F009:0
Name
Password protection
Meaning
4.2.1.20 0xF010 Module list
Index Name (hex) F010:0 Module list F010:01 Subindex 001
Meaning
320
Version: 2.6
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT8 UINT32
RW
n
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
ELM3xxx
Index (hex) ... F010:n
Name
... Subindex n
Meaning ...
n = number of existing channels by the terminal
Commissioning
Data type Flags Default
... UINT32
...
...
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
4.2.1.21 0xF083 BTN
Index (hex)
F083:0
Name BTN
Meaning Beckhoff Traceability Number
Data type Flags Default
STRING
RO
00000000
Note: this object exists from revision -0018 (ELM3148 from revision -0017) and the FW from release date >2019/03 only
4.2.1.22 0xF900 PAI Info Data
Index Name (hex) F900:0 PAI Info Data F900:01 CPU Usage F900:02 Device State
F900:03 Operating Time
Meaning
CPU load in [%]* Device State Permitted values: 0 OK 1 Warm Up Operating time in [min]
Data type UINT8 UINT16 UINT16
UINT32
F900:04 Overtemperature Time of overtemperature of the device Time (Device)
F900:11 Device Temperature
Measured temperature in the terminal
F900:12 Min. Device Temperature
Lowest measured temperature in the terminal
F900:13 Max. Device Temperature
Highest measured temperature in the terminal
UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32
Flags RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x13 (19dec) 0x0000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
*) This value depends of additional enabled features (Filters, True RMS, ...); the more functions of the terminal are in use, the greater is the value. Notice amongst others the ,,Input cycle counter" (PAI Status [} 310]). The CPU load is an informative value with particularly regard to the "Device-specific Diag messages".
4.2.1.23 0xF912 Filter info
Index (hex) F912:0 F912:01
Name
Filter info Info header
F912:02 ... F912:m
Filter 1 ... Filter n
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
UINT8
RO m
Basic information for the filter designer
OCTETSTRING[8] RO {0}
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
...
...
...
...
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
m = (2 No. of channels) + 1
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
321
Commissioning
Note: availability of CoE Objekt "0xF912 Filter info":
Terminal ELM3002 ELM3004
since FW version 02 03
Revision -0017 -0018
4.2.1.24 0xFB00 PAI Command
Index Name (hex) FB00:0 PAI Command FB00:01 Request FB00:02 Status
FB00:03 Response
Meaning
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
Command request
The respective functional chapters explain which value is to be entered here.
OCTET-
RW
STRING[2]
Command status
UINT8
RO
This indicates that the command is still running or has been executed. Functional dependent, see respective sections. Otherwise:
0: Command not existing
1: executed without errors
2,3: executed not successful
100..200: indicates the execution progress (100 = 0% etc.)
255: function is busy, if [100..200] won't be used as progress display
Command response
OCTET-
RO
If the transferred command returns a STRING[6]
response, it will be displayed here.
Functional dependent, see resprective
sections.
Default 0x03 (3dec) {0} 0x00 (0dec)
{0}
4.2.2 ELM310x
4.2.2.1 0x10F3 Diagnosis History
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
10F3:0 Diagnosis History
Max. Subindex
10F3:01 Maximum Messages
Maximum Messages
10F3:02 Newest Message Newest Message
10F3:03 Newest Acknowledged Message
Subindex of last Acknowledged Message
10F3:04 New Messages True: New Messages Available Available
10F3:05 Flags
Diagnosis message options (see ETG specification)
Data type UINT8 UINT8 UINT8 UINT8
BOOLEAN UINT16
Flags RO RO RO RW
RO RW
Default 0x15 (21dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
322
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex)
10F3:06 Diagnosis .10F3:15 Message 001...
Diagnosis Message 016
Meaning Diagnosis Message No. 01...16
Commissioning
Data type Flags Default
OCTET-
RO
{0}
STRING[22]
4.2.2.2 0x60n0 PAI Status Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex) 60n0:0 PAI Status
Ch.[n+1] 60n0:01 No of Samples
60n0:09 Error 60n0:0A Underrange 60n0:0B Overrange 60n0:0D Diag
60n0:0E TxPDO State 60n0:0F Input cycle
counter
Meaning
Data type
UINT8
Number of valid samples within the PDO samples TRUE: General error TRUE: Measurement event underflow TRUE: Measurement event overflow TRUE: New diagnostic message available TRUE: data invalid Incremented by one when values have changed
UINT8
BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN BIT2
Flags
RO
RO
RO RO RO RO
RO RO
Default
0x0F (15dec)
0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.2.3 0x60n1 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (24 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:64 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.2.4 0x60n2 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (16 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels:
Index Name (hex)
60n2:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n2:01 Sample
...
...
60n2:64 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT16 ... INT16
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x0000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x0000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
323
Commissioning
4.2.2.5 0x60n5 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n5:0 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
60n5:01 Low
Meaning Timestamp (low)
Data type UINT8 UINT32
60n5:02 Hi
Timestamp (hi)
UINT32
Flags RO RO RO
Default
0x02 (2dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.2.6 0x60n6 PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n6:0
PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
60n6:01 Internal Buffer
Meaning
Data type RO
RO
Flags Default UINT8 0x01 (1dec)
UINT16 0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.2.7 0x70n0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
70n0:0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
70n0:01 Integrator Reset Restart of the integration with each edge
70n0:02 Peak Hold Reset
Start new peak value detection with each edge
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
BOOLEAN RO
BOOLEAN RO
Default 0x02 (2dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.2.8 0x80n0 PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 80n0:0
80n0:01
Name
PAI Settings Ch.[n+1] Interface
Meaning
Selection of the measurement configuration: 0 None 17 - I ±20 mA 18 - I 0...20 mA 19 - I 4...20 mA 20 - I 4...20 mA NAMUR
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x41 (65dec)
UINT16
RW
0x0000 (0dec)
324
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:04 80n0:16
80n0:17 80n0:18 80n0:19
80n0:1A 80n0:1B 80n0:1C 80n0:1D 80n0:2B
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
Start
Start connection test with rising
Connection Test edge (see section "Broken wire
detection/ optional connection
diagnosis")
BOOLEAN RW
Filter 1
Options for filter 1:
UINT16 RW
0 None 1 - FIR Notch 50 Hz 2 - FIR Notch 60 Hz 3 - FIR LP 100 Hz 4 - FIR LP 1000 Hz 5 - FIR HP 150 Hz 16 - IIR Notch 50 Hz 17 - IIR Notch 60 Hz 18 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1 Hz 19 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 25 Hz 20 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 100 Hz 21 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 250 Hz 22 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1000 Hz 32 - User defined FIR Filter 33 - User defined IIR Filter 34 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 1 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 1
UINT16 RW
Decimation Factor
Factor of the individual sampling UINT16 RW rate (min. 1)
Filter 2
Options for filter 2:
UINT16 RW
0 None
1 - IIR 1
2 - IIR 2
3 - IIR 3
4 - IIR 4
5 - IIR 5
6 - IIR 6
7 - IIR 7
8 - IIR 8
16 - User defined FIR Filter
17 - User defined IIR Filter
18 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 2 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 2
UINT16 RW
True RMS No. Number of samples for "True RMS" UINT16 RW
of Samples
calculation (min. 1, max. 1000);
also see chapter TrueRMS
(extended maximum values for
ELM36xx)
Enable True RMS
Activation of "True RMS" calculation
BOOLEAN RW
Enable Frequency Counter
Enable Frequency Counter
BOOLEAN RW
Extended Functions
Options for future functions/settings UINT16 RW 0 Disabled
ELM35xx: 1 Load Cell Analysis
Default 0x00 (FALSE) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x0001 (1dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x0000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
325
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:2C
80n0:2D
80n0:2E
80n0:2F 80n0:30 80n0:31 80n0:32 80n0:33 80n0:34 80n0:40 80n0:41
Name
Meaning
Data type
Integrator/ Differentiator
Differentiator Samples Delta Scaler
Lookup Table Length Low Limiter
Options: 0 Off 1 Integrator 1x 2 Integrator 2x (* 3 Differentiator 1x 4 Differentiator 2x (*
UINT16
Distance of samples for the differentiation; max. value = 1000; except ELM36xx with max value = 5000
UINT16
Scaling (enum): 0 Extended Range 1 Linear 2 Lookup Table 3 Legacy Range 4 Lookup Table (additive)
UINT16
Optional: 5 Extended Functions
Anzahl Stützstellen der LookUpTabelle
UINT16
Smallest PDO output value
INT32
High Limiter Largest PDO output value
INT32
Low Range Error High Range Error Timestamp Correction
Filter 1 Type Info Filter 2 Type Info
Lowest limit at which the error bit and the error LED are set
Highest limit at which the error bit and the error LED are set
Value for correcting StartNextLatchTime (timestamp of the first sample)
Filter 1 type information
INT32 INT32 INT32
STRING
Filter 2 type information
STRING
Flags RW
RW
RW
RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0001 (1dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0064 (100dec) 0x80000000 (2147483648dec) 0x7FFFFFFF (2147483647dec) 0xFF800000 (8388608dec) 0x007FFFFF (8388607dec) 0xFFFB6C20 (300000dec) N/A N/A
(* Functionality is only available from FW03
4.2.2.9 0x80n1 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n1:0 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n1:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n1:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 1 ... Coefficients for filter 1
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
326
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.2.10 0x80n3 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n3:0 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n3:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n3:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 2 ... Coefficients for filter 2
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.2.11 0x80n5 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n5:0 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n5:01 Scaler Offset/ Scaler Value 1
80n5:02 Scaler-Gain/ Scaler Value 2
80n5:03 Scaler Value 3
80n5:04 Scaler Value 4
..
..
80n5:63 Scaler Value 99
80n5:64 Scaler Value 100
Meaning
Scaling values offset/gain or LookUp table with 50 x/y value pairs Scaling offset oder LookUp x value 1 Scaling gain oder LookUp y value 1 LookUp x value 2 LookUp y value 2 .. LookUp x value 50 LookUp y value 50
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x64 (100dec)
INT32
INT32
INT32 INT32 .. INT32 INT32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
..
..
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.2.12 0x80nE PAI User Calibration Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nE:0 PAI User Calibration Data Ch.1
80nE:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nE:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nE:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nE:04 S1 80nE:05 S2
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
327
Commissioning Index Name (hex) 80nE:06 S3 80nE:07 T1
80nE:08 T1S1
80nE:09 T2
80nE:0A T2S1
80nE:0B T3
80nE:0C T3S1
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Coefficient for third-order samples
REAL32
RW
0x00000000
(S3 * sample³)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T1 * temp)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
0x00000000
and temperature values (T1S1 * temp * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
0x00000000
order temperature value (T2 * temp²)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T2S1 * temp² * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.2.13 0x80nF PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nF:0 PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.1
80nF:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nF:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nF:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nF:04 S1 80nF:05 S2 80nF:06 S3 80nF:07 T1
80nF:08 T1S1
80nF:09 T2
80nF:0A T2S1
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Coefficient for third-order samples (S3 * sample³)
REAL32
RW
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T1 * temp)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
and temperature values
(T1S1 * temp * sample)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
order temperature value
(T2 * temp²)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T2S1 * temp² * sample)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
328
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex) 80nF:0B T3
80nF:0C T3S1
Commissioning
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.2.14 0x90n0 PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 90n0:0
90n0:02
Name
Meaning
PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
ADC Raw Value ADC Raw Value
Data type UINT8
INT32
90n0:03 90n0:04 90n0:07 90n0:08 90n0:09
90n0:0A
90n0:0B
Calibration Value
Value after calibration
Zero Offset Value
Zero offset value
Actual Negative Current absolute minimum value Peak Hold
Actual Positive Current absolute maximum value Peak Hold
Previous
Absolute minimum value up to last
Negative Peak rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Hold
Previous Positive Peak Hold
Absolute maximum value up to last rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Filter 1 Value Value after filter 1
INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32
INT32
INT32
90n0:0C Filter 2 Value Value after filter 2
INT32
90n0:0D True RMS Value Value after "True RMS" calculation INT32
90n0:0E 90n0:0F
90n0:10
Extended
Value after advanced (optional)
Functions Value function
INT32
Integrator/ Differentiator Value
Value after integration or differentiation INT32
Scaler Value Value after scaling
INT32
90n0:11 Limiter Value Value after limitation
INT32
90n0:20 DC Bias Voltage DC bias voltage in AC operation
REAL32
90n0:21 90n0:22
Signal Frequency
Signal Duty Cycle
Frequency of the input signal Duty Cycle of the input signal
UINT32 UINT8
Flags RO
RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x22 (34dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
329
Commissioning
4.2.2.15 0x90n2 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
90n2:0 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
90n2:01 Effective Sample Effective Sample Rate Rate
90n2:02 Channel Temperature
Temperature of the channel
90n2:03 Min. Channel Temperature
Minimal temperature of the channel
90n2:04 Max. Channel Maximal temperature of the channel Temperature
90n2:05 Overload Time Absolute time during overload
Data type UINT8 UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 UINT32
"Overload" means that the channel is electrically overloaded. This is a nonrecommendable condition that may eventually lead to atypical aging or even damage. This condition should be avoided.
Its accumulated duration is displayed here informatively.
90n2:06 Saturation Time Absolute time during saturation
UINT32
"Saturation" means that the measuring range of the ADC of the channel is fully utilized, the ADC thus outputs its maximum value and the measured value can no longer be used. "Saturation" is therefore a prederegistration, with further signal increase it comes to "overload".
The saturation state is not fundamentally harmful, but it indicates an insufficient dimensioning of the measurement channel.
Its accumulated response time is displayed here informatively.
90n2:07 Overtemperature Time of exceeded temperature of the UINT32 Time (Channel) channel
90n2:11 Vendor Calibration Counter
Counter of the vendor calibration
UINT16
(related to the selected interface)
The counter counts +1 when data has
changed and the memory code word is
written. Depending on the adjustment
method, the counter may therefore
count several times.
Flags RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO
Default 0x12 (18dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
330
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
Data type
90n2:12
User Calibration Counter
Counter of the user calibration (related to the selected interface) The counter counts +1 when data has changed and the memory code word is written. Depending on the adjustment method, the counter may therefore count several times.
UINT16
Flags RO
Default
0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.2.16 0x90nF PAI Calibration Dates Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels:
Index (hex)
90nF:0
Name PAI Calibration Dates
Meaning
Data type UINT8
90nF:11 90nF:12 90nF:13 90nF:14
90nF:91 90nF:92 90nF:93 90nF:94
Vendor I ±20 mA Vendor I 0...20 mA Vendor I 4...20 mA Vendor I 4...20 mA (NAMUR) User I ±20 mA User I 0...20 mA User I 4...20 mA User I 4...20 mA (NAMUR)
OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4]
Flags Default
RO 0x94 (148dec)
RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0}
RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0}
4.2.2.17 0xF000 Modular device profile
Index Name (hex)
F000:0 Modular device profile
F000:01 Module index distance
F000:02 Maximum number of modules
Meaning
General information for the modular device profile Index distance of the objects of the individual channels Number of channels
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x02 (2dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0010 (16dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0004 (4dec)
4.2.2.18 0xF008 Code word
Index (hex)
F008:0
Name Code word
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
331
Commissioning
4.2.2.19 0xF009 Password Protection
Index (hex)
F009:0
Name
Password protection
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
4.2.2.20 0xF010 Module list
Index Name (hex) F010:0 Module list F010:01 Subindex 001
Meaning
...
...
...
F010:n Subindex n
n = number of existing channels by the terminal
Data type Flags Default
UINT8 UINT32
... UINT32
RW
n
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
...
...
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
4.2.2.21 0xF083 BTN
Index (hex)
F083:0
Name BTN
Meaning Beckhoff Traceability Number
Data type Flags Default
STRING
RO
00000000
Note: this object exists from revision -0018 (ELM3148 from revision -0017) and the FW from release date >2019/03 only
4.2.2.22 0xF900 PAI Info Data
Index (hex)
F900:0
Name PAI Info Data
Meaning
Data type UINT8
F900:01 CPU Usage F900:02 Device State
F900:03 Operating Time
CPU load in [%]*
Device State Permitted values: 0 OK 1 Warm Up
Operating time in [min]
UINT16 UINT16
UINT32
F900:04 Overtemperature Time of overtemperature of the device Time (Device)
F900:11 Device Temperature
Measured temperature in the terminal
F900:12 Min. Device Temperature
Lowest measured temperature in the terminal
F900:13 Max. Device Temperature
Highest measured temperature in the terminal
UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32
Flags RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
Default
ELM3x0x: 0x13 (19dec) 0x0000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
*) This value depends of additional enabled features (Filters, True RMS, ...); the more functions of the terminal are in use, the greater is the value. Notice amongst others the ,,Input cycle counter" (PAI Status [} 323]). The CPU load is an informative value with particularly regard to the "Device-specific Diag messages".
332
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.2.23 0xF912 Filter info
Index (hex) F912:0 F912:01
Name
Filter info Info header
F912:02 ... F912:m
Filter 1 ... Filter n
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
UINT8
RO m
Basic information for the filter designer
OCTETSTRING[8] RO {0}
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
...
...
...
...
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
m = (2 No. of channels) + 1 Note: availability of CoE Objekt "0xF912 Filter info":
Terminal ELM310x
since FW version 02
Revision -0017
4.2.2.24 0xFB00 PAI Command
Index Name (hex) FB00:0 PAI Command FB00:01 Request FB00:02 Status
FB00:03 Response
Meaning
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
Command request
The respective functional chapters explain which value is to be entered here.
OCTET-
RW
STRING[2]
Command status
UINT8
RO
This indicates that the command is still running or has been executed. Functional dependent, see respective sections. Otherwise:
0: Command not existing
1: executed without errors
2,3: executed not successful
100..200: indicates the execution progress (100 = 0% etc.)
255: function is busy, if [100..200] won't be used as progress display
Command response
OCTET-
RO
If the transferred command returns a STRING[6]
response, it will be displayed here.
Functional dependent, see resprective
sections.
Default 0x03 (3dec) {0} 0x00 (0dec)
{0}
4.2.3 ELM314x
4.2.3.1 0x10F3 Diagnosis History
Index (hex)
10F3:0
Name
Diagnosis History
Meaning Max. Subindex
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x15 (21dec)
333
Commissioning
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
10F3:01 Maximum Messages
Maximum Messages
10F3:02 Newest Message Newest Message
10F3:03 Newest Acknowledged Message
Subindex of last Acknowledged Message
10F3:04 New Messages True: New Messages Available Available
10F3:05 Flags
Diagnosis message options (see ETG specification)
10F3:06 Diagnosis .10F3:15 Message 001...
Diagnosis Message 016
Diagnosis Message No. 01...16
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RW
BOOLEAN RO
UINT16
RW
OCTET-
RO
STRING[22]
Default 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec) {0}
4.2.3.2 0x60n0 PAI Status Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex) 60n0:0 PAI Status
Ch.[n+1] 60n0:01 No of Samples
60n0:09 Error 60n0:0A Underrange 60n0:0B Overrange 60n0:0D Diag
60n0:0E TxPDO State 60n0:0F Input cycle
counter
Meaning
Data type
UINT8
Number of valid samples within the PDO samples TRUE: General error TRUE: Measurement event underflow TRUE: Measurement event overflow TRUE: New diagnostic message available TRUE: data invalid Incremented by one when values have changed
UINT8
BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN BIT2
Flags
RO
RO
RO RO RO RO
RO RO
Default
0x0F (15dec)
0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.3.3 0x60n1 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (24 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:20 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x20 (32dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
334
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.3.4 0x60n5 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n5:0 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
60n5:01 Low
Meaning Timestamp (low)
Data type UINT8 UINT32
60n5:02 Hi
Timestamp (hi)
UINT32
Flags RO RO RO
Default
0x02 (2dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.3.5 0x60n6 PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n6:0
PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
60n6:01 Internal Buffer
Meaning
Data type RO
RO
Flags Default UINT8 0x01 (1dec)
UINT16 0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.3.6 0x70n0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
70n0:0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
70n0:01 Integrator Reset Restart of the integration with each edge
70n0:02 Peak Hold Reset
Start new peak value detection with each edge
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
BOOLEAN RO
BOOLEAN RO
Default 0x02 (2dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.3.7 0x80n0 PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex)
80n0:0
Name
PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x41 (65dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
335
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:01
80n0:04 80n0:06 80n0:09 80n0:16
80n0:17 80n0:18 80n0:19
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
Interface
Selection of the measurement configuration: 0 None 2 - U ±10 V 3 - U ±5 V 4 - U ±2.5 V 5 - U ±1.25 V 14 - U 0..10 V 15 - U 0..5 V 17 - I ±20 mA 18 - I 0..20 mA 19 - I 4..20 mA 20 - I 4..20 mA NAMUR
UINT16 RW
Start
Start connection test with rising
Connection Test edge (see section "Broken wire
detection/ optional connection
diagnosis")
BOOLEAN RW
Enable Autorange
Autorange (Enable/ Disable)
BOOLEAN RW
Disable Offset Offset Compensation (Enable/ Compensation Disable)
BOOLEAN RW
Filter 1
Options for filter 1:
UINT16 RW
0 None 1 - FIR Notch 50 Hz 2 - FIR Notch 60 Hz 3 - FIR LP 100 Hz 4 - FIR LP 1000 Hz 5 - FIR HP 150 Hz 16 - IIR Notch 50 Hz 17 - IIR Notch 60 Hz 18 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1 Hz 19 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 25 Hz 20 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 100 Hz 21 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 250 Hz 22 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1000 Hz 32 - User defined FIR Filter 33 - User defined IIR Filter 34 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 1 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 1
UINT16 RW
Decimation Factor
Factor of the individual sampling UINT16 RW rate (min. 1)
Filter 2
Options for filter 2:
UINT16 RW
0 None
1 - IIR 1
2 - IIR 2
3 - IIR 3
4 - IIR 4
5 - IIR 5
6 - IIR 6
7 - IIR 7
8 - IIR 8
16 - User defined FIR Filter
17 - User defined IIR Filter
18 - User defined Average Filter
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x0001 (1dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
336
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:1A 80n0:1B
80n0:1C 80n0:1D 80n0:2B
80n0:2C
80n0:2D
80n0:2E
80n0:2F 80n0:30 80n0:31 80n0:32 80n0:33 80n0:34 80n0:40 80n0:41
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
Average Filter 2 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 2
UINT16 RW
True RMS No. Number of samples for "True RMS" UINT16 RW
of Samples
calculation (min. 1, max. 1000);
also see chapter TrueRMS
(extended maximum values for
ELM36xx)
Enable True RMS
Activation of "True RMS" calculation
BOOLEAN RW
Enable Frequency Counter
Enable Frequency Counter
BOOLEAN RW
Extended Functions
Options for future functions/settings UINT16 RW 0 Disabled
ELM35xx: 1 Load Cell Analysis
Integrator/ Differentiator
Options: 0 Off 1 Integrator 1x 2 Integrator 2x (* 3 Differentiator 1x 4 Differentiator 2x (*
UINT16 RW
Differentiator Distance of samples for the
UINT16 RW
Samples Delta differentiation; max. value = 1000;
except ELM36xx with max value =
5000
Scaler
Scaling (enum): 0 Extended Range 1 Linear 2 Lookup Table 3 Legacy Range 4 Lookup Table (additive)
UINT16 RW
Optional: 5 Extended Functions
Lookup Table Anzahl Stützstellen der
Length
LookUpTabelle
UINT16 RW
Low Limiter
Smallest PDO output value
INT32
RW
High Limiter Largest PDO output value
INT32
RW
Low Range Error High Range Error Timestamp Correction
Filter 1 Type Info Filter 2 Type Info
Lowest limit at which the error bit INT32
RW
and the error LED are set
Highest limit at which the error bit INT32
RW
and the error LED are set
Value for correcting
INT32
RW
StartNextLatchTime (timestamp of
the first sample)
Filter 1 type information
STRING RW
Filter 2 type information
STRING RW
Default 0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00C8 (200dec)
0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0001 (1dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0064 (100dec) 0x80000000 (2147483648dec) 0x7FFFFFFF (2147483647dec) 0xFF800000 (8388608dec) 0x007FFFFF (8388607dec) 0xFFFB6C20 (300000dec) N/A N/A
(* Functionality is only available from FW03
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
337
Commissioning
4.2.3.8 0x80n1 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n1:0 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n1:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n1:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 1 ... Coefficients for filter 1
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.3.9 0x80n3 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n3:0 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n3:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n3:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 2 ... Coefficients for filter 2
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.3.10 0x80n5 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n5:0 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n5:01 Scaler Offset/ Scaler Value 1
80n5:02 Scaler-Gain/ Scaler Value 2
80n5:03 Scaler Value 3
80n5:04 Scaler Value 4
..
..
80n5:63 Scaler Value 99
80n5:64 Scaler Value 100
Meaning
Scaling values offset/gain or LookUp table with 50 x/y value pairs Scaling offset oder LookUp x value 1 Scaling gain oder LookUp y value 1 LookUp x value 2 LookUp y value 2 .. LookUp x value 50 LookUp y value 50
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x64 (100dec)
INT32
INT32
INT32 INT32 .. INT32 INT32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
..
..
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
338
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.3.11 0x80nE PAI User Calibration Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nE:0 PAI User Calibration Data Ch.1
80nE:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nE:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nE:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nE:04 S1 80nE:05 S2 80nE:06 S3 80nE:07 T1 80nE:08 T1S1 80nE:09 T2 80nE:0A T2S1 80nE:0B T3 80nE:0C T3S1
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Coefficient for third-order samples (S3 * sample³)
REAL32
RW
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T1 * temp)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
and temperature values
(T1S1 * temp * sample)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
order temperature value
(T2 * temp²)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T2S1 * temp² * sample)
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T3 * temp³)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
4.2.3.12 0x80nF PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nF:0 PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.1
80nF:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nF:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nF:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
Default 0x0C (12dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
339
Commissioning Index Name (hex) 80nF:04 S1 80nF:05 S2 80nF:06 S3 80nF:07 T1
80nF:08 T1S1
80nF:09 T2
80nF:0A T2S1
80nF:0B T3
80nF:0C T3S1
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Coefficient for first-order samples
REAL32
RW
0x3F800000
(S1 * sample)
(1.0dec)
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
0x00000000
(S2 * sample²)
(0.0dec)
Coefficient for third-order samples
REAL32
RW
0x00000000
(S3 * sample³)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T1 * temp)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
0x00000000
and temperature values (T1S1 * temp * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
0x00000000
order temperature value (T2 * temp²)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T2S1 * temp² * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.3.13 0x90n0 PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 90n0:0
90n0:02
Name
Meaning
PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
ADC Raw Value ADC Raw Value
Data type UINT8
INT32
90n0:03 90n0:04 90n0:07 90n0:08 90n0:09
90n0:0A
90n0:0B
Calibration Value
Value after calibration
Zero Offset Value
Zero offset value
Actual Negative Current absolute minimum value Peak Hold
Actual Positive Current absolute maximum value Peak Hold
Previous
Absolute minimum value up to last
Negative Peak rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Hold
Previous Positive Peak Hold
Absolute maximum value up to last rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Filter 1 Value Value after filter 1
INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32
INT32
INT32
90n0:0C Filter 2 Value Value after filter 2
INT32
Flags RO
RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO
Default
0x22 (34dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
340
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex)
90n0:0D
Name
Meaning
True RMS Value Value after "True RMS" calculation
Data type INT32
90n0:0E 90n0:0F
90n0:10
Extended
Value after advanced (optional)
Functions Value function
INT32
Integrator/ Differentiator Value
Value after integration or differentiation INT32
Scaler Value Value after scaling
INT32
90n0:11 Limiter Value Value after limitation
INT32
90n0:20 DC Bias Voltage DC bias voltage in AC operation
REAL32
90n0:21 90n0:22
Signal Frequency
Signal Duty Cycle
Frequency of the input signal Duty Cycle of the input signal
UINT32 UINT8
Flags RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.3.14 0x90n2 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
90n2:0 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
90n2:01 Effective Sample Effective Sample Rate Rate
90n2:02 Channel Temperature
Temperature of the channel
90n2:03 Min. Channel Temperature
Minimal temperature of the channel
90n2:04 Max. Channel Maximal temperature of the channel Temperature
90n2:05 Overload Time Absolute time during overload
Data type UINT8 UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 UINT32
"Overload" means that the channel is electrically overloaded. This is a nonrecommendable condition that may eventually lead to atypical aging or even damage. This condition should be avoided.
Its accumulated duration is displayed here informatively.
Flags RO RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x12 (18dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
341
Commissioning
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
90n2:06 Saturation Time Absolute time during saturation
Data type UINT32
"Saturation" means that the measuring range of the ADC of the channel is fully utilized, the ADC thus outputs its maximum value and the measured value can no longer be used. "Saturation" is therefore a prederegistration, with further signal increase it comes to "overload".
The saturation state is not fundamentally harmful, but it indicates an insufficient dimensioning of the measurement channel.
Its accumulated response time is displayed here informatively.
90n2:07 Overtemperature Time of exceeded temperature of the UINT32 Time (Channel) channel
90n2:11 Vendor Calibration Counter
Counter of the vendor calibration
UINT16
(related to the selected interface)
The counter counts +1 when data has
changed and the memory code word is
written. Depending on the adjustment
method, the counter may therefore
count several times.
90n2:12
User Calibration Counter
Counter of the user calibration (related to the selected interface) The counter counts +1 when data has changed and the memory code word is written. Depending on the adjustment method, the counter may therefore count several times.
UINT16
Flags RO
RO RO RO
Default 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.3.15 0x90nF PAI Calibration Dates Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels:
Index (hex)
90nF:0
Name PAI Calibration Dates
Meaning
Data type UINT8
90nF:02 90nF:03 90nF:04 90nF:05 90nF:0E 90nF:0F 90nF:11 90nF:12 90nF:13 90nF:14
Vendor U ±10 V Vendor U ±5 V Vendor U ±2.5 V Vendor U ±1.25 V Vendor U 0..10 V Vendor U 0..5 V Vendor I ±20 mA Vendor I 0...20 mA Vendor I 4...20 mA Vendor I 4...20 mA (NAMUR)
OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4]
Flags Default
RO 0x94 (148dez)
RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0}
342
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index (hex) 90nF:82 90nF:83 90nF:84 90nF:85 90nF:8E 90nF:8F 90nF:91 90nF:92 90nF:93 90nF:94
Name
Meaning
User U ±10 V User U ±5 V User U ±2.5 V User U ±1.25 V User U 0..10 V User U 0..5 V User I ±20 mA User I 0...20 mA User I 4...20 mA User I 4...20 mA (NAMUR)
Commissioning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
4.2.3.16 0xF000 Modular device profile
Index Name (hex)
F000:0 Modular device profile
F000:01 Module index distance
F000:02 Maximum number of modules
Meaning
General information for the modular device profile Index distance of the objects of the individual channels Number of channels
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x02 (2dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0010 (16dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0004 (4dec)
4.2.3.17 0xF008 Code word
Index (hex)
F008:0
Name Code word
Meaning
4.2.3.18 0xF009 Password Protection
Index (hex)
F009:0
Name
Password protection
Meaning
4.2.3.19 0xF010 Module list
Index Name (hex) F010:0 Module list F010:01 Subindex 001
Meaning
...
...
...
F010:n Subindex n
n = number of existing channels by the terminal
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT8 UINT32
... UINT32
RW
n
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
...
...
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
343
Commissioning
4.2.3.20 0xF083 BTN
Index (hex)
F083:0
Name BTN
Meaning Beckhoff Traceability Number
Data type Flags Default
STRING
RO
00000000
Note: this object exists from revision -0018 (ELM3148 from revision -0017) and the FW from release date >2019/03 only
4.2.3.21 0xF800 PAI Settings Device
Index Name (hex)
F800:0 PAI Settings Device
F800:01 Connect Up- to GNDA
Meaning TRUE: Up- with GNDA connected
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
BOOLEAN RW
0x01 (1dez) 0x00 (0dez)
4.2.3.22 0xF900 PAI Info Data
Index Name (hex) F900:0 PAI Info Data F900:01 CPU Usage F900:02 Device State
F900:03 Operating Time
Meaning
CPU load in [%]* Device State Permitted values: 0 OK 1 Warm Up Operating time in [min]
Data type UINT8 UINT16 UINT16
UINT32
F900:04 Overtemperature Time of overtemperature of the device Time (Device)
F900:11 Device Temperature
Measured temperature in the terminal
F900:12 Min. Device Temperature
Lowest measured temperature in the terminal
F900:13 Max. Device Temperature
Highest measured temperature in the terminal
F900:20 Status Up
Up status
UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 BOOLEAN
Flags RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x20 (32dec) 0x0000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
*) This value depends of additional enabled features (Filters, True RMS, ...); the more functions of the terminal are in use, the greater is the value. Notice amongst others the ,,Input cycle counter" (PAI Status [} 334]). The CPU load is an informative value with particularly regard to the "Device-specific Diag messages".
4.2.3.23 0xF912 Filter info
Index (hex) F912:0 F912:01
Name
Filter info Info header
F912:02 Filter 1
...
...
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
UINT8
RO m
Basic information for the filter designer
OCTETSTRING[8] RO {0}
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
...
...
...
...
344
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex)
F912:m
Name Filter n
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
m = (2 No. of channels) + 1
Note: availability of CoE Objekt "0xF912 Filter info":
Terminal ELM314x
since FW version 01
Revision -0016
4.2.3.24 0xFB00 PAI Command
Index Name (hex) FB00:0 PAI Command FB00:01 Request FB00:02 Status
FB00:03 Response
Meaning
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
Command request
The respective functional chapters explain which value is to be entered here.
OCTET-
RW
STRING[2]
Command status
UINT8
RO
This indicates that the command is still running or has been executed. Functional dependent, see respective sections. Otherwise:
0: Command not existing
1: executed without errors
2,3: executed not successful
100..200: indicates the execution progress (100 = 0% etc.)
255: function is busy, if [100..200] won't be used as progress display
Command response
OCTET-
RO
If the transferred command returns a STRING[6]
response, it will be displayed here.
Functional dependent, see resprective
sections.
Default 0x03 (3dec) {0} 0x00 (0dec)
{0}
4.2.4 ELM350x
4.2.4.1 0x10F3 Diagnosis History
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
10F3:0 Diagnosis History
Max. Subindex
10F3:01 Maximum Messages
Maximum Messages
10F3:02 Newest Message Newest Message
10F3:03 Newest Acknowledged Message
Subindex of last Acknowledged Message
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
UINT8
UINT8 UINT8
RO
0x15 (21dec)
RO
0x00 (0dec)
RO
0x00 (0dec)
RW
0x00 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
345
Commissioning
Index Name (hex) 10F3:04 New Messages
Available 10F3:05 Flags
10F3:06 Diagnosis .10F3:15 Message 001...
Diagnosis Message 016
Meaning
True: New Messages Available
Diagnosis message options (see ETG specification) Diagnosis Message No. 01...16
Data type Flags
BOOLEAN RO
UINT16
RW
OCTET-
RO
STRING[22]
Default 0x00 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec) {0}
4.2.4.2 0x60n0 PAI Status Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex) 60n0:0 PAI Status
Ch.[n+1] 60n0:01 No of Samples
60n0:09 Error 60n0:0A Underrange 60n0:0B Overrange 60n0:0D Diag
60n0:0E TxPDO State 60n0:0F Input cycle
counter
Meaning
Data type
UINT8
Number of valid samples within the PDO samples TRUE: General error TRUE: Measurement event underflow TRUE: Measurement event overflow TRUE: New diagnostic message available TRUE: data invalid Incremented by one when values have changed
UINT8
BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN BIT2
Flags
RO
RO
RO RO RO RO
RO RO
Default
0x0F (15dec)
0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.4.3 0x60n1 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (24 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:64 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.4.4 0x60n2 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (16 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels:
Index Name (hex)
60n2:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n2:01 Sample
...
...
Meaning
Samples ...
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT16 ...
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x0000 (0dec)
...
...
346
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex)
60n2:64 Sample
Meaning Samples
Commissioning
Data type Flags Default
INT16
RO
0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.4.5 0x60n3 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (24 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
ELM3x0x:
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:64 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3x4x:
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:20 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x20 (32dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.4.6 0x60n5 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n5:0 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
60n5:01 Low
Meaning Timestamp (low)
Data type UINT8 UINT32
60n5:02 Hi
Timestamp (hi)
UINT32
Flags RO RO RO
Default
0x02 (2dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.4.7 0x60n6 PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n6:0
PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
60n6:01 Internal Buffer
Meaning
Data type RO
RO
Flags Default UINT8 0x01 (1dec)
UINT16 0x0000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
347
Commissioning
4.2.4.8 0x70n0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
70n0:0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
70n0:01 Integrator Reset Restart of the integration with each edge
70n0:02 Peak Hold Reset
Start new peak value detection with each edge
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
BOOLEAN RO
BOOLEAN RO
Default 0x02 (2dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.4.9 0x80n0 PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex)
Name
Meaning
Data type
80n0:0
PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
UINT8
80n0:01 Interface
Selection of the measurement configuration: 0 None 2 - U ±10 V 9 - U ±80 mV 14 U 0..10 V 42 - PT1000 2Wire 43 - PT1000 3Wire 44 - PT1000 4Wire 65 - Poti 3Wire 66 - Poti 5Wire more..
UINT16
80n0:02 Sensor Supply Sensor supply:
UINT16
0 - 0.0 V 2 - 1.0 V 3 - 1.5 V 4 - 2.0 V 5 - 2.5 V 6 - 3.0 V 7 - 3.5 V 8 - 4.0 V 9 - 4.5 V 10 - 5.0 V 65535 - External Supply
80n0:04
Start
Start connection test with rising
Connection Test edge (see section "Broken wire
detection/ optional connection
diagnosis")
BOOLEAN
80n0:08 Enable Shunt Shunt calibration (Enable/ Disable) BOOLEAN Calibration
80n0:09 Disable Offset Offset Compensation (Enable/ (ELM314x Compensation Disable) only)
BOOLEAN
80n0:13 Wire Resistance Wire resistance compensation Compensation
REAL32
Flags RO RW
RW
RW RW RW RW
Default 0x41 (65dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00000000 (0dec)
348
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:16
80n0:17 80n0:18 80n0:19
80n0:1A 80n0:1B 80n0:1C 80n0:1D 80n0:1E 80n0:2B
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
Filter 1
Options for filter 1:
UINT16 RW
0 None 1 - FIR Notch 50 Hz 2 - FIR Notch 60 Hz 3 - FIR LP 100 Hz 4 - FIR LP 1000 Hz 5 - FIR HP 150 Hz 16 - IIR Notch 50 Hz 17 - IIR Notch 60 Hz 18 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1 Hz 19 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 25 Hz 20 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 100 Hz 21 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 250 Hz 22 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1000 Hz 32 - User defined FIR Filter 33 - User defined IIR Filter 34 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 1 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 1
UINT16 RW
Decimation Factor
Factor of the individual sampling UINT16 RW rate (min. 1)
Filter 2
Options for filter 2:
UINT16 RW
0 None
1 - IIR 1
2 - IIR 2
3 - IIR 3
4 - IIR 4
5 - IIR 5
6 - IIR 6
7 - IIR 7
8 - IIR 8
16 - User defined FIR Filter
17 - User defined IIR Filter
18 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 2 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 2
UINT16 RW
True RMS No. Number of samples for "True RMS" UINT16 RW
of Samples
calculation (min. 1, max. 1000);
also see chapter TrueRMS
(extended maximum values for
ELM36xx)
Enable True RMS
Activation of "True RMS" calculation
BOOLEAN RW
Enable Frequency Counter
Enable Frequency Counter
BOOLEAN RW
Reset Load
Reset Load Cycle Counter
Cycle Counter
BOOLEAN RW
Extended Functions
Options for future functions/settings UINT16 RW 0 Disabled
ELM35xx: 1 Load Cell Analysis
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x0001 (1dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x0000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
349
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:2C
80n0:2D
80n0:2E
80n0:2F 80n0:32 80n0:33 80n0:34 80n0:35 80n0:36 80n0:37 80n0:38 80n0:39 80n0:3A 80n0:3B 80n0:40 80n0:41
Name
Meaning
Data type
Integrator/ Differentiator
Differentiator Samples Delta
Scaler
Lookup Table Length Low Range Error High Range Error Timestamp Correction Low Limiter
Options: 0 Off 1 Integrator 1x 2 Integrator 2x (* 3 Differentiator 1x 4 Differentiator 2x (*
UINT16
Distance of samples for the differentiation; max. value = 1000; except ELM36xx with max value = 5000
UINT16
Scaling (enum): 0 Extended Range 1 Linear 2 Lookup Table 3 Legacy Range 4 Lookup Table (additive)
UINT16
Optional: 5 Extended Functions
Anzahl Stützstellen der LookUpTabelle
UINT16
Lowest limit at which the error bit INT32 and the error LED are set
Highest limit at which the error bit INT32 and the error LED are set
Value for correcting
INT32
StartNextLatchTime (timestamp of
the first sample)
Smallest PDO output value
REAL32
High Limiter Largest PDO output value
REAL32
Bridge Resistance
Bridge resistance
Wire Resistance Wire resistance Uv Uv-
Wire Resistance Wire resistance Uv+ Uv+
Low Load Cycle Low load cycle limit Limit
High Load Cycle High load cycle limit Limit
Filter 1 Type Info
Filter 1 type information
Filter 2 Type Info
Filter 2 type information
REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 STRING STRING
Flags RW
RW
RW
RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0001 (1dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0064 (100dec) 0xFF800000 (8388608dec) 0x007FFFFF (8388607dec) 0xFFFB6C20 (300000dec) 0xFF7FFFFD (-8388611dec) 0x7F7FFFFD (2139095037dec) 0x43AF0000 (1135542272dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) N/A N/A
(* Functionality is only available from FW03
350
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.4.10 0x80n1 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n1:0 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n1:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n1:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 1 ... Coefficients for filter 1
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.4.11 0x80n3 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n3:0 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n3:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n3:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 2 ... Coefficients for filter 2
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.4.12 0x80n6 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n6:0 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n6:01 Scaler Offset/ Scaler Value 1
80n6:02 Scaler-Gain/ Scaler Value 2
80n6:03 Scaler Value 3
80n6:04 Scaler Value 4
..
..
80n6:63 Scaler Value 99
80n6:64 Scaler Value 100
Meaning
Scaling values offset/gain or LookUp table with 50 x/y value pairs Scaling offset oder LookUp x value 1 Scaling gain oder LookUp y value 1 LookUp x value 2 LookUp y value 2 .. LookUp x value 50 LookUp y value 50
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x64 (100dec)
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
..
..
..
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
351
Commissioning
4.2.4.13 0x80nA PAI Extended Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels (Special settings for the ,,Extended Functions")
Index Name (hex)
80nA:0 PAI Extended Settings Ch.[n+1]
80nA:01 Sensitivity (Compression)
80nA:02 Sensitivity (Tension)
80nA:03 Zero Balance
80nA:04 Maximum Capacity
80nA:05 Gravity of Earth
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Special settings for the ,,Extended UINT8 Functions"
RO
0x05 (5dec)
Sensitivity (mech. compression) REAL32 RW 0x40000000
(1073741824dec)
Sensitivity (mech. tension)
REAL32 RW 0xC0000000
(-1073741824dec)
Zero balance
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
Maximum capacity
REAL32 RW 0x40A00000
(1084227584dec)
Gravity of earth
REAL32 RW 0x411CE80A
(1092413450dec)
4.2.4.14 0x80nE PAI User Calibration Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nE:0 PAI User Calibration Data Ch.1
80nE:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nE:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nE:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nE:04 S1 80nE:05 S2 80nE:06 S3 80nE:07 T1
80nE:08 T1S1
80nE:09 T2
80nE:0A T2S1
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Coefficient for third-order samples (S3 * sample³)
REAL32
RW
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T1 * temp)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
and temperature values
(T1S1 * temp * sample)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
order temperature value
(T2 * temp²)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T2S1 * temp² * sample)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
352
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex) 80nE:0B T3
80nE:0C T3S1
Commissioning
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.4.15 0x80nF PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nF:0 PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.1
80nF:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nF:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nF:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nF:04 S1 80nF:05 S2 80nF:06 S3 80nF:07 T1 80nF:08 T1S1 80nF:09 T2 80nF:0A T2S1 80nF:0B T3 80nF:0C T3S1
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Coefficient for third-order samples (S3 * sample³)
REAL32
RW
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T1 * temp)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
and temperature values
(T1S1 * temp * sample)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
order temperature value
(T2 * temp²)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T2S1 * temp² * sample)
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T3 * temp³)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
353
Commissioning
4.2.4.16 0x90n0 PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 90n0:0
90n0:02
Name
Meaning
PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
ADC Raw Value ADC Raw Value
Data type UINT8
INT32
90n0:03 90n0:04 90n0:07 90n0:08 90n0:09
90n0:0A
90n0:0B
Calibration Value
Value after calibration
Zero Offset Value
Zero offset value
Actual Negative Current absolute minimum value Peak Hold
Actual Positive Current absolute maximum value Peak Hold
Previous
Absolute minimum value up to last
Negative Peak rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Hold
Previous Positive Peak Hold
Absolute maximum value up to last rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Filter 1 Value Value after filter 1
INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32
INT32
INT32
90n0:0C Filter 2 Value Value after filter 2
INT32
90n0:0D True RMS Value Value after "True RMS" calculation INT32
90n0:0E 90n0:0F
90n0:10
Extended
Value after advanced (optional)
Functions Value function
INT32
Integrator/ Differentiator Value
Value after integration or differentiation INT32
Scaler Value Value after scaling
INT32
90n0:11 Limiter Value Value after limitation
INT32
90n0:21 90n0:22
Signal Frequency
Signal Duty Cycle
Frequency of the input signal Duty Cycle of the input signal
UINT32 UINT8
Flags RO
RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO
Default
0x22 (34dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.4.17 0x90n2 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
90n2:0 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
90n2:01 Effective Sample Effective Sample Rate Rate
Data type UINT8 UINT32
Flags RO RO
Default
0x12 (18dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
354
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index Name (hex)
90n2:02 Channel Temperature
90n2:03 Min. Channel Temperature
90n2:04 Max. Channel Temperature
90n2:05 Overload Time
Meaning Temperature of the channel Minimal temperature of the channel Maximal temperature of the channel Absolute time during overload
Data type REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 UINT32
"Overload" means that the channel is electrically overloaded. This is a nonrecommendable condition that may eventually lead to atypical aging or even damage. This condition should be avoided.
Its accumulated duration is displayed here informatively.
90n2:06 Saturation Time Absolute time during saturation
UINT32
"Saturation" means that the measuring range of the ADC of the channel is fully utilized, the ADC thus outputs its maximum value and the measured value can no longer be used. "Saturation" is therefore a prederegistration, with further signal increase it comes to "overload".
The saturation state is not fundamentally harmful, but it indicates an insufficient dimensioning of the measurement channel.
Its accumulated response time is displayed here informatively.
90n2:07 Overtemperature Time of exceeded temperature of the UINT32 Time (Channel) channel
90n2:10 Load Cycle Counter
Load Cycle Counter
UINT32
90n2:11 Vendor Calibration Counter
Counter of the vendor calibration
UINT16
(related to the selected interface)
The counter counts +1 when data has
changed and the memory code word is
written. Depending on the adjustment
method, the counter may therefore
count several times.
90n2:12
User Calibration Counter
Counter of the user calibration (related to the selected interface) The counter counts +1 when data has changed and the memory code word is written. Depending on the adjustment method, the counter may therefore count several times.
UINT16
Flags RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO RO
RO
Default 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
355
Commissioning
4.2.4.18 0x90nF PAI Calibration Dates Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels:
Index (hex)
90nF:0
Name PAI Calibration Dates
Meaning
Data type UINT8
90nF:01 90nF:02 90nF:03 90nF:04 90nF:05 90nF:06 90nF:07 90nF:08 90nF:09
90nF:0A
90nF:0B
90nF:0C
90nF:0D
90nF:0E
90nF:0F
90nF:10
90nF:11
90nF:12
90nF:13
90nF:14
90nF:15
90nF:16
90nF:17
90nF:18
90nF:19
90nF:1A
90nF:1B
Vendor U ±10 V
Vendor U ±80 mV
Vendor U 0..10 V
Vendor PT1000 2 Wire
Vendor PT1000 3 Wire
Vendor PT1000 4 Wire
Vendor Poti 3 Wire
Vendor Poti 5 Wire
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 16 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V
OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
Flags Default
RO 0xC4 (196dec)
RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
356
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index (hex) 90nF:1C 90nF:1D 90nF:1E 90nF:1F 90nF:20 90nF:21 90nF:22
90nF:23 90nF:24
90nF:25 90nF:26 90nF:27 90nF:28
90nF:29 90nF:2A
90nF:2B 90nF:2C 90nF:2D 90nF:2E
90nF:2F 90nF:30
90nF:31 90nF:32 90nF:33
Name
Meaning
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 16 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V
Commissioning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
357
Commissioning
Index (hex) 90nF:34
90nF:35 90nF:36
90nF:37 90nF:38 90nF:39 90nF:3A
90nF:3B 90nF:3C
90nF:3D 90nF:3E 90nF:3F 90nF:40
90nF:41 90nF:42
90nF:43 90nF:44 90nF:81 90nF:82 90nF:83 90nF:84 90nF:85 90nF:86 90nF:87 90nF:88 90nF:89 90nF:8A
Name
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 32 mV/V
User U ±10 V
User U ±80 mV
User U 0..10 V
User PT1000 2 Wire
User PT1000 3 Wire
User PT1000 4 Wire
User Poti 3 Wire
User Poti 5 Wire
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V compensated
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
358
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex) 90nF:8B 90nF:8C 90nF:8D 90nF:8E 90nF:8F 90nF:90 90nF:91 90nF:92 90nF:93 90nF:94 90nF:95 90nF:96 90nF:97 90nF:98 90nF:99 90nF:9A 90nF:9B 90nF:9C 90nF:9D 90nF:9E 90nF:9F 90nF:A0 90nF:A1 90nF:A2
90nF:A3 90nF:A4
Name
Meaning
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 8 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 32 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 8 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 32 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 8 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 16 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 8 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 16 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
359
Commissioning
Index (hex) 90nF:A5 90nF:A6 90nF:A7 90nF:A8
90nF:A9 90nF:AA
90nF:AB 90nF:AC 90nF:AD 90nF:AE
90nF:AF 90nF:B0
90nF:B1 90nF:B2 90nF:B3 90nF:B4
90nF:B5 90nF:B6
90nF:B7 90nF:B8 90nF:B9 90nF:BA
90nF:BB
Name
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 4 mV/V
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
360
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index (hex) 90nF:BC
90nF:BD 90nF:BE 90nF:BF 90nF:C0
90nF:C1 90nF:C2
90nF:C3 90nF:C4
Name
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 4 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 32 mV/V
Meaning
Commissioning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
4.2.4.19 0xF000 Modular device profile
Index Name (hex)
F000:0 Modular device profile
F000:01 Module index distance
F000:02 Maximum number of modules
Meaning
General information for the modular device profile Index distance of the objects of the individual channels Number of channels
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x02 (2dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0010 (16dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0004 (4dec)
4.2.4.20 0xF008 Code word
Index (hex)
F008:0
Name Code word
Meaning
4.2.4.21 0xF009 Password Protection
Index (hex)
F009:0
Name
Password protection
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
361
Commissioning
4.2.4.22 0xF010 Module list
Index Name (hex) F010:0 Module list F010:01 Subindex 001
Meaning
...
...
...
F010:n Subindex n
n = number of existing channels by the terminal
Data type Flags Default
UINT8 UINT32
... UINT32
RW
n
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
...
...
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
4.2.4.23 0xF083 BTN
Index (hex)
F083:0
Name BTN
Meaning Beckhoff Traceability Number
Data type Flags Default
STRING
RO
00000000
Note: this object exists from revision -0018 (ELM3148 from revision -0017) and the FW from release date >2019/03 only
4.2.4.24 0xF900 PAI Info Data
Index Name (hex) F900:0 PAI Info Data F900:01 CPU Usage F900:02 Device State
F900:03 Operating Time
Meaning
CPU load in [%]* Device State Permitted values: 0 OK 1 Warm Up Operating time in [min]
Data type UINT8 UINT16 UINT16
UINT32
F900:04 Overtemperature Time of overtemperature of the device Time (Device)
F900:11 Device Temperature
Measured temperature in the terminal
F900:12 Min. Device Temperature
Lowest measured temperature in the terminal
F900:13 Max. Device Temperature
Highest measured temperature in the terminal
UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32
Flags RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x13 (19dec) 0x0000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
*) This value depends of additional enabled features (Filters, True RMS, ...); the more functions of the terminal are in use, the greater is the value. Notice amongst others the ,,Input cycle counter" (PAI Status [} 346]). The CPU load is an informative value with particularly regard to the "Device-specific Diag messages".
4.2.4.25 0xF912 Filter info
Index (hex) F912:0 F912:01
Name
Filter info Info header
Meaning
Basic information for the filter designer
Data type
Flags Default
UINT8
RO m
OCTETSTRING[8] RO {0}
362
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex) F912:02 ... F912:m
Name
Filter 1 ... Filter n
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
...
...
...
...
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
m = (2 No. of channels) + 1
Note: availability of CoE Objekt "0xF912 Filter info":
Terminal ELM350x
since FW version 01
Revision -0016
4.2.4.26 0xFB00 PAI Command
Index Name (hex) FB00:0 PAI Command FB00:01 Request FB00:02 Status
FB00:03 Response
Meaning
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
Command request
The respective functional chapters explain which value is to be entered here.
OCTET-
RW
STRING[2]
Command status
UINT8
RO
This indicates that the command is still running or has been executed. Functional dependent, see respective sections. Otherwise:
0: Command not existing
1: executed without errors
2,3: executed not successful
100..200: indicates the execution progress (100 = 0% etc.)
255: function is busy, if [100..200] won't be used as progress display
Command response
OCTET-
RO
If the transferred command returns a STRING[6]
response, it will be displayed here.
Functional dependent, see resprective
sections.
Default 0x03 (3dec) {0} 0x00 (0dec)
{0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
363
Commissioning
4.2.4.27 0x80n0:01 PAI Settings.Interface
ELM350x/ELM354x: 0x80n0:01 PAI Settings.Interface (0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels) - continued
Index (hex) 80n0:01
Meaning
Selection of the measurement configuration (continued):
0x80n0 PAI Settings [} 348] ... ELM35xx: 259 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V 260 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V compensated 261 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V 262 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V compensated 263 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 8 mV/V 268 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 32 mV/V 291 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V 292 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V compensated 293 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V 294 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V compensated 295 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 8 mV/V 300 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 32 mV/V 323 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V 324 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V compensated 325 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V 326 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V compensated 327 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 8 mV/V 329 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 16 mV/V 355 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V 356 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V compensated 357 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V 358 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V compensated 359 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 8 mV/V 361 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 16 mV/V 388 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated 389 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V 390 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated 391 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 8 mV/V 396 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 32 mV/V 420 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated 422 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated 423 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 8 mV/V 428 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 32 mV/V 452 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated 454 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated 455 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 8 mV/V 460 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 32 mV/V 484 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated 486 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated 487 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 8 mV/V 492 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 32 mV/V 516 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated 518 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated 519 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 8 mV/V 524 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 32 mV/V 548 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated 550 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated 551 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 8 mV/V 556 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 32 mV/V
(387-549: existing in ESI Revision 0016/0017 only, not functionally implemented)
Data type UINT16
Flags RW
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
364
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
4.2.5 ELM354x
Commissioning
4.2.5.1 0x10F3 Diagnosis History
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
10F3:0 Diagnosis History
Max. Subindex
10F3:01 Maximum Messages
Maximum Messages
10F3:02 Newest Message Newest Message
10F3:03 Newest Acknowledged Message
Subindex of last Acknowledged Message
10F3:04 New Messages True: New Messages Available Available
10F3:05 Flags
Diagnosis message options (see ETG specification)
10F3:06 Diagnosis .10F3:15 Message 001...
Diagnosis Message 016
Diagnosis Message No. 01...16
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RW
BOOLEAN RO
UINT16
RW
OCTET-
RO
STRING[22]
Default 0x15 (21dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec) {0}
4.2.5.2 0x60n0 PAI Status Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex) 60n0:0 PAI Status
Ch.[n+1] 60n0:01 No of Samples
60n0:09 Error 60n0:0A Underrange 60n0:0B Overrange 60n0:0D Diag
60n0:0E TxPDO State 60n0:0F Input cycle
counter
Meaning
Data type
UINT8
Number of valid samples within the PDO samples TRUE: General error TRUE: Measurement event underflow TRUE: Measurement event overflow TRUE: New diagnostic message available TRUE: data invalid Incremented by one when values have changed
UINT8
BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN BIT2
Flags
RO
RO
RO RO RO RO
RO RO
Default
0x0F (15dec)
0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.5.3 0x60n1 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (24 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
Meaning
Samples ...
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ...
RO
0x20 (32dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
365
Commissioning
Index Name (hex) 60n1:20 Sample
Meaning Samples
Data type Flags Default
INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.5.4 0x60n3 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (24 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:20 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x20 (32dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.5.5 0x60n5 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n5:0 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
60n5:01 Low
Meaning Timestamp (low)
Data type UINT8 UINT32
60n5:02 Hi
Timestamp (hi)
UINT32
Flags RO RO RO
Default
0x02 (2dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.5.6 0x60n6 PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n6:0
PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
60n6:01 Internal Buffer
Meaning
Data type RO
RO
Flags Default UINT8 0x01 (1dec)
UINT16 0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.5.7 0x70n0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
70n0:0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
70n0:01 Integrator Reset Restart of the integration with each edge
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
BOOLEAN RO
0x02 (2dec) 0x00 (0dec)
366
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex)
70n0:02 Peak Hold Reset
Commissioning
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Start new peak value detection with BOOLEAN RO each edge
0x00 (0dec)
4.2.5.8 0x80n0 PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 80n0:0 80n0:01
80n0:02
80n0:04 80n0:08 80n0:13
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
UINT8
RO
Interface
Selection of the measurement configuration: 0 None 2 - U ±10 V 9 - U ±80 mV 14 U 0..10 V 42 - PT1000 2Wire 43 - PT1000 3Wire 44 - PT1000 4Wire 65 - Poti 3Wire 66 - Poti 5Wire
more.. [} 383]
UINT16 RW
Sensor Supply
Sensor supply: 0 - 0.0 V 2 - 1.0 V 3 - 1.5 V 4 - 2.0 V 5 - 2.5 V 6 - 3.0 V 7 - 3.5 V 8 - 4.0 V 9 - 4.5 V 10 - 5.0 V 11 - 5.5 V 12 - 6.0 V 13 - 6.5 V 14 - 7.0 V 15 - 7.5 V 16 - 8.0 V 17 - 8.5 V 18 - 9.0 V 19 - 9.5 V 20 - 10.0 V 21 - 10.5 V 22 - 11.0 V 23 - 11.5 V 24 - 12.0 V 65535 - External Supply
UINT16 RW
Start
Start connection test with rising
Connection Test edge (see section "Broken wire
detection/ optional connection
diagnosis")
BOOLEAN RW
Enable Shunt Shunt calibration (Enable/ Disable) BOOLEAN RW Calibration
Wire Resistance Wire resistance compensation Compensation
REAL32 RW
Default 0x41 (65dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
367
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:16
80n0:17 80n0:18 80n0:19
80n0:1A 80n0:1B 80n0:1C 80n0:1D 80n0:1E 80n0:2B
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
Filter 1
Options for filter 1:
UINT16 RW
0 None 1 - FIR Notch 50 Hz 2 - FIR Notch 60 Hz 3 - FIR LP 100 Hz 4 - FIR LP 1000 Hz 5 - FIR HP 150 Hz 16 - IIR Notch 50 Hz 17 - IIR Notch 60 Hz 18 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1 Hz 19 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 25 Hz 20 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 100 Hz 21 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 250 Hz 22 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1000 Hz 32 - User defined FIR Filter 33 - User defined IIR Filter 34 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 1 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 1
UINT16 RW
Decimation Factor
Factor of the individual sampling UINT16 RW rate (min. 1)
Filter 2
Options for filter 2:
UINT16 RW
0 None
1 - IIR 1
2 - IIR 2
3 - IIR 3
4 - IIR 4
5 - IIR 5
6 - IIR 6
7 - IIR 7
8 - IIR 8
16 - User defined FIR Filter
17 - User defined IIR Filter
18 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 2 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 2
UINT16 RW
True RMS No. Number of samples for "True RMS" UINT16 RW
of Samples
calculation (min. 1, max. 1000);
also see chapter TrueRMS
(extended maximum values for
ELM36xx)
Enable True RMS
Activation of "True RMS" calculation
BOOLEAN RW
Enable Frequency Counter
Enable Frequency Counter
BOOLEAN RW
Reset Load
Reset Load Cycle Counter
Cycle Counter
BOOLEAN RW
Extended Functions
Options for future functions/settings UINT16 RW 0 Disabled 1 Load Cell Analysis
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x0001 (1dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x0000 (0dec)
368
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:2C
80n0:2D
80n0:2E
80n0:2F 80n0:32 80n0:33 80n0:34 80n0:35 80n0:36 80n0:37 80n0:38 80n0:39 80n0:3A 80n0:3B 80n0:40 80n0:41
Name
Meaning
Data type
Integrator/ Differentiator
Differentiator Samples Delta
Scaler
Lookup Table Length Low Range Error High Range Error Timestamp Correction Low Limiter
Options: 0 Off 1 Integrator 1x 2 Integrator 2x (* 3 Differentiator 1x 4 Differentiator 2x (*
UINT16
Distance of samples for the differentiation; max. value = 1000; except ELM36xx with max value = 5000
UINT16
Scaling (enum): 0 Extended Range 1 Linear 2 Lookup Table 3 Legacy Range 4 Lookup Table (additive)
UINT16
Optional: 5 Extended Functions
Anzahl Stützstellen der LookUpTabelle
UINT16
Lowest limit at which the error bit INT32 and the error LED are set
Highest limit at which the error bit INT32 and the error LED are set
Value for correcting
INT32
StartNextLatchTime (timestamp of
the first sample)
Smallest PDO output value
REAL32
High Limiter Largest PDO output value
REAL32
Bridge Resistance
Bridge resistance
Wire Resistance Wire resistance Uv Uv-
Wire Resistance Wire resistance Uv+ Uv+
Low Load Cycle Low load cycle limit Limit
High Load Cycle High load cycle limit Limit
Filter 1 Type Info
Filter 1 type information
Filter 2 Type Info
Filter 2 type information
REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 STRING STRING
Flags RW
RW
RW
RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0001 (1dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0064 (100dec) 0xFF800000 (8388608dec) 0x007FFFFF (8388607dec) 0xFFFB6C20 (300000dec) 0xFF7FFFFD (-8388611dec) 0x7F7FFFFD (2139095037dec) 0x43AF0000 (1135542272dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) N/A N/A
(* Functionality is only available from FW03
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
369
Commissioning
4.2.5.9 0x80n1 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n1:0 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n1:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n1:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 1 ... Coefficients for filter 1
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.5.10 0x80n3 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n3:0 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n3:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n3:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 2 ... Coefficients for filter 2
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.5.11 0x80n6 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n6:0 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n6:01 Scaler Offset/ Scaler Value 1
80n6:02 Scaler-Gain/ Scaler Value 2
80n6:03 Scaler Value 3
80n6:04 Scaler Value 4
..
..
80n6:63 Scaler Value 99
80n6:64 Scaler Value 100
Meaning
Scaling values offset/gain or LookUp table with 50 x/y value pairs Scaling offset oder LookUp x value 1 Scaling gain oder LookUp y value 1 LookUp x value 2 LookUp y value 2 .. LookUp x value 50 LookUp y value 50
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x64 (100dec)
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
..
..
..
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
370
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.5.12 0x80nA PAI Extended Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels (Special settings for the ,,Extended Functions")
Index Name (hex)
80nA:0 PAI Extended Settings Ch.[n+1]
80nA:01 Sensitivity (Compression)
80nA:02 Sensitivity (Tension)
80nA:03 Zero Balance
80nA:04 Maximum Capacity
80nA:05 Gravity of Earth
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Special settings for the ,,Extended UINT8 Functions"
RO
0x05 (5dec)
Sensitivity (mech. compression) REAL32 RW 0x40000000
(1073741824dec)
Sensitivity (mech. tension)
REAL32 RW 0xC0000000
(-1073741824dec)
Zero balance
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
Maximum capacity
REAL32 RW 0x40A00000
(1084227584dec)
Gravity of earth
REAL32 RW 0x411CE80A
(1092413450dec)
4.2.5.13 0x80nE PAI User Calibration Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nE:0 PAI User Calibration Data Ch.1
80nE:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nE:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nE:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nE:04 S1 80nE:05 S2 80nE:06 S3 80nE:07 T1
80nE:08 T1S1
80nE:09 T2
80nE:0A T2S1
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Coefficient for third-order samples (S3 * sample³)
REAL32
RW
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T1 * temp)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
and temperature values
(T1S1 * temp * sample)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
order temperature value
(T2 * temp²)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T2S1 * temp² * sample)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
371
Commissioning
Index Name (hex) 80nE:0B T3
80nE:0C T3S1
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.5.14 0x80nF PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nF:0 PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.1
80nF:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nF:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nF:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nF:04 S1 80nF:05 S2 80nF:06 S3 80nF:07 T1 80nF:08 T1S1 80nF:09 T2 80nF:0A T2S1 80nF:0B T3 80nF:0C T3S1
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Coefficient for third-order samples (S3 * sample³)
REAL32
RW
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T1 * temp)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
and temperature values
(T1S1 * temp * sample)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
order temperature value
(T2 * temp²)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T2S1 * temp² * sample)
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T3 * temp³)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
372
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.5.15 0x90n0 PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 90n0:0
90n0:02
Name
Meaning
PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
ADC Raw Value ADC Raw Value
Data type UINT8
INT32
90n0:03 90n0:04 90n0:07 90n0:08 90n0:09
90n0:0A
90n0:0B
Calibration Value
Value after calibration
Zero Offset Value
Zero offset value
Actual Negative Current absolute minimum value Peak Hold
Actual Positive Current absolute maximum value Peak Hold
Previous
Absolute minimum value up to last
Negative Peak rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Hold
Previous Positive Peak Hold
Absolute maximum value up to last rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Filter 1 Value Value after filter 1
INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32
INT32
INT32
90n0:0C Filter 2 Value Value after filter 2
INT32
90n0:0D True RMS Value Value after "True RMS" calculation INT32
90n0:0E 90n0:0F
90n0:10
Extended
Value after advanced (optional)
Functions Value function
INT32
Integrator/ Differentiator Value
Value after integration or differentiation INT32
Scaler Value Value after scaling
INT32
90n0:11 Limiter Value Value after limitation
INT32
90n0:21 90n0:22
Signal Frequency
Signal Duty Cycle
Frequency of the input signal Duty Cycle of the input signal
UINT32 UINT8
Flags RO
RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO
Default
0x22 (34dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.5.16 0x90n2 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
90n2:0 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
90n2:01 Effective Sample Effective Sample Rate Rate
Data type UINT8 UINT32
Flags RO RO
Default
0x12 (18dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
373
Commissioning
Index Name (hex)
90n2:02 Channel Temperature
90n2:03 Min. Channel Temperature
90n2:04 Max. Channel Temperature
90n2:05 Overload Time
Meaning Temperature of the channel Minimal temperature of the channel Maximal temperature of the channel Absolute time during overload
Data type REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 UINT32
"Overload" means that the channel is electrically overloaded. This is a nonrecommendable condition that may eventually lead to atypical aging or even damage. This condition should be avoided.
Its accumulated duration is displayed here informatively.
90n2:06 Saturation Time Absolute time during saturation
UINT32
"Saturation" means that the measuring range of the ADC of the channel is fully utilized, the ADC thus outputs its maximum value and the measured value can no longer be used. "Saturation" is therefore a prederegistration, with further signal increase it comes to "overload".
The saturation state is not fundamentally harmful, but it indicates an insufficient dimensioning of the measurement channel.
Its accumulated response time is displayed here informatively.
90n2:07 Overtemperature Time of exceeded temperature of the UINT32 Time (Channel) channel
90n2:10 Load Cycle Counter
Load Cycle Counter
UINT32
90n2:11 Vendor Calibration Counter
Counter of the vendor calibration
UINT16
(related to the selected interface)
The counter counts +1 when data has
changed and the memory code word is
written. Depending on the adjustment
method, the counter may therefore
count several times.
90n2:12
User Calibration Counter
Counter of the user calibration (related to the selected interface) The counter counts +1 when data has changed and the memory code word is written. Depending on the adjustment method, the counter may therefore count several times.
UINT16
Flags RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO RO
RO
Default 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
374
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.5.17 0x90nF PAI Calibration Dates Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels:
Index (hex)
90nF:0
Name PAI Calibration Dates
Meaning
Data type UINT8
90nF:01 90nF:02 90nF:03 90nF:04 90nF:05 90nF:06 90nF:07 90nF:08 90nF:09
90nF:0A
90nF:0B
90nF:0C
90nF:0D
90nF:0E
90nF:0F
90nF:10
90nF:11
90nF:12
90nF:13
90nF:14
90nF:15
90nF:16
90nF:17
90nF:18
90nF:19
90nF:1A
90nF:1B
Vendor U ±10 V
Vendor U ±80 mV
Vendor U 0..10 V
Vendor PT1000 2 Wire
Vendor PT1000 3 Wire
Vendor PT1000 4 Wire
Vendor Poti 3 Wire
Vendor Poti 5 Wire
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 16 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V
OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4]
Flags Default
RO 0xC4 (196dec)
RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
RO {0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
375
Commissioning
Index (hex) 90nF:1C 90nF:1D 90nF:1E 90nF:1F 90nF:20 90nF:21 90nF:22
90nF:23 90nF:24
90nF:25 90nF:26 90nF:27 90nF:28
90nF:29 90nF:2A
90nF:2B 90nF:2C 90nF:2D 90nF:2E
90nF:2F 90nF:30
90nF:31 90nF:32 90nF:33
Name
Meaning
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 16 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
376
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index (hex) 90nF:34
90nF:35 90nF:36
90nF:37 90nF:38 90nF:39 90nF:3A
90nF:3B 90nF:3C
90nF:3D 90nF:3E 90nF:3F 90nF:40
90nF:41 90nF:42
90nF:43 90nF:44 90nF:81 90nF:82 90nF:83 90nF:84 90nF:85 90nF:86 90nF:87 90nF:88 90nF:89 90nF:8A
Name
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 32 mV/V
User U ±10 V
User U ±80 mV
User U 0..10 V
User PT1000 2 Wire
User PT1000 3 Wire
User PT1000 4 Wire
User Poti 3 Wire
User Poti 5 Wire
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V compensated
Meaning
Commissioning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
377
Commissioning
Index (hex) 90nF:8B 90nF:8C 90nF:8D 90nF:8E 90nF:8F 90nF:90 90nF:91 90nF:92 90nF:93 90nF:94 90nF:95 90nF:96 90nF:97 90nF:98 90nF:99 90nF:9A 90nF:9B 90nF:9C 90nF:9D 90nF:9E 90nF:9F 90nF:A0 90nF:A1 90nF:A2
90nF:A3 90nF:A4
Name
Meaning
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 8 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 32 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 8 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 32 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 8 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 16 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 8 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 16 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
378
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index (hex) 90nF:A5 90nF:A6 90nF:A7 90nF:A8
90nF:A9 90nF:AA
90nF:AB 90nF:AC 90nF:AD 90nF:AE
90nF:AF 90nF:B0
90nF:B1 90nF:B2 90nF:B3 90nF:B4
90nF:B5 90nF:B6
90nF:B7 90nF:B8 90nF:B9 90nF:BA
90nF:BB
Name
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 4 mV/V
Meaning
Commissioning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
379
Commissioning
Index (hex) 90nF:BC
90nF:BD 90nF:BE 90nF:BF 90nF:C0
90nF:C1 90nF:C2
90nF:C3 90nF:C4
Name
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 2 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 4 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 32 mV/V
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
4.2.5.18 0xF000 Modular device profile
Index Name (hex)
F000:0 Modular device profile
F000:01 Module index distance
F000:02 Maximum number of modules
Meaning
General information for the modular device profile Index distance of the objects of the individual channels Number of channels
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x02 (2dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0010 (16dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0004 (4dec)
4.2.5.19 0xF008 Code word
Index (hex)
F008:0
Name Code word
Meaning
4.2.5.20 0xF009 Password Protection
Index (hex)
F009:0
Name
Password protection
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
380
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
4.2.5.21 0xF010 Module list
Index Name (hex) F010:0 Module list F010:01 Subindex 001
Meaning
...
...
...
F010:n Subindex n
n = number of existing channels by the terminal
Commissioning
Data type Flags Default
UINT8 UINT32
... UINT32
RW
n
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
...
...
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
4.2.5.22 0xF083 BTN
Index (hex)
F083:0
Name BTN
Meaning Beckhoff Traceability Number
Data type Flags Default
STRING
RO
00000000
Note: this object exists from revision -0018 (ELM3148 from revision -0017) and the FW from release date >2019/03 only
4.2.5.23 0xF900 PAI Info Data
Index Name (hex) F900:0 PAI Info Data F900:01 CPU Usage F900:02 Device State
F900:03 Operating Time
Meaning
CPU load in [%]* Device State Permitted values: 0 OK 1 Warm Up Operating time in [min]
Data type UINT8 UINT16 UINT16
UINT32
F900:04 Overtemperature Time of overtemperature of the device Time (Device)
F900:11 Device Temperature
Measured temperature in the terminal
F900:12 Min. Device Temperature
Lowest measured temperature in the terminal
F900:13 Max. Device Temperature
Highest measured temperature in the terminal
UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32
Flags RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x13 (19dec) 0x0000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
*) This value depends of additional enabled features (Filters, True RMS, ...); the more functions of the terminal are in use, the greater is the value. Notice amongst others the ,,Input cycle counter" (PAI Status [} 365]). The CPU load is an informative value with particularly regard to the "Device-specific Diag messages".
4.2.5.24 0xF912 Filter info
Index (hex) F912:0 F912:01
Name
Filter info Info header
Meaning
Basic information for the filter designer
Data type
Flags Default
UINT8
RO m
OCTETSTRING[8] RO {0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
381
Commissioning
Index (hex) F912:02 ... F912:m
Name
Filter 1 ... Filter n
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
...
...
...
...
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
m = (2 No. of channels) + 1
Note: availability of CoE Objekt "0xF912 Filter info":
Terminal ELM350x
since FW version 01
Revision -0016
4.2.5.25 0xFB00 PAI Command
Index Name (hex) FB00:0 PAI Command FB00:01 Request FB00:02 Status
FB00:03 Response
Meaning
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
Command request
The respective functional chapters explain which value is to be entered here.
OCTET-
RW
STRING[2]
Command status
UINT8
RO
This indicates that the command is still running or has been executed. Functional dependent, see respective sections. Otherwise:
0: Command not existing
1: executed without errors
2,3: executed not successful
100..200: indicates the execution progress (100 = 0% etc.)
255: function is busy, if [100..200] won't be used as progress display
Command response
OCTET-
RO
If the transferred command returns a STRING[6]
response, it will be displayed here.
Functional dependent, see resprective
sections.
Default 0x03 (3dec) {0} 0x00 (0dec)
{0}
382
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.5.26 0x80n0:01 PAI Settings.Interface
ELM350x/ELM354x: 0x80n0:01 PAI Settings.Interface (0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels) - continued
Index (hex) 80n0:01
Meaning
Selection of the measurement configuration (continued):
0x80n0 PAI Settings [} 367] ... ELM35xx: 259 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V 260 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V compensated 261 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V 262 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V compensated 263 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 8 mV/V 268 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 32 mV/V 291 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V 292 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V compensated 293 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V 294 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V compensated 295 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 8 mV/V 300 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 32 mV/V 323 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V 324 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V compensated 325 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V 326 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 4 mV/V compensated 327 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 8 mV/V 329 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 16 mV/V 355 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V 356 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V compensated 357 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V 358 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 4 mV/V compensated 359 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 8 mV/V 361 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 16 mV/V 388 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated 389 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V 390 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated 391 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 8 mV/V 396 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 32 mV/V 420 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated 422 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated 423 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 8 mV/V 428 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 32 mV/V 452 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated 454 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated 455 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 8 mV/V 460 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 32 mV/V 484 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated 486 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated 487 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 8 mV/V 492 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 32 mV/V 516 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated 518 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated 519 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 8 mV/V 524 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 1k 32 mV/V 548 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 2 mV/V compensated 550 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 4 mV/V compensated 551 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 8 mV/V 556 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 1k 32 mV/V
(387-549: existing in ESI Revision 0016/0017 only, not functionally implemented)
Data type UINT16
Flags RW
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
383
Commissioning
4.2.6 ELM36xx
4.2.6.1 0x10F3 Diagnosis History
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
10F3:0 Diagnosis History
Max. Subindex
10F3:01 Maximum Messages
Maximum Messages
10F3:02 Newest Message Newest Message
10F3:03 Newest Acknowledged Message
Subindex of last Acknowledged Message
10F3:04 New Messages True: New Messages Available Available
10F3:05 Flags
Diagnosis message options (see ETG specification)
10F3:06 Diagnosis .10F3:15 Message 001...
Diagnosis Message 016
Diagnosis Message No. 01...16
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RW
BOOLEAN RO
UINT16
RW
OCTET-
RO
STRING[22]
Default 0x15 (21dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec) {0}
4.2.6.2 0x60n0 PAI Status Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex) 60n0:0 PAI Status
Ch.[n+1] 60n0:01 No of Samples
60n0:09 Error 60n0:0A Underrange 60n0:0B Overrange 60n0:0D Diag
60n0:0E TxPDO State 60n0:0F Input cycle
counter
Meaning
Data type
UINT8
Number of valid samples within the PDO samples TRUE: General error TRUE: Measurement event underflow TRUE: Measurement event overflow TRUE: New diagnostic message available TRUE: data invalid Incremented by one when values have changed
UINT8
BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN BIT2
Flags
RO
RO
RO RO RO RO
RO RO
Default
0x0F (15dec)
0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.6.3 0x60n1 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (24 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
ELM3x0x:
Index (hex)
60n1:0
Name
PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x64 (100dec)
384
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex)
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:64 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
ELM3x4x:
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:20 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Commissioning
Data type Flags Default
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x20 (32dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.6.4 0x60n2 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (16 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels (not ELM3x4x):
Index Name (hex)
60n2:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n2:01 Sample
...
...
60n2:64 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT16 ... INT16
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x0000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.6.5 0x60n5 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n5:0 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
60n5:01 Low
Meaning Timestamp (low)
Data type UINT8 UINT32
60n5:02 Hi
Timestamp (hi)
UINT32
Flags RO RO RO
Default
0x02 (2dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.6.6 0x60n6 PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n6:0
PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
60n6:01 Internal Buffer
Meaning
Data type RO
RO
Flags Default UINT8 0x01 (1dec)
UINT16 0x0000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
385
Commissioning
4.2.6.7 0x70n0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
70n0:0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
70n0:01 Integrator Reset Restart of the integration with each edge
70n0:02 Peak Hold Reset
Start new peak value detection with each edge
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
BOOLEAN RO
BOOLEAN RO
Default 0x02 (2dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.6.8 0x80n0 PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 80n0:0 80n0:01
80n0:03
80n0:04 80n0:07
Name
Meaning
PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
Interface
Selection of the measurement configuration: 0 None 97 - IEPE ±10 V 98 - IEPE ±5 V 99 - IEPE ±2.5 V 100 - IEPE ±1.25 V 101 - IEPE ±640 mV 102 - IEPE ±320 mV 103 - IEPE ±160 mV 104 - IEPE ±80 mV 105 - IEPE ±40 mV 106 - IEPE ±20 mV 107 - IEPE 0..20 V 108 - IEPE 0..10 V
IEPE AC Coupling
0 - Off (DC Coupling) 1 - 0.001 Hz 2 - 0.01 Hz 3 - 0.1 Hz 4 - 1 Hz 5 - 10 Hz
Start
Start connection test with rising
Connection Test edge (see section "Broken wire
detection/ optional connection
diagnosis")
IEPE Bias Current
0 - 0 mA 1 - 2 mA 2 - 4 mA
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x41 (65dec)
UINT16
RW
0x0000 (0dec)
UINT16
RW
0x0000 (0dec)
BOOLEAN RW 0x00 (FALSE)
BIT4
RW
0x00 (0dec)
386
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:16
80n0:17 80n0:18 80n0:19
80n0:1A 80n0:1B 80n0:1C 80n0:1D 80n0:2B
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
Filter 1
Options for filter 1:
UINT16 RW
0 None 1 - FIR Notch 50 Hz 2 - FIR Notch 60 Hz 3 - FIR LP 100 Hz 4 - FIR LP 1000 Hz 5 - FIR HP 150 Hz 16 - IIR Notch 50 Hz 17 - IIR Notch 60 Hz 18 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1 Hz 19 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 25 Hz 20 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 100 Hz 21 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 250 Hz 22 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1000 Hz 32 - User defined FIR Filter 33 - User defined IIR Filter 34 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 1 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 1
UINT16 RW
Decimation Factor
Factor of the individual sampling UINT16 RW rate (min. 1)
Filter 2
Options for filter 2:
UINT16 RW
0 None
1 - IIR 1
2 - IIR 2
3 - IIR 3
4 - IIR 4
5 - IIR 5
6 - IIR 6
7 - IIR 7
8 - IIR 8
16 - User defined FIR Filter
17 - User defined IIR Filter
18 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 2 Number of samples for userNo of Samples defined Average Filter 2
UINT16 RW
True RMS No. Number of samples for "True RMS" UINT16 RW
of Samples
calculation (min. 1, max. 1000);
also see chapter TrueRMS
(extended maximum values for
ELM36xx)
Enable True RMS
Activation of "True RMS" calculation
BOOLEAN RW
Enable Frequency Counter
Enable Frequency Counter
BOOLEAN RW
Extended Functions
Options for future functions/settings UINT16 RW 0 Disabled
ELM35xx: 1 Load Cell Analysis
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x0001 (1dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00C8 (200dec) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x0000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
387
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:2C
80n0:2D
80n0:2E
80n0:2F 80n0:30 80n0:31 80n0:32 80n0:33 80n0:34 80n0:40 80n0:41
Name
Meaning
Data type
Integrator/ Differentiator
Differentiator Samples Delta Scaler
Lookup Table Length Low Limiter
Options: 0 Off 1 Integrator 1x 2 Integrator 2x (* 3 Differentiator 1x 4 Differentiator 2x (*
UINT16
Distance of samples for the differentiation; max. value = 1000; except ELM36xx with max value = 5000
UINT16
Scaling (enum): 0 Extended Range 1 Linear 2 Lookup Table 3 Legacy Range 4 Lookup Table (additive)
UINT16
Optional: 5 Extended Functions
Anzahl Stützstellen der LookUpTabelle
UINT16
Smallest PDO output value
INT32
High Limiter Largest PDO output value
INT32
Low Range Error High Range Error Timestamp Correction
Filter 1 Type Info Filter 2 Type Info
Lowest limit at which the error bit and the error LED are set
Highest limit at which the error bit and the error LED are set
Value for correcting StartNextLatchTime (timestamp of the first sample)
Filter 1 type information
INT32 INT32 INT32
STRING
Filter 2 type information
STRING
Flags RW
RW
RW
RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0001 (1dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0064 (100dec) 0x80000000 (2147483648dec) 0x7FFFFFFF (2147483647dec) 0xFF800000 (8388608dec) 0x007FFFFF (8388607dec) 0xFFFB6C20 (300000dec) N/A N/A
(* Functionality is only available from FW03
4.2.6.9 0x80n1 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n1:0 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n1:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n1:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 1 ... Coefficients for filter 1
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
388
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.6.10 0x80n3 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n3:0 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n3:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n3:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 2 ... Coefficients for filter 2
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.6.11 0x80n5 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n5:0 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n5:01 Scaler Offset/ Scaler Value 1
80n5:02 Scaler-Gain/ Scaler Value 2
80n5:03 Scaler Value 3
80n5:04 Scaler Value 4
..
..
80n5:63 Scaler Value 99
80n5:64 Scaler Value 100
Meaning
Scaling values offset/gain or LookUp table with 50 x/y value pairs Scaling offset oder LookUp x value 1 Scaling gain oder LookUp y value 1 LookUp x value 2 LookUp y value 2 .. LookUp x value 50 LookUp y value 50
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x64 (100dec)
INT32
INT32
INT32 INT32 .. INT32 INT32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
..
..
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.6.12 0x80nE PAI User Calibration Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nE:0 PAI User Calibration Data Ch.1
80nE:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nE:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nE:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nE:04 S1 80nE:05 S2
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
389
Commissioning Index Name (hex) 80nE:06 S3 80nE:07 T1
80nE:08 T1S1
80nE:09 T2
80nE:0A T2S1
80nE:0B T3
80nE:0C T3S1
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Coefficient for third-order samples
REAL32
RW
0x00000000
(S3 * sample³)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T1 * temp)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
0x00000000
and temperature values (T1S1 * temp * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
0x00000000
order temperature value (T2 * temp²)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T2S1 * temp² * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.6.13 0x80nF PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nF:0 PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.1
80nF:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nF:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nF:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nF:04 S1 80nF:05 S2 80nF:06 S3 80nF:07 T1
80nF:08 T1S1
80nF:09 T2
80nF:0A T2S1
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Coefficient for third-order samples (S3 * sample³)
REAL32
RW
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T1 * temp)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
and temperature values
(T1S1 * temp * sample)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
order temperature value
(T2 * temp²)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T2S1 * temp² * sample)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
390
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex) 80nF:0B T3
80nF:0C T3S1
Commissioning
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.6.14 0x90n0 PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 90n0:0
90n0:02
Name
Meaning
PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
ADC Raw Value ADC Raw Value
Data type UINT8
INT32
90n0:03 90n0:04 90n0:07 90n0:08 90n0:09
90n0:0A
90n0:0B
Calibration Value
Value after calibration
Zero Offset Value
Zero offset value
Actual Negative Current absolute minimum value Peak Hold
Actual Positive Current absolute maximum value Peak Hold
Previous
Absolute minimum value up to last
Negative Peak rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Hold
Previous Positive Peak Hold
Absolute maximum value up to last rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Filter 1 Value Value after filter 1
INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32 INT32
INT32
INT32
90n0:0C Filter 2 Value Value after filter 2
INT32
90n0:0D True RMS Value Value after "True RMS" calculation INT32
90n0:0E 90n0:0F
90n0:10
Extended
Value after advanced (optional)
Functions Value function
INT32
Integrator/ Differentiator Value
Value after integration or differentiation INT32
Scaler Value Value after scaling
INT32
90n0:11 Limiter Value Value after limitation
INT32
90n0:20 DC Bias Voltage DC bias voltage in AC operation
REAL32
90n0:21 90n0:22
Signal Frequency
Signal Duty Cycle
Frequency of the input signal Duty Cycle of the input signal
UINT32 UINT8
Flags RO
RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x22 (34dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
391
Commissioning
4.2.6.15 0x90n2 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
90n2:0 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
90n2:01 Effective Sample Effective Sample Rate Rate
90n2:02 Channel Temperature
Temperature of the channel
90n2:03 Min. Channel Temperature
Minimal temperature of the channel
90n2:04 Max. Channel Maximal temperature of the channel Temperature
90n2:05 Overload Time Absolute time during overload
Data type UINT8 UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 UINT32
"Overload" means that the channel is electrically overloaded. This is a nonrecommendable condition that may eventually lead to atypical aging or even damage. This condition should be avoided.
Its accumulated duration is displayed here informatively.
90n2:06 Saturation Time Absolute time during saturation
UINT32
"Saturation" means that the measuring range of the ADC of the channel is fully utilized, the ADC thus outputs its maximum value and the measured value can no longer be used. "Saturation" is therefore a prederegistration, with further signal increase it comes to "overload".
The saturation state is not fundamentally harmful, but it indicates an insufficient dimensioning of the measurement channel.
Its accumulated response time is displayed here informatively.
90n2:07 Overtemperature Time of exceeded temperature of the UINT32 Time (Channel) channel
90n2:11 Vendor Calibration Counter
Counter of the vendor calibration
UINT16
(related to the selected interface)
The counter counts +1 when data has
changed and the memory code word is
written. Depending on the adjustment
method, the counter may therefore
count several times.
Flags RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO
Default 0x12 (18dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
392
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
Data type
90n2:12
User Calibration Counter
Counter of the user calibration (related to the selected interface) The counter counts +1 when data has changed and the memory code word is written. Depending on the adjustment method, the counter may therefore count several times.
UINT16
Flags RO
Default
0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.6.16 0x90nF PAI Calibration Dates Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels:
Index (hex)
90nF:0
Name PAI Calibration Dates
Meaning
Data type UINT8
90nF:61 90nF:62 90nF:63 90nF:64 90nF:65 90nF:66 90nF:67 90nF:68 90nF:69 90nF:6A 90nF:6B 90nF:E1 90nF:E2 90nF:E3 90nF:E4 90nF:E5 90nF:E6 90nF:E7 90nF:E8 90nF:E9 90nF:EA 90nF:EB 90nF:EC
Vendor IEPE ±10 V Vendor IEPE ±5 V Vendor IEPE ±2.5 V Vendor IEPE ±1.25 V Vendor IEPE ±640 mV Vendor IEPE ±320 mV Vendor IEPE ±160 mV Vendor IEPE ±80 mV Vendor IEPE ±40 mV Vendor IEPE ±20 mV Vendor IEPE 0..20 V Vendor IEPE 0..10 V User IEPE ±5 V User IEPE ±2.5 V User IEPE ±1.25 V User IEPE ±640 mV User IEPE ±320 mV User IEPE ±160 mV User IEPE ±80 mV User IEPE ±40 mV User IEPE ±20 mV User IEPE 0..20 V User IEPE 0..10 V
OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4]
Flags Default
RO 0xEC (236dec)
RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0}
4.2.6.17 0xB0n0 PAI TEDS Interface Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels:
Index (hex) B0n1:0 B0n1:01
Name
PAI TEDS Interface Ch.1 Request
Meaning
Commands to the ELM terminals
Data type
UINT8 OCTET-STRING[4]
Flags Default
RO 0x08 (8dec) RW {0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
393
Commissioning
Index (hex)
B0n1:02
Name Status
B0n1:03 B0n1:05 B0n1:07 B0n1:08
Family Code Serial Number CRC TEDS Data
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
CC = status code LL = data length
OCTET-STRING[2] RO {0}
URN (Unique
OCTET-STRING[1] RW {0}
Registration Number OCTET-STRING[6] RW {0}
OCTET-STRING[1] RW {0}
TEDS content
OCTET-STRING[128] RW {0}
4.2.6.18 0xF000 Modular device profile
Index Name (hex)
F000:0 Modular device profile
F000:01 Module index distance
F000:02 Maximum number of modules
Meaning
General information for the modular device profile Index distance of the objects of the individual channels Number of channels
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x02 (2dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0010 (16dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0004 (4dec)
4.2.6.19 0xF008 Code word
Index (hex)
F008:0
Name Code word
Meaning
4.2.6.20 0xF009 Password Protection
Index (hex)
F009:0
Name
Password protection
Meaning
4.2.6.21 0xF010 Module list
Index Name (hex) F010:0 Module list F010:01 Subindex 001
Meaning
...
...
...
F010:n Subindex n
n = number of existing channels by the terminal
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT8 UINT32
... UINT32
RW
n
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
...
...
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
394
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.6.22 0xF083 BTN
Index (hex)
F083:0
Name BTN
Meaning Beckhoff Traceability Number
Data type Flags Default
STRING
RO
00000000
Note: this object exists from revision -0018 (ELM3148 from revision -0017) and the FW from release date >2019/03 only
4.2.6.23 0xF900 PAI Info Data
Index Name (hex) F900:0 PAI Info Data F900:01 CPU Usage F900:02 Device State
F900:03 Operating Time
Meaning
CPU load in [%]* Device State Permitted values: 0 OK 1 Warm Up Operating time in [min]
Data type UINT8 UINT16 UINT16
UINT32
F900:04 Overtemperature Time of overtemperature of the device Time (Device)
F900:11 Device Temperature
Measured temperature in the terminal
F900:12 Min. Device Temperature
Lowest measured temperature in the terminal
F900:13 Max. Device Temperature
Highest measured temperature in the terminal
UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32
Flags RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x13 (19dec) 0x0000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
*) This value depends of additional enabled features (Filters, True RMS, ...); the more functions of the terminal are in use, the greater is the value. Notice amongst others the ,,Input cycle counter" (PAI Status [} 384]). The CPU load is an informative value with particularly regard to the "Device-specific Diag messages".
4.2.6.24 0xF912 Filter info
Index (hex) F912:0 F912:01
Name
Filter info Info header
F912:02 ... F912:m
Filter 1 ... Filter n
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
UINT8
RO m
Basic information for the filter designer
OCTETSTRING[8] RO {0}
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
...
...
...
...
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
m = (2 No. of channels) + 1
Note: availability of CoE Objekt "0xF912 Filter info":
Terminal ELM360x
since FW version 03
Revision -0017
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
395
Commissioning
4.2.6.25 0xFB00 PAI Command
Index Name (hex) FB00:0 PAI Command FB00:01 Request FB00:02 Status
FB00:03 Response
Meaning
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
Command request
The respective functional chapters explain which value is to be entered here.
OCTET-
RW
STRING[2]
Command status
UINT8
RO
This indicates that the command is still running or has been executed. Functional dependent, see respective sections. Otherwise:
0: Command not existing
1: executed without errors
2,3: executed not successful
100..200: indicates the execution progress (100 = 0% etc.)
255: function is busy, if [100..200] won't be used as progress display
Command response
OCTET-
RO
If the transferred command returns a STRING[6]
response, it will be displayed here.
Functional dependent, see resprective
sections.
Default 0x03 (3dec) {0} 0x00 (0dec)
{0}
4.2.7 ELM37xx
4.2.7.1 0x10F3 Diagnosis History
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
10F3:0 Diagnosis History
Max. Subindex
10F3:01 Maximum Messages
Maximum Messages
10F3:02 Newest Message Newest Message
10F3:03 Newest Acknowledged Message
Subindex of last Acknowledged Message
10F3:04 New Messages True: New Messages Available Available
10F3:05 Flags
Diagnosis message options (see ETG specification)
10F3:06 Diagnosis .10F3:15 Message 001...
Diagnosis Message 016
Diagnosis Message No. 01...16
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RO
UINT8
RW
BOOLEAN RO
UINT16
RW
OCTET-
RO
STRING[22]
Default 0x15 (21dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec) {0}
396
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.2.7.2 0x60n0 PAI Status Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex) 60n0:0 PAI Status
Ch.[n+1] 60n0:01 No of Samples
60n0:09 Error 60n0:0A Underrange 60n0:0B Overrange 60n0:0D Diag
60n0:0E TxPDO State 60n0:0F Input cycle
counter
Meaning
Data type
UINT8
Number of valid samples within the PDO samples TRUE: General error TRUE: Measurement event underflow TRUE: Measurement event overflow TRUE: New diagnostic message available TRUE: data invalid Incremented by one when values have changed
UINT8
BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN BIT2
Flags
RO
RO
RO RO RO RO
RO RO
Default
0x0F (15dec)
0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.7.3 0x60n1 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (24 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
ELM3x0x:
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:64 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
ELM3x4x:
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:20 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x20 (32dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.7.4 0x60n2 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (16 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels (not ELM3x4x):
Index Name (hex)
60n2:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n2:01 Sample
Meaning Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8 INT16
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x0000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
397
Commissioning
Index Name (hex)
...
...
60n2:64 Sample
Meaning
... Samples
Data type Flags Default
... INT16
...
...
RO
0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.7.5 0x60n3 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1] (24 Bit)
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
ELM3x0x:
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:64 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x64 (100dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3x4x:
Index Name (hex)
60n1:0 PAI Samples Ch.[n+1]
60n1:01 Sample
...
...
60n1:20 Sample
Meaning
Samples ... Samples
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
INT32 ... INT32
RO
0x20 (32dec)
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.7.6 0x60n5 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
60n5:0 PAI Timestamp Ch.[n+1]
60n5:01 Low
Meaning Timestamp (low)
Data type UINT8 UINT32
60n5:02 Hi
Timestamp (hi)
UINT32
Flags RO RO RO
Default
0x02 (2dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.7.7 0x60n6 PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex)
60n6:0
Name
PAI Synchronous Oversampling Ch.[n+1]
Meaning
Data type RO
Flags Default UINT8 0x01 (1dec)
398
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex)
60n6:01 Internal Buffer
Meaning
Commissioning
Data type Flags Default
RO
UINT16 0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.7.8 0x70n0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
70n0:0 PAI Control Ch.[n+1]
70n0:01 Integrator Reset Restart of the integration with each edge
70n0:02 Peak Hold Reset
Start new peak value detection with each edge
70n0:09 Invalidate
Switching off channel external
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
BOOLEAN RO
BOOLEAN RO
BOOLEAN RO
Default 0x09 (9dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (0dec)
4.2.7.9 0x70n1 PAI TC Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
70n1:0 PAI TC Ch.[n+1]
70n1:01 Cold Junction Temperature
Meaning Cold Junction Temperature [°C]
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
REAL32 RO
0x01 (1dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.7.10 0x80n0 PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex)
80n0:0
Name
PAI Settings Ch.[n+1]
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x41 (65dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
399
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:01
80n0:02
80n0:03 80n0:04 80n0:05 80n0:06 80n0:08 80n0:13
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
Interface
Selection of the measurement configuration: 0 None 1 - U ±60 V 2 - U ±10 V 3 - U ±5 V 4 - U ±2.5 V 5 - U ±1.25 V 6 - U ±640 mV 7 - U ±320 mV 8 - U ±160 mV 9 - U ±80 mV 10 - U ±40 mV 11 - U ±20 mV 14 - U 0..10 V 15 - U 0..5 V 17 - I ±20 mA 18 - I 0..20 mA 19 - I 4..20 mA 20 - I 4..20 mA NAMUR
more.. [} 416]
UINT16 RW
Sensor Supply
Sensor supply: 0 - 0.0 V 2 - 1.0 V 3 - 1.5 V 4 - 2.0 V 5 - 2.5 V 6 - 3.0 V 7 - 3.5 V 8 - 4.0 V 9 - 4.5 V 10 - 5.0 V 65534 - Local Control 65535 - External Supply
UINT16 RW
IEPE AC Coupling
0 - Off (DC Coupling) 1 - 0.001 Hz 2 - 0.01 Hz 3 - 0.1 Hz 4 - 1 Hz 5 - 10 Hz
UINT16 RW
Start
Start connection test with rising
Connection Test edge (see section "Broken wire
detection/ optional connection
diagnosis")
BOOLEAN RW
Coldjunction Compensation
0 - Intern 1 - None 2 - Extern Processdata 3 - Fix Value
BIT2
RW
Enable Autorange
Autorange (Enable/ Disable)
BOOLEAN RW
Enable Shunt Shunt calibration (Enable/ Disable) BOOLEAN RW Calibration
Wire Resistance Wire resistance compensation Compensation
REAL32 RW
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (0dec) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE) 0x00000000 (0dec)
400
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index (hex)
80n0:14
Name RTD Element
Meaning
0 None 1 - PT100 (-200...850°C) 2 - NI100 (-60...250°C) 3 - PT1000 (-200...850°C) 4 - PT500 (-200...850°C) 5 - PT200 (-200...850°C) 6 - NI1000 (-60...250°C) 7 - NI1000 TK5000: 1500Ohm (-30...160°C) 8 - NI120 (-60...320°C) 9 - KT100/110/130/210/230 KTY10/11/13/16/19 (-50...150°C) 10 - KTY81/82-110,120,150 (-50...150°C) 11 - KTY81-121 (-50...150°C) 12 - KTY81-122 (-50...150°C) 13 - KTY81-151 (-50...150°C) 14 - KTY81-152 (-50...150°C) 15 - KTY81/82-210,220, 250 (-50...150°C) 16 - KTY81-221 (-50...150°C) 17 - KTY81-222 (-50...150°C) 18 - KTY81-251 (-50...150°C) 19 - KTY81-252 (-50...150°C) 20 - KTY83-110,120,150 (-50...175°C) 21 - KTY83-121 (-50...175°C) 22 - KTY83-122 (-50...175°C) 23 - KTY83-151 (-50...175°C) 24 - KTY83-152 (-50...175°C) 25 - KTY84-130,150 (-40...300°C) 26 - KTY84-151 (-40...300°C) 27 - KTY21/23-6 (-50...150°C) 28 - KTY1x-5 (-50...150°C) 29 - KTY1x-7 (-50...150°C) 30 - KTY21/23-5 (-50...150°C) 31 - KTY21/23-7 (-50...150°C) 64 - B-Parameter Equation (8006) 65 - DIN IEC 60751 Equation (8006) 66 - Steinhart Hart Equation (8006)
Commissioning
Data type Flags Default
UINT16
RW
0x0000 (0dez)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
401
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:15
80n0:16
80n0:17 80n0:18 80n0:19
80n0:1A
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
TC Element
0 None 1 - K -270...1372°C 2 - J -210...1200°C 3 - L -50...900°C 4 - E -270...1000°C 5 - T -270...400°C 6 - N -270...1300°C 7 - U -50...600°C 8 - B 200...1820°C 9 - R -50...1768°C 10 - S -50...1768°C 11 - C 0...2320°C 13 D 0...2490°C 14 G 1000...2300°C 15 P (PLII) 0...1395°C 16 - Au//Pt 0...1000°C 17 Pt/Pd 0...1500°C 18 A-1 0...2500°C 19 A-2 0...1800°C 20 A-3 0...1800°C
UINT16 RW
Filter 1
Options for filter 1:
UINT16 RW
0 None 1 - FIR Notch 50 Hz 2 - FIR Notch 60 Hz 3 - FIR LP 100 Hz 4 - FIR LP 1000 Hz 5 - FIR HP 150 Hz 16 - IIR Notch 50 Hz 17 - IIR Notch 60 Hz 18 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1 Hz 19 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 25 Hz 20 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 100 Hz 21 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 250 Hz 22 - IIR Butterw. LP 5th Ord. 1000 Hz 32 - User defined FIR Filter 33 - User defined IIR Filter 34 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 1 Number of samples for user-defined UINT16 RW No of Samples Average Filter 1
Decimation Factor
Factor of the individual sampling UINT16 RW rate (min. 1)
Filter 2
Options for filter 2:
UINT16 RW
0 None
1 - IIR 1
2 - IIR 2
3 - IIR 3
4 - IIR 4
5 - IIR 5
6 - IIR 6
7 - IIR 7
8 - IIR 8
16 - User defined FIR Filter
17 - User defined IIR Filter
18 - User defined Average Filter
Average Filter 2 Number of samples for user-defined UINT16 RW No of Samples Average Filter 2
Default 0x0000 (0dez)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec) 0x0001 (1dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00C8 (200dec)
402
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:1B 80n0:1C 80n0:1D 80n0:1E 80n0:2B 80n0:2C
80n0:2D
80n0:2E
80n0:2F 80n0:32 80n0:33 80n0:34 80n0:35 80n0:36 80n0:37 80n0:38 80n0:39 80n0:3A
Name
Meaning
Data type Flags
True RMS No. of Samples
Enable True RMS Enable Frequency Counter Reset Load Cycle Counter Extended Functions
Integrator/ Differentiator
Differentiator Samples Delta
Scaler
Lookup Table Length Low Range Error High Range Error Timestamp Correction
Low Limiter
Number of samples for "True RMS" UINT16 RW calculation (min. 1, max. 1000); also see chapter TrueRMS
Activation of "True RMS" calculation BOOLEAN RW
Enable Frequency Counter
BOOLEAN RW
Reset Load Cycle Counter
BOOLEAN RW
Options for future functions/settings UINT16 RW 0 Disabled 1 Load Cell Analysis
Options: 0 Off 1 Integrator 1x 2 Integrator 2x (* 3 Differentiator 1x 4 Differentiator 2x (*
UINT16 RW
Distance of samples for the
UINT16 RW
differentiation; max. value = 1000;
except ELM36xx with max value =
5000
Scaling (enum): 0 Extended Range 1 Linear 2 Lookup Table 3 Legacy Range 4 Lookup Table (additive)
UINT16 RW
Optional: 5 Extended Function 6 - Temperature Celsius 7 - Temperature Kelvin 8 - Temperature Fahrenheit
Anzahl Stützstellen der LookUpTabelle
UINT16 RW
Lowest limit at which the error bit INT32
RW
and the error LED are set
Highest limit at which the error bit INT32
RW
and the error LED are set
Value for correcting
INT32
RW
StartNextLatchTime (timestamp of
the first sample)
Smallest PDO output value
REAL32 RW
High Limiter Largest PDO output value
REAL32 RW
Bridge Resistance
Bridge resistance
Wire Resistance Wire resistance Uv Uv-
Wire Resistance Wire resistance Uv+ Uv+
Low Load Cycle Low load cycle limit Limit
REAL32 RW REAL32 RW REAL32 RW REAL32 RW
Default 0x00C8 (200dec)
0x00 (FALSE) 0x00 (FALSE)
0x00 (FALSE) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0001 (1dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
0x0064 (100dec) 0xFF800000 (8388608dec) 0x007FFFFF (8388607dec) 0xFFFB6C20 (300000dec) 0xFF7FFFFD (-8388611dec) 0x7F7FFFFD (2139095037dec) 0x43AF0000 (1135542272dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
403
Commissioning
Index (hex) 80n0:3B
80n0:3C 80n0:40
80n0:41
Name
Meaning
High Load Cycle High load cycle limit Limit
TC CJ Value Value of the cold junction
Filter 1 Type Info
Filter 1 type information
Filter 2 Type Info
Filter 2 type information
(* Functionality is only available from FW03
Data type Flags Default
REAL32 RW
REAL32 RW STRING RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dez) N/A
STRING RW N/A
4.2.7.11 0x80n1 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n1:0 PAI Filter 1 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n1:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n1:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 1 ... Coefficients for filter 1
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.7.12 0x80n3 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n3:0 PAI Filter 2 Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n3:01 Filter Coefficient 1
...
...
80n3:28 Filter Coefficient 40
Meaning
Coefficients for filter 2 ... Coefficients for filter 2
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x28 (40dec)
INT32
... INT32
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
...
...
RO
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.7.13 0x80n5 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
80n5:0 PAI Scaler Settings Ch.[n+1]
80n5:01 Scaler Offset/ Scaler Value 1
Meaning
Scaling values offset/gain or LookUp table with 50 x/y value pairs Scaling offset oder LookUp x value 1
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x64 (100dec)
INT32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
404
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex)
80n5:02 Scaler-Gain/ Scaler Value 2
80n5:03 Scaler Value 3
80n5:04 Scaler Value 4
..
..
80n5:63 Scaler Value 99
80n5:64 Scaler Value 100
Meaning
Scaling gain oder LookUp y value 1 LookUp x value 2 LookUp y value 2 .. LookUp x value 50 LookUp y value 50
Commissioning
Data type Flags Default
INT32
INT32 INT32 .. INT32 INT32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
..
..
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
4.2.7.14 0x80nA PAI Extended Settings Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels (Special settings for the ,,Extended Functions")
Index Name (hex)
80nA:0 PAI Extended Settings Ch.[n+1]
80nA:01 Sensitivity (Compression)
80nA:02 Sensitivity (Tension)
80nA:03 Zero Balance
80nA:04 Maximum Capacity
80nA:05 Gravity of Earth
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Special settings for the ,,Extended UINT8 Functions"
RO
0x05 (5dec)
Sensitivity (mech. compression) REAL32 RW 0x40000000
(1073741824dec)
Sensitivity (mech. tension)
REAL32 RW 0xC0000000
(-1073741824dec)
Zero balance
REAL32
RW
0x00000000 (0dec)
Maximum capacity
REAL32 RW 0x40A00000
(1084227584dec)
Gravity of earth
REAL32 RW 0x411CE80A
(1092413450dec)
4.2.7.15 0x80nE PAI User Calibration Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nE:0 PAI User Calibration Data Ch.1
80nE:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nE:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nE:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nE:04 S1 80nE:05 S2 80nE:06 S3
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Coefficient for third-order samples (S3 * sample³)
REAL32
RW
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
405
Commissioning Index Name (hex) 80nE:07 T1
80nE:08 T1S1
80nE:09 T2
80nE:0A T2S1
80nE:0B T3
80nE:0C T3S1
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T1 * temp)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
0x00000000
and temperature values (T1S1 * temp * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
0x00000000
order temperature value (T2 * temp²)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T2S1 * temp² * sample)
(0.0dec)
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.7.16 0x80nF PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
80nF:0 PAI Vendor Calibration Data Ch.1
80nF:01 Calibration Date Date of calibration
80nF:02 Signature
Signature of the calibration values
80nF:03 S0
Offset
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
OCTET-
RW
STRING[4]
OCTET-
RW
STRING[256]
REAL32
RW
80nF:04 S1 80nF:05 S2 80nF:06 S3 80nF:07 T1
80nF:08 T1S1
80nF:09 T2
80nF:0A T2S1
Coefficient for first-order samples (S1 * sample)
REAL32
RW
Coefficient for second-order samples REAL32
RW
(S2 * sample²)
Coefficient for third-order samples (S3 * sample³)
REAL32
RW
Temperature coefficient for first-order REAL32
RW
temperature value
(T1 * temp)
Combined coefficient for first-order gain REAL32
RW
and temperature values
(T1S1 * temp * sample)
Temperature coefficient for second- REAL32
RW
order temperature value
(T2 * temp²)
Combined coefficient for second-order REAL32
RW
gain and temperature values
(T2S1 * temp² * sample)
Default
0x0C (12dec)
-
-
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x3F800000 (1.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec) 0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
0x00000000 (0.0dec)
406
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index Name (hex) 80nF:0B T3
80nF:0C T3S1
Commissioning
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
Temperature coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
temperature value (T3 * temp³)
(0.0dec)
Combined coefficient for third-order REAL32
RW
0x00000000
gain and temperature values (T3S1 * temp³ * sample)
(0.0dec)
4.2.7.17 0x90n0 PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index (hex) 90n0:0
90n0:01
90n0:02
Name
Meaning
PAI Internal Data Ch.[n+1]
Connector
Temperature on the connectors
Temperature
ADC Raw Value ADC Raw Value
Data type UINT8
REAL32 INT32
90n0:03 90n0:04 90n0:05
Calibration Value
Zero Offset Value
Resistor Value
Value after calibration Zero offset value Resistor Value
INT32 INT32 INT32
90n0:06 TC/RTD Value TC/RTD Value
INT32
90n0:07 90n0:08 90n0:09
90n0:0A
90n0:0B
Actual Negative Current absolute minimum value Peak Hold
Actual Positive Current absolute maximum value Peak Hold
Previous
Absolute minimum value up to last
Negative Peak rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Hold
Previous Positive Peak Hold
Absolute maximum value up to last rising edge of "Peak Hold Reset"
Filter 1 Value Value after filter 1
INT32 INT32 INT32
INT32
INT32
90n0:0C Filter 2 Value Value after filter 2
INT32
90n0:0D True RMS Value Value after "True RMS" calculation INT32
90n0:0E 90n0:0F
90n0:10
Extended
Value after advanced (optional)
Functions Value function
INT32
Integrator/ Differentiator Value
Value after integration or differentiation INT32
Scaler Value Value after scaling
INT32
90n0:11 Limiter Value Value after limitation
INT32
Flags RO
RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO RO RO RO
RO RO
Default
0x22 (34dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
407
Commissioning
Index (hex)
90n0:20
Name
Meaning
DC Bias Voltage DC bias voltage in AC operation
90n0:21 90n0:22
Signal Frequency
Signal Duty Cycle
Frequency of the input signal Duty Cycle of the input signal
Data type Flags Default
REAL32
RO
0x00000000
(0dec)
UINT32
RO
0x00000000
(0dec)
UINT8
RO
0x00 (0dec)
4.2.7.18 0x90n2 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
90n2:0 PAI Info Data Ch.[n+1]
90n2:01 Effective Sample Effective Sample Rate Rate
90n2:02 Channel Temperature
Temperature of the channel
90n2:03 Min. Channel Temperature
Minimal temperature of the channel
90n2:04 Max. Channel Maximal temperature of the channel Temperature
90n2:05 Overload Time Absolute time during overload
Data type UINT8 UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32 UINT32
"Overload" means that the channel is electrically overloaded. This is a nonrecommendable condition that may eventually lead to atypical aging or even damage. This condition should be avoided.
Its accumulated duration is displayed here informatively.
90n2:06 Saturation Time Absolute time during saturation
UINT32
"Saturation" means that the measuring range of the ADC of the channel is fully utilized, the ADC thus outputs its maximum value and the measured value can no longer be used. "Saturation" is therefore a prederegistration, with further signal increase it comes to "overload".
The saturation state is not fundamentally harmful, but it indicates an insufficient dimensioning of the measurement channel.
Its accumulated response time is displayed here informatively.
90n2:07 Overtemperature Time of exceeded temperature of the Time (Channel) channel
90n2:10 Load Cycle Counter
Load Cycle Counter
UINT32 UINT32
Flags RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO
RO RO
Default 0x12 (18dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
408
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index Name (hex)
Meaning
Data type
90n2:11 Vendor Calibration Counter
Counter of the vendor calibration
UINT16
(related to the selected interface)
The counter counts +1 when data has
changed and the memory code word is
written. Depending on the adjustment
method, the counter may therefore
count several times.
90n2:12
User Calibration Counter
Counter of the user calibration (related to the selected interface) The counter counts +1 when data has changed and the memory code word is written. Depending on the adjustment method, the counter may therefore count several times.
UINT16
Flags RO
RO
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
0x0000 (0dec)
4.2.7.19 0x90nF PAI Calibration Dates Ch.[n+1]
0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels:
Index (hex)
90nF:0
Name PAI Calibration Dates
Meaning
Data type UINT8
90nF:01 90nF:02 90nF:03 90nF:04 90nF:05 90nF:06 90nF:07 90nF:08 90nF:09 90nF:0A 90nF:0B 90nF:0C 90nF:0D 90nF:0E 90nF:0F 90nF:10 90nF:11
90nF:12 90nF:13 90nF:14 90nF:15 90nF:16 90nF:17 90nF:18 90nF:19 90nF:1A
Vendor U ±60 V Vendor U ±10 V Vendor U ±5 V Vendor U ±2.5 V Vendor U ±1.25 V Vendor U ±640 mV Vendor U ±320 mV Vendor U ±160 mV Vendor U ±80 mV Vendor U ±40 mV Vendor U ±20 mV Vendor U 0..10 V Vendor U 0..5 V Vendor I ±20 mA Vendor I 0..20 mA Vendor I 4..20 mA Vendor I 4..20 mA (NAMUR) Vendor Poti 3Wire Vendor Poti 5Wire Vendor TC 80 mV Vendor TC CJC Vendor IEPE ±10 V Vendor IEPE ±5 V Vendor IEPE ±2.5 V Vendor IEPE 0..20 V Vendor IEPE 0..10 V
OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4]
OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4] OCTET-STRING[4]
Flags Default
RO 0xC3 (195dec)
RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0}
RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0} RO {0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
409
Commissioning
Index (hex) 90nF:1B 90nF:1C 90nF:1D 90nF:1E 90nF:1F 90nF:20 90nF:21 90nF:22 90nF:23 90nF:24 90nF:25
90nF:26
90nF:27 90nF:28 90nF:29
90nF:2A
90nF:2B 90nF:2C 90nF:2D
90nF:2E
90nF:2F 90nF:30 90nF:31
Name
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V
Vendor SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 16 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V
Vendor SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 16 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 8 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 32 mV/V
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
410
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index (hex) 90nF:32
90nF:33
90nF:34
90nF:35 90nF:36 90nF:37 90nF:38 90nF:39 90nF:3A 90nF:3B 90nF:3C 90nF:3D 90nF:3E 90nF:3F 90nF:40 90nF:41 90nF:42 90nF:43 90nF:81 90nF:82 90nF:83 90nF:84 90nF:85 90nF:86 90nF:87 90nF:88 90nF:89 90nF:8A 90nF:8B 90nF:8C 90nF:8D 90nF:8E 90nF:8F 90nF:90 90nF:91 90nF:92 90nF:93 90nF:94 90nF:95 90nF:96 90nF:97 90nF:98 90nF:99 90nF:9A
Name
Meaning
Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 8 mV/V Vendor SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 32 mV/V Vendor R/RTD 2Wire 5k Vendor R/RTD 3Wire 5k Vendor R/RTD 4Wire 5k Vendor R/RTD 2Wire 2k Vendor R/RTD 3Wire 2k Vendor R/RTD 4Wire 2k Vendor R/RTD 2Wire 500R Vendor R/RTD 3Wire 500R Vendor R/RTD 4Wire 500R Vendor R/RTD 2Wire 200R Vendor R/RTD 3Wire 200R Vendor R/RTD 4Wire 200R Vendor R/RTD 2Wire 50R Vendor R/RTD 3Wire 50R Vendor R/RTD 4Wire 50R User U ±60 V User U ±10 V User U ±5 V User U ±2.5 V User U ±1.25 V User U ±640 mV User U ±320 mV User U ±160 mV User U ±80 mV User U ±40 mV User U ±20 mV User U 0..10 V User U 0..5 V User I ±20 mA User I 0..20 mA User I 4..20 mA User I 4..20 mA (NAMUR) User Poti 3Wire User Poti 5Wire User TC 80 mV User TC CJC User IEPE ±10 V User IEPE ±5 V User IEPE ±2.5 V User IEPE 0..20 V User IEPE 0..10 V
Commissioning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
411
Commissioning
Index (hex) 90nF:9B 90nF:9C 90nF:9D 90nF:9E 90nF:9F 90nF:A0 90nF:A1 90nF:A2 90nF:A3 90nF:A4 90nF:A5
90nF:A6
90nF:A7 90nF:A8 90nF:A9
90nF:AA
90nF:AB 90nF:AC 90nF:AD
90nF:AE
90nF:AF 90nF:B0 90nF:B1
Name
Meaning
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 32 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V
User SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 32 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 16 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V
User SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 16 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 8 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 32 mV/V
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
412
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Index (hex) 90nF:B2
90nF:B3
90nF:B4
90nF:B5 90nF:B6 90nF:B7 90nF:B8 90nF:B9 90nF:BA 90nF:BB 90nF:BC 90nF:BD 90nF:BE 90nF:BF 90nF:C0 90nF:C1 90nF:C2 90nF:C3
Name
User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 8 mV/V User SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 32 mV/V User R/RTD 2Wire 5k User R/RTD 3Wire 5k User R/RTD 4Wire 5k User R/RTD 2Wire 2k User R/RTD 3Wire 2k User R/RTD 4Wire 2k User R/RTD 2Wire 500R User R/RTD 3Wire 500R User R/RTD 4Wire 500R User R/RTD 2Wire 200R User R/RTD 3Wire 200R User R/RTD 4Wire 200R User R/RTD 2Wire 50R User R/RTD 3Wire 50R User R/RTD 4Wire 50R
Meaning
Commissioning
Data type
Flags Default
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0} OCTET-STRING[4] RO {0}
4.2.7.20 0xF000 Modular device profile
Index Name (hex)
F000:0 Modular device profile
F000:01 Module index distance
F000:02 Maximum number of modules
Meaning
General information for the modular device profile Index distance of the objects of the individual channels Number of channels
Data type Flags Default
UINT8
RO
0x02 (2dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0010 (16dec)
UINT16
RO
0x0004 (4dec)
4.2.7.21 0xF008 Code word
Index (hex)
F008:0
Name Code word
Meaning
4.2.7.22 0xF009 Password Protection
Index (hex)
F009:0
Name
Password protection
Meaning
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
Data type Flags Default
UINT32
RW
0x00000000
(0dec)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
413
Commissioning
4.2.7.23 0xF010 Module list
Index Name (hex) F010:0 Module list F010:01 Subindex 001
Meaning
...
...
...
F010:n Subindex n
n = number of existing channels by the terminal
Data type Flags Default
UINT8 UINT32
... UINT32
RW
n
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
...
...
RW
0x0000015E
(350dec)
4.2.7.24 0xF083 BTN
Index (hex)
F083:0
Name BTN
Meaning Beckhoff Traceability Number
Data type Flags Default
STRING
RO
00000000
Note: this object exists from revision -0018 (ELM3148 from revision -0017) and the FW from release date >2019/03 only
4.2.7.25 0xF900 PAI Info Data
Index Name (hex) F900:0 PAI Info Data F900:01 CPU Usage F900:02 Device State
F900:03 Operating Time
Meaning
CPU load in [%]* Device State Permitted values: 0 OK 1 Warm Up Operating time in [min]
Data type UINT8 UINT16 UINT16
UINT32
F900:04 Overtemperature Time of overtemperature of the device Time (Device)
F900:11 Device Temperature
Measured temperature in the terminal
F900:12 Min. Device Temperature
Lowest measured temperature in the terminal
F900:13 Max. Device Temperature
Highest measured temperature in the terminal
UINT32 REAL32 REAL32 REAL32
Flags RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
Default
0x13 (19dec) 0x0000 (0dec) 0x0000 (0dec)
0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec) 0x00000000 (0dec)
*) This value depends of additional enabled features (Filters, True RMS, ...); the more functions of the terminal are in use, the greater is the value. Notice amongst others the ,,Input cycle counter" (PAI Status [} 397]). The CPU load is an informative value with particularly regard to the "Device-specific Diag messages".
4.2.7.26 0xF912 Filter info
Index (hex) F912:0 F912:01
Name
Filter info Info header
Meaning
Basic information for the filter designer
Data type
Flags Default
UINT8
RO m
OCTETSTRING[8] RO {0}
414
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Index (hex) F912:02 ... F912:m
Name
Filter 1 ... Filter n
Meaning
Data type
Flags Default
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
...
...
...
...
Informations for the filter designer OCTETSTRING[30] RO {0}
m = (2 No. of channels) + 1
Note: availability of CoE Objekt "0xF912 Filter info":
Terminal ELM370x
since FW version 01
Revision -0016
4.2.7.27 0xFB00 PAI Command
Index Name (hex) FB00:0 PAI Command FB00:01 Request FB00:02 Status
FB00:03 Response
Meaning
Data type Flags
UINT8
RO
Command request
The respective functional chapters explain which value is to be entered here.
OCTET-
RW
STRING[2]
Command status
UINT8
RO
This indicates that the command is still running or has been executed. Functional dependent, see respective sections. Otherwise:
0: Command not existing
1: executed without errors
2,3: executed not successful
100..200: indicates the execution progress (100 = 0% etc.)
255: function is busy, if [100..200] won't be used as progress display
Command response
OCTET-
RO
If the transferred command returns a STRING[6]
response, it will be displayed here.
Functional dependent, see resprective
sections.
Default 0x03 (3dec) {0} 0x00 (0dec)
{0}
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
415
Commissioning
4.2.7.28 0x80n0:01 PAI Settings.Interface
ELM37xx: 0x80n0:01 PAI Settings.Interface (0 n m, n+1 = Channel number, m+1 = max. No. of channels) - continued
Index (hex) 80n0:01
Meaning
Selection of the measurement configuration (continued):
0x80n0 PAI Settings [} 399] ... ELM37xx: 65 - Poti 3Wire 66 - Poti 5Wire 81 - TC 80 mV 86 - TC CJC 97 - IEPE ±10 V 98 - IEPE ±5 V 99 - IEPE ±2.5 V 107 - IEPE 0..20 V 108 - IEPE 0..10 V 259 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 2 mV/V 261 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 4 mV/V 268 - SG Full-Bridge 4Wire 32 mV/V 291 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 2 mV/V 293 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 4 mV/V 300 - SG Full-Bridge 6Wire 32 mV/V 323 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 2 mV/V 329 - SG Half-Bridge 3Wire 16 mV/V 355 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 2 mV/V 361 - SG Half-Bridge 5Wire 16 mV/V 388 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated 390 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated 391 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 8 mV/V 396 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 120R 32 mV/V 420 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 2 mV/V compensated 422 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 4 mV/V compensated 423 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 8 mV/V 428 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 120R 32 mV/V 452 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated 454 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated 455 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 8 mV/V 460 - SG Quarter-Bridge 2Wire 350R 32 mV/V 484 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 2 mV/V compensated 486 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 4 mV/V compensated 487 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 8 mV/V 492 - SG Quarter-Bridge 3Wire 350R 32 mV/V 785 - R/RTD 2Wire 5k 786 - R/RTD 3Wire 5k 787 - R/RTD 4Wire 5k 800 - R/RTD 2Wire 2k 801 - R/RTD 3Wire 2k 802 - R/RTD 4Wire 2k 821 - R/RTD 2Wire 500R 822 - R/RTD 3Wire 500R 823 - R/RTD 4Wire 500R 830 - R/RTD 2Wire 200R 831 - R/RTD 3Wire 200R 832 - R/RTD 4Wire 200R 848 - R/RTD 2Wire 50R 849 - R/RTD 3Wire 50R 850 - R/RTD 4Wire 50R
Data type UINT16
Flags RW
Default 0x0000 (0dec)
416
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
4.3
Sample programs
Using the sample programs
This document contains sample applications of our products for certain areas of application. The application notes provided here are based on typical features of our products and only serve as examples. The notes contained in this document explicitly do not refer to specific applications. The customer is therefore responsible for assessing and deciding whether the product is suitable for a particular application. We accept no responsibility for the completeness and correctness of the source code contained in this document. We reserve the right to modify the content of this document at any time and accept no responsibility for errors and missing information.
Preparations for starting the sample programs (tnzip file / TwinCAT 3)
· Click on the download button to save the Zip archive locally on your hard disk, then unzip the *.tnzip archive file in a temporary folder.
Fig. 111: Opening the *. tnzip archive
· Select the .tnzip file (sample program). · A further selection window opens. Select the destination directory for storing the project. · For a description of the general PLC commissioning procedure and starting the program please refer to
the terminal documentation or the EtherCAT system documentation. · The EtherCAT device of the example should usually be declared your present system. After selection
of the EtherCAT device in the "Solutionexplorer" select the "Adapter" tab and click on "Search...":
Fig. 112: Search of the existing HW configuration for the EtherCAT configuration of the example
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
417
Commissioning
· Checking NetId: the "EtherCAT" tab of the EtherCAT device shows the configured NetId:
. The first 4 numbers have to be identical with the project NetId of the target system. The project NetId can be viewed within the TwinCAT environment above, where a pull down menu can be opened to choose a target system (by clicking right in the text field). The number blocks are placed in brackets there next to each computer name of a target system. · Modify the NetId: By right clicking on "EtherCAT device" within the solution explorer a context menu opens where "Change NetId..." have to be selected. The first four numbers of the NetId of the target computer have to be entered; the both last values are 4.1 usually. Example:
NetId of project: myComputer (123.45.67.89.1.1) Entry via ,,Change NetId...": 123.45.67.89.4.1
Preparation to start the sample program (tpzip file/ TwinCAT 3) · After clicking the Download button, save the zip file locally on your hard disk, and unzip the *.tpzip archive file into a temporary working folder. · Create a new TwinCAT project as described in section: TwinCAT Quickstart, TwinCAT 3, Startup [} 473]
· Open the context menu of "PLC" within the "Solutionexplorer" and select "Add Existing Item..."
· Select the beforehand unpacked .tpzip file (sample program).
4.3.1 Sample program 1 and 2 (offset/gain)
Download TwinCAT 3 project:
https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/zip/2152667403.zip
Program description / function: · Calculation of an Offset correction value on the basis of the amplitudes of an AC input voltage (with corresponding DC component) until a deviation of the offset smaller than "wOFFSET_MIN_VAL_REF" (in digits) is achieved. · Calculation of a Gain correction value by presetting via "nPRESET_MAX_VAL" (in digits).
The configuration of the minimum permitted input frequency, the order of the Gain and Offset calculations, and the direct writing to the CoE directory ("PAI Scaler Settings" object) can be done in this sample program (see Variable declaration).
The following procedure is foreseen:
1. Configuration of "bWriteToCoEEnable" = TRUE, i.e. on completion of the calculation of the correction values, they are written to the CoE object "PAI Scaler Settings".
418
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
2. Set the terminal to "Extended Range" (0) via the object "PAI Settings Ch. 1" 0x8000:2E in the CoE directory.
3. Connect a periodic signal (triangle, sine, square, ...) to the terminal within the selected voltage/current range via the PAI Settings object 0x8000:01 (Interface).
4. Start the program by setting "bEnable" to "TRUE".
5. The end of the execution is recognizable by the variables "bScaleGainDone" and "bScaleOffsetDone", which are then both TRUE.
6. If writing is enabled in the CoE ("bWriteToCoEEnable" = TRUE), the values determined should have been written to the object "PAI Scaler Settings" in the CoE directory (see variable "bError").
7. The terminal can now be set to "Linear" (1) via the object "PAI Settings Ch. 1" 0x8000:2E in the CoE directory. As a result, the terminal also performs the correction calculation internally (see: "nScaledSampleVal").
Comments:
Alternatively, the TC3 Analytics Library (TF3510) can be used instead of the function block "FB_GET_MIN_MAX". The function block "FB_ALY_MinMaxAvg_1Ch" can also be used for the determination of the min./max. values. The total calculation can then also be modified in this program by using the mean value provided by this function block.
In the case of the ELM350x and ELM370x terminals, the "PAI Scaler Settings" object is 0x80n6, in addition to which the nOffset and nGain variables can also be directly written without the type conversion (REAL to DINT); scaling of the amplitude correction values with 65536 is also no longer necessary.
Example program 1 and 2 program code:
PROGRAM MAIN
VAR_INPUT
bEnable
:BOOL; // Start the code (Offset / Gain adjust)
nPAI_Sample AT%I*
:DINT; // Input samples of the measurement value
END_VAR
VAR
// Enter your Net-Id here:
userNetId
:T_AmsNetId := 'a.b.c.d.x.y';
// Enter terminals EtherCAT device adress here:
nUserSlaveAddr
:UINT := 1002; // Check, if correct
// Configurations:
fMinFrequencyIn
:REAL:=1.5; // Hz
bScalingOrder
:BOOL:=FALSE; // TRUE: Start scale offset first
bWriteToCoEEnable
:BOOL:=FALSE; // TRUE: Enable writing to CoE
// ===============================================
// "Main" State controlling Offset/Gain adjusting:
nMainCal_State
:BYTE:=0;
// For CoE Object 0x8005 access:
fb_coe_write
:FB_EcCoESdoWrite; // FB for writing to CoE
nSTATE_WRITE_COE
:BYTE := 0;
nSubIndex
:BYTE;
nCoEIndexScaler
:WORD := 16#8005; // Use channel 1
// For ELM350x, ELM370x this is 0x80n6
nSubIndScalGain
:BYTE := 16#02;
nSubIndScalOffs
:BYTE := 16#01;
nADSErrId
:UDINT; // Copy of ADS-Error ID
// ===============================================
fb_get_min_max
:FB_GET_MIN_MAX; // Min/Max values needed
// Note: you may also use "FB_ALY_MinMaxAvg_1Ch" of TwinCAT analytics)
// instead; there avg (average values can also be determinated
// Variables used for offset scaling:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
419
Commissioning
nSTATE_SCALE_OFFSET :INT := 0;
bScaleOffsetStart
:BOOL := FALSE;
bScaleOffsetDone
:BOOL := FALSE;
fOffsetDeviationVal :REAL;
nOFFSET_MIN_VAL_REF :WORD := 200; // Max. limit value for offset
// Variables used for gain scaling:
nSTATE_SCALE_GAIN
:INT := 0;
bScaleGainStart
:BOOL := FALSE;
bScaleGainDone
:BOOL := FALSE;
nPRESET_MAX_VAL
:REAL := 3000000; // Target amplitude value
// ===============================================
// Variables for evaluating of gain and offset:
nOffset
:REAL := 0; // Offset value
nGain
:REAL := 1; // Gain value
nScaledSampleVal
:REAL;
nDINT_Value
:DINT;
fb_trig_bEnable
:R_TRIG; // Trigger FB for Enable
bError
:BOOL := FALSE; // Evaluate..
END_VAR
Execution part::
// THIS CODE IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE - YOU HAVE TO CHECK APTITUDE FOR YOUR APPLICATION // Example program 1 and 2 program code: // ===================================== // 1. PAI setting of 0x80n0:2E must be "Extended Range" at first // 2. When writing of scaling values were done, switch to "Linear"
// Calculation of the temporary value (..and use for ScopeView to check) nScaledSampleVal := nOffset + nGain * DINT_TO_REAL(nPAI_Sample); // Main-State Procedure: CASE nMainCal_State OF
0: fb_trig_bEnable(CLK:=(bEnable AND NOT bError)); IF fb_trig_bEnable.Q THEN // Poll switch or button // Initialize temporary offset and gain values: nOffset:= 0; nGain := 1; bScaleOffsetStart := bScalingOrder; bScaleGainStart := NOT bScalingOrder;
fb_get_min_max.nMinFreqInput := fMinFrequencyIn;
nMainCal_State := 10; // Start END_IF 10: IF (bScaleGainDone AND NOT bScalingOrder)
OR (bScaleOffsetDone AND bScalingOrder) THEN bScaleOffsetStart := NOT bScalingOrder; bScaleGainStart := bScalingOrder; nMainCal_State := nMainCal_State + 10;
END_IF 20:
IF bScaleGainDone AND bScaleOffsetDone THEN nMainCal_State :=0; // All done, initalization for next start
420
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
END_IF END_CASE
// ----- Offset scaling (program 1) ----IF bScaleOffsetStart THEN
CASE nSTATE_SCALE_OFFSET OF 0:
bScaleOffsetDone := FALSE; // Initialization of confirmation flag // Get min/max values within a period of the signal: fb_get_min_max(nInputValue:=nScaledSampleVal); IF fb_get_min_max.bRESULT THEN // Wait if Limit-Values are valid
// Min/Max Values valid, continue.. // calculate current offset deviation: fOffsetDeviationVal := (fb_get_min_max.nMaxVal - ABS((fb_get_min_max.nMaxVal-fb_get_min_max.nMinVal)/2));
// Offset deviation check: IF ABS(fOffsetDeviationVal) < nOFFSET_MIN_VAL_REF THEN
// Deviation in acceptable range - offset scaling done, // now write correction value into CoE Object: nDINT_Value := REAL_TO_DINT(nOffset);
// Initiate writing to CoE: nSubIndex := nSubIndScalOffs; nSTATE_WRITE_COE := 10; nSTATE_SCALE_OFFSET := nSTATE_SCALE_OFFSET + 10; ELSE // Calculate new offset value (new by old with deviation) nOffset := nOffset - fOffsetDeviationVal; END_IF END_IF 10: IF(nSTATE_WRITE_COE = 0) THEN // Scaling offset done within CoE of the terminal bScaleOffsetDone := TRUE; bScaleOffsetStart := FALSE; nSTATE_SCALE_OFFSET := 0; END_IF END_CASE END_IF
// ----- Gain scaling (program 2) ----IF bScaleGainStart THEN
CASE nSTATE_SCALE_GAIN OF 0:
bScaleGainDone := FALSE; // Initialization of confirmation flag // Get min/max values within a period of the signal: fb_get_min_max(nInputValue:=DINT_TO_REAL(nPAI_Sample)); IF fb_get_min_max.bRESULT THEN // Wait if Limit-Values are valid
// Calculate Gain nGain := nPRESET_MAX_VAL/ABS((fb_get_min_max.nMaxVal-fb_get_min_max.nMinVal)/2); // ..shift gain value by 16 Bit left and convert to DINT: nDINT_Value := REAL_TO_DINT(65536 * nGain);
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
421
Commissioning
//Due to 'output = gain * input + offset', the offset have to be adapted: nOffset := nOffset * nGain;
// Initiate writing to CoE: nSubIndex := nSubIndScalGain; nSTATE_WRITE_COE := 10; nSTATE_SCALE_GAIN := nSTATE_SCALE_GAIN + 10; END_IF 10: IF(nSTATE_WRITE_COE = 0) THEN IF NOT (nOffset = 0) THEN
// (bScalingOrder is TRUE) nDINT_Value := REAL_TO_DINT(nOffset); // Initiate writing to CoE (again): nSubIndex := nSubIndScalOffs; nSTATE_WRITE_COE := 10; END_IF
nSTATE_SCALE_GAIN := nSTATE_SCALE_GAIN + 10; END_IF
20: IF(nSTATE_WRITE_COE = 0) THEN // Scaling gain done within CoE of the terminal bScaleGainStart := FALSE; bScaleGainDone := TRUE; nSTATE_SCALE_GAIN := 0; // Set initial state
END_IF END_CASE
END_IF
IF (nSTATE_WRITE_COE > 0) THEN
IF bWriteToCoEEnable THEN
CASE nSTATE_WRITE_COE OF
10:
// Prepare CoE write access
fb_coe_write(
sNetId:=
userNetId,
nSlaveAddr:= nUserSlaveAddr,
nIndex:=
nCoEIndexScaler,
bExecute:= FALSE,
tTimeout:= T#1S
);
nSTATE_WRITE_COE := nSTATE_WRITE_COE + 10;
20:
// Write nDINT_Value to CoE Index "Scaler":
fb_coe_write(
nSubIndex:= nSubIndex,
pSrcBuf:= ADR(nDINT_Value),
cbBufLen:= SIZEOF(nDINT_Value),
bExecute:= TRUE
);
nSTATE_WRITE_COE := nSTATE_WRITE_COE + 10;
30:
fb_coe_write();
IF NOT fb_coe_write.bBusy THEN
422
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
nSTATE_WRITE_COE := 0; END_IF END_CASE ELSE nSTATE_WRITE_COE := 0; END_IF END_IF
IF(fb_coe_write.bError) AND NOT bError THEN bError := TRUE; nADSErrId := fb_coe_write.nErrId; // CoE write acccess error occured: reset all nSTATE_WRITE_COE := nMainCal_State := 0; bScaleOffsetDone := bScaleOffsetStart := FALSE; bScaleGainDone := bScaleGainStart := FALSE;
END_IF
4.3.1.1 Function block FB_GET_MIN_MAX
Declaration part:
FUNCTION_BLOCK FB_GET_MIN_MAX
VAR CONSTANT
CMAXinit
:REAL := -3.402823E+38;
CMINinit
:REAL := 3.402823E+38;
END_VAR
VAR_INPUT
bInit
:BOOL := TRUE;
nInputValue :REAL;
nMinFreqInput :REAL;
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
bRESULT
:BOOL;
nMaxVal
:REAL;
nMinVal
:REAL;
END_VAR
VAR
CMMcnt
:UINT;
nMaxValCnt :UINT;
nMinValCnt :UINT;
bValidMinVal :BOOL;
bValidMaxVal :BOOL;
fbGetCurTaskIdx : GETCURTASKINDEX;
END_VAR
Execution part:
IF bInit THEN // Counter initialization: // [counter value] > [1/(<input frequency> * TaskCycleTime)] fbGetCurTaskIdx(); CMMcnt := REAL_TO_UINT( 1.1E7/(nMinFreqInput*UDINT_TO_REAL( _TaskInfo[fbGetCurTaskIdx.index].CycleTime))); // At least an entire period have to be sampled for min/max determination
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
Commissioning 423
Commissioning
// Initialization, go on: nMaxValCnt :=CMMcnt; nMinValCnt :=CMMcnt; nMaxVal :=CMAXinit; nMinVal :=CMINinit; bInit := FALSE; END_IF // Assertions: new min/max values exists: bValidMaxVal := TRUE; bValidMinVal := TRUE; // Filter min/max values IF (nMaxVal < nInputValue) THEN bValidMaxVal := FALSE; nMaxVal := nInputValue; // Max value was found END_IF IF (nMinVal > nInputValue) THEN bValidMinVal := FALSE; nMinVal := nInputValue; // Min value was found END_IF // Count down, if no new value come in: IF (bValidMaxVal AND (nMaxValCnt > 0)) THEN nMaxValCnt := nMaxValCnt - 1; END_IF // Count down, if no new value come in: IF (bValidMinVal AND (nMinValCnt > 0)) THEN nMinValCnt := nMinValCnt - 1; END_IF IF ((nMaxValCnt = 0) AND (nMinValCnt = 0)) THEN // Consequence: min/max determined bInit := TRUE; // Prepare next call bRESULT := NOT (nMaxVal = nMinVal); // Sign valid results ELSE bRESULT := FALSE; // Sign still invalid results END_IF
4.3.2 Sample program 3 (write LookUp table)
Download TwinCAT 3 project: https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/ zip/2152669707.zip
Program description
Transmission of LookUp table interpolation values for mapping of an equation f(x) = x3 via CoE into the terminal.
Variable declaration sample program 3
PROGRAM MAIN VAR
//LookUp-Table (LUT) generated by: MBE * x³ aLUT:ARRAY[0..99] OF DINT := [
-7812500,-7812500,-7493593,-6894382, -7174765,-6051169,-6855859,-5279674,-6536953,-4576709, -6218125,-3939087,-5899218,-3363620,-5580390,-2847120, -5261484,-2386402,-4942578,-1978275,-4623750,-1619555,
424
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
-4304843,-1307052,-3985937,-1037580,-3667109,-807951,
-3348203,-614978,-3029375,-455472,-2710468,-326248,
-2391562,-224117,-2072734,-145892,-1753828,-88385,
-1434921,-48409,-1116093,-22776,-797187,-8300,
-478281,-1792,-159453,-66,159453,66,
478281,1792,797187,8300,1116093,22776,
1434921,48409,1753828,88385,2072734,145892,
2391562,224117,2710468,326248,3029375,455472,
3348203,614978,3667109,807951,3985937,1037580,
4304843,1307052,4623750,1619555,4942578,1978275,
5261484,2386402,5580390,2847120,5899218,3363620,
6218125,3939087,6536953,4576709,6855859,5279674,
7174765,6051169,7493593,6894382,7812500,7812500
];
// For CoE 0x8000 and 0x8005 - write values:
// ===============================================
wCoEIndexScaler :WORD := 16#8005; // CoE Index
wState
:BYTE := 0; // Write status
fb_coe_writeEx :FB_EcCoESdoWriteEx; // Function Block for writing in CoE
userNetId
:T_AmsNetId := '172.128.1.1.5.1'; // Have to be entered
userSlaveAddr :UINT := 1003; // Have to be entered
bWriteLUT2CoE :BOOL:=FALSE; // Sign for start writing
bError
:BOOL:=FALSE; // Sign for any error
END_VAR
Remarks: · The variable "startWrite" (BOOL) is also declared in sample program 4. · The variable 'userNetId' must include the EtherCAT net ID of the device. It can be viewed in the "EtherCAT" tab under "Device (EtherCAT)". · The variable "userSlaveAddr" must contain the EtherCAT address of the terminal.
Sample program for transferring the LookUp table:
Execution part:
// Example program 3: // ###### Write Lookup-Table in CoE Objekt 0x8005: ####### IF bWriteLUT2CoE THEN CASE wState OF
0: fb_coe_writeEx(bExecute := FALSE);// Prepare CoE-Access wState := wState + 1;// Next state
1: // Write 100 X/Y LookUp-Table entries fb_coe_writeEx( sNetId:= userNetId, nSlaveAddr:= userSlaveAddr, nSubIndex:= 1, nIndex:= wCoEIndexScaler, pSrcBuf:= ADR(aLUT), cbBufLen:= SIZEOF(aLUT), bCompleteAccess:= TRUE, bExecute:= TRUE ); wState := wState + 1; // Next state
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
425
Commissioning
2: // Proceed with writing to CoE fb_coe_writeEx(); IF NOT fb_coe_writeEx.bBusy THEN wState := 0;// Done bWriteLUT2CoE := FALSE; bError := fb_coe_writeEx.bError; // See nErrId if TRUE END_IF
END_CASE END_IF
A simple variable query, e.g. via button linked with bEnable, can be used to initiate the transfer. The variable declaration must contain
VAR_INPUT bEnable AT%I* :BOOL;
END_VAR
and the following program lines:
IF bEnable AND NOT startWrite THEN bWriteLUT2CoE := TRUE;
END_IF
4.3.3 Sample program 4 (generate LookUp table)
Download TwinCAT 3 project: https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/ zip/2152669707.zip
Program description / function:
Inclusion of LookUp table interpolation values from a terminal input signal to a field variable (and optional subsequent transfer of the LookUp table interpolation values via CoE access to the terminal using sample program 3).
It is envisaged to use a ramp generator with a trigger input, whose level, in conjunction with an input of a digital input terminal (e.g. EL1002) sets the variable "bStartRecord" to TRUE via a link (e.g. push button connected to +24 V). This allows recording of the values to be synchronized with the ramp input voltage. Alternatively, an output terminal can be used (e.g. EL2002), whose output controls the trigger input and whose output is then set to TRUE via the TwinCAT development environment ("bStartRecord" would then have to be declared as AT%Q* and linked to a terminal output).
Variable declaration sample program 4
// Variablendeklaration for example program 4
PROGRAM MAIN
VAR CONSTANT
nEndX
: BYTE := 50; // Number of support values
END_VAR
VAR
nPAISampleIn
AT%I* : DINT; // PDO PAISamples
bStartRecord
AT%I* : BOOL; // +Electrical junction to trigger ramp
bGetMinMax
: BOOL := FALSE;
bRecordLUT
: BOOL := FALSE;
r_trigStartRecord
: R_TRIG;
nX
: BYTE := 0;
aValues
: ARRAY[0..nEndX-1] OF DINT;
nYstepValue
: DINT;
tp_timer
: TP;
ton_timer
: TON;
426
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
nMinValue nMaxValue nYvalue tRepeatTimerValue aLUT END_VAR
: DINT := 7812500; : DINT := -7812500; : DINT; : TIME := T#51MS; : ARRAY[0..99] OF DINT;
Execution part:
// Example program 4: // ################# Recording of 50 sample points: ################# // a) Determination of min./max. values (corresponding to the value range of the sensor) tp_timer(IN:=bGetMinMax, PT:=T#2.51S); // Periodic duration of ramp (+reserve) IF tp_timer.Q THEN
nMinValue := MIN(nPAISampleIn, nMinValue); nMaxValue := MAX(nPAISampleIn, nMaxValue); END_IF // b) Recording of values: Start r_trigStartRecord(CLK:=bStartRecord); IF r_trigStartRecord.Q THEN nX := 0; memset(ADR(aLUT), 0 , 100); bRecordLUT := TRUE; END_IF ton_timer(); IF bRecordLUT OR ton_timer.Q THEN bRecordLUT := FALSE; ton_timer(IN:=FALSE); IF(nX < nEndX) THEN
// b.1) Record of values: aValues[nX] := nPAISampleIn; nX := nX + 1; ton_timer(IN:=TRUE, PT:=tRepeatTimerValue); // T=2,5s/49 = 51ms ELSE // b.2) Recording end: // Create linearized values: nYstepValue := (nMaxValue - nMinValue) / nEndX; // Y steps nYvalue := aValues[0]; // Common start value of the LUT FOR nX:=0 TO nEndX DO
// Create LUT (X = actual values, Y = target values): aLUT[nX*2] := aValues[nX]; // X value aLUT[nX*2+1] := nYvalue; // Y value // next Y value of the LUT (make a "straight"): nYvalue := nYvalue + nYstepValue; // f(x) = b+x END_FOR END_IF END_IF
4.3.4 Sample program 5 (write filter coefficients)
Download TwinCAT 3 project: https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/ zip/2152672011.zip
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
427
Commissioning
Program description
Transmission of exemplary filter coefficients via CoE access into the terminal.
General settings
· The function block "FB_EcCoESdoWrite" requires the "Tc2_EtherCAT" library · <AmsNetID> must show the local device EtherCAT NetID in inverted commas (e.g.
'168.57.1.1.5.1') · <DeviceEtherCATAddress> must show the local device EtherCAT address of the EL3751 termi-
nal (e.g. 1007)
Variable declaration sample program 5
PROGRAM MAIN
// Variable declaration example program 5
VAR CONSTANT
NumOfFilterCoeff
:BYTE:=40;
END_VAR
VAR
// Function block of library "Tc2_EtherCAT" for CoE Object access:
fb_coe_write
:FB_EcCoESdoWrite;
userNetId
:T_AmsNetId := '???';
userSlaveAddr
:UINT := ???;
// Writing PLC state for coefficients transfer (Set to 0 for start)
wState
:BYTE:=255;
index
:BYTE:=1; // Start index for coefficients transfer
wCoEIndexUserFilterCoeffizents :WORD:=16#8001;
aFilterCoeffs:ARRAY[0..NumOfFilterCoeff] OF LREAL :=
[
// Example filter coefficients FIR band pass: 3600..3900 Hz
// Usage: "User defined FIR Filter" (32)
0.03663651655662163,
0.04299467480848277,
-0.007880289104928245,
0.0664029021294729,
-0.0729038234874446,
-0.00005849791174519834,
0.05628409460964408,
-0.0525134329294473,
0.026329003448584205,
0.00027114381194760643,
-0.03677629552114248,
0.06743018479714939,
-0.0560894442193289,
0.0009722394088121363,
0.05676876756757213,
-0.07775650809213645,
0.05330627422911416,
0.0009941073749156226,
-0.055674804078696793,
0.07874009379691002,
-0.055674804078696793,
0.0009941073749156226,
0.05330627422911416,
-0.07775650809213645,
428
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
0.05676876756757213, 0.0009722394088121363, -0.0560894442193289, 0.06743018479714939, -0.03677629552114248, 0.00027114381194760643, 0.026329003448584205, -0.0525134329294473, 0.05628409460964408, -0.00005849791174519834, -0.0729038234874446, 0.0664029021294729, -0.007880289104928245, 0.04299467480848277, 0.03663651655662163, 0 ]; nValue :DINT; // Temporary variable END_VAR
Execution part:
// Example program 5: // writes filter coefficients of // "User defined FIR Filter" (32) // incl. example coefficients for band pass // Note: writing possible, if CoE Object // PAI Settings Ch.1 (0x8000:16) has value 32 or 33 set, only! // (32 = User defined FIR Filter / 33 = User defined IIR Filter) // =============================================================== CASE wState OF
0: fb_coe_write(bExecute := FALSE);// Prepare CoE access wState := wState + 1;// Go to next state
1: //nValue := REAL_TO_DINT(DINT_TO_REAL(aFilterCoeffs[index]) *16384); nValue := LREAL_TO_DINT(aFilterCoeffs[index] * 1073741824); // Bit-shift factor: 2^30 // Write filter coefficients (max. 40 entries) fb_coe_write( sNetId:= userNetId, nSlaveAddr:= userSlaveAddr, nSubIndex:= index, nIndex:= wCoEIndexUserFilterCoeffizents, pSrcBuf:= ADR(nValue), cbBufLen:= SIZEOF(nValue), bExecute:= TRUE, tTimeout:= T#1S ); wState := wState + 1; // Go to next state
2: // Execute writing to CoE fb_coe_write(); IF fb_coe_write.bError THEN wState := 100; // Error case ELSE
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
429
Commissioning
IF NOT fb_coe_write.bBusy THEN index := index + 1;
IF index <= (NumOfFilterCoeff) THEN fb_coe_write(bExecute := FALSE);// Prepare the next CoE access wState := 1;// Write next value
ELSE wState := 255;// Done
END_IF END_IF END_IF 100: ; // Error handling 255: ; // Go on.. END_CASE
4.3.5 Sample program 6 (interlacing of measured values)
Program description / function
In some use cases a particularly fine temporal resolution of the signal is desired, e.g. so that many measuring points are available for an FFT. Two ways to do this are shown below:
· Use of an analog input terminal with the correspondingly high sampling rate, e.g. 20 ksps. · Use of two analog input terminals with half the sampling rate, i.e. 10 ksps, and so-called interlacing of
measured values; the result is likewise a 20 ksps sampling of the signal.
The second way is described in this sample: Use of two EL3751 EtherCAT Terminals, each with a maximum sampling rate of 10 kSps (and thus a conversion time of 100 µs in this case, cf. chapter "Temporal aspects of the analog/digital conversion" [} 604]). Due to their parallel connection, both terminals are fed the same signal simultaneously and are configured by Distributed Clocks in such a way that they sample not at the same time, but offset by half the conversion time (in this case: 50 µs). If the two measured data streams are now combined alternately in the controller, i.e. "interlaced", the result is a net measured data stream of 20 ksps.
Fig. 113: Process of interlacing the input data The following configuration is used for this purpose:
430
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Fig. 114: Configuration and setup for sample program 6: Doubling of the sample rate with 2 x EL3751
The sample is also available with corresponding adaptations for other EL3xxx/ELM3xxx terminals or boxes. There may then be different oversampling factors, shift times, etc. The optionally existing task with 50 µs in sample 6a may then also not be usable.
So that the input values can be successively combined to form a total value, a corresponding shift time is necessary for each channel/terminal; in this sample 50 µs for the second terminal. This is set in the "Advanced settings" for Distributed Clocks ("DC" tab) for the second terminal:
Fig. 115: Setting the DC shift time for terminal 2
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
431
Commissioning
Some notes and restrictions
· This principle can be implemented with two (as described above) or more terminals; the limit is the shift time fineness of 1 µs.
· The terminals used must support Distributed Clocks. Oversampling is helpful, but not necessary. The sampling methods simultaneous vs. multiplex must be considered; see corresponding documentation with the question: "when the channels sample their values in relation to Distributed Clocks".
· Although this approach doubles the sampling rate of the signal under observation, the frequency response and attenuation specified in the technical data for the terminal still apply! It is therefore not possible to read signals that are twice as fast with twice the sampling rate. Sample: the EL3751 with a sampling rate of 10 ksps can meaningfully (alias-free) read signals up to half the sampling rate = 5 kHz. This limit remains even with multiple parallel sampling! The attenuation of -3 dB at 3 kHz given as an example also applies to the interlaced sum signal.
· Only one EtherCAT terminal can be functionally time-shifted as a whole by Distributed Clocks shift time, not the individual channel of a terminal. The shift then affects all the channels of a terminal. Therefore, for the given principle, two or more terminals/boxes must always be used; the interlacing of two channels of the same terminal/box is not possible.
· The specified measurement uncertainty must be observed: the unavoidably different real measurement uncertainty and thus the amplitude difference between the two terminals or their channels used on the same signal can become visible as a noise component after interlacing. Therefore, terminals should be used for this principle that exhibit a much smaller measurement uncertainty than is necessary for the application. It is expressly recommended to carry out an explicit user calibration of at least the offset of the two electrically interconnected channels in order to minimize this effect.
· Terminals with the same HW/FW version should be used.
Sample program
This setting, like the base time and the task cycle time, is already configured in the sample program:
Download TwinCAT 3 project / sample program 6a: https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/ Resources/zip/4867888523.zip
In the following section, the simplest form of input value interlacing in Structured Text is initially shown with oversampling = 1 for each input value: each of two elements of a field variable receives a value from a terminal. The variable can be used for further processing and is shown here in the TwinCAT ScopeView. In the EL3751 the programming instructions are assigned to a 100 µs task:
Variable declaration sample program 6a
PROGRAM MAIN
VAR
nSamples_1
AT%I*
:DINT; // EL3751 input with no added shift time
nSamples_2
AT%I*
:DINT; // EL3751 input with -50 µs added shift time
aCollectedResult
:ARRAY[0..1] OF DINT;
END_VAR
Execution part:
// Example program 6a: // 100 µs task // ============================================================ aCollectedResult[0] := nSamples_1; // Put 1st Value of sequence into array // Pattern: 1.1.1.1... aCollectedResult[1] := nSamples_2; // Put n-th Value of sequence into array (2nd here) // Pattern: .2.2.2.2... // ============================================================ // Result pattern: 12121212... (--> see scope view dots)
For an input signal with sine 5 kHz and 2.5 V amplitude, for example, the TwinCAT ScopeView provides the following results:
432
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Fig. 116: Oversampling 20 ksps with 2 x EL3751 with input signals (below) and result signal (top)
The upper diagram shows the total signal and the two input signals (nSample_1, nSample_2), with a time shift of 50 µs relative to each other, within 18 s in compressed form. The total input signal (nCollectedResult) indicates the interlacing of the two input signals.
The following diagram (enhanced through highlighting) shows how the input signals (nSample_1, nSample_2) contribute to the structure of the total input signal:
Fig. 117: Oversampling 20 ksps with 2 x EL3751 shows input value 1 and input value 2 alternately for a result value
Under certain conditions, both inputs can be combined into a single variable in a correspondingly fast task. For this purpose the sample program contains an additional task with 50 µs cycle time, which is required for representing the input signals in the SopeView and contains a variable (nCollected) to which both inputs are assigned alternately:
// 50 µs task
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
433
Commissioning
// ============================================================ // Junction of the two inputs nCollected := SEL(nToggle, MAIN.nSamples_1_, MAIN.nSamples_2_); nToggle := NOT nToggle;
The input variables required for the ScopeView are read in this task from the 100 µs task, so that the individual values can be represented at 50 µs intervals.
Variant with 2 x oversampling 10 = oversampling 20
If, for example, an oversampling factor of 10 is used for both input terminals, a field variable is used for the total measured value. A simple loop can be used for interlacing the input values, which reads the values sequentially into a field variable for the resulting result variable:
Variable declaration sample program 6b
PROGRAM MAIN
VAR
aSamples_1
AT%I*
:ARRAY[0..9] OF DINT; // EL3751 input with no added shift time
aSamples_2
AT%I*
:ARRAY[0..9] OF DINT; // EL3751 input with -50 µs added shift time
aCollectedResult
:ARRAY[0..19] OF DINT;
// ===================================================
nPos
:BYTE;
END_VAR
Execution part:
// Example program 6b: // 1 ms task // ============================================================ FOR nPos := 0 TO 9 DO
// Put 1st Value of sequence into array: aCollectedResult[2*nPos] := aSamples_1[nPos]; // Put n-th value of sequence into array (2nd here): aCollectedResult[2*nPos+1] := aSamples_2[nPos]; END_FOR
Download TwinCAT 3 project / sample program 6b: https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/ Resources/zip/4867891467.zip
Sample program 6b returns the same result, except that the total input signal is only available in the form of a field variable with 20 elements.
4.3.6 Sample program 7 (general decimation in the PLC)
The EL3751 or ELM3xxx can only decimate their basic sampling rate fmax by integer multiples, see chapter "Decimation". To realize any other sampling rates (ftarget < fmax) for a channel, you can proceed as follows, for example:
· Operate the terminal/channel at the maximum sampling rate and transfer the data to the controller (PLC) via EtherCAT/oversampling
434
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
· In the PLC/C++, on the time axis, convert to the desired sampling rate, e.g. by linear interpolation based on the timestamp for each input value (sample). Since the EL3751/ELM3xxx units provide timeequidistant samples based on distributed clocks, this is easily possible. For example, a sinusoidal signal decimated with 50/44.1 = 1/0.882 can be represented as follows:
Green: corresponds to original analog signal (input), approx. 432 Hz
Blue (O): corresponds to sampling of the EL3751/ELM3xxx with fmax of 10,000 sps; a sampling interval of 100 µs
Red (X): corresponds to signal converted by PLC to 8820 sps (factor 0.882) and thus a time interval of approx. 113.37.. µs
· Note: The term "decimation" is applied both to the calculation in the terminal (see chapter "Decimation") and to the conversion in the PLC program. The following refers to the conversion in the PLC.
· Since the time interval of the desired sampling after decimation in the PLC is usually no longer an integer (finite) number, value/time pairs are used for representation in the PLC/Scope, i.e. an X time value is assigned to each Y value. Such value/time pairs can easily be displayed with TwinCAT ScopeView in XY mode. See also infosys.beckhoff.com: TwinCAT3 TExxxx | TC3 Engineering TE13xx | TC3 ScopeView Configuration XYGraph
· The conversion also has consequences for further processing in PLC/C/ADS:
A PLC/EtherCAT/TwinCAT system tends to be set up such that a constant number of samples is processed per cycle. Usually this is now no longer the case: a different number of samples has to be processed from cycle to cycle (specified by the program variable nResultNoOfSamples).
While a time stamp per signal value has so far remained relatively insignificant, the method of conversion of the decimation process used here, however, means that the respective timestamp per signal value must be taken into account in an elementary manner.
· The non-constant number of samples is not visible in the TwinCAT XY Scope because some values are sporadically drawn twice, and this should be taken into account; it may be advisable to use an intermediate buffer for further processing.
· For orientation of the currently valid number of samples per task cycle, the program provides the variable nResultNoOfSamples. It indicates which values in the array variable contain valid values in a task cycle (indicates the field number - 1).
The following sample program, which also contains the XY representation in the TwinCAT Scope, serves as a guide. Due to the above-mentioned problem relating to the non-constant number of valid samples, the program returns the array pair aVarDecResult_TS and aVarDecResult for the Scope with the same number of elements as for the input value aSamples_1 (value = nOVS). If there are fewer values in a task run, the last value is simply entered repeatedly (similar to "sample & hold"). The ScopeView was configured as follows for the recording:
Property ScopeNodeProperties
ChartXYNodeProperties
XYChannelNodeProperties
ViewDetauilLevel Record time Default Display Width Max Data Points Marks Mark Size Mark Color
Value ExtendedXYOnly 00:00:00:05 0,00:00:00,050:000 200000 On 5 (other than line color)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
435
Commissioning
For an illustrative representation, the ScopeView recording was started first and then the program, which limits the decimated values to one second:
IF nOVS_CycleCount = 1000000000 THEN ; bEnable := FALSE;// Stop after 1s just for recording
ELSE ...
This line can, of course, be commented out for further adjustments:
//bEnable := FALSE;// Stop after 1s just for recording
Notes: · the target sampling rate ftarget should be close to the sample rate fmax, so that it is possible to evaluate a time interval between two decimated values. The desired decimation may require further parameters such as task cycle time, oversampling factor etc. to be adjusted both in the configuration and as variable initialization in the sample program (see figure "Process of variable decimation of the sample program", which illustrates the functionality of the program code). · Basically, the conversion process in this sample program causes distortions in the result in relation to the original signal shape when decimating with fractional rational factors (see signal curve). In concrete terms, deviations from the original signal curve only occur in those sections where the time derivative value (the slope) is not constant. For example, input values of a sine signal in the non-linear sections are distorted by the interpolation performed in the program:
In the frequency spectrum, for example by a calculation with 20 Hz sinus signal, sampled with 500 sps and decimated to 441 sps, this is illustrated as follows:
· If no low-pass filtering corresponding to ftarget is performed on the data stream, aliasing effects will occur! It is therefore advisable to perform low-pass filtering in the PLC, e.g. with the TC3 Controller Toolbox or the TC3 Filter Library, before the conversion/decimation is performed. Suitable filters can easily be created with the TE1310 FilterDesigner. For more information, see www.beckhoff.com:
436
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Automation TwinCAT 3 TE1xxx | TC3 Engineering TE1310 | TC3 Filter Designer Alternatively, the filters available in the EL3751/ELM3xxx can, of course, be set to the suitable lowpass frequency; the TwinCAT Filter Designer is also helpful for this. · Entries of decimation factors within the program (nDecimationValue) should have a value > 1. The program code supports down sampling only.
E.g.: If a terminal such as ELM3602-0002 (2-channel IEPE evaluation) provides a data stream with oversampling of 50 ksps at 100 µs cycle time, this sample code can decimate to 44.1 ksps. In the sample program, the cycle ticks in the task configuration should be changed from 5 to 1 and the corresponding program variable nTaskCycle_ns from 500000 to 100000. See the following image section of ScopeView XY:
Fig. 118: Decimation from 20 µs (left) to 22.675.. µs (right) with ELM3602
The decimation factor is given by entering the value "50/44.1" for nDecimationValue in the sample. If this sample is used for the EL3751 with 500 µs cycle time and 5x oversampling, the sampling interval of 100 µs, which originates from the EL3751, is converted to approx. 113.378.. µs. This sample is designed accordingly. The decimation in the program is freely selectable and must be configured with an oversampling factor and a task cycle time. The variable nOVS must contain the same oversampling factor as set in the process data configuration.
Download sample program 7:
· Configuration: IPC + EK1100 + EL3751 + EL9011: https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/zip/5090848011.zip
· Configuration: IPC + EK1100 + ELM36020002 + EL9011: https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/zip/5117137291.zip
General information
The time at which the EtherCAT frames are passed to the terminal is subject to fluctuations, referred to as EtherCAT frame jitter. If these fluctuations are large in relation to the cycle time, it is possible that data is fetched late from the terminal, and dropouts/duplications may occur in the scope display. Such effects can be diagnosed with TwinCAT EtherCAT diagnostics. In the sample program for the ELM3602, the variable nEqualTimeStampsCnt is available for this kind of verification. The variable is incremented if such a failure occurs. It can be remedied by changing the DC ShiftTime of the terminal; see the EtherCAT system documentation.
Declaration
// THIS CODE IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE - YOU HAVE TO CHECK APTITUDE FOR YOUR APPLICATION
PROGRAM MAIN VAR CONSTANT
// User decimation factor e.g. 50 to 44.1 kSps:
nDecimationValue
:LREAL := 50/44.1; // 50/20;
nOVS
:BYTE := 5;
// Oversampling factor
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
437
Commissioning
nTaskCycle_ns
:UDINT := 500000; // PlcTask configured cycle time in ns
nOVSTimeInterval_ns nDecTimeInterval_ns END_VAR VAR aSamples_1 AT%I* aOVS_SampleSets
:UDINT := LREAL_TO_UDINT(nTaskCycle_ns/nOVS); // OVS interval :LREAL := nDecimationValue * nOVSTimeInterval_ns; // Decimation interval
:ARRAY[0..nOVS-1] OF DINT;
// Link to the terminal PDO
:ARRAY[0..(2*nOVS)-1] OF DINT; // 2 OVS sample sets
nVarDecResult tVarDecResult
:DINT; // The calculated interpolated value :LREAL; // Decimation timestamp
aVarDecResult aVarDecResult_TS
:ARRAY[0..nOVS-1] OF DINT; // Decimation result values :ARRAY[0..nOVS-1] OF LREAL; // Decimation result timestamps
nResultNoOfSamples
:BYTE; // This is for the user for further processing
nDivVar tDecVar_InTaskCycle
:INT; // Value for selection of the target input element :LREAL:=0; // Time span for all decimation timestamps within a task cycle
i nDX nDY sVal bEnable nOVS_CycleCount
:BYTE:=0; // Common loop counter :LREAL; // X-Difference: target input element to decimation element :DINT; // Y-Difference: two values for interpolation :LREAL; // Slope for calculation of new value :BOOL:=FALSE; // Start/Stop conversion to decimation values :ULINT := 0; // Time value for every OVS sample
// Values for testing bTEST_VALUES_ENABLED nPhi
:BOOL := FALSE; // No input value needed, if TRUE :LREAL := 1.4; // Start angle for sinus simulation
// For visualization only:
aOVS_Samples
:ARRAY[0..nOVS-1] OF DINT; // 2 OVS sample sets (value)
aOVS_Samples_TS
:ARRAY[0..nOVS-1] OF ULINT; // 2 OVS sample sets (timestamp)
END_VAR
Program
// 500 µs Task FOR i:= 0 TO nOVS-1 DO
// Shift OVS set to left and update on right:
aOVS_SampleSets[i] := aOVS_SampleSets[i+nOVS]; IF bTEST_VALUES_ENABLED THEN
// Simulate values:
// Transfer "samples set" to the left side
aOVS_SampleSets[i+nOVS] := LREAL_TO_DINT(1000000 * SIN(nPhi)); nPhi := nPhi + 0.01;//0.003141592653; ELSE
// Fill current new samples set on right:
aOVS_SampleSets[i+nOVS] := aSamples_1[i]; END_IF END_FOR
IF bEnable THEN nResultNoOfSamples := 0; // Use for further processing
FOR i := 0 TO nOVS-1 DO
438
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
nDivVar := TRUNC_INT(tDecVar_InTaskCycle/nOVSTimeInterval_ns);
// Check, if new value is in grid IF (nDivVar = i) THEN
nResultNoOfSamples := nResultNoOfSamples + 1;
// Calc slope by the left and right element values (dy/dx): nDY := aOVS_SampleSets[i+1] - aOVS_SampleSets[i]; sVal := DINT_TO_LREAL(nDY)/nOVSTimeInterval_ns;
// Get the time (difference) from the left side element start to the desired time point: nDX := tDecVar_InTaskCycle
- TRUNC_INT(tDecVar_InTaskCycle/nOVSTimeInterval_ns) * UDINT_TO_LREAL(nOVSTimeInterval_ns); // Calc timestamp tVarDecResult := nDX + ULINT_TO_LREAL(nOVS_CycleCount); // Calc new value: nVarDecResult :=
LREAL_TO_DINT(DINT_TO_LREAL(aOVS_SampleSets[i]) + sVal * nDX);
// next decimation time step tDecVar_InTaskCycle := tDecVar_InTaskCycle + nDecTimeInterval_ns; tDecVar_InTaskCycle := tDecVar_InTaskCycle
- INT_TO_UDINT(TRUNC_INT(tDecVar_InTaskCycle/nTaskCycle_ns)) * nTaskCycle_ns; END_IF
// Fill timestamp and new value allocated to the field element of its timestamp aVarDecResult_TS[i] := tVarDecResult; aVarDecResult[i] := nVarDecResult;
// For visualization of the original input: aOVS_Samples[i] := aOVS_SampleSets[i]; aOVS_Samples_TS[i] := nOVS_CycleCount;
// Count the task cycle timestamp nOVS_CycleCount := nOVS_CycleCount + nOVSTimeInterval_ns; END_FOR END_IF
IF nOVS_CycleCount = 1000000000 THEN bEnable := FALSE;// Stop after 1s just for recording IF NOT bEnable THEN bEnable := TRUE; // OVSSamples transferred complete into both array sets END_IF
END_IF
4.3.7 Sample program 8 (diagnosis messages)
Download TwinCAT 3 project: https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/ zip/4279234443.zip
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
439
Commissioning
Program description
This sample program reads several CoE Objects of the terminal and yet 0x10F3 ,,Diagnosis History" [} 310] that contains user specific diagnosis data: Diagnosis message No.01...16 (0x10F3:06...0x10F3:15). Format of a message (consider little endian): [dddd cccc ffff mmmm tttttttttttttttt pppp(i) kk(i)] dddd = DiagCode: z.B. (00 E0): 0xE000 standard Beckhoff Message cccc = ProductCode (21 50): 0x5021 = Code for ELM ffff = Flags, amongst others indication of the number (i) of parameters (pppp kk) to be given. E.g. (02 00) = 0x0002; bit 4 is set, when not in DC operation
mmmm = Message ID respective text can be found here: basic principles of diag messages [} 568] tttttttttttttttt = TimeStamp pppp(i) = Datatype of the parameters, e.g. (05 00) = 0x0005 for datatype UINT8 kk(i) = parameter value e.g. 2 x UINT8 parameters as indicated by ffff (Flags), with values 0x3C and 0x89 = "05003C050089"
Preparation to start the sample program (tpzip file/ TwinCAT 3) · After clicking the Download button, save the zip file locally on your hard disk, and unzip the *.tpzip archive file into a temporary working folder. · Create a new TwinCAT project as described in section: TwinCAT Quickstart, TwinCAT 3, Startup [} 473]
· Open the context menu of "PLC" within the "Solutionexplorer" and select "Add Existing Item..."
· Select the beforehand unpacked .tpzip file (sample program). The further procedure is described in section TwinCAT Quickstart, TwinCAT 3, Starting the controller [} 486].
4.3.8 Sample program 9 (measuring range combination)
In some applications it can be of interest to measure a value with very fine resolution in a small range, but still detect high deflections. If it is an AC/DC signal that has to be resolved around 0, the following approach can be used: Two inputs of an ELM terminal are electrically connected to simultaneously measure the signal, but with different measuring ranges.
440
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Fig. 119: Principle of combining two measuring channels with FSV1 and FSV2
The dynamic range of a typical 24-bit voltage or current measurement range with the absolute PDO end value of 223 (bit 24 is sign) is 20 log(223) 138.5 dB (without consideration of measurement uncertainties). Now it is possible to connect two (or more) inputs of a measuring system of the same measurement type with different measurement range end values (FSV1, FSV2, FSVn) in parallel to increase the dynamic range. The measured input value is then logged with two measuring ranges FSV1 and FSV2 through combination of two inputs. If FSV2 < FSV1 is selected and thus a lower resolution of FSV2 than FSV1, the low resolution of FSV2 is available if the magnitude of the measured input value is <= FSV2, and the measured input value can also be acquired for the larger range up to <= FSV1.
Note: The general definition is used to calculate the dynamic range:
Dynamic range = largest measured value / smallest unit
For output in dB accordingly with 20 log(FSV / ResolutionFSV). In this sample, using a combination of FSV1 and FSV2, the calculation is as follows:
Dynamic range = 20 log(FSV1 / ResolutionFSV2).
The following sample program is based on a parallel connection of two input channels of the ELM3602-0002:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
441
Commissioning
Fig. 120: Possible structure for the "Measurement range combination" sample program
Program description / function
The FSV1 of channel 1 is selected as ± 5 V, the FSV2 of channel 2 as ±80 mV. The program takes the measured input value from either channel 1 or channel 2 for a common variable depending on the magnitude of the unsigned amount of the measured input value: Initially, the limit value of 107% of the FSV2 (8388607) is verified.
In the CoE object directory, the following settings should be applied in the in the PAI settings objects, according to the variables nFSV_HI and nFSV_LO:
0x8000:01 ±5 V
0x8010:01 ±80 mV
Scaling for both channels: "Extended Range"; no filters active (corresponds to the default setting of the terminal).
Variables declaration:
PROGRAM MAIN VAR CONSTANT
nFSV_PDO nMAX_PDO
: REAL := 7812500; : REAL := 8388607;
nEXT_F
: REAL := nMAX_PDO/nFSV_PDO;
nFSV_HI nFSV_LO
: REAL := 5; // V : REAL := 0.08; // V
nStep_HI nStep_LO END_VAR VAR nSamplesIn1 nSamplesIn2
: REAL := nFSV_HI/nFSV_PDO; : REAL := nFSV_LO/nFSV_PDO;
AT%I* : DINT; AT%I* : DINT;
nValueCombi
: LINT;
442
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
nValueCombi_LREAL nKF nLimit nPDO1_REAL nPDO2_REAL
: LREAL; : REAL := nFSV_HI/nFSV_LO; : REAL := nMAX_PDO; : LREAL; : LREAL;
// Voltage values: nVoltage1 nVoltage2 nVoltageComb
END_VAR
: LREAL; : LREAL; : LREAL;
Program code:
nPDO1_REAL := DINT_TO_LREAL(nSamplesIn1); nPDO2_REAL := DINT_TO_LREAL(nSamplesIn2);
IF ABS(nPDO2_REAL) >= nLimit THEN nValueCombi_LREAL := nPDO1_REAL*nKF;
ELSE nValueCombi_LREAL := nPDO2_REAL;
END_IF nValueCombi := LREAL_TO_LINT(nValueCombi_LREAL);
nVoltage1 := nPDO1_REAL * nFSV_HI/nFSV_PDO; nVoltage2 := nPDO2_REAL * nFSV_LO/nFSV_PDO; nVoltageComb := nValueCombi_LREAL * nFSV_LO/nFSV_PDO;
An application of this sample with a ±5 V FSV1 and a ±80 mV FSV2 and an input signal of ±5.68 V shows the voltage curve at input 1, input 2 and both combined inputs as a continuous range in the lowest recording. In the recording of input 2 the range of +/- overflow is marked (negative/ positive clipping):
Fig. 121: Combination of two channels of the ELM3602-0002 with ±5 V and ±80 mV measuring range
With an applied delta voltage of approx. 86 mV ±5 mV, the transition range is indicated by the voltage characteristic of input 2 (values < 0 V):
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
443
Commissioning
Fig. 122: Combination of two channels of the ELM3602-0002: Supply of a delta voltage in the positive transition range
The following applies to the (preset) extended range of both channels (without taking any measurement uncertainties into account):
If the dynamic range for the ± 5 V measuring range is approx. 20 · log (5.368 / 6.4E-7) 138.47 dB, the combination of two channels of the terminal can be used to increase the dynamic range to approx. 20 × log (5.368 / 1.024E-8) 174.39 dB (with the limitation of a coarser resolution in the range of approx. ± 85.9 mV to ± 5.37 V).
Please note that under these conditions the terminal always displays errors via the error LED and the error bit and outputs error messages to the TwinCAT environment due to regularly occurring overflow of a measuring channel.
4.3.9 Sample program 10 (reading and writing TEDS data)
Program description / function
This sample program illustrates how to read/write the data of a separate TEDS module (TEDS = Transducer Electronic Data Sheet). Such TEDS modules are available on the market for retrofitting sensors or actuators, in order to identify the device after installation or to read out specific data (calibration, manufacturer etc.). The device used in this example was an HBM TEDS 1-TEDS-BOARD-L, version 2018.
This sample program is expressly intended as a feasibility demonstration. Specifically, there is no claim to interoperability with any other TEDS modules. It is the responsibility of users to transfer the methods formulated here to their own implementations.
This demonstration does not cover TEDS modules that are integrated in the sensor and communicate on the sensor lines. This is common for IEPE (vibration) or strain gauges/measuring bridges. It is possible to connect an IEPE sensor equipped with TEDS to Beckhoff ELM3602/ELM3604 terminals.
The following configuration is required:
[EK1100] + [EL2262] + [EL9505] + [EL1262-0050] + EL9011
The configuration can control 2 TEDS modules. Only single-channel operation is shown in the example.
444
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Fig. 123: Wiring for sample program 3
The voltage divider can be dimensioned with R1 = 2180 (e.g. 680 + 1500 ), R2 = 680 and Z = 5,1 V for example.
Notes on the program (visualization)
First the URN has to be read (A). Only then are further functions available.
The program determines the URN for each bit by reinitializing the module, since the terminal for the input causes a time offset that is too large (see "Bit repeat count" at the top right).
Data can be written either by entering hexadecimal values (B) or a text string (ASCII) (C); hexadecimal values must be separated by spaces in the text field. Which of the two inputs is to be used for writing can be specified with the checkbox "Write ASCII data" (E):
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
445
Commissioning
Fig. 124: Visualization of the sample program for TEDS with EL1262-0050 and EL2262
The basic function after the identified URN is (D) reading (READ MEM) and writing (WRITE MEM) TEDS data. By issuing such a command, the associated command statement is generated in the text field (H) and can also be changed and then executed with "Execute command". Via +/- the TEDS address or page can be changed (F). Both the start address and "page" can be entered directly for read / write accesses.
The hexadecimal data (B) of text field #1 to #4 each represent 32 bytes of the total read/write buffer size of 128 bytes, as configured in the sample program. If the checkbox "Complete read size" (G) is unchecked, only text field #1 will be used for writing usually (except the module supports page sizes > 32 byte). Accordingly, only the first characters of the ASCII data text will be written. In any case, the number of bytes as a page of the TEDS module is configured will be used. Note, that the module usually supports write access to addresses of a multiple value of the page size only. For example, assuming a page size of 32 bytes and the address 234 is input, an error 0x35 `writing fail' will occur by a WRITE MEM command; but if address 352 is used, this is valid and there is no error).
Selection of "Include application register" provides whether the application register shall be written or read additionally (G).
Download: https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/zip/5750275595.zip
See information about the TEDS feature of the ELM3xxx in section "ELM Features/ TEDS".
4.3.10 Sample program 11 (FB for real time diagnosis)
The following function block can be used as a template for a real time diagnosis application of an analog input terminal in TwinCAT PLC. It has to be placed between the terminal and the application and evaluates the diagnostic variables coming from the terminal. The measurement values will be unchanged passed through.
446
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
The function block is written for the ELM36020002 with oversampling=5 and should be understood as a functional example and must be adapted if necessary to
· other terminals, if necessary other value data types · other oversampling values It can be extended with data-processing code or further particular diagnostics or assigned to a completely different terminal type (analog output EL4xxx, Encoder EL5xxx, ...). The function block between the terminal and the PLC can be schematically illustrated as follows:
Fig. 125: Function block as an example for analysis of diagnostics information of the terminal
Simplified linking via structure variable This example program takes the opportunity to describe a TwinCAT function that simplifies the linking of complex PDO structures. This function block would have to be linked to all real time variables of the terminal: inputs and outputs; here e.g. for the ELM3602:
This time-consuming process can be simplified and accelerated by structuring in TwinCAT 3. Therefore, in this chapter two alternative variants in TwinCAT 3.1 are presented, as with a few clicks a structure can be defined in the PLC which corresponds to the process image of the terminal.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
447
Commissioning
The respective variant of the function block FB_REALTIME_DIAGNOSIS is included in the two example programs. It contains variables with an application-specific data type. This is a structure created by TwinCAT 3. Because the structure generated by TwinCAT directly maps the PDO structure of the terminal, it is not necessary that a suitable structure must be elaborately created or individual variables must be linked to individual data types. Only a link at a higher level (Status, Samples, Control, ...) is required.
This and all configurations are already included in the respective example program: · Example program (variant A using the "Plc" tab of the terminal): https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/zip/7161530379.zip · Example program (variant B using of "Create SM/PDO Variables" by the advanced settings of the terminal): https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/zip/7161533067.zip
Variant A, "Plc" tab:
In general, the generation of this special PDO data type is activated via the PLC settings of the terminal (tab "Plc"): there the check box "Create PLC Data Type" is set ("Copy" then transfers this character string to the clipboard):
Fig. 126: Creation of PDO variables (TwinCAT version >= V3.1.4024.0)
The setting "Per Channel" can be set if not for all but for one only the structure shall be created.
The address assignments for inputs (%ATI*) and outputs (%ATQ*) are already within this generated structure. Inputs and outputs are therefore summarized in this structure.
The variables declaration within the function block FB_REALTIME_DIAGNOSIS then contains:
stELM3602Special
: MDP5001_350_EB559ACD;
Read access is provided to the inputs of the terminal via the substructure MDP5001_350_Input and write access to the outputs via the substructure MDP5001_350_Output of the structure stELM3602Special.
Variant B, "Create SM/PDO variables":
Commonly, the generation of this specific PDO data type incl. the PDO element will be activated via the EtherCAT settings of the terminal: within the advanced settings under "General"/ "Behavior" the checkbox "Create SM/PDO Variables" in "Process Data" is to set:
448
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
Fig. 127: Creation of the SmPdoVariables (TwinCAT version >= V3.1.4022.30) The data type is visible by selecting the object and can be copied to the clipboard there:
Fig. 128: Seek the generated data type of SmPdoVariables
The variables declaration within the function block FB_REALTIME_DIAGNOSIS then contains:
st_SM2
AT%Q* : ECAT_ELM3602_0002_SM_3412CB6A;
st_SM3
AT%I* : ECAT_ELM3602_0002_SM_87A01A51;
The read access to the inputs of the application is provided via the structure st_SM3 and write access to the outputs via the structure st_SM2. These data structures corresponds to the automatically added new PDO element "SmPdoVariables".
4.3.11 Sample program 12 (scripts for generation and transformation of filter coefficients)
Download link: https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/zip/8663163915.zip For explanations of application see chapter "Exemplary calculation of IIR/FIR filter coefficients".
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
449
Commissioning
4.3.12 Sample program 13 (R/W signature of calibration)
The terminal features an advanced calibration mechanism to store, among other things, an individual signature with 256 bytes, which results from the calibration data. In this way the customer could provide a calibration with a specific signature, e.g. to detect unauthorized internal manipulation of the calibration data; see also chapter "Calibration/Adjustment/Synchronization (vendor and user)".
The function block described below can be used as a basis for an implementation in TwinCAT on a PLC. To simplify matters, only a CRC16 was used in this sample to serve a "signature" limited to two bytes. At a commented point in the FB implementation, another signature algorithm can be implemented, which can be up to 256 bytes long.
The sample function block is included in the TwinCAT 3 archive, which is available for download together with a visualization:
https://infosys.beckhoff.com/content/1033/elm3xxx/Resources/zip/8823639307.zip
Explanatory notes for the visualization "Calibration_Signature_RW"
The input variables of the ADS address and the "InputToggle" must be linked again if another terminal (than ELM3602) is used for the sample. This must be entered in the field after starting the sample program. Alternatively, it can be entered before the start as initialization of the input variable "sTerminalTypeIn" of the function block "FB_VisuUpdate":
sTerminalTypeIn
: T_MaxString := 'ELM3602';
After the program start
The function block "FB_CalibrationSignature" is called in read mode by the visualization when channel +/- or interface +/- or "read" is actuated and in write mode when "write" is actuated. If, after reading, the calculated and the read signature match, bCmpResult becomes TRUE (no inequality). After a write access the entry remains in the read CoE and can be checked by reading (a write access does not change the state of bCmpResult).
Fig. 129: Visualization of the sample implementation: Calibration signature
The variable bError (visualization representation: "R/W Error") provides information about a general error that has occurred when accessing the terminal as well as the failure to find stored terminal information (either the entry in the GVL is missing or the terminal is not present).
Explanatory notes for FB_CalibrationSignature
The interface of the function block is structured as follows:
VAR_INPUT
bInitialize
: BOOL := FALSE; // Ist Initialisiert
bEnable tAmsNetIdArr nIfSlectCoE
: BOOL := FALSE; // Aktiviere Baustein
: AMSADDR;
// Ads-Adresse der Klemme
: WORD;
// Interface Nummer für das CoE
nChSelectCoE eOption stCoEPAIInfoDataCalCnt
: WORD := 1;
// Kanalnummer
: E_CALSIG_OPTIONS; // Zugriff get/set (lese/schreibe)
: ST_CoE;
// Kal.-Zähler Objekt (El3751/ ELM)
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT bDone bCmpResult
: BOOL; // Prozedur abgeschlossen : BOOL; // Signatur-Vergleich: TRUE = Gleich
450
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning
nInterfaceUserCalCnt bError bCancel nErrorId anSigDataOutCoE anSigDataOutCalc END_VAR
: WORD; // Wert des Kalibirungszählers : BOOL; // Fehlerfall : BOOL; // Abbruch (Fehlerfall) : UDINT;// Fehlernummer (alle Quellen) : ARRAY[0..(GVL_CoE.nSigLen-1)] OF BYTE; // Signatur gespeichert : ARRAY[0..(GVL_CoE.nSigLen-1)] OF BYTE; // Signatur berechnet
For initialization the "Net Id" and "Port No." must be transferred to the variable "tAmsNetIdArr" of the FB instance. In addition, the CoE object for reading the calibration counter must be transferred via 'stCoEPAIInfoDataCalCnt', since this is different for the ELM3xxx and EL3751 terminals.
A call is made with "bEnable := TRUE" for activation and with specification of the interface number (nIfSlectCoE) that applies to the terminal to be addressed, the channel (nChSelectCoE) and for reading the stored signature "eOption := E_CALSIG_OPTIONS.get" or for writing "eOption := E_CALSIG_OPTIONS.set".
Then the function block is called until the output variable "bDone" is TRUE.
The outputs anSigDataOutCalc, anSigDataOutCoE, nInterfaceUserCalCnt and bCmpResult will provide content according to the selected option and the calculated/stored terminal data.
To attempt to clear an error that has occurred in the case of "bError" = TRUE, the FB can be called with "bInit := FALSE" (e.g. if the channel number or the interface number has been corrected according to the addressed terminal). The "nErrorId" can be used for evaluation.
In the function block, the signature calculation can be changed/extended at the following point:
// Berechne Signatur // ============== Anwender Code hier ============== // Beispiel: einfache CRC: nCrc := nIfSlectCoE + nChSelectCoE; // Voreinstellung des Startwertes nCrc := F_DATA_TO_CRC16_CCITT(ADR(aData), nDataLen, nCrc); // Berechne "Signatur" memset(ADR(anSigDataOutCalc), 16#FF, GVL_CoE.nSigLen); memcpy(ADR(anSigDataOutCalc), ADR(nCrc), 2); // <- Abhängig von Verschlüsselungsart // =================================================
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
451
ELM Features
5
ELM Features
NOTE
This short documentation does not contain any further information within this chapter. For the complete documentation please contact the Beckhoff sales department responsible for you.
452
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
6
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
6.1
General Notes - EtherCAT Slave Application
This summary briefly deals with a number of aspects of EtherCAT Slave operation under TwinCAT. More detailed information on this may be found in the corresponding sections of, for instance, the EtherCAT System Documentation.
Diagnosis in real time: WorkingCounter, EtherCAT State and Status
Generally speaking an EtherCAT Slave provides a variety of diagnostic information that can be used by the controlling task.
This diagnostic information relates to differing levels of communication. It therefore has a variety of sources, and is also updated at various times.
Any application that relies on I/O data from a fieldbus being correct and up to date must make diagnostic access to the corresponding underlying layers. EtherCAT and the TwinCAT System Manager offer comprehensive diagnostic elements of this kind. Those diagnostic elements that are helpful to the controlling task for diagnosis that is accurate for the current cycle when in operation (not during commissioning) are discussed below.
Fig. 130: Selection of the diagnostic information of an EtherCAT Slave
In general, an EtherCAT Slave offers
· communication diagnosis typical for a slave (diagnosis of successful participation in the exchange of process data, and correct operating mode) This diagnosis is the same for all slaves.
as well as · function diagnosis typical for a channel (device-dependent)
See the corresponding device documentation
The colors in Fig. Selection of the diagnostic information of an EtherCAT Slave also correspond to the variable colors in the System Manager, see Fig. Basic EtherCAT Slave Diagnosis in the PLC.
Colour yellow red
Meaning Input variables from the Slave to the EtherCAT Master, updated in every cycle Output variables from the Slave to the EtherCAT Master, updated in every cycle
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
453
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Colour green
Meaning
Information variables for the EtherCAT Master that are updated acyclically. This means that it is possible that in any particular cycle they do not represent the latest possible status. It is therefore useful to read such variables through ADS.
Fig. Basic EtherCAT Slave Diagnosis in the PLC shows an example of an implementation of basic EtherCAT Slave Diagnosis. A Beckhoff EL3102 (2-channel analogue input terminal) is used here, as it offers both the communication diagnosis typical of a slave and the functional diagnosis that is specific to a channel. Structures are created as input variables in the PLC, each corresponding to the process image.
Fig. 131: Basic EtherCAT Slave Diagnosis in the PLC
The following aspects are covered here:
Code A
Function
The EtherCAT Master's diagnostic information
updated acyclically (yellow) or provided acyclically (green).
Implementation
454
Version: 2.6
Application/evaluation At least the DevState is to be evaluated for the most recent cycle in the PLC. The EtherCAT Master's diagnostic information offers many more possibilities than are treated in the EtherCAT System Documentation. A few keywords:
· CoE in the Master for communication with/through the Slaves
· Functions from TcEtherCAT.lib · Perform an OnlineScan
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Code B C
D
Function
Implementation
Application/evaluation
In the example chosen (EL3102) the EL3102 comprises two analogue input channels that transmit a single function status for the most recent cycle.
Status
In order for the higher-level PLC task (or cor-
·
the bit significations may be found in the device documentation
responding control applications) to be able to rely on correct data, the function status must be evaluated there. Such information is therefore provided with the process data for
· other devices may supply the most recent cycle.
more information, or none
that is typical of a slave
For every EtherCAT Slave that has cyclic WcState (Working Counter)
In order for the higher-level PLC task (or cor-
process data, the Master displays, using what is known as a WorkingCounter, whether the slave is participating success-
0: valid real-time communication in the last cycle
responding control applications) to be able to rely on correct data, the communication status of the EtherCAT Slave must be evaluated
fully and without error in the cyclic ex-
1: invalid real-time communication there. Such information is therefore provided
change of process data. This important, el- This may possibly have effects on
ementary information is therefore provided the process data of other Slaves
for the most recent cycle in the System that are located in the same Syn-
Manager
cUnit
with the process data for the most recent cycle.
1. at the EtherCAT Slave, and, with identical contents
2. as a collective variable at the EtherCAT Master (see Point A)
for linking.
Diagnostic information of the EtherCAT State
Master which, while it is represented at the slave for linking, is actually determined by the Master for the Slave concerned and represented there. This information cannot
current Status (INIT..OP) of the Slave. The Slave must be in OP (=8) when operating normally.
be characterized as real-time, because it AdsAddr
Information variables for the EtherCAT Master that are updated acyclically. This means that it is possible that in any particular cycle they do not represent the latest possible status. It is therefore possible to read such variables through ADS.
· is only rarely/never changed,
The ADS address is useful for
except when the system starts up communicating from the PLC/task
·
is itself determined acyclically (e.g. EtherCAT Status)
via ADS with the EtherCAT Slave, e.g. for reading/writing to the CoE. The AMS-NetID of a slave corre-
sponds to the AMS-NetID of the
EtherCAT Master; communication
with the individual Slave is possible
via the port (= EtherCAT address).
NOTE
Diagnostic information
It is strongly recommended that the diagnostic information made available is evaluated so that the application can react accordingly.
CoE Parameter Directory
The CoE parameter directory (CanOpen-over-EtherCAT) is used to manage the set values for the slave concerned. Changes may, in some circumstances, have to be made here when commissioning a relatively complex EtherCAT Slave. It can be accessed through the TwinCAT System Manager, see Fig. EL3102, CoE directory:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
455
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 132: EL3102, CoE directory
EtherCAT System Documentation
The comprehensive description in the EtherCAT System Documentation (EtherCAT Basics --> CoE Interface) must be observed! A few brief extracts: · Whether changes in the online directory are saved locally in the slave depends on the device. EL terminals (except the EL66xx) are able to save in this way. · The user must manage the changes to the StartUp list. Commissioning aid in the TwinCAT System Manager Commissioning interfaces are being introduced as part of an ongoing process for EL/EP EtherCAT devices. These are available in TwinCAT System Managers from TwinCAT 2.11R2 and above. They are integrated into the System Manager through appropriately extended ESI configuration files.
456
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 133: Example of commissioning aid for a EL3204
This commissioning process simultaneously manages · CoE Parameter Directory · DC/FreeRun mode · the available process data records (PDO)
Although the "Process Data", "DC", "Startup" and "CoE-Online" that used to be necessary for this are still displayed, it is recommended that, if the commissioning aid is used, the automatically generated settings are not changed by it.
The commissioning tool does not cover every possible application of an EL/EP device. If the available setting options are not adequate, the user can make the DC, PDO and CoE settings manually, as in the past.
EtherCAT State: automatic default behaviour of the TwinCAT System Manager and manual operation
After the operating power is switched on, an EtherCAT Slave must go through the following statuses · INIT · PREOP · SAFEOP · OP
to ensure sound operation. The EtherCAT Master directs these statuses in accordance with the initialization routines that are defined for commissioning the device by the ES/XML and user settings (Distributed Clocks (DC), PDO, CoE). See also the section on "Principles of Communication, EtherCAT State Machine [} 528]" in this connection. Depending how much configuration has to be done, and on the overall communication, booting can take up to a few seconds.
The EtherCAT Master itself must go through these routines when starting, until it has reached at least the OP target state.
The target state wanted by the user, and which is brought about automatically at start-up by TwinCAT, can be set in the System Manager. As soon as TwinCAT reaches the status RUN, the TwinCAT EtherCAT Master will approach the target states.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
457
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master Standard setting The advanced settings of the EtherCAT Master are set as standard:
· EtherCAT Master: OP · Slaves: OP
This setting applies equally to all Slaves.
Fig. 134: Default behaviour of the System Manager In addition, the target state of any particular Slave can be set in the "Advanced Settings" dialogue; the standard setting is again OP.
Fig. 135: Default target state in the Slave
Manual Control There are particular reasons why it may be appropriate to control the states from the application/task/PLC. For instance:
458
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
· for diagnostic reasons · to induce a controlled restart of axes · because a change in the times involved in starting is desirable In that case it is appropriate in the PLC application to use the PLC function blocks from the TcEtherCAT.lib, which is available as standard, and to work through the states in a controlled manner using, for instance, FB_EcSetMasterState. It is then useful to put the settings in the EtherCAT Master to INIT for master and slave.
Fig. 136: PLC function blocks
Note regarding E-Bus current
EL/ES terminals are placed on the DIN rail at a coupler on the terminal strand. A Bus Coupler can supply the EL terminals added to it with the E-bus system voltage of 5 V; a coupler is thereby loadable up to 2 A as a rule. Information on how much current each EL terminal requires from the E-bus supply is available online and in the catalogue. If the added terminals require more current than the coupler can supply, then power feed terminals (e.g. EL9410) must be inserted at appropriate places in the terminal strand.
The pre-calculated theoretical maximum E-Bus current is displayed in the TwinCAT System Manager as a column value. A shortfall is marked by a negative total amount and an exclamation mark; a power feed terminal is to be placed before such a position.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
459
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 137: Illegally exceeding the E-Bus current From TwinCAT 2.11 and above, a warning message "E-Bus Power of Terminal..." is output in the logger window when such a configuration is activated: Fig. 138: Warning message for exceeding E-Bus current
NOTE Caution! Malfunction possible!
The same ground potential must be used for the E-Bus supply of all EtherCAT terminals in a terminal block!
460
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
6.2
TwinCAT Quick Start
TwinCAT is a development environment for real-time control including multi-PLC system, NC axis control, programming and operation. The whole system is mapped through this environment and enables access to a programming environment (including compilation) for the controller. Individual digital or analog inputs or outputs can also be read or written directly, in order to verify their functionality, for example.
For further information please refer to http://infosys.beckhoff.com:
· EtherCAT Systemmanual: Fieldbus Components EtherCAT Terminals EtherCAT System Documentation Setup in the TwinCAT System Manager
· TwinCAT 2 TwinCAT System Manager I/O - Configuration · In particular, TwinCAT driver installation:
Fieldbus components Fieldbus Cards and Switches FC900x PCI Cards for Ethernet Installation
Devices contain the terminals for the actual configuration. All configuration data can be entered directly via editor functions (offline) or via the "Scan" function (online):
· "offline": The configuration can be customized by adding and positioning individual components. These can be selected from a directory and configured.
The procedure for offline mode can be found under http://infosys.beckhoff.com: TwinCAT 2 TwinCAT System Manager IO - Configuration Adding an I/O Device
· "online": The existing hardware configuration is read
See also http://infosys.beckhoff.com: Fieldbus components Fieldbus cards and switches FC900x PCI Cards for Ethernet Installation Searching for devices
The following relationship is envisaged from user PC to the individual control elements:
Fig. 139: Relationship between user side (commissioning) and installation
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
461
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master The user inserting of certain components (I/O device, terminal, box...) is the same in TwinCAT 2 and TwinCAT 3. The descriptions below relate to the online procedure. Sample configuration (actual configuration) Based on the following sample configuration, the subsequent subsections describe the procedure for TwinCAT 2 and TwinCAT 3:
· Control system (PLC) CX2040 including CX2100-0004 power supply unit · Connected to the CX2040 on the right (E-bus):
EL1004 (4-channel digital input terminal 24 VDC) · Linked via the X001 port (RJ-45): EK1100 EtherCAT Coupler · Connected to the EK1100 EtherCAT coupler on the right (E-bus):
EL2008 (8-channel digital output terminal 24 VDC; 0.5 A) · (Optional via X000: a link to an external PC for the user interface)
Fig. 140: Control configuration with Embedded PC, input (EL1004) and output (EL2008) Note that all combinations of a configuration are possible; for example, the EL1004 terminal could also be connected after the coupler, or the EL2008 terminal could additionally be connected to the CX2040 on the right, in which case the EK1100 coupler wouldn't be necessary.
462
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
6.2.1 TwinCAT 2
Startup TwinCAT basically uses two user interfaces: the TwinCAT System Manager for communication with the electromechanical components and TwinCAT PLC Control for the development and compilation of a controller. The starting point is the TwinCAT System Manager. After successful installation of the TwinCAT system on the PC to be used for development, the TwinCAT 2 System Manager displays the following user interface after startup:
Fig. 141: Initial TwinCAT 2 user interface
Generally, TwinCAT can be used in local or remote mode. Once the TwinCAT system including the user interface (standard) is installed on the respective PLC, TwinCAT can be used in local mode and thereby the next step is "Insert Device [} 465]".
If the intention is to address the TwinCAT runtime environment installed on a PLC as development environment remotely from another system, the target system must be made known first. In the menu under
"Actions" "Choose Target System...", via the symbol "
" or the "F8" key, open the following window:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
463
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 142: Selection of the target system Use "Search (Ethernet)..." to enter the target system. Thus a next dialog opens to either:
· enter the known computer name after "Enter Host Name / IP:" (as shown in red) · perform a "Broadcast Search" (if the exact computer name is not known) · enter the known computer IP or AmsNetID.
Fig. 143: Specify the PLC for access by the TwinCAT System Manager: selection of the target system Once the target system has been entered, it is available for selection as follows (a password may have to be entered):
After confirmation with "OK" the target system can be accessed via the System Manager.
464
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Adding devices
In the configuration tree of the TwinCAT 2 System Manager user interface on the left, select "I/O Devices" and then right-click to open a context menu and select "Scan Devices...", or start the action in the menu bar
via
. The TwinCAT System Manager may first have to be set to "Config mode" via
"Actions" "Set/Reset TwinCAT to Config Mode..." (Shift + F4).
or via menu
Fig. 144: Select "Scan Devices..." Confirm the warning message, which follows, and select "EtherCAT" in the dialog:
Fig. 145: Automatic detection of I/O devices: selection the devices to be integrated
Confirm the message "Find new boxes", in order to determine the terminals connected to the devices. "Free Run" enables manipulation of input and output values in "Config mode" and should also be acknowledged.
Based on the sample configuration [} 462] described at the beginning of this section, the result is as follows:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
465
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 146: Mapping of the configuration in the TwinCAT 2 System Manager The whole process consists of two stages, which may be performed separately (first determine the devices, then determine the connected elements such as boxes, terminals, etc.). A scan can also be initiated by selecting "Device ..." from the context menu, which then reads the elements present in the configuration below:
Fig. 147: Reading of individual terminals connected to a device
This functionality is useful if the actual configuration is modified at short notice.
Programming and integrating the PLC TwinCAT PLC Control is the development environment for the creation of the controller in different program environments: TwinCAT PLC Control supports all languages described in IEC 61131-3. There are two textbased languages and three graphical languages.
· Text-based languages Instruction List (IL)
466
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master Structured Text (ST) · Graphical languages Function Block Diagram (FBD) Ladder Diagram (LD) The Continuous Function Chart Editor (CFC) Sequential Function Chart (SFC) The following section refers to Structured Text (ST). After starting TwinCAT PLC Control, the following user interface is shown for an initial project:
Fig. 148: TwinCAT PLC Control after startup Sample variables and a sample program have been created and stored under the name "PLC_example.pro":
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
467
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 149: Sample program with variables after a compile process (without variable integration)
Warning 1990 (missing "VAR_CONFIG") after a compile process indicates that the variables defined as external (with the ID "AT%I*" or "AT%Q*") have not been assigned. After successful compilation, TwinCAT PLC Control creates a "*.tpy" file in the directory in which the project was stored. This file ("*.tpy") contains variable assignments and is not known to the System Manager, hence the warning. Once the System Manager has been notified, the warning no longer appears.
First, integrate the TwinCAT PLC Control project in the System Manager via the context menu of the PLC configuration; right-click and select "Append PLC Project...":
Fig. 150: Appending the TwinCAT PLC Control project
468
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master Select the PLC configuration "PLC_example.tpy" in the browser window that opens. The project including the two variables identified with "AT" are then integrated in the configuration tree of the System Manager:
Fig. 151: PLC project integrated in the PLC configuration of the System Manager The two variables "bEL1004_Ch4" and "nEL2008_value" can now be assigned to certain process objects of the I/O configuration. Assigning variables Open a window for selecting a suitable process object (PDO) via the context menu of a variable of the integrated project "PLC_example" and via "Modify Link..." "Standard":
Fig. 152: Creating the links between PLC variables and process objects
In the window that opens, the process object for the variable "bEL1004_Ch4" of type BOOL can be selected from the PLC configuration tree:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
469
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 153: Selecting PDO of type BOOL
According to the default setting, certain PDO objects are now available for selection. In this sample the input of channel 4 of the EL1004 terminal is selected for linking. In contrast, the checkbox "All types" must be ticked for creating the link for the output variables, in order to allocate a set of eight separate output bits to a byte variable. The following diagram shows the whole process:
Fig. 154: Selecting several PDOs simultaneously: activate "Continuous" and "All types"
Note that the "Continuous" checkbox was also activated. This is designed to allocate the bits contained in the byte of the variable "nEL2008_value" sequentially to all eight selected output bits of the EL2008 terminal. In this way it is possible to subsequently address all eight outputs of the terminal in the program with a byte
corresponding to bit 0 for channel 1 to bit 7 for channel 8 of the PLC. A special symbol ( ) at the yellow or red object of the variable indicates that a link exists. The links can also be checked by selecting a "Goto Link Variable" from the context menu of a variable. The object opposite, in this case the PDO, is automatically selected:
470
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 155: Application of a "Goto Link" variable, using "MAIN.bEL1004_Ch4" as a sample The process of assigning variables to the PDO is completed via the menu selection "Actions" "Generate
Mappings", key Ctrl+M or by clicking on the symbol This can be visualized in the configuration:
in the menu.
The process of creating links can also take place in the opposite direction, i.e. starting with individual PDOs to variable. However, in this example it would then not be possible to select all output bits for the EL2008, since the terminal only makes individual digital outputs available. If a terminal has a byte, word, integer or similar PDO, it is possible to allocate this a set of bit-standardized variables (type "BOOL"). Here, too, a "Goto Link Variable" from the context menu of a PDO can be executed in the other direction, so that the respective PLC instance can then be selected.
Activation of the configuration
The allocation of PDO to PLC variables has now established the connection from the controller to the inputs and outputs of the terminals. The configuration can now be activated. First, the configuration can be verified
via
(or via "Actions" "Check Configuration"). If no error is present, the configuration can be
activated via
(or via "Actions" "Activate Configuration...") to transfer the System Manager settings
to the runtime system. Confirm the messages "Old configurations are overwritten!" and "Restart TwinCAT
system in Run mode" with "OK".
A few seconds later the real-time status
is displayed at the bottom right in the System Manager.
The PLC system can then be started as described below.
Starting the controller
Starting from a remote system, the PLC control has to be linked with the Embedded PC over Ethernet via "Online" "Choose Run-Time System...":
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
471
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 156: Choose target system (remote) In this sample "Runtime system 1 (port 801)" is selected and confirmed. Link the PLC with the real-time
system via menu option "Online" "Login", the F11 key or by clicking on the symbol
. The control
program can then be loaded for execution. This results in the message "No program on the controller!
Should the new program be loaded?", which should be acknowledged with "Yes". The runtime environment
is ready for the program start:
472
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 157: PLC Control logged in, ready for program startup
The PLC can now be started via "Online" "Run", F5 key or
.
6.2.2 TwinCAT 3
Startup
TwinCAT makes the development environment areas available together with Microsoft Visual Studio: after startup, the project folder explorer appears on the left in the general window area (cf. "TwinCAT System Manager" of TwinCAT 2) for communication with the electromechanical components.
After successful installation of the TwinCAT system on the PC to be used for development, TwinCAT 3 (shell) displays the following user interface after startup:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
473
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 158: Initial TwinCAT 3 user interface
First create a new project via
(or under "File""New" "Project..."). In the
following dialog make the corresponding entries as required (as shown in the diagram):
Fig. 159: Create new TwinCAT project The new project is then available in the project folder explorer:
474
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 160: New TwinCAT3 project in the project folder explorer Generally, TwinCAT can be used in local or remote mode. Once the TwinCAT system including the user interface (standard) is installed on the respective PLC, TwinCAT can be used in local mode and thereby the next step is "Insert Device [} 476]". If the intention is to address the TwinCAT runtime environment installed on a PLC as development environment remotely from another system, the target system must be made known first. Via the symbol in the menu bar:
expand the pull-down menu:
and open the following window:
Fig. 161: Selection dialog: Choose the target system
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
475
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Use "Search (Ethernet)..." to enter the target system. Thus a next dialog opens to either: · enter the known computer name after "Enter Host Name / IP:" (as shown in red) · perform a "Broadcast Search" (if the exact computer name is not known) · enter the known computer IP or AmsNetID.
Fig. 162: Specify the PLC for access by the TwinCAT System Manager: selection of the target system
Once the target system has been entered, it is available for selection as follows (a password may have to be entered):
After confirmation with "OK" the target system can be accessed via the Visual Studio shell. Adding devices In the project folder explorer of the Visual Studio shell user interface on the left, select "Devices" within
element "I/O", then right-click to open a context menu and select "Scan" or start the action via
in the
menu bar. The TwinCAT System Manager may first have to be set to "Config mode" via menu "TwinCAT" "Restart TwinCAT (Config mode)".
or via the
Fig. 163: Select "Scan" Confirm the warning message, which follows, and select "EtherCAT" in the dialog:
476
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 164: Automatic detection of I/O devices: selection the devices to be integrated Confirm the message "Find new boxes", in order to determine the terminals connected to the devices. "Free Run" enables manipulation of input and output values in "Config mode" and should also be acknowledged. Based on the sample configuration [} 462] described at the beginning of this section, the result is as follows:
Fig. 165: Mapping of the configuration in VS shell of the TwinCAT3 environment
The whole process consists of two stages, which may be performed separately (first determine the devices, then determine the connected elements such as boxes, terminals, etc.). A scan can also be initiated by selecting "Device ..." from the context menu, which then reads the elements present in the configuration below:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
477
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 166: Reading of individual terminals connected to a device
This functionality is useful if the actual configuration is modified at short notice.
Programming the PLC
TwinCAT PLC Control is the development environment for the creation of the controller in different program environments: TwinCAT PLC Control supports all languages described in IEC 61131-3. There are two textbased languages and three graphical languages.
· Text-based languages Instruction List (IL) Structured Text (ST)
· Graphical languages Function Block Diagram (FBD) Ladder Diagram (LD) The Continuous Function Chart Editor (CFC) Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
The following section refers to Structured Text (ST).
In order to create a programming environment, a PLC subproject is added to the project sample via the context menu of "PLC" in the project folder explorer by selecting "Add New Item....":
478
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 167: Adding the programming environment in "PLC" In the dialog that opens select "Standard PLC project" and enter "PLC_example" as project name, for example, and select a corresponding directory:
Fig. 168: Specifying the name and directory for the PLC programming environment
The "Main" program, which already exists by selecting "Standard PLC project", can be opened by doubleclicking on "PLC_example_project" in "POUs". The following user interface is shown for an initial project:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
479
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 169: Initial "Main" program of the standard PLC project To continue, sample variables and a sample program have now been created:
480
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 170: Sample program with variables after a compile process (without variable integration) The control program is now created as a project folder, followed by the compile process:
Fig. 171: Start program compilation
The following variables, identified in the ST/ PLC program with "AT%", are then available in under "Assignments" in the project folder explorer:
Assigning variables
Via the menu of an instance - variables in the "PLC" context, use the "Modify Link..." option to open a window for selecting a suitable process object (PDO) for linking:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
481
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 172: Creating the links between PLC variables and process objects In the window that opens, the process object for the variable "bEL1004_Ch4" of type BOOL can be selected from the PLC configuration tree:
Fig. 173: Selecting PDO of type BOOL
According to the default setting, certain PDO objects are now available for selection. In this sample the input of channel 4 of the EL1004 terminal is selected for linking. In contrast, the checkbox "All types" must be ticked for creating the link for the output variables, in order to allocate a set of eight separate output bits to a byte variable. The following diagram shows the whole process:
482
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 174: Selecting several PDOs simultaneously: activate "Continuous" and "All types" Note that the "Continuous" checkbox was also activated. This is designed to allocate the bits contained in the byte of the variable "nEL2008_value" sequentially to all eight selected output bits of the EL2008 terminal. In this way it is possible to subsequently address all eight outputs of the terminal in the program with a byte corresponding to bit 0 for channel 1 to bit 7 for channel 8 of the PLC. A special symbol ( ) at the yellow or red object of the variable indicates that a link exists. The links can also be checked by selecting a "Goto Link Variable" from the context menu of a variable. The object opposite, in this case the PDO, is automatically selected:
Fig. 175: Application of a "Goto Link" variable, using "MAIN.bEL1004_Ch4" as a sample
The process of creating links can also take place in the opposite direction, i.e. starting with individual PDOs to variable. However, in this example it would then not be possible to select all output bits for the EL2008, since the terminal only makes individual digital outputs available. If a terminal has a byte, word, integer or
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
483
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master similar PDO, it is possible to allocate this a set of bit-standardized variables (type "BOOL"). Here, too, a "Goto Link Variable" from the context menu of a PDO can be executed in the other direction, so that the respective PLC instance can then be selected.
Note on the type of variable assignment
The following type of variable assignment can only be used from TwinCAT version V3.1.4024.4 onwards and is only available for terminals with a microcontroller. In TwinCAT it is possible to create a structure from the mapped process data of a terminal. An instance of this structure can then be created in the PLC, so it is possible to access the process data directly from the PLC without having to declare own variables. The procedure for the EL3001 1-channel analog input terminal -10...+10 V is shown as an example. 1. First the required process data must be selected in the "Process data" tab in TwinCAT. 2. After that, the PLC data type must be generated in the tab "PLC" via the check box. 3. The data type in the "Data Type" field can then be copied using the "Copy" button.
Fig. 176: Creating a PLC data type 4. An instance of the data structure of the copied data type must then be created in the PLC.
Fig. 177: Instance_of_struct 5. Then the project folder must be created. This can be done either via the key combination "CTRL + Shift + B" or via the "Build" tab in TwinCAT. 6. The structure in the "PLC" tab of the terminal must then be linked to the created instance.
484
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 178: Linking the structure 7. In the PLC the process data can then be read or written via the structure in the program code.
Fig. 179: Reading a variable from the structure of the process data
Activation of the configuration The allocation of PDO to PLC variables has now established the connection from the controller to the inputs
and outputs of the terminals. The configuration can now be activated with
or via the menu under
"TwinCAT" in order to transfer settings of the development environment to the runtime system. Confirm the
messages "Old configurations are overwritten!" and "Restart TwinCAT system in Run mode" with "OK". The
corresponding assignments can be seen in the project folder explorer:
A few seconds later the corresponding status of the Run mode is displayed in the form of a rotating symbol
at the bottom right of the VS shell development environment. The PLC system can then be started as described below.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
485
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master Starting the controller
Select the menu option "PLC" "Login" or click on
to link the PLC with the real-time system and load
the control program for execution. This results in the message No program on the controller! Should the new
program be loaded?, which should be acknowledged with "Yes". The runtime environment is ready for
program start by click on symbol , the "F5" key or via "PLC" in the menu selecting "Start". The started programming environment shows the runtime values of individual variables:
Fig. 180: TwinCAT development environment (VS shell): logged-in, after program startup
The two operator control elements for stopping
and logout
result in the required action
(accordingly also for stop "Shift + F5", or both actions can be selected via the PLC menu).
6.3
TwinCAT Development Environment
The Software for automation TwinCAT (The Windows Control and Automation Technology) will be distinguished into:
· TwinCAT 2: System Manager (Configuration) & PLC Control (Programming)
· TwinCAT 3: Enhancement of TwinCAT 2 (Programming and Configuration takes place via a common Development Environment)
Details: · TwinCAT 2: Connects I/O devices to tasks in a variable-oriented manner Connects tasks to tasks in a variable-oriented manner Supports units at the bit level Supports synchronous or asynchronous relationships Exchange of consistent data areas and process images Datalink on NT - Programs by open Microsoft Standards (OLE, OCX, ActiveX, DCOM+, etc.)
486
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Integration of IEC 61131-3-Software-SPS, Software- NC and Software-CNC within Windows NT/2000/XP/Vista, Windows 7, NT/XP Embedded, CE
Interconnection to all common fieldbusses More...
Additional features: · TwinCAT 3 (eXtended Automation): Visual-Studio®-Integration Choice of the programming language Supports object orientated extension of IEC 61131-3 Usage of C/C++ as programming language for real time applications Connection to MATLAB®/Simulink® Open interface for expandability Flexible run-time environment Active support of Multi-Core- und 64-Bit-Operatingsystem Automatic code generation and project creation with the TwinCAT Automation Interface More...
Within the following sections commissioning of the TwinCAT Development Environment on a PC System for the control and also the basically functions of unique control elements will be explained. Please see further information to TwinCAT 2 and TwinCAT 3 at http://infosys.beckhoff.com.
6.3.1 Installation of the TwinCAT real-time driver
In order to assign real-time capability to a standard Ethernet port of an IPC controller, the Beckhoff real-time driver has to be installed on this port under Windows. This can be done in several ways. One option is described here. In the System Manager call up the TwinCAT overview of the local network interfaces via Options Show Real Time Ethernet Compatible Devices.
Fig. 181: System Manager "Options" (TwinCAT 2)
This have to be called up by the Menü "TwinCAT" within the TwinCAT 3 environment:
Fig. 182: Call up under VS Shell (TwinCAT 3)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
487
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master The following dialog appears:
Fig. 183: Overview of network interfaces
Interfaces listed under "Compatible devices" can be assigned a driver via the "Install" button. A driver should only be installed on compatible devices.
A Windows warning regarding the unsigned driver can be ignored.
Alternatively an EtherCAT-device can be inserted first of all as described in chapter Offline configuration creation, section "Creating the EtherCAT device" [} 497] in order to view the compatible ethernet ports via its EtherCAT properties (tab "Adapter", button "Compatible Devices..."):
Fig. 184: EtherCAT device properties(TwinCAT 2): click on "Compatible Devices..." of tab "Adapte"" TwinCAT 3: the properties of the EtherCAT device can be opened by double click on "Device .. (EtherCAT)" within the Solution Explorer under "I/O":
After the installation the driver appears activated in the Windows overview for the network interface (Windows Start System Properties Network)
488
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 185: Windows properties of the network interface A correct setting of the driver could be:
Fig. 186: Exemplary correct driver setting for the Ethernet port Other possible settings have to be avoided:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
489
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 187: Incorrect driver settings for the Ethernet port
490
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
IP address of the port used
IP address/DHCP
In most cases an Ethernet port that is configured as an EtherCAT device will not transport general IP packets. For this reason and in cases where an EL6601 or similar devices are used it is useful to specify a fixed IP address for this port via the "Internet Protocol TCP/IP" driver setting and to disable DHCP. In this way the delay associated with the DHCP client for the Ethernet port assigning itself a default IP address in the absence of a DHCP server is avoided. A suitable address space is 192.168.x.x, for example.
Fig. 188: TCP/IP setting for the Ethernet port
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
491
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
6.3.2 Notes regarding ESI device description
Installation of the latest ESI device description The TwinCAT EtherCAT master/System Manager needs the device description files for the devices to be used in order to generate the configuration in online or offline mode. The device descriptions are contained in the so-called ESI files (EtherCAT Slave Information) in XML format. These files can be requested from the respective manufacturer and are made available for download. An *.xml file may contain several device descriptions.
The ESI files for Beckhoff EtherCAT devices are available on the Beckhoff website. The ESI files should be stored in the TwinCAT installation directory. Default settings:
· TwinCAT 2: C:\TwinCAT\IO\EtherCAT · TwinCAT 3: C:\TwinCAT\3.1\Config\Io\EtherCAT The files are read (once) when a new System Manager window is opened, if they have changed since the last time the System Manager window was opened. A TwinCAT installation includes the set of Beckhoff ESI files that was current at the time when the TwinCAT build was created. For TwinCAT 2.11/TwinCAT 3 and higher, the ESI directory can be updated from the System Manager, if the programming PC is connected to the Internet; by · TwinCAT 2: Option "Update EtherCAT Device Descriptions" · TwinCAT 3: TwinCAT EtherCAT Devices "Update Device Descriptions (via ETG Website)..." The TwinCAT ESI Updater [} 496] is available for this purpose.
ESI
The *.xml files are associated with *.xsd files, which describe the structure of the ESI XML files. To update the ESI device descriptions, both file types should therefore be updated.
Device differentiation EtherCAT devices/slaves are distinguished by four properties, which determine the full device identifier. For example, the device identifier EL2521-0025-1018 consists of:
· family key "EL" · name "2521" · type "0025" · and revision "1018"
Fig. 189: Identifier structure
The order identifier consisting of name + type (here: EL2521-0010) describes the device function. The revision indicates the technical progress and is managed by Beckhoff. In principle, a device with a higher revision can replace a device with a lower revision, unless specified otherwise, e.g. in the documentation. Each revision has its own ESI description. See further notes [} 9].
492
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Online description
If the EtherCAT configuration is created online through scanning of real devices (see section Online setup) and no ESI descriptions are available for a slave (specified by name and revision) that was found, the System Manager asks whether the description stored in the device should be used. In any case, the System Manager needs this information for setting up the cyclic and acyclic communication with the slave correctly.
Fig. 190: OnlineDescription information window (TwinCAT 2) In TwinCAT 3 a similar window appears, which also offers the Web update:
Fig. 191: Information window OnlineDescription (TwinCAT 3)
If possible, the Yes is to be rejected and the required ESI is to be requested from the device manufacturer. After installation of the XML/XSD file the configuration process should be repeated.
NOTE Changing the "usual" configuration through a scan
ü If a scan discovers a device that is not yet known to TwinCAT, distinction has to be made between two cases. Taking the example here of the EL2521-0000 in the revision 1019
a) no ESI is present for the EL2521-0000 device at all, either for the revision 1019 or for an older revision. The ESI must then be requested from the manufacturer (in this case Beckhoff).
b) an ESI is present for the EL2521-0000 device, but only in an older revision, e.g. 1018 or 1017. In this case an in-house check should first be performed to determine whether the spare parts stock allows the integration of the increased revision into the configuration at all. A new/higher revision usually also brings along new features. If these are not to be used, work can continue without reservations with the previous revision 1018 in the configuration. This is also stated by the Beckhoff compatibility rule.
Refer in particular to the chapter "General notes on the use of Beckhoff EtherCAT IO components" and for manual configuration to the chapter "Offline configuration creation [} 497]".
If the OnlineDescription is used regardless, the System Manager reads a copy of the device description from the EEPROM in the EtherCAT slave. In complex slaves the size of the EEPROM may not be sufficient for the complete ESI, in which case the ESI would be incomplete in the configurator. Therefore it's recommended using an offline ESI file with priority in such a case.
The System Manager creates for online recorded device descriptions a new file "OnlineDescription0000...xml" in its ESI directory, which contains all ESI descriptions that were read online.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
493
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 192: File OnlineDescription.xml created by the System Manager Is a slave desired to be added manually to the configuration at a later stage, online created slaves are indicated by a prepended symbol ">" in the selection list (see Figure Indication of an online recorded ESI of EL2521 as an example).
Fig. 193: Indication of an online recorded ESI of EL2521 as an example
If such ESI files are used and the manufacturer's files become available later, the file OnlineDescription.xml should be deleted as follows:
· close all System Manager windows · restart TwinCAT in Config mode · delete "OnlineDescription0000...xml" · restart TwinCAT System Manager This file should not be visible after this procedure, if necessary press <F5> to update
OnlineDescription for TwinCAT 3.x
In addition to the file described above "OnlineDescription0000...xml", a so called EtherCAT cache with new discovered devices is created by TwinCAT 3.x, e.g. under Windows 7:
(Please note the language settings of the OS!) You have to delete this file, too.
Faulty ESI file If an ESI file is faulty and the System Manager is unable to read it, the System Manager brings up an information window.
Fig. 194: Information window for faulty ESI file (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)
494
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Reasons may include: · Structure of the *.xml does not correspond to the associated *.xsd file check your schematics · Contents cannot be translated into a device description contact the file manufacturer
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
495
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
6.3.3 TwinCAT ESI Updater
For TwinCAT 2.11 and higher, the System Manager can search for current Beckhoff ESI files automatically, if an online connection is available:
Fig. 195: Using the ESI Updater (>= TwinCAT 2.11) The call up takes place under: "Options" "Update EtherCAT Device Descriptions" Selection under TwinCAT 3:
Fig. 196: Using the ESI Updater (TwinCAT 3)
The ESI Updater (TwinCAT 3) is a convenient option for automatic downloading of ESI data provided by EtherCAT manufacturers via the Internet into the TwinCAT directory (ESI = EtherCAT slave information). TwinCAT accesses the central ESI ULR directory list stored at ETG; the entries can then be viewed in the Updater dialog, although they cannot be changed there.
The call up takes place under: "TwinCAT" "EtherCAT Devices" "Update Device Description (via ETG Website)...".
6.3.4 Distinction between Online and Offline
The distinction between online and offline refers to the presence of the actual I/O environment (drives, terminals, EJ-modules). If the configuration is to be prepared in advance of the system configuration as a programming system, e.g. on a laptop, this is only possible in "Offline configuration" mode. In this case all components have to be entered manually in the configuration, e.g. based on the electrical design.
If the designed control system is already connected to the EtherCAT system and all components are energised and the infrastructure is ready for operation, the TwinCAT configuration can simply be generated through "scanning" from the runtime system. This is referred to as online configuration.
In any case, during each startup the EtherCAT master checks whether the slaves it finds match the configuration. This test can be parameterised in the extended slave settings. Refer to note "Installation of the latest ESI-XML device description" [} 492].
For preparation of a configuration: · the real EtherCAT hardware (devices, couplers, drives) must be present and installed · the devices/modules must be connected via EtherCAT cables or in the terminal/ module strand in the same way as they are intended to be used later
496
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master · the devices/modules be connected to the power supply and ready for communication · TwinCAT must be in CONFIG mode on the target system. The online scan process consists of: · detecting the EtherCAT device [} 502] (Ethernet port at the IPC) · detecting the connected EtherCAT devices [} 503]. This step can be carried out independent of the
preceding step · troubleshooting [} 506] The scan with existing configuration [} 507] can also be carried out for comparison.
6.3.5 OFFLINE configuration creation
Creating the EtherCAT device Create an EtherCAT device in an empty System Manager window.
Fig. 197: Append EtherCAT device (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3) Select type "EtherCAT" for an EtherCAT I/O application with EtherCAT slaves. For the present publisher/ subscriber service in combination with an EL6601/EL6614 terminal select "EtherCAT Automation Protocol via EL6601".
Fig. 198: Selecting the EtherCAT connection (TwinCAT 2.11, TwinCAT 3) Then assign a real Ethernet port to this virtual device in the runtime system.
Fig. 199: Selecting the Ethernet port
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
497
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
This query may appear automatically when the EtherCAT device is created, or the assignment can be set/ modified later in the properties dialog; see Fig. "EtherCAT device properties (TwinCAT 2)".
Fig. 200: EtherCAT device properties (TwinCAT 2) TwinCAT 3: the properties of the EtherCAT device can be opened by double click on "Device .. (EtherCAT)" within the Solution Explorer under "I/O":
Selecting the Ethernet port
Ethernet ports can only be selected for EtherCAT devices for which the TwinCAT real-time driver is installed. This has to be done separately for each port. Please refer to the respective installation page [} 487].
Defining EtherCAT slaves Further devices can be appended by right-clicking on a device in the configuration tree.
Fig. 201: Appending EtherCAT devices (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)
The dialog for selecting a new device opens. Only devices for which ESI files are available are displayed.
Only devices are offered for selection that can be appended to the previously selected device. Therefore the physical layer available for this port is also displayed (Fig. "Selection dialog for new EtherCAT device", A). In the case of cable-based Fast-Ethernet physical layer with PHY transfer, then also only cable-based devices are available, as shown in Fig. "Selection dialog for new EtherCAT device". If the preceding device has several free ports (e.g. EK1122 or EK1100), the required port can be selected on the right-hand side (A).
Overview of physical layer · "Ethernet": cable-based 100BASE-TX: EK couplers, EP boxes, devices with RJ45/M8/M12 connector
498
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
· "E-Bus": LVDS "terminal bus", "EJ-module": EL/ES terminals, various modular modules The search field facilitates finding specific devices (since TwinCAT 2.11 or TwinCAT 3).
Fig. 202: Selection dialog for new EtherCAT device
By default only the name/device type is used as selection criterion. For selecting a specific revision of the device the revision can be displayed as "Extended Information".
Fig. 203: Display of device revision
In many cases several device revisions were created for historic or functional reasons, e.g. through technological advancement. For simplification purposes (see Fig. "Selection dialog for new EtherCAT device") only the last (i.e. highest) revision and therefore the latest state of production is displayed in the selection dialog for Beckhoff devices. To show all device revisions available in the system as ESI descriptions tick the "Show Hidden Devices" check box, see Fig. "Display of previous revisions".
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
499
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 204: Display of previous revisions
Device selection based on revision, compatibility
The ESI description also defines the process image, the communication type between master and slave/device and the device functions, if applicable. The physical device (firmware, if available) has to support the communication queries/settings of the master. This is backward compatible, i.e. newer devices (higher revision) should be supported if the EtherCAT master addresses them as an older revision. The following compatibility rule of thumb is to be assumed for Beckhoff EtherCAT Terminals/ Boxes/ EJ-modules: device revision in the system >= device revision in the configuration This also enables subsequent replacement of devices without changing the configuration (different specifications are possible for drives).
Example If an EL2521-0025-1018 is specified in the configuration, an EL2521-0025-1018 or higher (-1019, -1020) can be used in practice.
Fig. 205: Name/revision of the terminal
If current ESI descriptions are available in the TwinCAT system, the last revision offered in the selection dialog matches the Beckhoff state of production. It is recommended to use the last device revision when creating a new configuration, if current Beckhoff devices are used in the real application. Older revisions should only be used if older devices from stock are to be used in the application. In this case the process image of the device is shown in the configuration tree and can be parameterized as follows: linking with the task, CoE/DC settings, plug-in definition, startup settings, ...
500
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master Fig. 206: EtherCAT terminal in the TwinCAT tree (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
501
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
6.3.6 ONLINE configuration creation
Detecting/scanning of the EtherCAT device
The online device search can be used if the TwinCAT system is in CONFIG mode. This can be indicated by a symbol right below in the information bar:
· on TwinCAT 2 by a blue display "Config Mode" within the System Manager window:
.
· on TwinCAT 3 within the user interface of the development environment by a symbol . TwinCAT can be set into this mode:
· TwinCAT 2: by selection of Mode..."
in the Menubar or by "Actions" "Set/Reset TwinCAT to Config
· TwinCAT 3: by selection of in the Menubar or by "TwinCAT" "Restart TwinCAT (Config Mode)"
Online scanning in Config mode
The online search is not available in RUN mode (production operation). Note the differentiation between TwinCAT programming system and TwinCAT target system.
The TwinCAT 2 icon ( ) or TwinCAT 3 icon ( ) within the Windows-Taskbar always shows the TwinCAT mode of the local IPC. Compared to that, the System Manager window of TwinCAT 2 or the user interface of TwinCAT 3 indicates the state of the target system.
Fig. 207: Differentiation local/target system (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3) Right-clicking on "I/O Devices" in the configuration tree opens the search dialog.
Fig. 208: Scan Devices (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)
This scan mode attempts to find not only EtherCAT devices (or Ethernet ports that are usable as such), but also NOVRAM, fieldbus cards, SMB etc. However, not all devices can be found automatically.
Fig. 209: Note for automatic device scan (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)
502
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Ethernet ports with installed TwinCAT real-time driver are shown as "RT Ethernet" devices. An EtherCAT frame is sent to these ports for testing purposes. If the scan agent detects from the response that an EtherCAT slave is connected, the port is immediately shown as an "EtherCAT Device" .
Fig. 210: Detected Ethernet devices
Via respective checkboxes devices can be selected (as illustrated in Fig. "Detected Ethernet devices" e.g. Device 3 and Device 4 were chosen). After confirmation with "OK" a device scan is suggested for all selected devices, see Fig.: "Scan query after automatic creation of an EtherCAT device".
Selecting the Ethernet port
Ethernet ports can only be selected for EtherCAT devices for which the TwinCAT real-time driver is installed. This has to be done separately for each port. Please refer to the respective installation page [} 487].
Detecting/Scanning the EtherCAT devices
Online scan functionality
During a scan the master queries the identity information of the EtherCAT slaves from the slave EEPROM. The name and revision are used for determining the type. The respective devices are located in the stored ESI data and integrated in the configuration tree in the default state defined there.
Fig. 211: Example default state
NOTE Slave scanning in practice in series machine production
The scanning function should be used with care. It is a practical and fast tool for creating an initial configuration as a basis for commissioning. In series machine production or reproduction of the plant, however, the function should no longer be used for the creation of the configuration, but if necessary for comparison [} 507] with the defined initial configuration.Background: since Beckhoff occasionally increases the revision version of the delivered products for product maintenance reasons, a configuration can be created by such a scan which (with an identical machine construction) is identical according to the device list; however, the respective device revision may differ from the initial configuration.
Example:
Company A builds the prototype of a machine B, which is to be produced in series later on. To do this the prototype is built, a scan of the IO devices is performed in TwinCAT and the initial configuration "B.tsm" is created. The EL2521-0025 EtherCAT terminal with the revision 1018 is located somewhere. It is thus built into the TwinCAT configuration in this way:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
503
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 212: Installing EthetCAT terminal with revision -1018
Likewise, during the prototype test phase, the functions and properties of this terminal are tested by the programmers/commissioning engineers and used if necessary, i.e. addressed from the PLC "B.pro" or the NC. (the same applies correspondingly to the TwinCAT 3 solution files). The prototype development is now completed and series production of machine B starts, for which Beckhoff continues to supply the EL2521-0025-0018. If the commissioning engineers of the series machine production department always carry out a scan, a B configuration with the identical contents results again for each machine. Likewise, A might create spare parts stores worldwide for the coming series-produced machines with EL2521-0025-1018 terminals. After some time Beckhoff extends the EL2521-0025 by a new feature C. Therefore the FW is changed, outwardly recognizable by a higher FW version and a new revision -1019. Nevertheless the new device naturally supports functions and interfaces of the predecessor version(s); an adaptation of "B.tsm" or even "B.pro" is therefore unnecessary. The series-produced machines can continue to be built with "B.tsm" and "B.pro"; it makes sense to perform a comparative scan [} 507] against the initial configuration "B.tsm" in order to check the built machine. However, if the series machine production department now doesn't use "B.tsm", but instead carries out a scan to create the productive configuration, the revision -1019 is automatically detected and built into the configuration:
Fig. 213: Detection of EtherCAT terminal with revision -1019
This is usually not noticed by the commissioning engineers. TwinCAT cannot signal anything either, since virtually a new configuration is created. According to the compatibility rule, however, this means that no EL2521-0025-1018 should be built into this machine as a spare part (even if this nevertheless works in the vast majority of cases). In addition, it could be the case that, due to the development accompanying production in company A, the new feature C of the EL2521-0025-1019 (for example, an improved analog filter or an additional process data for the diagnosis) is discovered and used without in-house consultation. The previous stock of spare part devices are then no longer to be used for the new configuration "B2.tsm" created in this way. Þ if series machine production is established, the scan should only be performed for informative purposes for comparison with a defined initial configuration. Changes are to be made with care! If an EtherCAT device was created in the configuration (manually or through a scan), the I/O field can be scanned for devices/slaves.
Fig. 214: Scan query after automatic creation of an EtherCAT device (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3)
504
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 215: Manual triggering of a device scan on a specified EtherCAT device (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3) In the System Manager (TwinCAT 2) or the User Interface (TwinCAT 3) the scan process can be monitored via the progress bar at the bottom in the status bar.
Fig. 216: Scan progressexemplary by TwinCAT 2 The configuration is established and can then be switched to online state (OPERATIONAL).
Fig. 217: Config/FreeRun query (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3) In Config/FreeRun mode the System Manager display alternates between blue and red, and the EtherCAT device continues to operate with the idling cycle time of 4 ms (default setting), even without active task (NC, PLC).
Fig. 218: Displaying of "Free Run" and "Config Mode" toggling right below in the status bar
Fig. 219: TwinCAT can also be switched to this state by using a button (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3) The EtherCAT system should then be in a functional cyclic state, as shown in Fig. Online display example.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
505
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 220: Online display example
Please note: · all slaves should be in OP state · the EtherCAT master should be in "Actual State" OP · "frames/sec" should match the cycle time taking into account the sent number of frames · no excessive "LostFrames" or CRC errors should occur
The configuration is now complete. It can be modified as described under manual procedure [} 497].
Troubleshooting
Various effects may occur during scanning. · An unknown device is detected, i.e. an EtherCAT slave for which no ESI XML description is available. In this case the System Manager offers to read any ESI that may be stored in the device. This case is described in the chapter "Notes regarding ESI device description". · Device are not detected properly Possible reasons include: faulty data links, resulting in data loss during the scan slave has invalid device description The connections and devices should be checked in a targeted manner, e.g. via the emergency scan. Then re-run the scan.
Fig. 221: Faulty identification
In the System Manager such devices may be set up as EK0000 or unknown devices. Operation is not possible or meaningful.
506
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Scan over existing Configuration
NOTE Change of the configuration after comparison
With this scan (TwinCAT 2.11 or 3.1) only the device properties vendor (manufacturer), device name and revision are compared at present! A "ChangeTo" or "Copy" should only be carried out with care, taking into consideration the Beckhoff IO compatibility rule (see above). The device configuration is then replaced by the revision found; this can affect the supported process data and functions. If a scan is initiated for an existing configuration, the actual I/O environment may match the configuration exactly or it may differ. This enables the configuration to be compared.
Fig. 222: Identical configuration (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3) If differences are detected, they are shown in the correction dialog, so that the user can modify the configuration as required.
Fig. 223: Correction dialog
It is advisable to tick the "Extended Information" check box to reveal differences in the revision.
Color green blue
light blue
Explanation
This EtherCAT slave matches the entry on the other side. Both type and revision match.
This EtherCAT slave is present on the other side, but in a different revision. This other revision can have other default values for the process data as well as other/additional functions. If the found revision is higher than the configured revision, the slave may be used provided compatibility issues are taken into account.
If the found revision is lower than the configured revision, it is likely that the slave cannot be used. The found device may not support all functions that the master expects based on the higher revision number.
This EtherCAT slave is ignored ("Ignore" button)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
507
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Color red
Explanation
· This EtherCAT slave is not present on the other side.
· It is present, but in a different revision, which also differs in its properties from the one specified. The compatibility principle then also applies here: if the found revision is higher than the configured revision, use is possible provided compatibility issues are taken into account, since the successor devices should support the functions of the predecessor devices. If the found revision is lower than the configured revision, it is likely that the slave cannot be used. The found device may not support all functions that the master expects based on the higher revision number.
Device selection based on revision, compatibility
The ESI description also defines the process image, the communication type between master and slave/device and the device functions, if applicable. The physical device (firmware, if available) has to support the communication queries/settings of the master. This is backward compatible, i.e. newer devices (higher revision) should be supported if the EtherCAT master addresses them as an older revision. The following compatibility rule of thumb is to be assumed for Beckhoff EtherCAT Terminals/ Boxes/ EJ-modules:
device revision in the system >= device revision in the configuration
This also enables subsequent replacement of devices without changing the configuration (different specifications are possible for drives).
Example
If an EL2521-0025-1018 is specified in the configuration, an EL2521-0025-1018 or higher (-1019, -1020) can be used in practice.
Fig. 224: Name/revision of the terminal
If current ESI descriptions are available in the TwinCAT system, the last revision offered in the selection dialog matches the Beckhoff state of production. It is recommended to use the last device revision when creating a new configuration, if current Beckhoff devices are used in the real application. Older revisions should only be used if older devices from stock are to be used in the application.
In this case the process image of the device is shown in the configuration tree and can be parameterized as follows: linking with the task, CoE/DC settings, plug-in definition, startup settings, ...
508
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 225: Correction dialog with modifications Once all modifications have been saved or accepted, click "OK" to transfer them to the real *.tsm configuration. Change to Compatible Type TwinCAT offers a function Change to Compatible Type... for the exchange of a device whilst retaining the links in the task.
Fig. 226: Dialog "Change to Compatible Type..." (left: TwinCAT 2; right: TwinCAT 3) This function is preferably to be used on AX5000 devices. Change to Alternative Type The TwinCAT System Manager offers a function for the exchange of a device: Change to Alternative Type
Fig. 227: TwinCAT 2 Dialog Change to Alternative Type
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
509
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
If called, the System Manager searches in the procured device ESI (in this example: EL1202-0000) for details of compatible devices contained there. The configuration is changed and the ESI-EEPROM is overwritten at the same time therefore this process is possible only in the online state (ConfigMode).
6.3.7 EtherCAT subscriber configuration
In the left-hand window of the TwinCAT 2 System Manager or the Solution Explorer of the TwinCAT 3 Development Environment respectively, click on the element of the terminal within the tree you wish to configure (in the example: EL3751 Terminal 3).
Fig. 228: Branch element as terminal EL3751 In the right-hand window of the TwinCAT System Manager (TwinCAT 2) or the Development Environment (TwinCAT 3), various tabs are now available for configuring the terminal. And yet the dimension of complexity of a subscriber determines which tabs are provided. Thus as illustrated in the example above the terminal EL3751 provides many setup options and also a respective number of tabs are available. On the contrary by the terminal EL1004 for example the tabs "General", "EtherCAT", "Process Data" and "Online" are available only. Several terminals, as for instance the EL6695 provide special functions by a tab with its own terminal name, so "EL6695" in this case. A specific tab "Settings" by terminals with a wide range of setup options will be provided also (e.g. EL3751).
"General" tab
Fig. 229: "General" tab
Name Id Type Comment Disabled Create symbols
Name of the EtherCAT device Number of the EtherCAT device EtherCAT device type Here you can add a comment (e.g. regarding the system). Here you can deactivate the EtherCAT device. Access to this EtherCAT slave via ADS is only available if this control box is activated.
510
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
"EtherCAT" tab
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 230: "EtherCAT" tab
Type Product/Revision Auto Inc Addr.
EtherCAT Addr. Previous Port
Advanced Settings
EtherCAT device type
Product and revision number of the EtherCAT device
Auto increment address of the EtherCAT device. The auto increment address can be used for addressing each EtherCAT device in the communication ring through its physical position. Auto increment addressing is used during the start-up phase when the EtherCAT master allocates addresses to the EtherCAT devices. With auto increment addressing the first EtherCAT slave in the ring has the address 0000hex. For each further slave the address is decremented by 1 (FFFFhex, FFFEhex etc.).
Fixed address of an EtherCAT slave. This address is allocated by the EtherCAT master during the start-up phase. Tick the control box to the left of the input field in order to modify the default value.
Name and port of the EtherCAT device to which this device is connected. If it is possible to connect this device with another one without changing the order of the EtherCAT devices in the communication ring, then this combination field is activated and the EtherCAT device to which this device is to be connected can be selected.
This button opens the dialogs for advanced settings.
The link at the bottom of the tab points to the product page for this EtherCAT device on the web.
"Process Data" tab
Indicates the configuration of the process data. The input and output data of the EtherCAT slave are represented as CANopen process data objects (Process Data Objects, PDOs). The user can select a PDO via PDO assignment and modify the content of the individual PDO via this dialog, if the EtherCAT slave supports this function.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
511
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 231: "Process Data" tab
The process data (PDOs) transferred by an EtherCAT slave during each cycle are user data which the application expects to be updated cyclically or which are sent to the slave. To this end the EtherCAT master (Beckhoff TwinCAT) parameterizes each EtherCAT slave during the start-up phase to define which process data (size in bits/bytes, source location, transmission type) it wants to transfer to or from this slave. Incorrect configuration can prevent successful start-up of the slave.
For Beckhoff EtherCAT EL, ES, EM, EJ and EP slaves the following applies in general:
· The input/output process data supported by the device are defined by the manufacturer in the ESI/XML description. The TwinCAT EtherCAT Master uses the ESI description to configure the slave correctly.
· The process data can be modified in the System Manager. See the device documentation. Examples of modifications include: mask out a channel, displaying additional cyclic information, 16-bit display instead of 8-bit data size, etc.
· In so-called "intelligent" EtherCAT devices the process data information is also stored in the CoE directory. Any changes in the CoE directory that lead to different PDO settings prevent successful startup of the slave. It is not advisable to deviate from the designated process data, because the device firmware (if available) is adapted to these PDO combinations.
If the device documentation allows modification of process data, proceed as follows (see Figure Configuring the process data).
· A: select the device to configure
· B: in the "Process Data" tab select Input or Output under SyncManager (C)
· D: the PDOs can be selected or deselected
· H: the new process data are visible as linkable variables in the System Manager The new process data are active once the configuration has been activated and TwinCAT has been restarted (or the EtherCAT master has been restarted)
· E: if a slave supports this, Input and Output PDO can be modified simultaneously by selecting a socalled PDO record ("predefined PDO settings").
512
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 232: Configuring the process data
Manual modification of the process data
According to the ESI description, a PDO can be identified as "fixed" with the flag "F" in the PDO overview (Fig. Configuring the process data, J). The configuration of such PDOs cannot be changed, even if TwinCAT offers the associated dialog ("Edit"). In particular, CoE content cannot be displayed as cyclic process data. This generally also applies in cases where a device supports download of the PDO configuration, "G". In case of incorrect configuration the EtherCAT slave usually refuses to start and change to OP state. The System Manager displays an "invalid SM cfg" logger message: This error message ("invalid SM IN cfg" or "invalid SM OUT cfg") also indicates the reason for the failed start.
A detailed description [} 518] can be found at the end of this section.
"Startup" tab
The Startup tab is displayed if the EtherCAT slave has a mailbox and supports the CANopen over EtherCAT (CoE) or Servo drive over EtherCAT protocol. This tab indicates which download requests are sent to the mailbox during startup. It is also possible to add new mailbox requests to the list display. The download requests are sent to the slave in the same order as they are shown in the list.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
513
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 233: "Startup" tab
Column Transition
Protocol Index Data Comment
Description Transition to which the request is sent. This can either be · the transition from pre-operational to safe-operational (PS), or · the transition from safe-operational to operational (SO). If the transition is enclosed in "<>" (e.g. <PS>), the mailbox request is fixed and cannot be modified or deleted by the user. Type of mailbox protocol Index of the object Date on which this object is to be downloaded. Description of the request to be sent to the mailbox
Move Up Move Down New Delete Edit
This button moves the selected request up by one position in the list. This button moves the selected request down by one position in the list. This button adds a new mailbox download request to be sent during startup. This button deletes the selected entry. This button edits an existing request.
"CoE - Online" tab
The additional CoE - Online tab is displayed if the EtherCAT slave supports the CANopen over EtherCAT (CoE) protocol. This dialog lists the content of the object list of the slave (SDO upload) and enables the user to modify the content of an object from this list. Details for the objects of the individual EtherCAT devices can be found in the device-specific object descriptions.
514
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 234: "CoE - Online" tab
Object list display
Column Index Name Flags
Value
Description Index and sub-index of the object Name of the object RW The object can be read, and data can be written to the object (read/write) RO The object can be read, but no data can be written to the object (read only) P An additional P identifies the object as a process data object. Value of the object
Update List Auto Update Advanced
The Update list button updates all objects in the displayed list If this check box is selected, the content of the objects is updated automatically. The Advanced button opens the Advanced Settings dialog. Here you can specify which objects are displayed in the list.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
515
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 235: Dialog "Advanced settings"
Online - via SDO Information Offline - via EDS File
If this option button is selected, the list of the objects included in the object list of the slave is uploaded from the slave via SDO information. The list below can be used to specify which object types are to be uploaded.
If this option button is selected, the list of the objects included in the object list is read from an EDS file provided by the user.
"Online" tab
Fig. 236: "Online" tab
State Machine
Init Pre-Op Op Bootstrap Safe-Op
This button attempts to set the EtherCAT device to the Init state. This button attempts to set the EtherCAT device to the pre-operational state. This button attempts to set the EtherCAT device to the operational state. This button attempts to set the EtherCAT device to the Bootstrap state. This button attempts to set the EtherCAT device to the safe-operational state.
516
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Clear Error
Current State Requested State
This button attempts to delete the fault display. If an EtherCAT slave fails during change of state it sets an error flag.
Example: An EtherCAT slave is in PREOP state (pre-operational). The master now requests the SAFEOP state (safe-operational). If the slave fails during change of state it sets the error flag. The current state is now displayed as ERR PREOP. When the Clear Error button is pressed the error flag is cleared, and the current state is displayed as PREOP again.
Indicates the current state of the EtherCAT device.
Indicates the state requested for the EtherCAT device.
DLL Status
Indicates the DLL status (data link layer status) of the individual ports of the EtherCAT slave. The DLL status can have four different states:
Status No Carrier / Open No Carrier / Closed Carrier / Open Carrier / Closed
Description No carrier signal is available at the port, but the port is open. No carrier signal is available at the port, and the port is closed. A carrier signal is available at the port, and the port is open. A carrier signal is available at the port, but the port is closed.
File Access over EtherCAT
Download Upload
With this button a file can be written to the EtherCAT device. With this button a file can be read from the EtherCAT device.
"DC" tab (Distributed Clocks)
Fig. 237: "DC" tab (Distributed Clocks)
Operation Mode
Options (optional):
· FreeRun
· SM-Synchron
· DC-Synchron (Input based)
· DC-Synchron
Advanced Settings... Advanced settings for readjustment of the real time determinant TwinCAT-clock
Detailed information to Distributed Clocks is specified on http://infosys.beckhoff.com:
Fieldbus Components EtherCAT Terminals EtherCAT System documentation EtherCAT basics Distributed Clocks
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
517
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
6.3.7.1 Detailed description of Process Data tab
Sync Manager
Lists the configuration of the Sync Manager (SM). If the EtherCAT device has a mailbox, SM0 is used for the mailbox output (MbxOut) and SM1 for the mailbox input (MbxIn). SM2 is used for the output process data (outputs) and SM3 (inputs) for the input process data.
If an input is selected, the corresponding PDO assignment is displayed in the PDO Assignment list below.
PDO Assignment
PDO assignment of the selected Sync Manager. All PDOs defined for this Sync Manager type are listed here:
· If the output Sync Manager (outputs) is selected in the Sync Manager list, all RxPDOs are displayed. · If the input Sync Manager (inputs) is selected in the Sync Manager list, all TxPDOs are displayed.
The selected entries are the PDOs involved in the process data transfer. In the tree diagram of the System Manager these PDOs are displayed as variables of the EtherCAT device. The name of the variable is identical to the Name parameter of the PDO, as displayed in the PDO list. If an entry in the PDO assignment list is deactivated (not selected and greyed out), this indicates that the input is excluded from the PDO assignment. In order to be able to select a greyed out PDO, the currently selected PDO has to be deselected first.
Activation of PDO assignment
ü If you have changed the PDO assignment, in order to activate the new PDO assignment, a) the EtherCAT slave has to run through the PS status transition cycle (from pre-operational to
safe-operational) once (see Online tab [} 516]), b) and the System Manager has to reload the EtherCAT slaves
(
button for TwinCAT 2 or
button for TwinCAT 3)
PDO list
List of all PDOs supported by this EtherCAT device. The content of the selected PDOs is displayed in the PDO Content list. The PDO configuration can be modified by double-clicking on an entry.
Column Index Size Name
Flags
SM SU
Description
PDO index.
Size of the PDO in bytes.
Name of the PDO. If this PDO is assigned to a Sync Manager, it appears as a variable of the slave with this parameter as the name.
F
Fixed content: The content of this PDO is fixed and cannot be changed by the
System Manager.
M
Mandatory PDO. This PDO is mandatory and must therefore be assigned to a
Sync Manager! Consequently, this PDO cannot be deleted from the PDO
Assignment list
Sync Manager to which this PDO is assigned. If this entry is empty, this PDO does not take part in the process data traffic.
Sync unit to which this PDO is assigned.
PDO Content Indicates the content of the PDO. If flag F (fixed content) of the PDO is not set the content can be modified.
518
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Download
If the device is intelligent and has a mailbox, the configuration of the PDO and the PDO assignments can be downloaded to the device. This is an optional feature that is not supported by all EtherCAT slaves.
PDO Assignment
If this check box is selected, the PDO assignment that is configured in the PDO Assignment list is downloaded to the device on startup. The required commands to be sent to the device can be viewed in the Startup [} 513] tab.
PDO Configuration
If this check box is selected, the configuration of the respective PDOs (as shown in the PDO list and the PDO Content display) is downloaded to the EtherCAT slave.
6.3.8 Import/Export of EtherCAT devices with SCI and XTI
SCI and XTI Export/Import Handling of user-defined modified EtherCAT slaves
6.3.8.1 Basic principles
An EtherCAT slave is basically parameterized through the following elements: · Cyclic process data (PDO) · Synchronization (Distributed Clocks, FreeRun, SM-Synchron) · CoE parameters (acyclic object dictionary)
Note: Not all three elements may be present, depending on the slave.
For a better understanding of the export/import function, let's consider the usual procedure for IO configuration:
· The user/programmer processes the IO configuration in the TwinCAT system environment. This involves all input/output devices such as drives that are connected to the fieldbuses used. Note: In the following sections, only EtherCAT configurations in the TwinCAT system environment are considered.
· For example, the user manually adds devices to a configuration or performs a scan on the online system.
· This results in the IO system configuration. · On insertion, the slave appears in the system configuration in the default configuration provided by the
vendor, consisting of default PDO, default synchronization method and CoE StartUp parameter as defined in the ESI (XML device description). · If necessary, elements of the slave configuration can be changed, e.g. the PDO configuration or the synchronization method, based on the respective device documentation.
It may become necessary to reuse the modified slave in other projects in this way, without having to make equivalent configuration changes to the slave again. To accomplish this, proceed as follows:
· Export the slave configuration from the project, · Store and transport as a file, · Import into another EtherCAT project.
TwinCAT offers two methods for this purpose: · within the TwinCAT environment: Export/Import as xti file or · outside, i.e. beyond the TwinCAT limits: Export/Import as sci file.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
519
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
An example is provided below for illustration purposes: an EL3702 terminal with standard setting is switched to 2-fold oversampling (blue) and the optional PDO "StartTimeNextLatch" is added (red):
The two methods for exporting and importing the modified terminal referred to above are demonstrated below.
6.3.8.2 Procedure within TwinCAT with xti files
Each IO device can be exported/saved individually:
The xti file can be stored:
and imported again in another TwinCAT system via "Insert Existing item":
520
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
6.3.8.3 Procedure within and outside TwinCAT with sci file
Note regarding availability (2021/01) The SCI method is available from TwinCAT 3.1 build 4024.14. The Slave Configuration Information (SCI) describes a specific complete configuration for an EtherCAT slave (terminal, box, drive...) based on the setting options of the device description file (ESI, EtherCAT Slave Information). That is, it includes PDO, CoE, synchronization. Export:
· select a single device via the menu (multiple selection is also possible): TwinCAT EtherCAT Devices Export SCI.
· If TwinCAT is offline (i.e. if there is no connection to an actual running controller) a warning message may appear, because after executing the function the system attempts to reload the EtherCAT segment. However, in this case this is not relevant for the result and can be acknowledged by clicking OK:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
521
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master · A description may also be provided:
· Explanation of the dialog box:
Name Description Options Keep modules
AoE | Set AmsNetId
EoE | Set MAC and IP
ESI Export
CoE | Set cycle time(0x1C3x.2)
Name of the SCI, assigned by the user.
Description of the slave configuration for the use case, assigned by the user.
If a slave supports modules/slots, the user can decide whether these are to be exported or whether the module and device data are to be combined during export.
The configured AmsNetId is exported. Usually this is network-dependent and cannot always be determined in advance.
The configured virtual MAC and IP addresses are stored in the SCI. Usually these are network-dependent and cannot always be determined in advance.
The configured cycle time is exported. Usually this is network-dependent and cannot always be determined in advance.
Reference to the original ESI file.
Save SCI file.
· A list view is available for multiple selections (Export multiple SCI files):
· Selection of the slaves to be exported:
All: All slaves are selected for export.
522
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
None: All slaves are deselected.
· The sci file can be saved locally:
· The export takes place:
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Import · An sci description can be inserted manually into the TwinCAT configuration like any normal Beckhoff device description. · The sci file must be located in the TwinCAT ESI path, usually under: C:\TwinCAT\3.1\Config\Io\EtherCAT
· Open the selection dialog:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
523
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master · Display SCI devices and select and insert the desired device:
Additional Notes · Settings for the SCI function can be made via the general Options dialog (Tools Options TwinCAT Export SCI):
Explanation of the settings:
Default export options
Generic
AoE | Set AmsNetId CoE | Set cycle time(0x1C3x.2) EoE | Set MAC and IP Keep modules Reload Devices
Default setting whether the configured AmsNetId is exported.
Default setting whether the configured cycle time is exported.
Default setting whether the configured MAC and IP addresses are exported.
Default setting whether the modules persist.
Setting whether the Reload Devices command is executed before the SCI export. This is strongly recommended to ensure a consistent slave configuration.
524
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master SCI error messages are displayed in the TwinCAT logger output window if required:
6.4
EtherCAT basics
Please refer to the EtherCAT System Documentation for the EtherCAT fieldbus basics.
6.5
EtherCAT cabling wire-bound
The cable length between two EtherCAT devices must not exceed 100 m. This results from the FastEthernet technology, which, above all for reasons of signal attenuation over the length of the cable, allows a maximum link length of 5 + 90 + 5 m if cables with appropriate properties are used. See also the Design recommendations for the infrastructure for EtherCAT/Ethernet.
Cables and connectors
For connecting EtherCAT devices only Ethernet connections (cables + plugs) that meet the requirements of at least category 5 (CAt5) according to EN 50173 or ISO/IEC 11801 should be used. EtherCAT uses 4 wires for signal transfer.
EtherCAT uses RJ45 plug connectors, for example. The pin assignment is compatible with the Ethernet standard (ISO/IEC 8802-3).
Pin
Color of conductor
Signal
Description
1
yellow
TD +
Transmission Data +
2
orange
TD -
Transmission Data -
3
white
RD +
Receiver Data +
6
blue
RD -
Receiver Data -
Due to automatic cable detection (auto-crossing) symmetric (1:1) or cross-over cables can be used between EtherCAT devices from Beckhoff.
Recommended cables
It is recommended to use the appropriate Beckhoff components e.g. - cable sets ZK1090-9191-xxxx respectively - RJ45 connector, field assembly ZS1090-0005 - EtherCAT cable, field assembly ZB9010, ZB9020
Suitable cables for the connection of EtherCAT devices can be found on the Beckhoff website!
E-Bus supply
A bus coupler can supply the EL terminals added to it with the E-bus system voltage of 5 V; a coupler is thereby loadable up to 2 A as a rule (see details in respective device documentation). Information on how much current each EL terminal requires from the E-bus supply is available online and in the catalogue. If the added terminals require more current than the coupler can supply, then power feed terminals (e.g. EL9410) must be inserted at appropriate places in the terminal strand.
The pre-calculated theoretical maximum E-Bus current is displayed in the TwinCAT System Manager. A shortfall is marked by a negative total amount and an exclamation mark; a power feed terminal is to be placed before such a position.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
525
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 238: System manager current calculation
NOTE Malfunction possible!
The same ground potential must be used for the E-Bus supply of all EtherCAT terminals in a terminal block!
6.6
General notes for setting the watchdog
ELxxxx terminals are equipped with a safety feature (watchdog) that switches off the outputs after a specifiable time e.g. in the event of an interruption of the process data traffic, depending on the device and settings, e.g. in OFF state.
The EtherCAT slave controller (ESC) in the EL2xxx terminals features two watchdogs:
· SM watchdog (default: 100 ms) · PDI watchdog (default: 100 ms)
SM watchdog (SyncManager Watchdog)
The SyncManager watchdog is reset after each successful EtherCAT process data communication with the terminal. If no EtherCAT process data communication takes place with the terminal for longer than the set and activated SM watchdog time, e.g. in the event of a line interruption, the watchdog is triggered and the outputs are set to FALSE. The OP state of the terminal is unaffected. The watchdog is only reset after a successful EtherCAT process data access. Set the monitoring time as described below.
The SyncManager watchdog monitors correct and timely process data communication with the ESC from the EtherCAT side.
PDI watchdog (Process Data Watchdog)
If no PDI communication with the EtherCAT slave controller (ESC) takes place for longer than the set and activated PDI watchdog time, this watchdog is triggered. PDI (Process Data Interface) is the internal interface between the ESC and local processors in the EtherCAT slave, for example. The PDI watchdog can be used to monitor this communication for failure.
The PDI watchdog monitors correct and timely process data communication with the ESC from the application side.
The settings of the SM- and PDI-watchdog must be done for each slave separately in the TwinCAT System Manager.
526
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 239: EtherCAT tab -> Advanced Settings -> Behavior -> Watchdog
Notes: · the multiplier is valid for both watchdogs. · each watchdog has its own timer setting, the outcome of this in summary with the multiplier is a resulting time. · Important: the multiplier/timer setting is only loaded into the slave at the start up, if the checkbox is activated. If the checkbox is not activated, nothing is downloaded and the ESC settings remain unchanged.
Multiplier
Multiplier
Both watchdogs receive their pulses from the local terminal cycle, divided by the watchdog multiplier:
1/25 MHz * (watchdog multiplier + 2) = 100 µs (for default setting of 2498 for the multiplier)
The standard setting of 1000 for the SM watchdog corresponds to a release time of 100 ms.
The value in multiplier + 2 corresponds to the number of basic 40 ns ticks representing a watchdog tick. The multiplier can be modified in order to adjust the watchdog time over a larger range.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
527
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Example "Set SM watchdog"
This checkbox enables manual setting of the watchdog times. If the outputs are set and the EtherCAT communication is interrupted, the SM watchdog is triggered after the set time and the outputs are erased. This setting can be used for adapting a terminal to a slower EtherCAT master or long cycle times. The default SM watchdog setting is 100 ms. The setting range is 0...65535. Together with a multiplier with a range of 1...65535 this covers a watchdog period between 0...~170 seconds.
Calculation
Multiplier = 2498 watchdog base time = 1 / 25 MHz * (2498 + 2) = 0.0001 seconds = 100 µs SM watchdog = 10000 10000 * 100 µs = 1 second watchdog monitoring time
CAUTION Undefined state possible!
The function for switching off of the SM watchdog via SM watchdog = 0 is only implemented in terminals from version -0016. In previous versions this operating mode should not be used.
CAUTION Damage of devices and undefined state possible!
If the SM watchdog is activated and a value of 0 is entered the watchdog switches off completely. This is the deactivation of the watchdog! Set outputs are NOT set in a safe state, if the communication is interrupted.
6.7
EtherCAT State Machine
The state of the EtherCAT slave is controlled via the EtherCAT State Machine (ESM). Depending upon the state, different functions are accessible or executable in the EtherCAT slave. Specific commands must be sent by the EtherCAT master to the device in each state, particularly during the bootup of the slave.
A distinction is made between the following states: · Init · Pre-Operational · Safe-Operational and · Operational · Boot
The regular state of each EtherCAT slave after bootup is the OP state.
528
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 240: States of the EtherCAT State Machine
Init
After switch-on the EtherCAT slave in the Init state. No mailbox or process data communication is possible. The EtherCAT master initializes sync manager channels 0 and 1 for mailbox communication.
Pre-Operational (Pre-Op)
During the transition between Init and Pre-Op the EtherCAT slave checks whether the mailbox was initialized correctly.
In Pre-Op state mailbox communication is possible, but not process data communication. The EtherCAT master initializes the sync manager channels for process data (from sync manager channel 2), the FMMU channels and, if the slave supports configurable mapping, PDO mapping or the sync manager PDO assignment. In this state the settings for the process data transfer and perhaps terminal-specific parameters that may differ from the default settings are also transferred.
Safe-Operational (Safe-Op)
During transition between Pre-Op and Safe-Op the EtherCAT slave checks whether the sync manager channels for process data communication and, if required, the distributed clocks settings are correct. Before it acknowledges the change of state, the EtherCAT slave copies current input data into the associated DPRAM areas of the EtherCAT slave controller (ECSC).
In Safe-Op state mailbox and process data communication is possible, although the slave keeps its outputs in a safe state, while the input data are updated cyclically.
Outputs in SAFEOP state
The default set watchdog [} 526] monitoring sets the outputs of the module in a safe state - depending on the settings in SAFEOP and OP - e.g. in OFF state. If this is prevented by deactivation of the watchdog monitoring in the module, the outputs can be switched or set also in the SAFEOP state.
Operational (Op)
Before the EtherCAT master switches the EtherCAT slave from Safe-Op to Op it must transfer valid output data.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
529
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
In the Op state the slave copies the output data of the masters to its outputs. Process data and mailbox communication is possible.
Boot In the Boot state the slave firmware can be updated. The Boot state can only be reached via the Init state. In the Boot state mailbox communication via the file access over EtherCAT (FoE) protocol is possible, but no other mailbox communication and no process data communication.
6.8
CoE Interface
General description
The CoE interface (CAN application protocol over EtherCAT)) is used for parameter management of EtherCAT devices. EtherCAT slaves or the EtherCAT master manage fixed (read only) or variable parameters which they require for operation, diagnostics or commissioning.
CoE parameters are arranged in a table hierarchy. In principle, the user has read access via the fieldbus. The EtherCAT master (TwinCAT System Manager) can access the local CoE lists of the slaves via EtherCAT in read or write mode, depending on the attributes.
Different CoE parameter types are possible, including string (text), integer numbers, Boolean values or larger byte fields. They can be used to describe a wide range of features. Examples of such parameters include manufacturer ID, serial number, process data settings, device name, calibration values for analog measurement or passwords.
The order is specified in two levels via hexadecimal numbering: (main)index, followed by subindex. The value ranges are
· Index: 0x0000 ...0xFFFF (0...65535dez) · SubIndex: 0x00...0xFF (0...255dez)
A parameter localized in this way is normally written as 0x8010:07, with preceding "0x" to identify the hexadecimal numerical range and a colon between index and subindex.
The relevant ranges for EtherCAT fieldbus users are:
· 0x1000: This is where fixed identity information for the device is stored, including name, manufacturer, serial number etc., plus information about the current and available process data configurations.
· 0x8000: This is where the operational and functional parameters for all channels are stored, such as filter settings or output frequency.
Other important ranges are:
· 0x4000: here are the channel parameters for some EtherCAT devices. Historically, this was the first parameter area before the 0x8000 area was introduced. EtherCAT devices that were previously equipped with parameters in 0x4000 and changed to 0x8000 support both ranges for compatibility reasons and mirror internally.
· 0x6000: Input PDOs ("input" from the perspective of the EtherCAT master) · 0x7000: Output PDOs ("output" from the perspective of the EtherCAT master)
Availability
Not every EtherCAT device must have a CoE list. Simple I/O modules without dedicated processor usually have no variable parameters and therefore no CoE list.
If a device has a CoE list, it is shown in the TwinCAT System Manager as a separate tab with a listing of the elements:
530
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 241: "CoE Online" tab
The figure above shows the CoE objects available in device "EL2502", ranging from 0x1000 to 0x1600. The subindices for 0x1018 are expanded.
Data management and function "NoCoeStorage"
Some parameters, particularly the setting parameters of the slave, are configurable and writeable. This can be done in write or read mode
· via the System Manager (Fig. "CoE Online" tab) by clicking This is useful for commissioning of the system/slaves. Click on the row of the index to be parameterized and enter a value in the "SetValue" dialog.
· from the control system/PLC via ADS, e.g. through blocks from the TcEtherCAT.lib library This is recommended for modifications while the system is running or if no System Manager or operating staff are available.
Data management
If slave CoE parameters are modified online, Beckhoff devices store any changes in a fail-safe manner in the EEPROM, i.e. the modified CoE parameters are still available after a restart. The situation may be different with other manufacturers.
An EEPROM is subject to a limited lifetime with respect to write operations. From typically 100,000 write operations onwards it can no longer be guaranteed that new (changed) data are reliably saved or are still readable. This is irrelevant for normal commissioning. However, if CoE parameters are continuously changed via ADS at machine runtime, it is quite possible for the lifetime limit to be reached. Support for the NoCoeStorage function, which suppresses the saving of changed CoE values, depends on the firmware version. Please refer to the technical data in this documentation as to whether this applies to the respective device.
· If the function is supported: the function is activated by entering the code word 0x12345678 once in CoE 0xF008 and remains active as long as the code word is not changed. After switching the device on it is then inactive. Changed CoE values are not saved in the EEPROM and can thus be changed any number of times.
· Function is not supported: continuous changing of CoE values is not permissible in view of the lifetime limit.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
531
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Startup list
Changes in the local CoE list of the terminal are lost if the terminal is replaced. If a terminal is replaced with a new Beckhoff terminal, it will have the default settings. It is therefore advisable to link all changes in the CoE list of an EtherCAT slave with the Startup list of the slave, which is processed whenever the EtherCAT fieldbus is started. In this way a replacement EtherCAT slave can automatically be parameterized with the specifications of the user. If EtherCAT slaves are used which are unable to store local CoE values permanently, the Startup list must be used.
Recommended approach for manual modification of CoE parameters · Make the required change in the System Manager The values are stored locally in the EtherCAT slave · If the value is to be stored permanently, enter it in the Startup list. The order of the Startup entries is usually irrelevant.
Fig. 242: Startup list in the TwinCAT System Manager
The Startup list may already contain values that were configured by the System Manager based on the ESI specifications. Additional application-specific entries can be created.
Online/offline list
While working with the TwinCAT System Manager, a distinction has to be made whether the EtherCAT device is "available", i.e. switched on and linked via EtherCAT and therefore online, or whether a configuration is created offline without connected slaves.
In both cases a CoE list as shown in Fig. "CoE online tab" is displayed. The connectivity is shown as offline/ online.
· If the slave is offline The offline list from the ESI file is displayed. In this case modifications are not meaningful or possible. The configured status is shown under Identity. No firmware or hardware version is displayed, since these are features of the physical device. Offline is shown in red.
532
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Fig. 243: Offline list
· If the slave is online The actual current slave list is read. This may take several seconds, depending on the size and cycle time. The actual identity is displayed The firmware and hardware version of the equipment according to the electronic information is displayed Online is shown in green.
Fig. 244: Online list
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
533
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
Channel-based order
The CoE list is available in EtherCAT devices that usually feature several functionally equivalent channels. For example, a 4-channel analog 0...10 V input terminal also has four logical channels and therefore four identical sets of parameter data for the channels. In order to avoid having to list each channel in the documentation, the placeholder "n" tends to be used for the individual channel numbers.
In the CoE system 16 indices, each with 255 subindices, are generally sufficient for representing all channel parameters. The channel-based order is therefore arranged in 16dec/10hex steps. The parameter range 0x8000 exemplifies this:
· Channel 0: parameter range 0x8000:00 ... 0x800F:255 · Channel 1: parameter range 0x8010:00 ... 0x801F:255 · Channel 2: parameter range 0x8020:00 ... 0x802F:255 · ...
This is generally written as 0x80n0.
Detailed information on the CoE interface can be found in the EtherCAT system documentation on the Beckhoff website.
534
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Commissioning on EtherCAT Master
6.9
Distributed Clock
The distributed clock represents a local clock in the EtherCAT slave controller (ESC) with the following characteristics:
· Unit 1 ns
· Zero point 1.1.2000 00:00
· Size 64 bit (sufficient for the next 584 years; however, some EtherCAT slaves only offer 32-bit support, i.e. the variable overflows after approx. 4.2 seconds)
· The EtherCAT master automatically synchronizes the local clock with the master clock in the EtherCAT bus with a precision of < 100 ns.
For detailed information please refer to the EtherCAT system description.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
535
Housing
7
Housing
Fig. 245: Dimensions: ELM terminals
536
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
7.1
Housing data
Housing data
ELM-Type
ELM3002-0000 ELM3004-0000 ELM3102-0000 ELM3104-0000 ELM3142-0000 ELM3144-0000 ELM3146-0000 ELM3148-0000 ELM3344-0000 ELM3348-0000 ELM3502-0000 ELM3504-0000 ELM3602-0000 ELM3604-0000 ELM3702-0000 ELM3704-0000
ELM3344-0000 ELM3348-0000
ELM3602-0002 ELM3604-0002
ELM3704-0001
Plug-/ Connector
push-in, for direct wiring, plug connector detachable for service
Depth 95 mm
IEC thermocouple connector "universal"
BNC (female)
115 mm
LEMO (female), 98 mm series B multipole, size 1, 8 pol. "308"(1
1) Socket 8 pol. LEMO ECG
Width 33 mm
Housing
Height 100 mm
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
537
Housing
7.2
Notes on connection technology
Connection type: Push-in with service plug
The wires are plugged in directly; for solid wires no tools are required, i.e. after the insulation has been stripped, the wire is simply pushed into the contact point. The same principle applies for the ferrule. Free stranded wire ends can also be connected in this way; in this case the wire clamping mechanism has to be opened by operating the pushing device.
Like in standard terminals, the wires are released via the contact release device, using a screwdriver or pushing device.
The cables must not be pulled/ pushed live or under load.
For maintenance purposes, e.g. during service, the entire plug-in body can be removed from the Beckhoff terminal without releasing the individual wires. Use a screwdriver (e.g. Beckhoff ZB8700) to release the central release device and pull the cables to release the connector body.
Additionally the service plug don't have specified switching power, also it must not be pulled/ pushed live or under load, too.
The permitted conductor cross-sections and the strip length are shown in the following table.
Wire cross-section (solid wire) Wire cross-section (stranded wire) Wire cross-section (stranded) Wire cross-section (stranded wire) Current rating, permanent Conductor (AWG) Strip length
0.2 ... 1.5 mm2 0.2 ... 1.5 mm2
0.25 ... 0.75 mm2 (with ferrule with plastic collar) 0.25 ... 1.5 mm2 (with ferrule without plastic collar)
5 A 24 14 | 14: THHN, THWN 8 ... 9 mm / 0.31 0.35 in
538
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Housing
Releasing the contact The push-in connector is supplied with the terminal. The push-in connector is designed as a service plug. Maximum number of mating cycles: 10 The connector with connected wires can be removed by pushing the unlocking tab (red) in the direction of the arrow, e.g. with a screwdriver, thereby releasing the unlocking device.
Meticulous cleanliness must be ensured when the connector is re-inserted. Do not touch the pins in the device tray. Push in the connector until it latches audibly and the front of the plug is flush with the ELM housing.
Connection type: BNC No connector plug is provided for terminals with BNC socket (coaxial). A wide range of BNC plug connectors is available commercially. Push the connector without tilting, and lock the bayonet closure by turning it 90°. Release in reverse order. Ensure cleanliness. Note the installation instructions for connector assembly. Impedance data (50 , 75 ) are only relevant for high-frequency applications, i.e. for frequencies in the MHz range or above. Unless specified otherwise, Beckhoff Terminals therefore do not feature 50 or 75 power matching.
Connection type: LEMO No connector plug is provided for terminals with LEMO connection. LEMO offers a wide range of connectors, from which the best match can be selected for the respective cable (depending on sealing, cable diameter, housing material, angled/straight). Beckhoff currently (2020) does not offer LEMO plug connectors for resale. Follow the installation instructions provided by LEMO for connector assembly. LEMO series B connectors are self-locking in the socket, i.e. they do not have to be tightened. To release the connector, pull the housing, which automatically releases the lock.
Connection design of mini thermocouple No connector is supplied for terminals with mini-TC connection. The conventional plugs can be used:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
539
Housing
Fig. 246: Figure: mini thermocouple plug (dimensions only as guide values) Currently (2020), Beckhoff does not offer the mini-TC plugs for resale. The color of the plug/socket indicates the type of material used. Ideally, plugs and sockets are of the same type and therefore made of the same material. The unavoidable TC cold junction then shifts into the measuring device and can be measured there optimally. Alternatively, a certain plug can be inserted into a white universal socket made of copper, which is the second-best solution. The appropriate cold junction option must be selected in the device settings.
540
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Housing
7.3
Accessories
The following accessories are currently available for the analog input terminals of the ELM3xxx series
7.3.1 Shield connection ZS9100-0002
The shield connection is an optional component, which can be installed on the underside of the ELMxxxx housing. It has to be ordered separately.
It is used as a low-resistance earthing connection at the housing, to deal with electrical interference signals arriving via the cable screen. The fault signals are then directed to the DIN rail via the metallic ELM housing and the integrated grounding springs. For this to work, the DIN rail/control cabinet also has to have a lowresistance connection, of course.
Note: Electrical faults usually occur in the form of high-frequency signals. Therefore, it is important to not only ensure a good low-resistance connection for DC signals (continuity test with a multimeter), but also to ensure its effectiveness for high-frequency signals in the form of a low-impedance connection. This should be tested with special measuring devices, unless the general installation instructions regarding EMCcompliant control cabinet construction are observed.
The shield connection should be used as follows:
· Lever off the plastic cover from the ELM housing and retain if for later reuse, if required
· Attach the shield connection with the screw provided. Clean the contact surfaces, as appropriate. The second screw hole remains free in case a PE connection is required.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
541
Housing · Strip the signal cable, feed it through the shield clamp and hand-tighten the clamp (recommended screw tightening torque: 0.5 Nm) · Apply the signal cable wires at the plug connector. · For disassembly, proceed in reverse order.
Note: the shield connection does not act as strain relief! Alternative shield connection methods for analog signal lines:
· Beckhoff shielding connection system ZB8500 https://www.beckhoff.com/zb8500/
· Separate shield connection depending on requirements
7.3.2 Shielding hood ZS9100-0003
The shielding hood is an optional component for the ELMxxxx housing series. It has to be ordered separately. It does not affect the visibility of the LED displays of the terminal.
542
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Housing
The shielding hood has two purposes
· Electromagnetic shielding of faults If push-in connectors are used, they represent a gateway for faults in the terminal, due to the fact that they are made of plastic. The shielding hood can be installed (either right away or retrospectively) in order to form an enclosed metallic cage around the terminal and the signal cable. Alternatively, ELMxxxx terminals with shielded plug connectors can be used (e.g. LEMO, BNC), in which case the shielding hood is not required.
· Thermal shielding for thermocouple measurements If the ELM3xxx terminal is used for measuring temperatures with thermocouples, the integrated cold junction measurement contributes significantly to the overall uncertainty. Thermal turbulence caused by air flowing past and radiant heat can lead to large temperature gradients around the plug, resulting in fluctuating temperature measurements. The shielding hood facilitates a thermally stabilized environment around the plug, which helps to increase the measuring accuracy.
Between one and four commercially available signal lines up to approx. 7 mm shield diameter (usually corresponds to approx. 9 mm outer diameter) can be connected.
Technical data Weight Dimensions (W x H x D)
Permissible ambient temperature range during operation and storage Vibration/shock resistance
Protection class Installation position Approval
ZS9100-0003 approx. 190 g 26 x 145 x 93 mm effective extended width after mounting: 74 mm -40...+85 °C
conforms to EN 60068-2-6 / EN 60068-2-27 Usage restriction: see below IP 20 variable CE
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
543
Housing
The shielding hood should be installed as follows: · Use a screwdriver to lever off the two painted plastic covers on the top and bottom of the ELM housing; retain the covers for later reuse · Slide on the shield connection and fasten it with the three screws provided. The fourth screw hole is intended for a PE connection, if required.
544
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Housing
· Remove the sheathing from the signal cables and insert the wires into the connectors (A). Then push the shield braid into the EMC clamp (B) and fasten the cable to the strain relief clip (C) using the cable tie provided. Follow the cable manufacturer's recommendations for the bending radius.
· The shield braid should rest on the conductive foam block (D). This block ensures EMC-compliant sealing when the hood is closed.
· Position the hood and hand-tighten it with the knurled screw. Ensure that the unpainted sections and the foam block are in close contact.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
545
Housing
· For disassembly, proceed in reverse order. Any component identification should be replicated on the hood.
NOTE Note for use under vibration load
An application of the ELM terminal with mounted shielding hood ZS9100-0003 under vibration and shock effect in the direction of DIN rail track (red arrow) is, regardless of the installation position, not allowed.
If vibration / shock inevitably occurs during operation, an installation position must be selected which does not load the ELM terminal and accordingly the shielding hood in the indicated direction of the arrow. Basically, an additional mechanical support of the shielding hood and cables respectively is recommended for vibration / shock.
Also see about this 2 Housing [} 536]
7.3.3 Replacement push-in ZS2001-000x
The black push-in service plugs for ELM/EKM terminals can be ordered separately as spare parts. Per unit 10 pieces are included.
ZS2001-000x
Number of poles 2 4 6 10
Designation ZS2001-0006 ZS2001-0007 ZS2001-0008 ZS2001-0009
546
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Housing
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
547
Mounting and wiring
8
Mounting and wiring
8.1
Common notes to the power contacts
If the ELM terminal doesn't have own wheeling of electricity or supply of the power contacts, the terminal on its right mustn't have sticking out power contacts on the left side. They would be free accessible if the ELM terminal would be pulled out from the DIN rail.
Also see about this 2 ELM/EKM terminal mounting on DIN rail [} 558]
8.2
Installation positions
NOTE
Constraints regarding installation position and operating temperature range
Please refer to the technical data for a terminal to ascertain whether any restrictions regarding the installation position and/or the operating temperature range have been specified. When installing high power dissipation terminals ensure that an adequate spacing is maintained between other components above and below the terminal in order to guarantee adequate ventilation!
Optimum installation position (standard)
The optimum installation position requires the mounting rail to be installed horizontally and the connection surfaces of the EL/KL terminals to face forward (see Fig. "Recommended distances for standard installation position"). The terminals are ventilated from below, which enables optimum cooling of the electronics through convection. "From below" is relative to the acceleration of gravity.
Fig. 247: Recommended distances for standard installation position
548
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Mounting and wiring
Compliance with the distances shown in Fig. "Recommended distances for standard installation position" is recommended.
Other installation positions All other installation positions are characterized by different spatial arrangement of the mounting rail - see Fig "Other installation positions". The minimum distances to ambient specified above also apply to these installation positions.
Fig. 248: Other installation positions
8.3
Mounting of Passive Terminals
Hint for mounting passive terminals
EtherCAT Bus Terminals (ELxxxx / ESxxxx), which do not take an active part in data transfer within the bus terminal block are so called Passive Terminals. The Passive Terminals have no current consumption out of the E-Bus To ensure an optimal data transfer, you must not directly string together more than 2 Passive Terminals!
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
549
Mounting and wiring Examples for mounting passive terminals (highlighted)
Fig. 249: Correct configuration
Fig. 250: Incorrect configuration
8.4
Notes regarding connectors and wiring
It is in the very nature of EtherCAT I/O modules/terminals/boxes that they have two connection sides: one to the fieldbus for communication with the module, which is obligatory, the other to the signal/sensor/actuator to facilitate proper use of the module. The "outer" connection side usually features contacting options for connecting outgoing wires.
Only few I/O devices do not have a second side. Examples include the EL6070 license key terminal and the EL6090 display terminal.
Notes and suggestions for dealing with the connection options are provided below
· Manufacturer specifications/notes for connection options must be followed. Any special tools that may have been provided must be used as intended, so that gas-tightness is ensured through the crimping pressure.
· Any detachable connection system is subject to a specified maximum number of connection cycles. Each connection/disconnection operation results in wear through friction, mechanical stretching/ relaxation, possibly ingress of contaminants/gases/liquids/condensation, contact discharge, modification of the electrical properties and of the contact point (ohmic contact resistance). In other words, releasing/connecting a contact results in mechanical, chemical and therefore ultimately
550
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Mounting and wiring
electrical changes. In terms of the application scenario it is therefore important to select suitable connection systems or devices with suitable connection systems:
For connections that are more or less permanent, it may make sense to use connectors/contacts with a maximum number of mating cycles (as specified by the manufacturer) of 10 to 100 cycles. This may be the case if devices are installed/wired only once, and over the entire lifetime rewiring is only expected to become necessary during maintenance work.
For connections that have to be detached on a regular basis, connectors/contacts with a maximum number of mating cycles of 1,000 or higher should be selected. Such connections can typically be found in laboratory environments, where the cabling may be changed several times each day but high-quality contact must nevertheless be ensured over many years.
· When handling and assembling connectors/contacts it is essential to avoid contact with hand perspiration/liquids, even for low-tech connections (open stranded wire, cage clamp/push-in). Acidic/ alkaline liquids may have a very aggressive effect on the contact surface and quickly lead to structural changes and oxidation layers. These are very disruptive for analog measurements, particularly since they undermine the reproducibility of measurements and can therefore result (if known) in large systematic measurement uncertainty. It may be possible to rectify the problem by thorough follow-up cleaning.
· The actual/expected load during operation must be taken into account when selecting connectors.
· Abnormal vibrations can lead to microfriction/corrosion and change the electrical properties, potentially resulting in complete loss of contact.
· Temperature variations affect the mechanical strength of the connection and the spring forces in metallic components.
· Exposure to gas or liquid can damage the connection, particularly if the gas or liquid penetrates to the actual contact region and is unable to escape from there.
· Of high relevance for analog measurements is the electrical quality of the connection, both in the short term during commissioning and over the service life under external influences and perhaps repeated mating cycles. This is expressed in the repeatability of the transition. The influence should be checked against the expected accuracy. Of particular relevance is the (frequency dependent) contact resistance. Effects can be:
Increasing the contact resistance results in a voltage drop when power is transmitted, potentially leading to critical self-heating.
The internal voltage drop can distort corresponding measurements. In order to avoid negative effects, 4/5/6-wire connections should be used in SG/resistance measurements, since non-live contacts are no longer affected by a distorting voltage drop. The popular 3-wire connection for resistance measurement (PT100, PT1000 etc.) does not provide absolute protection, since the singular line cannot be diagnosed. Current/voltage measurements in industrial environments are less sensitive to contact changes.
A defective contact surface can lead to random resistance values, depending on the contact position and temperature. This makes reproducible measurements difficult.
· The effort for establishing the connection, including assembling the cables and connectors, generally increases with increasing transmission quality requirements. This applies to the tools, diligence and time required. Examples:
Cage clamp/push-in connections (e.g. Beckhoff EL terminals), which are common in automation applications, can be established or released in a few seconds with or without ferrule. A screwdriver or push pin is sufficient. On the other hand, in many cases the (ohmic) repeatability is insufficient for high-precision measurements in the SG/R range.
Some 10 minutes and costs of some 10 euros should be assumed for assembly a lab-standard LEMO/ODU connector (Beckhoff ELM3704-0001), depending on the number of poles. The result is a top-quality connection system with a high number of permissible mating cycles.
An intermediate solution can be field-configurable M8/M12 connections. For reasons of tightness, they are more elaborate to assemble (soldering or insulation displacement contact, if necessary), although the maximum number of mating cycles is similar to maintenance connectors.
· A pre-assembled connection should be subjected to electrical/mechanical testing before commissioning: visual inspection, pull-out test, crimp height measurement, resistance measurement etc.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
551
Mounting and wiring
8.5
Shielding concept
Together with the shield busbar, the prefabricated cables from Beckhoff Automation offer optimum protection against electromagnetic interference. It is highly recommended to apply the shield as close as possible to the terminal, in order to minimize operational disturbances.
Connection of the motor cable to the shield busbar
Fasten the shield busbar supports 1 to the DIN rail 2. The mounting rail 2 must be in contact with the metallic rear wall of the control cabinet over a wide area. Install the shield busbar 3 as shown below. As an alternative, a shield busbar clamp 3a can be screwed directly to the metallic rear wall of the control cabinet (fig. "shield busbar clamp")
Fig. 251: Shield busbar
552
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Mounting and wiring
Fig. 252: Shield busbar clamp
Connect the cores 4 of the motor cable 5, then attach the copper-sheathed end 6 of the motor cable 5 with the shield clamp 7 to the shield busbar 3 or shield busbar clamp 3a. Tighten the screw 8 to the stop. Fasten the PE clamp 9 to the shield busbar 3 or shield busbar clamp 3a. Clamp the PE core 10 of the motor cable 5 under the PE clamp 9.
Fig. 253: Shield connection
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
553
Mounting and wiring
Connection of the feedback cable to the motor
Twisting of the feedback cable cores
The feedback cable cores should be twisted, in order to avoid operational disturbances.
When screwing the feedback plug to the motor, the shield of the feedback cable is connected via the metallic plug fastener. On the terminal side the shield can also be connected. Connect the cores of the feedback cable and attach the copper-sheathed end of the feedback cable to the shield busbar 3 or shield busbar clamp 3a with the shield clamp 7. The motor cable and the feedback cable can be connected to the shield clamp 7 with the screw 8.
8.6
Power supply, potential groups
The terminals from the ELM3xxx series have different structures depending on their function. In general, the electronics consist internally of at least 2 potential groups:
· of a communication section on the E-bus, the so-called bus side This section is directly connected to the internal 5 V supply of the E-bus. It is not directly accessible from the user side.
· of a signal section for the connection of the input/output signals, the so-called field side. As a rule, all channels of the device are contiguous in this island.
Both potential groups are always electrically isolated. The "load capacity" of the isolation must then be observed in detail, i.e. the voltage difference/potential difference in continuous operation or for a short time between the two areas.
In individual devices, the analog channels on the field side can also be electrically isolated from one another; the magnitude of the max. electrical isolation is then specified. The device then consists of several potential groups: the bus side and the n channels.
Depending on the terminal, the internal electronics are supplied with power via the E-bus, via the optional power contacts, or both. See the relevant notes about this in the respective device specification.
The plug used can also have an influence on the potential groups; if necessary, its housing is conductively connected to the terminal housing.
The external system GND (DIN rail, SGND, PE, FE) is always present and represents the reference ground.
In the following the permissible potential difference is referred to only as "Insulation"; the exact specification (value, type and, if applicable, insulating strength) can be found in the respective terminal specifications.
NOTE
Isolation between the potential groups in practice
The potential groups are theoretically electrically isolated, i.e. there are only parasitic ohmic connections in the range of M and higher that are unavoidable due to the electronics. The load capacity of the isolation with regard to voltage level and duration is specified. It results among other things from internal isolation distances and the group-spanning components used, e.g. data transmitters or transformers, and is formulated in view of the underlying standards, which describe application aspects such as aging, contamination or defined overvoltage events. From this it can be seen that, in practice, potential groups cannot to be operated arbitrarily isolated from the environment. In particular, if EMC disturbances penetrate the potential group, conducted by the external cables or radiated, then this energy seeks its way to SGND and finds it in every case undefined in the groupspanning elements mentioned above. Therefore, practice has shown that potential groups of all kinds should be purposefully and intentionally connected to one another and to SGND for interference dissipation with small capacities in the nF range, so that the HF disturbances (and these already start at 50 Hz) find a defined way and do not affect the operability. The ohmic effect of the capacitors in relation to the parasitic ohmic effects is negligible.
The following potential schemata may be specified for the ELM3xxx:
554
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Variant A
Mounting and wiring
Properties:
· electrical isolation at a specified level between field and E-bus: yes between field and SGND: yes between E-bus and SGND: yes between the channels: no
· Power contacts in use: no · Connection type: Push-in · Applies to:
ELM300x-0000, ELM310x-0000, ELM350x-0000, ELM360x-0000, ELM370x-0000
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
555
Mounting and wiring Variant B
Properties: · electrical isolation at a specified level between field and E-bus: yes between field and SGND: no, overvoltage protection diode to internal analog GND (AGND) between E-bus and SGND: yes between the channels: no · Power contacts in use: no · Connection type: ELM360x-0000 Push-In and ELM360x-0002 BNC, insulated from housing, BNC shield is internally connected to AGND · Applies to: ELM360x-0000, ELM360x-0002
556
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Variant C
Mounting and wiring
Properties:
· electrical isolation at a specified level between field and E-bus: yes between field and SGND: yes between E-bus and SGND: yes between the channels: no
· Power contacts in use: yes, but not used for internal supply, not electrically connected, only passthrough
· Connection type: Push-In, Mini-TC · Applies to: ELM314x-0000, ELM334x-0000/0003
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
557
Mounting and wiring Variant D
Properties: · electrical isolation at a specified level between field and E-bus: yes between field and SGND: yes between E-bus and SGND: yes between the channels: no · Power contacts in use: yes, used for internal supply, electrically isolated power supply unit · Connection type: Push-in · Applies to: ELM354x-0000
8.7
ELM/EKM terminal mounting on DIN rail
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and damage of device!
Bring the bus terminal system into a safe, powered down state before starting installation, disassembly or wiring of the bus terminals!
Assembly
The ELM terminals are locked to commercially available 35 mm mounting rails (DIN rails according to EN 60715) as following described:
· The ELM terminal can easily be latched onto the DIN rail. Therefore the clips of the terminal on top and down side have to be opened first:
558
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Mounting and wiring
Fig. 254: Opening the clips on top and down side by lifting them e.g. with a screw driver · Insert the ELM terminal to other already on the DIN rail arranged moduls together with tongue and groove and push the terminals against the mounting rail, until it clicks onto the touchdown point of the mounting rail. Then close the both clips on top and down side of the terminal respectively:
Fig. 255: Push-in of the ELM terminal and closing the mounting rail clips top and down
· During closing of the both clips there mustn't be a disruptive mechanical resistance being noticeable. The clips have to be snapped so that they're ending flat with the housing:
Attention: If the ELM terminal is clipped onto the mounting rail first and then pushed together without tongue and groove, the connection will not be operational! When correctly assembled, no significant gap should be visible between the housings.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
559
Mounting and wiring
Disassembly
Each ELM terminal is secured by a lock on the mounting rail, which must be released for disassembly. The procedure for demounting have to be done in reverse order as described in Assembly [} 558]:
1. Release the mounting rail lock of the ELM terminal on the top and down side and you can pull the terminal out of the bus terminal block easily without excessive force.
2. Grasp the released terminal with thumb and index finger simultaneous at the upper and lower grooved housing surfaces and pull the terminal out of the bus terminal block.
Fig. 256: Opening of the upper and lower mounting rail lock and pull out the ELM terminal module
Connections within a bus terminal block
The electric connections between the Bus Coupler and the Bus Terminals are automatically realized by joining the components: The six spring contacts of the K-Bus/E-Bus deal with the transfer of the data and the supply of the Bus Terminal electronics.
8.8
Protective earth (PE)
The housings of the ELM/EKM series are made of die-cast zinc and are thus metallic. This results in a need for clarification regarding the use of protective earthing against the risk of electric shock.
Attention: The relevant application standards refer to the surrounding control cabinet/control box as "housing", whereas this documentation refers to the Beckhoff terminal as "housing".
See also chapter "Notes regarding analog equipment - shielding and earth" [} 607] in this documentation.
560
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Mounting and wiring
The housing offers the option of an M3 bolted connection for connecting a ring terminal to PE.
The procedure for this is as follows:
· Lever off the plastic cover from the ELM housing and retain if for later reuse, if required · Secure the previously prepared ring terminal, which was crimped to the protective conductor, using an
M3x4 screw; max. torque 0.5 Nm. Use a suitable tool. ATTENTION: The screw must not be longer than specified, in order to avoid it protruding into the interior, where it could cause damage. This would be evident if the unit is sent in for repair. · Connect the PE cable to the protective conductor system.
Notes on whether a PE connection is necessary in the specific application
· A PE connection is required if the terminal could pose a risk of electric shock due to an inadmissible contact voltage. A distinction is made between two causes:
if the terminal is subjected to high internal voltages (not SELV/PELV), this high voltage may reach the housing in the event of a fault. For such terminals, a PE connection is essential. See the corresponding mechanical options at the module. For background information please refer to product and device standards such as EN 61010. Note: The terminals of type ELM3004, ELM3002, ELM3104, ELM3102, ELM3504, ELM3502, ELM3604, ELM3602, ELM3704, ELM3702 operate with low voltage SELV/PELV, so that there is usually no potential risk.
A connection to the protective earth conductor system must nevertheless be provided if the terminal operates with protective extra-low voltage (SELV/PELV), but there is a risk that a live conductor may come into contact with the housing in the event of a fault, resulting in unacceptable touch voltage. This is stipulated by application standards such as EN602041 or EN614391 relating to control cabinet design.
· It is therefore always necessary to check in which environment the application is used to ascertain whether a PE connection is required.
Note on protective earth (PE) with regard to analog measurements
The protective earth conductor system is specifically designed for discharging high currents. This may result in significant high-frequency interference, which could adversely affect an analog measuring device if it is/ has to be connected to the protective conductor system. In such cases, a strictly star-shaped configuration of the FE and PE systems may be advisable, in order to have as few interference sources as possible on the
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
561
Mounting and wiring
PE system that are close to the analog measuring system. Ideally, no PE connection should be used at all. However, in this case the installation must comply with the two conditions referred to above, which may necessitate splitting the system into a high-voltage and a low-voltage control cabinet, so that no PE would be required for the latter.
8.9
Connection notes for 20 mA measurement
8.9.1 Configuration of 0/4..20 mA differential inputs
This section describes the 0/4..20 mA differential inputs for terminal series EL301x, EL302x, EL311x, EL312x and terminals EL3174, EL3612, EL3742 and EL3751.
For the single-ended 20 mA inputs the terminal series EL304x, EL305x, EL314x, EL315x, EL317x, EL318x and EL375x they only apply with regard to technical transferability and also for devices whose analogue input channels have a common related ground potential (and therefore the channels are not to each other and/or not to power supply electrically isolated). Herewith an example for an electrically isolated device is the terminal EL3174-0002.
Technical background
The internal input electronics of the terminals referred to above have the following characteristic (see Fig. [} 562] Internal connection diagram for 0/4..20 mA inputs):
· Differential current measurement, i.e. concrete potential reference is primarily not required. The system limit applies is the individual terminal EL30xx/EL31xx.
· Current measurement via a 33 shunt per channel, resulting in a maximum voltage drop of 660 mV via the shunt
· Internal resistor configuration with GND point (A) central to the shunt The configuration of the resistors is symmetric, such that the potential of (A) is central relative to the voltage drop via the shunt.
· All channels within the terminal have this GNDint potential in common. · the common GNDint potential (A)
is connected for 1 and 2 channel terminals to a terminal point and not with GNDPC (power contact). is connected for 4 channel terminals with GNDPC · The center point of the voltage drop over the 33 shunt is referred to common mode point (CMP). According to the technical product data, the maximum permitted UCM voltage (common mode) refers to the potential between the CMP of a channel and the internal GND or the potential between the CMP of 2 channels within a terminal. It must not exceed the specified limit (typically ±10 or ±35 V).
Accordingly, for multi-channel measurements UCMspecifications must be followed.
Fig. 257: Internal connection diagram 0/4...20 mA inputs
The block diagram for a 2 channel terminal shows the linked GND points within the terminal (Fig. [} 563] Internal connection for 0/4..20 mA inputs of a EL3xx2):
562
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Mounting and wiring
Fig. 258: Internal connection diagram for 0/4..20 mA inputs of a EL3xx2 For all channels within the terminal UCM-max must not be exceeded.
UCM for 0/4..20 mA inputs
If UCM of an analog input channel is exceeded, internal equalizing currents result in erroneous measurements. For 1 and 2 channel terminals the internal GND is therefore fed out to a terminal point, so that the UCM specification can be met through application-specific configuration of this GND point, even in cases of atypical sensor configuration. Example 1 The 2-channel EL3012 is connected to 2 sensors, which are supplied with 5 and 24 V. Both current measurements are executed as low-side measurements. This connection type is permitted, because at Imax CMPch1 and CMPch2 are approx. 330 mV above 0 V, which means that UCM is always < 0.5 V. The requirement of UCM < 10 V (applicable to EL30xx) is therefore adhered to.
Fig. 259: Example 1: low-side measurement
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
563
Mounting and wiring
If the EL30x1/EL30x2 or EL31x1/EL31x2 terminals have no external GNDint connection, the GNDint potential can adjust itself as required (referred to as "floating"). Please note that for this mode reduced measuring accuracy is to be expected.
Example 1a Accordingly, this also applies if the floating point GNDINT is connected to another potential.
Fig. 260: Example 1a, high-side measurement
Example 2
The same EL3012 is now again connected with the two 20 mA sensors, although this time with one low-side measurement at 5 V and one high-side measurement at 12 V. This results in significant potential differences UCM > 10 V (applicable to EL30xx) between the two channels, which is not permitted.
Fig. 261: Example 2, high-side/low-side measurement
564
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Mounting and wiring
To rectify this, GNDint can in this case be connected externally with an auxiliary potential of 6 V relative to "0 V". The resulting A/GNDint will be in the middle, i.e. approx. 0.3 V or 11.6 V.
Example 3 In the EL3xx4 terminals GNDint is internally connected with the negative power contact. The choice of potential is therefore limited.
Fig. 262: Invalid EL3xx4 configuration
The resulting CMP is 23.6 V, i.e. >> 10 V (applicable to EL30xx). The EL30x4/EL31x4 terminals should therefore be configured such that CMP is always less than UCM,max.
Summary
This results in certain concrete specifications for external connection with 0/4..20 mA sensors:
· We recommended connecting GNDint with a low-impedance potential, because this significantly improves the measuring accuracy of the EL30xx/31xx. Please note the instructions relating to the UCM potential reference.
· The UCM potential reference must be adhered to between CMP GNDint and CMPch(x) CMPch(y). If this cannot be guaranteed, the single-channel version should be used.
· Terminal configuration: EL3xx1/EL3xx2: GNDint is connected to terminal point for external connection. GNDint should be connected externally such that condition 2 is met. EL3xx4: GND is connected with the negative power contact. The external connection should be such that condition 2 is met.
If the sensor cable is shielded, the shield should not be connected with the GNDint terminal point but with a dedicated low-impedance shield point.
· If terminal points of several EL30xx/EL31xx terminals are connected with each other, ensure that condition 2 is met.
Connection of GNDint
In the EL30x1/EL30x2 and EL31x1/EL31x2 terminals the internal GND, GNDint connection is fed out to terminal contacts. To achieve a precise measurement result GNDint should be connected to a suitable external low-impedance potential, taking account the specifications for UCM.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
565
Mounting and wiring
8.10 LED indicators - meanings
Fig. 263: LEDs of ELM terminals
LED RUN
Color green
Meaning off flashing
single flash
on
flickering
State of the EtherCAT State Machine [} 528]: INIT = initialization of the terminal
State of the EtherCAT State Machine: PREOP = function for mailbox communication and different standard-settings set State of the EtherCAT State Machine: SAFEOP = check the channels of the Sync Manager [} 518] and the Distributed Clocks [} 535] (if supported)
State of the EtherCAT State Machine: OP = normal operating state; mailbox and process data communication is possible
State of the EtherCAT State Machine: BOOTSTRAP = function for firmware updates [} 581] of the terminal
LED
OK (1...n)
Color green rot
Meaning No error Error display, along with error bit in the status, for
· Measuring range error (not for underrange/overrange!)
· Set measuring type is not calibrated (see CoE object 0x80nF PAI Vendor Calibration Data [} 316])
· Processor overload (see CoE object 0xF900 PAI Info Data)
· ADC in "saturation"
· Analog circuit "in overload", over voltage detected at inputs; see section "StartUp what is the action for..." and notes in section "Common technical data" [} 17].
flashing off
· Oversampling Error in Synchron Mode Active selftest of terminal; see chapter ELM Features/ Self-test and self-test report No operation
566
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Mounting and wiring
8.11 Power contacts ELM314x
The power contacts (looped through, usually 24V/ 0V) are connected to the terminal points of the ELM314x for sensor supply as follows:
Fig. 264: Connections of the power contacts of the ELM314x
Table:
Terminal Connector 24 V / UP+ 0 V / UP-
ELM3142-0000 X001, X002 Terminal point 3 Terminal point 4
ELM3144-0000 X001..X004 Terminal point 3 Terminal point 4
ELM3146-0000 X003, X004 Terminal points 1, 3, 5 Terminal points 2, 4, 6
ELM3148-0000 X001..X004 Terminal point 5 Terminal point 6
NOTE The electrical power to be taken from the terminal points depends on the lowest value of the following factors:
· electrical continuous load of the power contacts in the terminal wheeling: 10 A · electrical continuous load of the terminal point, see section "Housing/ Housing data" [} 537] · capacity of the feeding coupler/ power feed terminal to the power contacts · permissible maximum outgoing cumulative current of the contacts each ELM314x: 2 A
NOTE
Switchable connection AGND/UP-
The internal signal ground AGND can be switched to the negative power contact UP- via Firmware (CoE directory of the terminal), see chapter "Switchable AGND".
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
567
Appendix
9
Appendix
9.1
Diagnostics basic principles of diag messages
DiagMessages designates a system for the transmission of messages from the EtherCAT Slave to the EtherCAT Master/TwinCAT. The messages are stored by the device in its own CoE under 0x10F3 and can be read by the application or the System Manager. An error message referenced via a code is output for each event stored in the device (warning, error, status change).
Definition
The DiagMessages system is defined in the ETG (EtherCAT Technology Group) in the guideline ETG.1020, chapter 13 "Diagnosis handling". It is used so that pre-defined or flexible diagnostic messages can be conveyed from the EtherCAT Slave to the Master. In accordance with the ETG, the process can therefore be implemented supplier-independently. Support is optional. The firmware can store up to 250 DiagMessages in its own CoE.
Each DiagMessage consists of
· Diag Code (4-byte) · Flags (2-byte; info, warning or error) · Text ID (2-byte; reference to explanatory text from the ESI/XML) · Timestamp (8-byte, local slave time or 64-bit Distributed Clock time, if available) · Dynamic parameters added by the firmware
The DiagMessages are explained in text form in the ESI/XML file belonging to the EtherCAT device: on the basis of the Text ID contained in the DiagMessage, the corresponding plain text message can be found in the languages contained in the ESI/XML. In the case of Beckhoff products these are usually German and English.
Via the entry NewMessagesAvailable the user receives information that new messages are available.
DiagMessages can be confirmed in the device: the last/latest unconfirmed message can be confirmed by the user.
In the CoE both the control entries and the history itself can be found in the CoE object 0x10F3:
Fig. 265: DiagMessages in the CoE The subindex of the latest DiagMessage can be read under 0x10F3:02.
568
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Support for commissioning
The DiagMessages system is to be used above all during the commissioning of the plant. The diagnostic values e.g. in the StatusWord of the device (if available) are helpful for online diagnosis during the subsequent continuous operation.
TwinCAT System Manager implementation From TwinCAT 2.11 DiagMessages, if available, are displayed in the device's own interface. Operation (collection, confirmation) also takes place via this interface.
Fig. 266: Implementation of the DiagMessage system in the TwinCAT System Manager
The operating buttons (B) and the history read out (C) can be seen on the Diag History tab (A). The components of the message:
· Info/Warning/Error · Acknowledge flag (N = unconfirmed, Q = confirmed) · Time stamp · Text ID · Plain text message according to ESI/XML data
The meanings of the buttons are self-explanatory.
DiagMessages within the ADS Logger/Eventlogger
Since TwinCAT 3.1 build 4022 DiagMessages send by the terminal are shown by the TwinCAT ADS Logger. Given that DiagMessages are represented IO- comprehensive at one place, commissioning will be simplified. In addition, the logger output could be stored into a data file hence DiagMessages are available long-term for analysis.
DiagMessages are actually only available locally in CoE 0x10F3 in the terminal and can be read out manually if required, e.g. via the DiagHistory mentioned above.
In the latest developments, the EtherCAT Terminals are set by default to report the presence of a DiagMessage as emergency via EtherCAT; the event logger can then retrieve the DiagMessage. The function is activated in the terminal via 0x10F3:05, so such terminals have the following entry in the StartUp list by default:
Fig. 267: Startup List
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
569
Appendix
If the function is to be deactivated because, for example, many messages come in or the EventLogger is not used, the StartUp entry can be deleted or set to 0.
Reading messages into the PLC - In preparation -
Interpretation
Time stamp
The time stamp is obtained from the local clock of the terminal at the time of the event. The time is usually the distributed clock time (DC) from register x910.
Please note: When EtherCAT is started, the DC time in the reference clock is set to the same time as the local IPC/TwinCAT time. From this moment the DC time may differ from the IPC time, since the IPC time is not adjusted. Significant time differences may develop after several weeks of operation without a EtherCAT restart. As a remedy, external synchronization of the DC time can be used, or a manual correction calculation can be applied, as required: The current DC time can be determined via the EtherCAT master or from register x901 of the DC slave.
Structure of the Text ID
The structure of the MessageID is not subject to any standardization and can be supplier-specifically defined. In the case of Beckhoff EtherCAT devices (EL, EP) it usually reads according to xyzz:
x
0: Systeminfo 2: reserved 1: Info 4: Warning 8: Error
y
0: System 1: General 2: Communication 3: Encoder 4: Drive 5: Inputs 6: I/O general 7: reserved
zz Error number
Example: Message 0x4413 --> Drive Warning Number 0x13
Overview of text IDs
Specific text IDs are listed in the device documentation.
Text ID 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003
Type Information Information Information
Place System System System
0x1000 Information System
0x1012 Information System
0x1021 Information System
0x1024 Information System
0x1042 Information System
0x1048 Information System
0x1084 Information System
0x1100 Information General
Text Message
Additional comment
No error
No error
Communication established
Connection established
Initialization: 0x%X, 0x%X, 0x%X General information; parameters depend on event. See device documentation for interpretation.
Information: 0x%X, 0x%X, 0x%X General information; parameters depend on event. See device documentation for interpretation.
EtherCAT state change Init PreOp
EtherCAT state change PreOp Init
EtherCAT state change PreOp Safe-Op
EtherCAT state change SafeOp PreOp
EtherCAT state change SafeOp Op
EtherCAT state change Op SafeOp
Detection of operation mode com- Detection of the mode of operation ended pleted: 0x%X, %d
570
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Text ID 0x1135 0x1157
0x1158
0x1159
0x117F 0x1201
0x1300 0x1303 0x1304
0x1305
0x1400 0x1401 0x1705
0x1706
0x1707
0x170A 0x170C 0x170D
Type Information Information
Information
Information
Information Information
Information Information Information
Information
Information Information Information
Information
Information
Information Information Information
Place
Text Message
Additional comment
General
Cycle time o.k.: %d
Cycle time OK
General
Data manually saved (Idx: 0x%X, Data saved manually SubIdx: 0x%X)
General
Data automatically saved (Idx: 0x Data saved automatically %X, SubIdx: 0x%X)
General
Data deleted (Idx: 0x%X, SubIdx: Data deleted 0x%X)
General
Information: 0x%X, 0x%X, 0x%X Information
Communication Communication re-established
Communication to the field side restored This message appears, for example, if the voltage was removed from the power contacts and re-applied during operation.
Encoder
Position set: %d, %d
Position set - StartInputhandler
Encoder
Encoder Supply ok
Encoder power supply unit OK
Encoder
Encoder initialization successfully, channel: %X
Encoder initialization successfully completed
Encoder
Sent command encoder reset, channel: %X
Send encoder reset command
Drive
Drive is calibrated: %d, %d
Drive is calibrated
Drive
Actual drive state: 0x%X, %d
Current drive status
CPU usage returns in normal range (< 85%%)
Processor load is back in the normal range
Channel is not in saturation any- Channel is no longer in saturation more
Channel is not in overload any- Channel is no longer overloaded more
No channel range error anymore A measuring range error is no longer active
Calibration data saved
Calibration data were saved
Calibration data will be applied Calibration data are not applied and saved until the and saved after sending the com- command "0x5AFE" is sent. mand "0x5AFE"
Text ID 0x2000 0x2001 0x2002 0x2003
Type Information Information Information Information
Place System System System System
0x2004 Information System
0x2005 0x2006
Information Information
System System
0x2007 0x2008 0x2009
Information Information Information
System System System
Text Message
%s: %s
%s: Network link lost
%s: Network link detected
%s: no valid IP Configuration Dhcp client started
%s: valid IP Configuration (IP: %d.%d.%d.%d) assigned by Dhcp server %d.%d.%d.%d
%s: Dhcp client timed out
%s: Duplicate IP Address detected (%d.%d.%d.%d)
%s: UDP handler initialized
%s: TCP handler initialized
%s: No more free TCP sockets available
Additional comment
Network connection lost Network connection found Invalid IP configuration
Valid IP configuration, assigned by the DHCP server
DHCP client timeout Duplicate IP address found
UDP handler initialized TCP handler initialized No free TCP sockets available.
Text ID Type 0x4000 Warning
0x4001 0x4002
Warning Warning
Place
System System
0x4003 Warning
System
0x4004 Warning
System
Text Message
Additional comment
Warning: 0x%X, 0x%X, 0x%X
General warning; parameters depend on event. See device documentation for interpretation.
Warning: 0x%X, 0x%X, 0x%X
%s: %s Connection Open (IN:%d OUT:%d API:%dms) from %d. %d.%d.%d successful
%s: %s Connection Close (IN:%d OUT:%d) from %d.%d.%d.%d successful
%s: %s Connection (IN:%d OUT: %d) with %d.%d.%d.%d timed out
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
571
Appendix
Text ID Type 0x4005 Warning
Place System
0x4006 Warning
System
0x4007 Warning
System
0x4008 Warning
System
0x4101 Warning 0x4102 Warning
General General
0x417F 0x428D 0x4300
Warning Warning Warning
0x4301 0x4302
Warning Warning
General General Encoder
Encoder Encoder
0x4303 Warning
Encoder
0x4304 Warning
Encoder
0x4400 0x4401
Warning Warning
0x4402 0x4405 0x4410 0x4411
Warning Warning Warning Warning
Drive Drive
Drive Drive Drive Drive
0x4412 Warning
Drive
0x4413 Warning
Drive
0x4414 Warning
Drive
0x4415 Warning
Drive
0x4416 Warning
0x4417 Warning
0x4418 0x4419
Warning Warning
Drive
Drive
Drive Drive
Text Message
Additional comment
%s: %s Connection Open (IN:%d OUT:%d) from %d.%d.%d.%d denied (Error: %u)
%s: %s Connection Open (IN:%d OUT:%d) from %d.%d.%d.%d denied (Input Data Size expected: %d Byte(s) received: %d Byte(s))
%s: %s Connection Open (IN:%d OUT:%d) from %d.%d.%d.%d denied (Output Data Size expected: %d Byte(s) received: %d Byte(s))
%s: %s Connection Open (IN:%d OUT:%d) from %d.%d.%d.%d denied (RPI:%dms not supported -> API:%dms)
Terminal-Overtemperature
Overtemperature. The internal temperature of the terminal exceeds the parameterized warning threshold.
Discrepancy in the PDO-Configu- The selected PDOs do not match the set operating
ration
mode.
Sample: Drive operates in velocity mode, but the velocity PDO is but not mapped in the PDOs.
Warning: 0x%X, 0x%X, 0x%X
Challenge is not Random
Subincrements deactivated: %d, Sub-increments deactivated (despite activated configu-
%d
ration)
Encoder-Warning
General encoder error
Maximum frequency of the input signal is nearly reached (channel %d)
Limit counter value was reduced because of the PDO configuration (channel %d)
Reset counter value was reduced because of the PDO configuration (channel %d)
Drive is not calibrated: %d, %d Drive is not calibrated
Starttype not supported: 0x%X, Start type is not supported %d
Command rejected: %d, %d
Command rejected
Invalid modulo subtype: %d, %d Modulo sub-type invalid
Target overrun: %d, %d
Target position exceeded
DC-Link undervoltage (Warning) The DC link voltage of the terminal is lower than the parameterized minimum voltage. Activation of the output stage is prevented.
DC-Link overvoltage (Warning)
The DC link voltage of the terminal is higher than the parameterized maximum voltage. Activation of the output stage is prevented.
I2T-Model Amplifier overload (Warning)
· The amplifier is being operated outside the specification.
· The I2T-model of the amplifier is incorrectly parameterized.
I2T-Model Motor overload (Warning)
· The motor is being operated outside the parameterized rated values.
· The I2T-model of the motor is incorrectly parameterized.
Speed limitation active
The maximum speed is limited by the parameterized objects (e.g. velocity limitation, motor speed limitation). This warning is output if the set velocity is higher than one of the parameterized limits.
Step lost detected at position: 0x Step loss detected %X%X
Motor overtemperature
The internal temperature of the motor exceeds the parameterized warning threshold
Limit: Current
Limit: current is limited
Limit: Amplifier I2T-model exceeds 100%%
The threshold values for the maximum current were exceeded.
572
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Text ID Type 0x441A Warning
0x441B Warning
0x441C Warning
0x4600 0x4610 0x4705 0x470A
Warning Warning Warning Warning
Text ID 0x8000 0x8001
Type Error Error
0x8002 0x8003
Error Error
0x8004 Error
0x8005 Error 0x8006 Error
0x8007 Error
0x8100 0x8101
Error Error
0x8102 Error
0x8103 0x8104
Error Error
0x8105 Error
0x8135 Error
0x8136 Error
0x8137 0x8140 0x8141 0x8142 0x8143 0x817F 0x8200 0x8201
Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error
0x8281 0x8282
Error Error
Place Drive
Drive
Drive
General IO General IO
Text Message
Additional comment
Limit: Motor I2T-model exceeds Limit: Motor I2T-model exceeds 100% 100%%
Limit: Velocity limitation
The threshold values for the maximum speed were exceeded.
STO while the axis was enabled An attempt was made to activate the axis, despite the fact that no voltage is present at the STO input.
Wrong supply voltage range
Supply voltage not in the correct range
Wrong output voltage range
Output voltage not in the correct range
Processor usage at %d %%
Processor load at %d %%
EtherCAT Frame missed (change EtherCAT frame missed (change DC Operation Mode Settings or DC Operation Mode or Sync0 Shift Time under Settings) or Sync0 Shift Time)
Place
Text Message
Additional comment
System
%s: %s
System
Error: 0x%X, 0x%X, 0x%X
General error; parameters depend on event. See device documentation for interpretation.
System
Communication aborted
Communication aborted
System
Configuration error: 0x%X, 0x%X, General; parameters depend on event.
0x%X
See device documentation for interpretation.
System
%s: Unsuccessful FwdOpen-Response received from %d.%d.%d. %d (%s) (Error: %u)
System
%s: FwdClose-Request sent to %d.%d.%d.%d (%s)
System
%s: Unsuccessful FwdClose-Response received from %d.%d.%d. %d (%s) (Error: %u)
System
%s: Connection with %d.%d.%d. %d (%s) closed
General
Status word set: 0x%X, %d
Error bit set in the status word
General
Operation mode incompatible to Mode of operation incompatible with the PDO interface PDO interface: 0x%X, %d
General
Invalid combination of Inputs and Invalid combination of input and output PDOs Outputs PDOs
General
No variable linkage
No variables linked
General
Terminal-Overtemperature
The internal temperature of the terminal exceeds the parameterized error threshold. Activation of the terminal is prevented
General
PD-Watchdog
Communication between the fieldbus and the output stage is secured by a Watchdog. The axis is stopped automatically if the fieldbus communication is interrupted.
· The EtherCAT connection was interrupted during operation.
· The Master was switched to Config mode during operation.
General
Cycle time has to be a multiple of The IO or NC cycle time divided by 125 µs does not
125 µs
produce a whole number.
General
Configuration error: invalid sam- Configuration error: Invalid sampling rate pling rate
General
Electronic type plate: CRC error Content of the external name plate memory invalid.
General
Sync Error
Real-time violation
General
Sync%X Interrupt lost
Sync%X Interrupt lost
General
Sync Interrupt asynchronous
Sync Interrupt asynchronous
General
Jitter too big
Jitter limit violation
General
Error: 0x%X, 0x%X, 0x%X
Communication Write access error: %d, %d
Error while writing
Communication No communication to field-side (Auxiliary voltage missing)
· There is no voltage applied to the power contacts.
· A firmware update has failed.
Communication Ownership failed: %X
Communication To many Keys founded
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
573
Appendix
Text ID 0x8283 0x8284 0x8285 0x8286 0x8287 0x8288 0x8289
Type Error Error Error Error Error Error Error
0x828A 0x828B 0x828C 0x82FF 0x8300 0x8301
Error Error Error Error Error Error
0x8302 0x8303
Error Error
0x8304 Error
0x8305 Error
0x8306 Error
0x8307 Error
0x8308 Error
0x8309 Error 0x830A Error
0x830C Error
0x830D Error
0x8310 0x8311
Error Error
0x8312 Error
0x8313 0x8314 0x8315 0x8400
Error Error Error Error
0x8401 Error
0x8402 Error
0x8403 0x8404 0x8405 0x8406
Error Error Error Error
0x8407 Error
0x8408 Error
574
Place
Text Message
Additional comment
Communication Key Creation failed: %X
Communication Key loading failed
Communication Reading Public Key failed: %X
Communication Reading Public EK failed: %X
Communication Reading PCR Value failed: %X
Communication Reading Certificate EK failed: %X
Communication Challenge could not be hashed: %X
Communication Tickstamp Process failed
Communication PCR Process failed: %X
Communication Quote Process failed: %X
Communication Bootmode not activated
Boot mode not activated
Encoder
Set position error: 0x%X, %d
Error while setting the position
Encoder
Encoder increments not config- Encoder increments not configured ured: 0x%X, %d
Encoder
Encoder error
The amplitude of the resolver is too small
Encoder
Encoder power missing (channel %d)
Encoder
Encoder communication error, channel: %X
Encoder communication error
Encoder
EnDat2.2 is not supported, chan- EnDat2.2 is not supported nel: %X
Encoder
Delay time, tolerance limit exceeded, 0x%X, channel: %X
Runtime measurement, tolerance exceeded
Encoder
Delay time, maximum value ex- Runtime measurement, maximum value exceeded ceeded, 0x%X, channel: %X
Encoder
Unsupported ordering designa- Wrong EnDat order ID tion, 0x%X, channel: %X (only 02 and 22 is supported)
Encoder
Encoder CRC error, channel: %X Encoder CRC error
Encoder
Temperature %X could not be read, channel: %X
Temperature cannot be read
Encoder
Encoder Single-Cycle-Data Error, CRC error detected. Check the transmission path and
channel. %X
the CRC polynomial
Encoder
Encoder Watchdog Error, chan- The sensor has not responded within a predefined time
nel. %X
period
Encoder
Initialisation error
Encoder
Maximum frequency of the input signal is exceeded (channel %d)
Encoder
Encoder plausibility error (channel %d)
Encoder
Configuration error (channel %d)
Encoder
Synchronisation error
Encoder
Error status input (channel %d)
Drive
Incorrect drive configuration: 0x Drive incorrectly configured %X, %d
Drive
Limiting of calibration velocity: %d, %d
Limitation of the calibration velocity
Drive
Emergency stop activated: 0x%X, Emergency stop activated %d
Drive
ADC Error
Error during current measurement in the ADC
Drive
Overcurrent
Overcurrent in phase U, V or W
Drive
Invalid modulo position: %d
Modulo position invalid
Drive
DC-Link undervoltage (Error)
The DC link voltage of the terminal is lower than the parameterized minimum voltage. Activation of the output stage is prevented.
Drive
DC-Link overvoltage (Error)
The DC link voltage of the terminal is higher than the parameterized maximum voltage. Activation of the output stage is prevented.
Drive
I2T-Model Amplifier overload (Error)
· The amplifier is being operated outside the specification.
· The I2T-model of the amplifier is incorrectly parameterized.
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Text ID Type 0x8409 Error
Place Drive
0x840A Error
0x8415 0x8416
Error Error
Drive
Drive Drive
0x8417 Error
Drive
0x841C Error
Drive
0x8550 0x8551 0x8552 0x8553 0x8581 0x8600 0x8601 0x8602 0x8603 0x8610 0x8611 0x8612 0x8613 0x8700 0x8701 0x8702
Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error
Inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs General IO General IO General IO General IO General IO General IO General IO General IO
0x8703 0x8704
Error Error
0x8705 Error
0x8706 0x8707 0x8708 0x8709 0x870A 0x870B 0xFFFF
Error Error Error Error Error Error Information
Text Message
Additional comment
I2T-Model motor overload (Error)
· The motor is being operated outside the parameterized rated values.
· The I2T-model of the motor is incorrectly parameterized.
Overall current threshold exceeded
Total current exceeded
Invalid modulo factor: %d
Modulo factor invalid
Motor overtemperature
The internal temperature of the motor exceeds the parameterized error threshold. The motor stops immediately. Activation of the output stage is prevented.
Maximum rotating field velocity Rotary field speed exceeds the value specified for dual
exceeded
use (EU 1382/2014).
STO while the axis was enabled An attempt was made to activate the axis, despite the fact that no voltage is present at the STO input.
Zero crossing phase %X missing Zero crossing phase %X missing
Phase sequence Error
Wrong direction of rotation
Overcurrent phase %X
Overcurrent phase %X
Overcurrent neutral wire
Overcurrent neutral wire
Wire broken Ch %D
Wire broken Ch %d
Wrong supply voltage range
Supply voltage not in the correct range
Supply voltage to low
Supply voltage too low
Supply voltage to high
Supply voltage too high
Over current of supply voltage Overcurrent of supply voltage
Wrong output voltage range
Output voltage not in the correct range
Output voltage to low
Output voltage too low
Output voltage to high
Output voltage too high
Over current of output voltage Overcurrent of output voltage
Channel/Interface not calibrated Channel/interface not synchronized
Operating time was manipulated Operating time was manipulated
Oversampling setting is not possi- Oversampling setting not possible ble
No slave controller found
No slave controller found
Slave controller is not in Bootstrap
Slave controller is not in bootstrap
Processor usage to high (>= 100%%)
Processor load too high (>= 100%%)
Channel in saturation
Channel in saturation
Channel overload
Channel overload
Overloadtime was manipulated Overload time was manipulated
Saturationtime was manipulated Saturation time was manipulated
Channel range error
Measuring range error for the channel
no ADC clock
No ADC clock available
Debug: 0x%X, 0x%X, 0x%X
Debug: 0x%X, 0x%X, 0x%X
9.2
TcEventLogger and IO
The TwinCAT 3 EventLogger provides an interface for the exchange of messages between TwinCAT components and non-TwinCAT components.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
575
Appendix
Fig. 268: Schematic representation TCEventLogger
Refer to the explanations in the TwinCAT EventLogger documentation, e.g. in the Beckhoff InfoSys https:// infosys.beckhoff.com/ TwinCAT 3 TE1000 XAE Technologies EventLogger.
The EventLogger saves to a local database under ..\TwinCAT\3.1\Boot\LoggedEvents.db and, unlike the VisualStudio Error Window, is designed for continuous recording.
IO devices can also be a source of messages. If so-called DiagMessages are generated in the IO device, they can be collected by TwinCAT over EtherCAT and displayed in the TcEventLogger with the appropriate device setting. This facilitates the central management of events that hinder operation, as a textual diagnosis no longer needs to be programmed out in the application for each individual IO device. The messages/ events can be displayed directly in the TwinCAT HMI, for example, and thus facilitate the diagnosis.
Notes: · This feature is supported from TwinCAT 3.1 build 4022.16. · TwinCAT may be in the RUN or CONFIG mode · On the manufacturer side, the IO device regarded must (1) generate local DiagMessages and (2) be fundamentally capable of transmitting them as events over EtherCAT. This is not the case with all EtherCAT IO devices/terminals/boxes from Beckhoff.
The messages managed by the EventLogger can be output in or read from · the HMI EventGrid · C# · the PLC · TwinCAT Engineering Logged Events
The use of the EventLogger with EtherCAT IO with TwinCAT 3.1 build 4022.22 during commissioning is explained below.
· The EventLogger window may need to be displayed in the TwinCAT Engineering
576
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Fig. 269: Display EventLogger window
· Some DiagMessages and the resulting Logged Events are shown below, taking an ELM3602-0002 as an example
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
577
Appendix
Fig. 270: Display DiagMessages and Logged Events · Filtering by entries and language is possible in the Logger window. German: 1031 English: 1033
Fig. 271: Setting filter language · If an EtherCAT slave is enabled by default to transmit DiagMessages as events over EtherCAT, this can be activated/deactivated for each individual slave in the CoE 0x10F3:05. TRUE means that the slave provides events for collection via EtherCAT, while FALSE deactivates the function.
578
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Fig. 272: Activating/deactivating event transmission · In the respective EtherCAT slave, various "causes" can lead to it transmitting DiagMessages or events. If only some of these are to be generated, you can read in the device documentation whether and how individual causes can be deactivated, e.g. through CoE settings. · Settings for the TwinCAT EventLogger can be found under Tools/Options
Fig. 273: Settings TwinCAT EventLogger
9.3
UL notice
Application
Beckhoff EtherCAT modules are intended for use with Beckhoff's UL Listed EtherCAT System only.
Examination
For cULus examination, the Beckhoff I/O System has only been investigated for risk of fire and electrical shock (in accordance with UL508 and CSA C22.2 No. 142).
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
579
Appendix
For devices with Ethernet connectors
Not for connection to telecommunication circuits.
Basic principles UL certification according to UL508. Devices with this kind of certification are marked by this sign:
580
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
9.4
Continuative documentation for ATEX and IECEx
Continuative documentation about explosion protection according to ATEX and IECEx
Pay also attention to the continuative documentation
Notes on the use of the Beckhoff terminal systems in hazardous areas according to ATEX and IECEx
that is available for download on the Beckhoff homepage https:\\www.beckhoff.com!
9.5
EtherCAT AL Status Codes
For detailed information please refer to the EtherCAT system description.
9.6
Firmware Update EL/ES/EM/ELM/EPxxxx
This section describes the device update for Beckhoff EtherCAT slaves from the EL/ES, ELM, EM, EK and EP series. A firmware update should only be carried out after consultation with Beckhoff support.
NOTE
Only use TwinCAT 3 software!
A firmware update of Beckhoff IO devices must only be performed with a TwinCAT 3 installation. It is recommended to build as up-to-date as possible, available for free download on the Beckhoff website https:// www.beckhoff.com/en-us/.
To update the firmware, TwinCAT can be operated in the so-called FreeRun mode, a paid license is not required.
The device to be updated can usually remain in the installation location, but TwinCAT has to be operated in the FreeRun. Please make sure that EtherCAT communication is trouble-free (no LostFrames etc.).
Other EtherCAT master software, such as the EtherCAT Configurator, should not be used, as they may not support the complexities of updating firmware, EEPROM and other device components.
Storage locations
An EtherCAT slave stores operating data in up to three locations:
· Depending on functionality and performance EtherCAT slaves have one or several local controllers for processing I/O data. The corresponding program is the so-called firmware in *.efw format.
· In some EtherCAT slaves the EtherCAT communication may also be integrated in these controllers. In this case the controller is usually a so-called FPGA chip with *.rbf firmware.
· In addition, each EtherCAT slave has a memory chip, a so-called ESI-EEPROM, for storing its own device description (ESI: EtherCAT Slave Information). On power-up this description is loaded and the EtherCAT communication is set up accordingly. The device description is available from the download area of the Beckhoff website at (https://www.beckhoff.com). All ESI files are accessible there as zip files.
Customers can access the data via the EtherCAT fieldbus and its communication mechanisms. Acyclic mailbox communication or register access to the ESC is used for updating or reading of these data.
The TwinCAT System Manager offers mechanisms for programming all three parts with new data, if the slave is set up for this purpose. Generally the slave does not check whether the new data are suitable, i.e. it may no longer be able to operate if the data are unsuitable.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
581
Appendix
Simplified update by bundle firmware
The update using so-called bundle firmware is more convenient: in this case the controller firmware and the ESI description are combined in a *.efw file; during the update both the firmware and the ESI are changed in the terminal. For this to happen it is necessary
· for the firmware to be in a packed format: recognizable by the file name, which also contains the revision number, e.g. ELxxxx-xxxx_REV0016_SW01.efw
· for password=1 to be entered in the download dialog. If password=0 (default setting) only the firmware update is carried out, without an ESI update.
· for the device to support this function. The function usually cannot be retrofitted; it is a component of many new developments from year of manufacture 2016.
Following the update, its success should be verified · ESI/Revision: e.g. by means of an online scan in TwinCAT ConfigMode/FreeRun this is a convenient way to determine the revision · Firmware: e.g. by looking in the online CoE of the device
NOTE Risk of damage to the device!
ü Note the following when downloading new device files a) Firmware downloads to an EtherCAT device must not be interrupted b) Flawless EtherCAT communication must be ensured. CRC errors or LostFrames must be avoided. c) The power supply must adequately dimensioned. The signal level must meet the specification. ð In the event of malfunctions during the update process the EtherCAT device may become unusable and
require re-commissioning by the manufacturer.
9.6.1 Device description ESI file/XML
NOTE Attention regarding update of the ESI description/EEPROM
Some slaves have stored calibration and configuration data from the production in the EEPROM. These are irretrievably overwritten during an update.
The ESI device description is stored locally on the slave and loaded on start-up. Each device description has a unique identifier consisting of slave name (9 characters/digits) and a revision number (4 digits). Each slave configured in the System Manager shows its identifier in the EtherCAT tab:
Fig. 274: Device identifier consisting of name EL3204-0000 and revision -0016
582
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
The configured identifier must be compatible with the actual device description used as hardware, i.e. the description which the slave has loaded on start-up (in this case EL3204). Normally the configured revision must be the same or lower than that actually present in the terminal network.
For further information on this, please refer to the EtherCAT system documentation.
Update of XML/ESI description
The device revision is closely linked to the firmware and hardware used. Incompatible combinations lead to malfunctions or even final shutdown of the device. Corresponding updates should only be carried out in consultation with Beckhoff support.
Display of ESI slave identifier
The simplest way to ascertain compliance of configured and actual device description is to scan the EtherCAT boxes in TwinCAT mode Config/FreeRun:
Fig. 275: Scan the subordinate field by right-clicking on the EtherCAT device If the found field matches the configured field, the display shows
Fig. 276: Configuration is identical otherwise a change dialog appears for entering the actual data in the configuration.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
583
Appendix
Fig. 277: Change dialog
In this example in Fig. Change dialog, an EL3201-0000-0017 was found, while an EL3201-0000-0016 was configured. In this case the configuration can be adapted with the Copy Before button. The Extended Information checkbox must be set in order to display the revision.
Changing the ESI slave identifier
The ESI/EEPROM identifier can be updated as follows under TwinCAT: · Trouble-free EtherCAT communication must be established with the slave. · The state of the slave is irrelevant. · Right-clicking on the slave in the online display opens the EEPROM Update dialog, Fig. EEPROM Update
Fig. 278: EEPROM Update
The new ESI description is selected in the following dialog, see Fig. Selecting the new ESI. The checkbox Show Hidden Devices also displays older, normally hidden versions of a slave.
584
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Fig. 279: Selecting the new ESI
A progress bar in the System Manager shows the progress. Data are first written, then verified.
The change only takes effect after a restart.
Most EtherCAT devices read a modified ESI description immediately or after startup from the INIT. Some communication settings such as distributed clocks are only read during power-on. The EtherCAT slave therefore has to be switched off briefly in order for the change to take effect.
9.6.2 Firmware explanation
Determining the firmware version
Determining the version on laser inscription
Beckhoff EtherCAT slaves feature serial numbers applied by laser. The serial number has the following structure: KK YY FF HH
KK - week of production (CW, calendar week) YY - year of production FF - firmware version HH - hardware version
Example with ser. no.: 12 10 03 02:
12 - week of production 12 10 - year of production 2010 03 - firmware version 03 02 - hardware version 02
Determining the version via the System Manager
The TwinCAT System Manager shows the version of the controller firmware if the master can access the slave online. Click on the E-Bus Terminal whose controller firmware you want to check (in the example terminal 2 (EL3204)) and select the tab CoE Online (CAN over EtherCAT).
CoE Online and Offline CoE
Two CoE directories are available: · online: This is offered in the EtherCAT slave by the controller, if the EtherCAT slave supports this. This CoE directory can only be displayed if a slave is connected and operational. · offline: The EtherCAT Slave Information ESI/XML may contain the default content of the CoE. This CoE directory can only be displayed if it is included in the ESI (e.g. "Beckhoff EL5xxx.xml"). The Advanced button must be used for switching between the two views.
In Fig. Display of EL3204 firmware version the firmware version of the selected EL3204 is shown as 03 in CoE entry 0x100A.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
585
Appendix
Fig. 280: Display of EL3204 firmware version In (A) TwinCAT 2.11 shows that the Online CoE directory is currently displayed. If this is not the case, the Online directory can be loaded via the Online option in Advanced Settings (B) and double-clicking on AllObjects.
9.6.3 Updating controller firmware *.efw
CoE directory
The Online CoE directory is managed by the controller and stored in a dedicated EEPROM, which is generally not changed during a firmware update. Switch to the Online tab to update the controller firmware of a slave, see Fig. Firmware Update.
586
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Fig. 281: Firmware Update Proceed as follows, unless instructed otherwise by Beckhoff support. Valid for TwinCAT 2 and 3 as EtherCAT master.
· Switch TwinCAT system to ConfigMode/FreeRun with cycle time >= 1 ms (default in ConfigMode is 4 ms). A FW-Update during real time operation is not recommended.
· Switch EtherCAT Master to PreOP
· Switch slave to INIT (A) · Switch slave to BOOTSTRAP
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
587
Appendix · Check the current status (B, C) · Download the new *efw file (wait until it ends). A pass word will not be neccessary usually.
· After the download switch to INIT, then PreOP · Switch off the slave briefly (don't pull under voltage!) · Check within CoE 0x100A, if the FW status was correctly overtaken.
9.6.4 FPGA firmware *.rbf
If an FPGA chip deals with the EtherCAT communication an update may be accomplished via an *.rbf file. · Controller firmware for processing I/O signals · FPGA firmware for EtherCAT communication (only for terminals with FPGA)
The firmware version number included in the terminal serial number contains both firmware components. If one of these firmware components is modified this version number is updated. Determining the version via the System Manager The TwinCAT System Manager indicates the FPGA firmware version. Click on the Ethernet card of your EtherCAT strand (Device 2 in the example) and select the Online tab. The Reg:0002 column indicates the firmware version of the individual EtherCAT devices in hexadecimal and decimal representation.
588
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Fig. 282: FPGA firmware version definition
If the column Reg:0002 is not displayed, right-click the table header and select Properties in the context menu.
Fig. 283: Context menu Properties
The Advanced Settings dialog appears where the columns to be displayed can be selected. Under Diagnosis/Online View select the '0002 ETxxxx Build' check box in order to activate the FPGA firmware version display.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
589
Appendix
Fig. 284: Dialog Advanced Settings Update For updating the FPGA firmware
· of an EtherCAT coupler the coupler must have FPGA firmware version 11 or higher; · of an E-Bus Terminal the terminal must have FPGA firmware version 10 or higher. Older firmware versions can only be updated by the manufacturer! Updating an EtherCAT device The following sequence order have to be met if no other specifications are given (e.g. by the Beckhoff support): · Switch TwinCAT system to ConfigMode/FreeRun with cycle time >= 1 ms (default in ConfigMode is
4 ms). A FW-Update during real time operation is not recommended.
590
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
· In the TwinCAT System Manager select the terminal for which the FPGA firmware is to be updated (in the example: Terminal 5: EL5001) and click the Advanced Settings button in the EtherCAT tab:
· The Advanced Settings dialog appears. Under ESC Access/E²PROM/FPGA click on Write FPGA button:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
591
Appendix · Select the file (*.rbf) with the new FPGA firmware, and transfer it to the EtherCAT device:
· Wait until download ends · Switch slave current less for a short time (don't pull under voltage!). In order to activate the new FPGA
firmware a restart (switching the power supply off and on again) of the EtherCAT device is required. · Check the new FPGA status
NOTE Risk of damage to the device!
A download of firmware to an EtherCAT device must not be interrupted in any case! If you interrupt this process by switching off power supply or disconnecting the Ethernet link, the EtherCAT device can only be recommissioned by the manufacturer!
9.6.5 Simultaneous updating of several EtherCAT devices
The firmware and ESI descriptions of several devices can be updated simultaneously, provided the devices have the same firmware file/ESI.
Fig. 285: Multiple selection and firmware update Select the required slaves and carry out the firmware update in BOOTSTRAP mode as described above.
592
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
9.7
Firmware compatibility
Beckhoff EtherCAT devices are delivered with the latest available firmware version. Compatibility of firmware and hardware is mandatory; not every combination ensures compatibility. The overview below shows the hardware versions on which a firmware can be operated.
Note
· It is recommended to use the newest possible firmware for the respective hardware.
· Beckhoff is not under any obligation to provide customers with free firmware updates for delivered products.
NOTE
Risk of damage to the device!
Pay attention to the instructions for firmware updates on the separate page [} 581]. If a device is placed in BOOTSTRAP mode for a firmware update, it does not check when downloading whether the new firmware is suitable. This can result in damage to the device! Therefore, always make sure that the firmware is suitable for the hardware version!
ELM3002 Hardware (HW) 00 03*
Firmware (FW) 01 02 03*
Revision no. 0016 0017 0017
Release date 2017/09 2018/04 2018/10
ELM3004 Hardware (HW) 00 04*
Firmware (FW) 01 02 03 04 05*
Revision no. 0016 0017 0017 0018 0018
Release date 2017/06 2017/10 2018/03 2018/08 2018/10
ELM3102 Hardware (HW) 00 03*
Firmware (FW) 01 02 03 04*
Revision no. 0016 0017 0017 0017
Release date 2017/09 2018/04 2018/10 2019/08
ELM3104 Hardware (HW) 00 04*
Firmware (FW) 01 02 03* 04*
Revision no. 0016 0017 0017 0017
Release date 2017/07 2018/04 2018/10 2019/08
ELM3142 Hardware (HW) 00
Firmware (FW) 01
Revision no. 0016
Release date
ELM3144 Hardware (HW) 00
Firmware (FW) 01
Revision no. 0016
Release date
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
593
Appendix
ELM3146 Hardware (HW) 00 ELM3148 Hardware (HW) 00 01 ELM3502 Hardware (HW) 00 02
00 03*
ELM3504 Hardware (HW) 00 03
00 - 04* ELM354x Hardware (HW) * ELM3602 Hardware (HW) 00 03*
ELM3604 Hardware (HW) 00 03*
ELM3702-0000 Hardware (HW) 00 ELM3704-0000 Hardware (HW) 00 ELM3704-0001 Hardware (HW) 00
594
Firmware (FW) 01
Revision no. 0016
Firmware (FW) 01 02
Revision no. 0016 0016
Firmware (FW) 01 02 03 04*
Revision no. 0016 0017 0018 0018
Firmware (FW) 01 02 03*
Revision no. 0016 0017 0018
Firmware (FW) 01
Revision no. 0016
Firmware (FW) 01 02 03 04 05*
Revision no. 0016 0016 0017 0017 0017
Firmware (FW) 01 02 03 04 05*
Revision no. 0016 0016 0017 0017 0017
Firmware (FW) 01
Revision no. 0016
Firmware (FW) 01
Revision no. 0016
Firmware (FW) 01
Revision no. 0016
Version: 2.6
Release date
Release date 2019/02
Release date 2018/07 2018/10 2019/05 2019/07
Release date 2018/07 2018/10 2019/07
Release date 2022
Release date 2018/01 2018/02 2018/04 2018/09 2019/01
Release date 2018/01 2018/03 2018/04 2018/09 2019/01
Release date
Release date
Release date
ELM3xxx
Appendix
*) This is the current compatible firmware/hardware version at the time of the preparing this documentation. Check on the Beckhoff web page whether more up-to-date documentation is available.
9.8
Firmware compatibility - passive terminals
The passive terminals ELxxxx terminal series have no firmware to update.
9.9
Restoring the delivery state
To restore the delivery state for backup objects in ELxxxx terminals, the CoE object Restore default parameters, SubIndex 001 can be selected in the TwinCAT System Manager (Config mode) (see Fig. Selecting the Restore default parameters PDO)
Fig. 286: Selecting the Restore default parameters PDO
Double-click on SubIndex 001 to enter the Set Value dialog. Enter the value 1684107116 in field Dec or the value 0x64616F6C in field Hex and confirm with OK (Fig. Entering a restore value in the Set Value dialog). All backup objects are reset to the delivery state.
Fig. 287: Entering a restore value in the Set Value dialog
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
595
Appendix
Alternative restore value
In some older terminals the backup objects can be switched with an alternative restore value: Decimal value: 1819238756, Hexadecimal value: 0x6C6F6164An incorrect entry for the restore value has no effect.
9.10 Notes on analog measured values
9.10.1 Notices on analog specifications
Beckhoff I/O devices (terminals, boxes, modules) with analog inputs are characterized by a number of technical characteristic data; refer to the technical data in the respective documents. Some explanations are given below for the correct interpretation of these characteristic data.
9.10.1.1 Full scale value (FSV)
An I/O device with an analog input measures over a nominal measuring range that is limited by an upper and a lower limit (initial value and end value); these can usually be taken from the device designation. The range between the two limits is called the measuring span and corresponds to the equation (end value initial value). Analogous to pointing devices this is the measuring scale (see IEC 61131) or also the dynamic range. For analog I/O devices from Beckhoff the rule is that the limit with the largest value is chosen as the full scale value of the respective product (also called the reference value) and is given a positive sign. This applies to both symmetrical and asymmetrical measuring spans.
Fig. 288: Full scale value, measuring span
For the above examples this means: · Measuring range 0...10 V: asymmetric unipolar, full scale value = 10 V, measuring span = 10 V · Measuring range 4...20 mA: asymmetric unipolar, full scale value = 20 mA, measuring span = 16 mA · Measuring range -200...1370°C: asymmetric bipolar, full scale value = 1370°C, measuring span = 1570°C · Measuring range -10...+10 V: symmetric bipolar, full scale value = 10 V, measuring span = 20 V
This applies to analog output terminals/ boxes (and related Beckhoff product groups).
9.10.1.2 Measuring error/ measurement deviation
The relative measuring error (% of the full scale value) is referenced to the full scale value and is calculated as the quotient of the largest numerical deviation from the true value (`measuring error') referenced to the full scale value.
596
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
The measuring error is generally valid for the entire permitted operating temperature range, also called the `usage error limit' and contains random and systematic portions of the referred device (i.e. `all' influences such as temperature, inherent noise, aging, etc.).
It is always to be regarded as a positive/negative span with ±, even if it is specified without ± in some cases.
The maximum deviation can also be specified directly.
Example: Measuring range 0...10 V and measuring error < ± 0.3 % full scale value maximum deviation ± 30 mV in the permissible operating temperature range.
Lower measuring error
Since this specification also includes the temperature drift, a significantly lower measuring error can usually be assumed in case of a constant ambient temperature of the device and thermal stabilization after a user calibration. This applies to analog output devices.
9.10.1.3 Temperature coefficient tK [ppm/K]
An electronic circuit is usually temperature dependent to a greater or lesser degree. In analog measurement technology this means that when a measured value is determined by means of an electronic circuit, its deviation from the "true" value is reproducibly dependent on the ambient/operating temperature.
A manufacturer can alleviate this by using components of a higher quality or by software means.
The temperature coefficient, when indicated, specified by Beckhoff allows the user to calculate the expected measuring error outside the basic accuracy at 23 °C.
Due to the extensive uncertainty considerations that are incorporated in the determination of the basic accuracy (at 23 °C), Beckhoff recommends a quadratic summation.
Example: Let the basic accuracy at 23 °C be ±0.01% typ. (full scale value), tK = 20 ppm/K typ.; the accuracy A35 at 35 °C is wanted, hence T = 12 K
Remarks: ppm 10-6
% 10-2
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
597
Appendix
9.10.1.4 Long-term use
Analog devices (inputs, outputs) are subject to constant environmental influences during operation (temperature, temperature change, shock/vibration, irradiation, etc.) This can affect the function, in particular the analog accuracy (also: measurement or output uncertainty). As industrial products, Beckhoff analog devices are designed for 24h/7d continuous operation. The devices show that they generally comply with the accuracy specification, even in long-term use. However, as is usual for technical devices, an unlimited functional assurance (also applies to accuracy) cannot be given. Beckhoff recommends checking the usability in relation to the application target within the scope of normal system maintenance, e.g. every 12-24 months.
9.10.1.5 Single-ended/differential typification
For analog inputs Beckhoff makes a basic distinction between two types: single-ended (SE) and differential (DIFF), referring to the difference in electrical connection with regard to the potential difference. The diagram shows two-channel versions of an SE module and a DIFF module as examples for all multichannel versions.
Fig. 289: SE and DIFF module as 2-channel version
Note: Dashed lines indicate that the respective connection may not necessarily be present in each SE or DIFF module. Electrical isolated channels are operating as differential type in general, hence there is no direct relation (voltaic) to ground within the module established at all. Indeed, specified information to recommended and maximum voltage levels have to be taken into account.
The basic rule:
· Analog measurements always take the form of voltage measurements between two potential points. For voltage measurements a large R is used, in order to ensure a high impedance. For current measurements a small R is used as shunt. If the purpose is resistance measurement, corresponding considerations are applied.
598
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Beckhoff generally refers to these two points as input+/signal potential and input-/reference potential.
For measurements between two potential points two potentials have to be supplied.
Regarding the terms "single-wire connection" or "three-wire connection", please note the following for pure analog measurements: three- or four-wire connections can be used for sensor supply, but are not involved in the actual analog measurement, which always takes place between two potentials/wires. In particular this also applies to SE, even though the term suggest that only one wire is required.
· The term "electrical isolation" should be clarified in advance. Beckhoff IO modules feature 1..8 or more analog channels; with regard to the channel connection a distinction is made in terms of:
how the channels WITHIN a module relate to each other, or
how the channels of SEVERAL modules relate to each other.
The property of electrical isolation indicates whether the channels are directly connected to each other.
Beckhoff terminals/ boxes (and related product groups) always feature electrical isolation between the field/analog side and the bus/EtherCAT side. In other words, if two analog terminals/ boxes are not connected via the power contacts (cable), the modules are effectively electrically isolated.
If channels within a module are electrically isolated, or if a single-channel module has no power contacts, the channels are effectively always differential. See also explanatory notes below. Differential channels are not necessarily electrically isolated.
· Analog measuring channels are subject to technical limits, both in terms of the recommended operating range (continuous operation) and the destruction limit. Please refer to the respective terminal/ box documentation for further details.
Explanation
· differential (DIFF)
Differential measurement is the most flexible concept. The user can freely choose both connection points, input+/signal potential and input-/reference potential, within the framework of the technical specification.
A differential channel can also be operated as SE, if the reference potential of several sensors is linked. This interconnection may take place via the system GND.
Since a differential channel is configured symmetrically internally (cf. Fig. SE and DIFF module as 2-channel variant), there will be a mid-potential (X) between the two supplied potentials that is the same as the internal ground/reference ground for this channel. If several DIFF channels are used in a module without electrical isolation, the technical property VCM (common-mode voltage) indicates the degree to which the mean voltage of the channels may differ.
The internal reference ground may be accessible as connection point at the terminal/ box, in order to stabilize a defined GND potential in the terminal/ box. In this case it is particularly important to pay attention to the quality of this potential (noiselessness, voltage stability). At this GND point a wire may be connected to make sure that VCM,max is not exceeded in the differential sensor cable. If differential channels are not electrically isolated, usually only one VCM, max is permitted. If the channels are electrically isolated this limit should not apply, and the channels voltages may differ up to the specified separation limit.
Differential measurement in combination with correct sensor wiring has the special advantage that any interference affecting the sensor cable (ideally the feed and return line are arranged side by side, so that interference signals have the same effect on both wires) has very little effect on the measurement, since the potential of both lines varies jointly (hence the term common mode). In simple terms: Common-mode interference has the same effect on both wires in terms of amplitude and phasing.
Nevertheless, the suppression of common-mode interference within a channel or between channels is subject to technical limits, which are specified in the technical data.
Further helpfully information on this topic can be found on the documentation page Configuration of 0/4..20 mA differential inputs (see documentation for the EL30xx terminals, for example).
· Single Ended (SE)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
599
Appendix
If the analog circuit is designed as SE, the input/reference wire is internally fixed to a certain potential that cannot be changed. This potential must be accessible from outside on at least one point for connecting the reference potential, e.g. via the power contacts (cable).
In other words, in situations with several channels SE offers users the option to avoid returning at least one of the two sensor cables to the terminal/ box (in contrast to DIFF). Instead, the reference wire can be consolidated at the sensors, e.g. in the system GND.
A disadvantage of this approach is that the separate feed and return line can result in voltage/ current variations, which a SE channel may no longer be able to handle. See common-mode interference. A VCM effect cannot occur, since the module channels are internally always 'hardwired' through the input/reference potential.
Typification of the 2/3/4-wire connection of current sensors
Current transducers/sensors/field devices (referred to in the following simply as `sensor') with the industrial 0/4-20 mA interface typically have internal transformation electronics for the physical measured variable (temperature, current, etc.) at the current control output. These internal electronics must be supplied with energy (voltage, current). The type of cable for this supply thus separates the sensors into self-supplied or externally supplied sensors:
Self-supplied sensors · The sensor draws the energy for its own operation via the sensor/signal cable + and -. So that enough energy is always available for the sensor's own operation and open-circuit detection is possible, a lower limit of 4 mA has been specified for the 4-20 mA interface; i.e. the sensor allows a minimum current of 4 mA and a maximum current of 20 mA to pass. · 2-wire connection see Fig. 2-wire connection, cf. IEC60381-1 · Such current transducers generally represent a current sink and thus like to sit between + and as a `variable load'. Refer also to the sensor manufacturer's information.
Fig. 290: 2-wire connection
Therefore, they are to be connected according to the Beckhoff terminology as follows:
preferably to `single-ended' inputs if the +Supply connections of the terminal/ box are also to be used connect to +Supply and Signal
they can, however, also be connected to `differential' inputs, if the termination to GND is then manufactured on the application side to be connected with the right polarity to +Signal and Signal It is important to refer to the information page Configuration of 0/4..20 mA differential inputs (see documentation for the EL30xx terminals, for example)!
Externally supplied sensors · 3- and 4-wire connection see Fig. Connection of externally supplied sensors, cf. IEC60381-1 · the sensor draws the energy/operating voltage for its own operation from two supply cables of its own. One or two further sensor cables are used for the signal transmission of the current loop: 1 sensor cable: according to the Beckhoff terminology such sensors are to be connected to `single-ended' inputs in 3 cables with +/-/Signal lines and if necessary FE/shield 2 sensor cables: for sensors with 4-wire connection based on +supply/-supply/+signal/-signal, check whether +signal can be connected to +supply or signal to supply.
600
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
- Yes: then you can connect accordingly to a Beckhoff `single-ended' input.
- No: the Beckhoff `differential' input for +Signal and Signal is to be selected; +Supply and Supply are to be connected via additional cables. It is important to refer to the information page Configuration of 0/4..20 mA differential inputs (see documentation for the EL30xx terminals, for example)!
Note: expert organizations such as NAMUR demand a usable measuring range <4 mA/>20 mA for error detection and adjustment, see also NAMUR NE043. The Beckhoff device documentation must be consulted in order to see whether the respective device supports such an extended signal range. Usually there is an internal diode existing within unipolar terminals/ boxes (and related product groups), in this case the polarity/direction of current have to be observed.
Fig. 291: Connection of externally supplied sensors
Classification of the Beckhoff terminals/ boxes - Beckhoff 0/4-20 mA terminals/ boxes (and related product groups) are available as differential and single-ended terminals/ boxes (and related product groups):
Single-ended
EL3x4x: 0-20 mA, EL3x5x: 4-20 mA; KL and related product groups exactly the same
Preferred current direction because of internal diode
Designed for the connection of externally-supplied sensors with a 3/4-wire connection
Designed for the connection of self-supplied sensors with a 2-wire connection
Differential
EL3x1x: 0-20 mA, EL3x2x: 4-20 mA; KL and related product groups exactly the same Preferred current direction because of internal diode The terminal/ box is a passive differential current measuring device; passive means that the sensor is not supplied with power.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
601
Appendix
Single-ended
Differential
Fig. 292: 2-, 3- and 4-wire connection at single-ended and differential inputs
602
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
9.10.1.6 Common-mode voltage and reference ground (based on differential inputs)
Common-mode voltage (Vcm) is defined as the average value of the voltages of the individual connections/ inputs and is measured/specified against reference ground.
Fig. 293: Common-mode voltage (Vcm)
The definition of the reference ground is important for the definition of the permitted common-mode voltage range and for measurement of the common-mode rejection ratio (CMRR) for differential inputs.
The reference ground is also the potential against which the input resistance and the input impedance for single-ended inputs or the common-mode resistance and the common-mode impedance for differential inputs is measured.
The reference ground is usually accessible at or near the terminal/ box, e.g. at the terminal contacts, power contacts (cable) or a mounting rail. Please refer to the documentation regarding positioning. The reference ground should be specified for the device under consideration.
For multi-channel terminals/ boxes with resistive (=direct, ohmic, galvanic) or capacitive connection between the channels, the reference ground should preferably be the symmetry point of all channels, taking into account the connection resistances.
Reference ground samples for Beckhoff IO devices:
1. Internal AGND fed out: EL3102/EL3112, resistive connection between the channels 2. 0V power contact: EL3104/EL3114, resistive connection between the channels and AGND; AGND
connected to 0V power contact with low-resistance 3. Earth or SGND (shield GND):
EL3174-0002: Channels have no resistive connection between each other, although they are capacitively coupled to SGND via leakage capacitors
EL3314: No internal ground fed out to the terminal points, although capacitive coupling to SGND
9.10.1.7 Dielectric strength
A distinction should be made between: · Dielectric strength (destruction limit): Exceedance can result in irreversible changes to the electronics Against a specified reference ground Differential · Recommended operating voltage range: If the range is exceeded, it can no longer be assumed that the system operates as specified Against a specified reference ground Differential
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
603
Appendix
Fig. 294: Recommended operating voltage range
The device documentation may contain particular specifications and timings, taking into account: · Self-heating · Rated voltage · Insulating strength · Edge steepness of the applied voltage or holding periods · Normative environment (e.g. PELV)
9.10.1.8 Temporal aspects of analog/digital conversion
The conversion of the constant electrical input signal to a value-discrete digital and machine-readable form takes place in the analog Beckhoff EL/KL/EP input modules with ADC (analog digital converter). Although different ADC technologies are in use, from a user perspective they all have a common characteristic: after the conversion a certain digital value is available in the controller for further processing. This digital value, the so-called analog process data, has a fixed temporal relationship with the "original parameter", i.e. the electrical input value. Therefore, corresponding temporal characteristic data can be determined and specified for Beckhoff analogue input devices.
This process involves several functional components, which act more or less strongly in every AI (analog input) module:
· the electrical input circuit · the analog/digital conversion · the digital further processing · the final provision of the process and diagnostic data for collection at the fieldbus (EtherCAT, Kbus,
etc.)
Fig. 295: Signal processing analog input Two aspects are crucial from a user perspective:
604
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
· "How often do I receive new values?", i.e. a sampling rate in terms of speed with regard to the device/ channel
· What delay does the (whole) AD conversion of the device/channel cause? I.e. the hardware and firmware components in its entirety. For technological reasons, the signal characteristics must be taken into account when determining this information: the run times through the system differ, depending on the signal frequency.
This is the "external" view of the "Beckhoff AI channel" system internally the signal delay in particular is composed of different components: hardware, amplifier, conversion itself, data transport and processing. Internally a higher sampling rate may be used (e.g. in the deltaSigma converters) than is offered "externally" from the user perspective. From a user perspective of the "Beckhoff AI channel" component this is usually irrelevant or is specified accordingly, if it is relevant for the function.
For Beckhoff AI devices the following specification parameters for the AI channel are available for the user from a temporal perspective:
1. Minimum conversion time [ms, µs]
This is the reciprocal value of the maximum sampling rate [sps, samples per second]: Indicates how often the analog channel makes a newly detected process data value available for collection by the fieldbus. Whether the fieldbus (EtherCAT, K-bus) fetches the value with the same speed (i.e. synchronous), or more quickly (if the AI channel operates in slow FreeRun mode) or more slowly (e.g. with oversampling), is then a question of the fieldbus setting and which modes the AI device supports. For EtherCAT devices the so-called toggle bit indicates (by toggling) for the diagnostic PDOs when a newly determined analog value is available. Accordingly, a maximum conversion time, i.e. a smallest sampling rate supported by the AI device, can be specified. Corresponds to IEC 61131-2, section 7.10.2 2, "Sampling repeat time"
2. Typical signal delay
Corresponds to IEC 61131-2, section 7.10.2 1, "Sampling duration". From this perspective it includes all internal hardware and firmware components, but not "external" delay components from the fieldbus or the controller (TwinCAT). This delay is particularly relevant for absolute time considerations, if AI channels also provide a time stamp that corresponds to the amplitude value which can be assumed to match the physically prevailing amplitude value at the time. Due to the frequency-dependent signal delay time, a dedicated value can only be specified for a given signal. The value also depends on potentially variable filter settings of the channel. A typical characterization in the device documentation may be:
2.1 Signal delay (step response)
Keywords: Settling time The square wave signal can be generated externally with a frequency generator (note impedance!) The 90 % limit is used as detection threshold. The signal delay [ms, µs] is then the time interval between the (ideal) electrical square wave signal and the time at which the analog process value has reached the 90 % amplitude.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
605
Appendix
Fig. 296: Diagram signal delay (step response)
2.2 Signal delay (linear)
Keyword: Group delay Describes the delay of a signal with constant frequency A test signal can be generated externally with a frequency generator, e.g. as sawtooth or sine. A simultaneous square wave signal would be used as reference. The signal delay [ms, µs] is then the interval between the applied electrical signal with a particular amplitude and the moment at which the analog process value reaches the same value. A meaningful range must be selected for the test frequency, e.g. 1/20 of the maximum sampling rate.
Fig. 297: Diagram signal delay (linear)
3. Additional Information May be provided in the specification, e.g.
· Actual sampling rate of the ADC (if different from the channel sampling rate) · Time correction values for run times with different filter settings · etc.
606
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
9.10.2 Notes regarding analog equipment - shielding and earth
Meticulous application of the term "earth" is required, particularly when it comes to reliable use of analog (measuring) signals. The conductive coupling of different potentials, such as earth potential and a housing potential or the earth points of analog devices, can have different aims:
1. Earthing as protective measure against the occurrence of dangerous touch voltages (PE) 2. Earthing for definition of a common signal potential, in order to ensure the function of analog measure-
ments, for example 3. Earthing for discharging of interference or internally generated emissions (FE); keywords: interference
immunity and interference emission
In each case the user should be clear which of the above aims is to be achieved through the respective measures. The respective reference earth can have different potential!
The observations, measures and effects described below primarily refer to 3. "FE/functional earth", taking into account the requirements of 2. "Common reference potential". Information and specifications relating to 1. "PE" can be found in the relevant guidelines, such as VDE0100, and is not part of this section on analog equipment. The focus and application area of the following notes is for the scope of analog signal transmission.
The terms "protective earth" and "functional earth"
This section primarily deals with functional earth (FE,
symbol:
) as a functionally relevant regular part of an installation, in contrast to protective
earth (PE, symbol:
), which is intended to protect persons from excessive touch voltages.
This document
This document provides general recommendations based on practical experience, without taking into account specific features of particular installations. These recommendations should be regarded as a collection of technical solution options. System manufacturers should check to what extent the measures described here are applicable to their system, and which of the suggested measures should be implemented. To this end, different measuring and testing techniques should be used. Any problems should be examined thoroughly, in order to ascertain the trigger and the fault location. This document attempts to deal with a complex issue and does not claim to be exhaustive. We gladly accept suggestions or critical comments.
Lightning protection
Lightning protection aspects are not considered.
Potentially explosive areas
Special regulations and procedures may apply for potentially explosive atmospheres and supply lines for such areas, which are not covered by this documentation.
Reference to individual documents
Special instructions and documentation relating to the devices used must be followed.
Recommended procedure in the event of a conspicuousness
1. Use this document, other publicly available documents/standards and manufacturer documentation to familiarise yourself with the background and practical characteristics of EMC interference. Reflect on the mechanism of action between source of interference transfer path interference sink.
2. Use the specified diagnostic methods to isolate the interference sink, i.e. the location/device that does not work properly
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
607
Appendix
3. Reflect on how the fault could have occurred, taking into account the background information from section 1.
4. Use the information and solution proposals provided to weigh up system-specific options or normative specifications/restrictions. We recommend to only change one component at a time, in order to verify the effectiveness of the respective measure.
5. At the same time, use the specified diagnostic methods to ascertain whether the source of interference or the transfer path has been found.
Functional chain: source of interference coupling interference sink
The undesirable effect of a source of interference on an interference sink via the coupling can be reduced or completely suppressed through the measures described below. A fault results in modification of a wanted signal. In the worst case, the recipient of the wanted signal is no longer able to interpret the information content, or its operation is disturbed due to the modified amplitude/frequency or even electrical damaged.
The fault can be transferred by wire or by radiation.
A device can simultaneously act as source of interference and as interference sink (depending on the effective direction).
A cable/device acts as source of interference effect (emissions, interference emission) due to (e.g.)
through strong/weak interference
· strong/weak interference effect through emissions, i.e. interference emissions
· insufficient suppression through shielding, chokes, filters
· insufficient avoidance through discharge facilities, spark gaps, incorrectly dimensioned termination resistors
A cable/device acts as interference sink
through strong/weak susceptibility to
interference, i.e. inadequate immunity to interference due to (e.g.)
· missing or inadequately implemented protection components: shielding, compensating elements, discharge facilities, spark gaps
In general, the following mechanisms are available for coupling a fault with the wanted signal:
608
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Shielding measures or interference generation prevention may be applied as remedial action. Galvanic coupling measures against transfer:
· Separation of different potentials, avoidance of equalising currents
· Star wiring, no ladder network
Capacitive coupling measures against transfer: · Spatial separation
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
609
Appendix
· Full, close-meshed shielding of the signal cable without interruption or holes. Holes in the sense of this documentation are uncovered areas of the order of centimetres. Significant signal components can be emitted or unintentionally received from a hole with a size of 10 % of the wavelengths.
· Single-sided, low-impedance connection of the shielding to system earth
Inductive coupling measures against transfer: · spatial separation · Shielding, see capacitive coupling · Two-sided, low-impedance connection of the shielding to system earth · Equidirectional, tight twisting (high twisting rate) of the analog signal cables with each other
Wireless coupling - measures: · Short cable lengths · Shielding, see capacitive coupling
Common signal potential, basic measures and notices
In some applications the reference potentials of different devices have to be linked, e.g. in order to be able to perform a measurement.
· Usually, no equalising currents should flow via such connections for remedial measures see the following section.
· Buffer amplifiers may have to be used in some cases · Potential-free connections on the device side may be suitable in some cases note the permitted
potential difference!
FE/shielding, basic measures and information
A list of exemplary measures, taking into account the information provided above, which may be considered in order to reduce interference, is provided below.
· Temporal effectiveness: the effectiveness of implemented measures may reduce over time and should therefore be checked regularly, particularly in the event of anomalies. Negative influencing factors include broken wire, oxidation at contact points, mechanical damage, change in earthing characteristics, change in environment (new interference sources?), etc.
· Selected reference potential The reference potential used for discharge/earthing may itself be subject to interference, so that a connection to it may introduce more interference in the system than it discharges. In this case, a different, low-interference reference potential should be used. To ensure good discharge, it may be helpful to install a separate FE earthing point in the building and use it for sensitive signals/shielding. Caution in the event of lightning strike: a lightning strike in the vicinity can result in large potential differences between buildings and earth, which can affect locally separated earthing equipment. Spark gaps may be able to prevent equipment damage. VDE guidelines must be followed!
Wanted signal routing · Cable routing The cable connections should be as short as possible The denser the cables can be laid over a metallic area/equipotential bonding, the less interference can be introduced, and the more interference is discharged capacitively via earth. Analog signal cables that are susceptible to interference and load cables with strong interference potential: - parallel installation, with a distance of at least 20 cm from each other - avoid parallel installation
610
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
- unshielded cables should be twisted, if possible - provide shielding through metallic isolating strips Use wire end sleeves or cable sockets to connect flexible cables/strands. Tinning is no longer permitted. Unused wires/cables should be earthed on one side as a minimum. · Shielding Shielding must not be used to function as N or PE conductor. Functional earth intended for improving EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) must not be used as protective earth according to VDE 0100. The shielding should not be used to carry discharge/fault currents. Some connection technologies as coax requires signal ground and shield on the same conductor. This can be disadvantageous in specific environments. So it should be checked, if another connection method can be used that provides a separate shield as e.g. triax. · Shield configuration If braided screen is used, it should consist of tin-coated/nickel-plated copper. Aluminium braid may be suitable, provided the specific properties are taken into account. For cables shielded with braid, the cover should be 60% to 95%. In special cases magnetic shielding using magnetically conductive, highly permeable material may be required. Cable shielding may consist of braid and/or electrically conductive foil. The use of foil on its own is inappropriate, since it can easily be interrupted. Contacting of the electrically conductive foil alone for the purpose of shield coupling is not permitted; the braiding must be contacted. Amongst others, the contacting of the electrically conductive foil confects a too low galvanic coupling and is moreover mechanical less resistant. Earthed metal tubes used for shrouding cable can offer additional shielding
· Shield connection
For discharge purposes, a "good connection" should be aimed for, i.e.
- low-impedance connection cross-section as large as possible, fine-wired, perhaps earthing strap - short cables - large-area contact, perhaps EMC gasket - 360°, if possible - metallic conductive components without contaminants, lacquer, fat, oxide layer
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
611
Appendix
- Pig tails (braid twisted at the end or wire attached to the braid) significantly reduce the effectiveness of the shield coupling. It's strictly recommended not to use it particularly with regard to increased immunity to interference requirements.
Beckhoff offers the ZB8500 shield connection system for this purpose. And also see section "Shielding concept".
· Hum interference may occur if several cables that are connected on both sides run between two devices ("earth loop"). However, opening of the shield on one side can significantly reduce the shield effectiveness. A better solution is coupling of the respective shield on one side via a coupling capacitor (C = 10.. 100nF, bipolar). This provides separation for DC, while currents from HF influence can still be discharged.
612
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
The coupling capacitor C must have adequate dielectric strength. In some situations it may be advisable to connect a resistance R in the M range parallel to the capacitor.
CAUTION Potentially explosive atmospheres
Note special regulations for potentially explosive atmospheres! · If the shielded cable continues after the shield contact, the further free cable length under shielding should be no longer than a few segments of 10 cm. This also applies to cables within control cabinets.
· Manufacturers sometimes equip devices with an RC combination between earth and PE. On the one hand this can achieve good discharge capacity for HF interference, on the other hand the device may not be damaged inadvertently through high leakage currents. Such an RC combination on the device side as connection between earth and PE counts as earth-free coupling.
A high-resistance resistor prevents excessive leakage currents. The capacitor short-circuits highfrequency peaks with low impedance. A specified dielectric strength applies for the combination. Good interference protection can be achieved if a shielded cable is laid completely earth-free (only RC connection on both sides).
· If a shielded cable has a drain wire, connection of this conductor to the shield coupling only is inadequate. At the cable end the shield and the drain wire should be connected together at the designated shield point.
· Connection of the shielding with sources of interference - only expected outside the control cabinet
Apply the shielding at the control cabinet entry
Continuation of the shielding within the control cabinet may not be necessary
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
613
Appendix
· Connection of the shielding with sources of interference - also expected inside the control cabinet
see: notices on control cabinet design
The shielding should be opened after the entry into the control cabinet, applied and then continued up to the terminal. At the device it should be contacted again (terminal contact or separate shield coupling).
614
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Equalisation of potential difference
· If signal or communication lines are run over longer distances, the installation should be checked for potential differences. Example: ribbon conductors in a wind turbine tower. To prevent equalising currents in the shielding:
suitable equipotential bonding conductors can be provided
optical fibre can be used
buffer amplifiers can be used
· The equipotential bonding conductor should be fine-wired, so that it has a large surface area to ensure effectiveness for high-frequency interference currents. In addition, compliance with the minimum diameters according to IEC 60364-5-54 is required
copper 6 mm²
aluminium 16 mm²
steel 50 mm²
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
615
Appendix
· The earthing system should have a star configuration. · The PE connection replaces neither HF earthing nor the shielding, but is required for safety reasons. · Lightning protection may have to be provided. · Atmospheric influences can lead to significant potential shifts.
Additional safety measures · For connected inductors and capacitors protective circuits/extinguishing equipment must be provided on the device side, in order to prevent voltage peaks as long the connected device does not already support such a performance.
· Filter components against interference emission should be used if necessary, e.g. in the form of current-compensating chokes or toroidal core ferrites
· Pick up the power supply for the measuring equipment in a star shape from the central supply source. Lay the feed and return wire together side by side
· Thermoelectric effects in the mV range could have a disturbing effect to analog signals and also Avoid potential differences between different materials Check the temperature or material, if necessary
Practice-oriented diagnostic methods for system examination
The following section lists some options for checking the effectiveness of shielding measures: · Visual inspection · Acoustic inspection (listen for voltage flash-overs) · Voltage measurement with voltmeter between suspect system points · Monitoring of voltages on shielding conductors with an oscilloscope that is suitable for high frequencies · Current measurement of equalising currents on the shielding cable with a clamp-on ammeter. The current on the shielding should not exceed a few milliamps (True RMS). · Continuity measurement of the shielding and checking for unacceptable shunt · Temperature measurement of surge arresters; the contact point will warm up in the presence of high current passage and high contact resistance
9.10.3 Notes on analog aspects dynamic signals
This chapter deals with the problem of measurement/acquisition of actual analog electrical signals from the industrial automation environment. Such signals are generated by sensors and measured by automation components. With this information, the (software-based) control system perceives the physical system reality and derives follow-up actions from it.
616
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
The signals are formed electrically and measured analogously as · signals via industrial interfaces 10 V, 20 mA, ... · signals from the sensor directly: voltage of a battery [V], bridge signal [mV/V], current measurement [A], resistance []...
Signals that do not have to be measured electrically but are already present virtually in the control system can also be analyzed with the tools listed below, but are not the focus of this document.
Introduction
This chapter deals with the usual "circumstances" of real analog sensor signals in industrial environments, which are considered "over time", in the course of which information is transmitted to the controller in the form of
· amplitude or signal level, or "signal is present", "signal is not present" · frequency or · a mixture thereof
In practical terms and based on actual examples, this means · the signals are "constant" battery measurement (but only without load)
· or are constantly changing, unpredictable, e.g.:
(continuous weighing process)
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
617
Appendix
(excitation of a solenoid valve) · In most cases they are not constantly cyclic "deterministic", like a 1 kHz sine wave from a frequency
generator, but have pauses and change their frequency, i.e. they are "stochastic", e.g.:
(excitation of a solenoid valve) · Sometimes they are very steep-edged:
618
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
· Or not:
Appendix
· They are never "ideal" but are subject to disturbance, interference and attenuation:
· They can be superimposed, apparently consisting of two superimposed sine signals:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
619
Appendix · If many frequencies are involved, this is indeed the case:
(the beginning of a song, measured at the loudspeaker) · They change over time, temperature, humidity, installation position, etc.:
· And a desired square wave signal (green) quickly becomes something else (red) on the line:
620
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix · Sometimes all these factors interact, in which case the question arises: "what is the measured value"?
· In any case, they rarely look as ideal and cyclical as here:
NOTE The time axis is relative
In the above examples the x/time axis is intentionally not labeled. Whether a signal is fast/slow, flat/steep "only" depends on the evaluation against the set requirement and the measuring time: in a mechanical tensile test (tear test), the signal changes only slightly for a long time, until very steep signal changes in the µs range are suddenly observed at the break point
Although "real" industrial signals are not permanently uniformly ideal and sinusoidal, it is helpful to use the terms and tools of theoretical signal analysis to characterize effects and test the effectiveness of measures. Keywords such as "signal frequency", "edge steepness", "attenuation" and similar can then be applied to the real signal section by section.
This chapter therefore considers the extensive theoretical basis of signal theory (which can be studied via www.wikipedia.com and standard text books) through the eyes of the industrial automation engineer and focuses on
· signal parameters µV..kV, corresponding to Ampere, etc., · signal frequencies 0 Hz to ~1 MHz, · non-constant signals,
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
621
Appendix
· that are not ideal.
Practical applications
Analog input modules can measure as follows, in order of increasing complexity:
· Static electrical variables that do not change over a "short" time: DC voltage or DC current, generally one constant variable, "DC" for short (direct current). This is available e.g. as output voltage of a battery that is not under load. Note: "short" is a subjective term that very much depends on the particular situation
· Dynamic electric variables that change over time: AC voltage or AC current, generally one alternating variable, "AC" for short (alternating current). It has a signal shape that repeats with a certain period. This is present, for example, in the German power supply system with a sinusoidal signal form of 50 Hz or appears in the form of "rapidly" changing measured variables on machines. The reciprocal value of the period value is the frequency f; unit Hz. The maximum value is called amplitude among other things and can refer to the current or voltage value. For a first approach it can be regarded as a constantly repeating, periodic/deterministic signal.
· Mixed signals: These are a "mixed form" of several overlaid alternating variables. They take the form of a voltage or current signal containing several alternating variables with different frequencies and amplitudes, and may also contain a DC voltage, which is usually referred to as the "DC component" or "offset". Here too, the first approach should be based on constantly repeating, periodic/deterministic signals
· If the signals change in their frequency/amplitude, so-called non-deterministic/stochastic (random) signals, we finally encounter the real cable reality. A particularly good example of a signal of this kind would be a "noise signal".
It should be noted that the "actual" signals that appear the "real" signals are more or less mixed signals, because electronic components are always "lossy" and usually distort a "pure" signal shape. Ideal signals are theoretical variables where no losses are taken into account. Therefore, a signal is specified as a real occurring mixed signal among other things by its maximum amplitude A and the lowest frequency that it contains, i.e. the base frequency. In addition, the constancy of a frequency in real environments is usually not possible either due to physical conditions. As a rule, it is rather complicated to create an oscillation generating system that is subject to virtually no changes of frequency over time.
Below, we explain what fundamentally needs to be observed when measuring dynamic signals with analog input modules.
Signal theory
The basic accuracies specified in the Beckhoff IO documentation apply in general to static (DC) signals unless stated otherwise. When determining the specification, a DC signal is applied and a measurement is only carried out when the entire measuring system has completely settled down and the measured value does not change within a "short" time. At attempt is made in the production calibration to minimize the residual deviation GDC.
On account of the losses and inertia of resistors, inductances and capacitances in the amplifiers of an electrical input circuit as well as the finite calculation times of digital signal processing blocks, settling requires a certain time (also referred to as settling time). Depending on the layout, this can take between a few nanoseconds and several seconds. Side note: If the thermal settling of the devices/cables also has to be taken into account, it can even take many minutes.
If, on the other hand, a dynamic, time-dependent (AC) signal is measured, the measuring system can never settle to a completely stationary state, because the signal is constantly changing and the rate of change of the AC signal is greater than the settling time of the system. This gives rise to an additional frequencydependent deviation that is not covered by the DC specification GDC. For example, if the dynamic signal is a sine wave
S(t)=Asin(2fSignalft),
with amplitude A, the additional deviation can be displayed as gain deviation GAC. In reality, this means that Ameasured Asignal, where not only attenuation Ameasured < Asignal is possible, but also inadvertently amplification Ameasured > Asignal. The total gain deviation then results in
622
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Gtot = GAC + GDC (frequency-dependent) where GAC is the additional gain deviation due to the alternating signal. Below, a real signal is examined whose signal composition (base frequency, noise, overlaid interferences) changes constantly; nevertheless, an ideal case is assumed with regard to its frequency, which is then constant (f = const.). Note: since this method has its historical basis in signal transmission in the AC range, the corresponding terms are used: gain/amplification, dB, attenuation and so on. As described later, this often leads to common statements in logarithmic [dB] representation, which have to be converted for low-frequency [ppm] assessment. The frequency response in dB and ppm This frequency-dependent deviation can be represented as a so-called frequency response. The frequency response describes the ratio of the output signal to the input signal with regard to the amplitude and the phase for a certain frequency range.
The phase shift is irrelevant in many applications and is therefore often not displayed. However, it should be borne in mind that not only the amplitude of the output signal can change over the frequency, but also the phase of the output signal relative to the input signal. On a graph of the frequency response, the x-axis always represents the frequency fsignal. The amplitude ratio is displayed either linearly or logarithmically (preferably in the unit dB [decibel]) in the y-axis. Depending on the analysis objective, the linear or logarithmic scaling shows certain characteristics better. It should be emphasized that the scaling (linear/logarithmic) is independent of the unit (Hz, ppm, dB)!
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
623
Appendix Scaling variants
y axis
Linear
measurement uncertainty
Attenuation
x axis / frequency
Linear [Hz]
Logarithmic (then preferably in [dB] )
Helpful for accuracy
Unusual, with increasing
considerations in the ppm frequency attenuation is
range
no longer clearly shown
Logarithmic (then
Not very helpful the lower Usual for dB
preferably as attenuation frequency range is poorly representation
in [dB] )
resolved
The unit dB (decibel, 1/10 Bel) is used to describe the ratios of two values to each other. It has no unit itself! A dB is defined for two powers P1 and P2 by the following equation
With this representation method, for example, it is possible in a system chain with amplifying and attenuating elements to determine a total value simply by the addition and subtraction of the individual values instead of multiplication and division. For the two electrical power values on the same resistance, the general equation P = U · I, together with Ohm's law, produces a square ratio for the two currents I1 and I2 as well as for the two voltages U1 and U2:
and
transferred to the ratio of the two powers P1 und P2:
and
The square can be written before the logarithm and the following equation thus results in general for two amplitudes A1 and A2 as field variables:
In this context it is helpful to note the following conversions of dB and amplitude ratios:
[dB] 40 20
[A2/A1] 100 10
624
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
[dB] 3 0 -3 -20 -40
[A2/A1] 1.414 1 0.707 0.1 0.01
The following illustration shows the double logarithmic amplitude response of an "ideal", i.e. "calculated" RC circuit configured as a low-pass filter, where R = 1 M and C = 1 nF. Both amplitude and frequency are represented logarithmically:
Fig. 298: Amplitude response of a low pass RC circuit
The input signal passes through almost without attenuation up to the frequency marked by the dotted line (fsignal 159 Hz, amplitude at 3 dB, 102 = 100!). Above = to the right of this frequency (obviously even a little before that), the circuit begins to attenuate the input signal noticeably. The marked frequency obviously separates two areas with different behaviors. It is therefore also referred to as the cut-off frequency fc.
Depending on the background to the problem, there are various parameters to describe the amplitude/ frequency responses. The 3 dB point is one possible parameter and is often used with analog RC filters or digital Butterworth filters.
The graph gives the impression that the amplitude passes through entirely unattenuated up to f = 20 Hz, but that is not the case. Like a view from afar, the dB representation conceals the fact that, from a microscopic point of view with a resolution in % = 1/100 or ppm = 1/1000000 = 106, attenuation does indeed take place. And this is particularly interesting when it comes to analog input modules that are specified with a basic accuracy in the ppm range.
The next illustration shows the same relative attenuation, but in ppm. It is a double-linear representation of the amplitude response of the RC circuit:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
625
Appendix
Fig. 299: Relative "gain" deviation of the RC circuit in ppm up to 50 Hz
The graph shows that at 10 Hz the output amplitude is already smaller relative to the input amplitude by 1968 ppm - in fact a measurement error. Since it is known in concrete terms, this can even be called a measurement error.
From the above table, we therefore select the small attenuation range of interest for metrological modules with some example values:
dB vs. ppm [dB] -0.001 -0.005 -0.01 -0.02 -0.04 -0.08 -0.2 -0.4 -0.8 -1.6 -3
[%] 0.01 0.06 0.12 0.23 0.46 0.92 2.28 4.5 8.8 16.82 29.21
[ppm] 115 575 1151 2300 4595 9168 22763 45007 87989 168236 292054
An attenuation of 3 dB thus means almost 30%FSV or almost 300000 ppmFSV amplitude error! And measurement accuracy of 0.1% corresponds to about 0.01 dB. This sounds dramatic, and rightly so, and is
lost in the usual logarithmic dB representation.
626
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix The "problem" of the dB representation, however, is mainly due to the fact that a dB representation usually extends over several Hz orders of magnitude - precisely in order to represent the high attenuations and to show linear behavior over wide frequency ranges.
When zooming into the dB representation and for consideration only lower frequency parts, the information is much better:
But before we look at the effect of the frequency response specifically on analog inputs, we need to look at other phenomena.
Filters are everywhere
The above-described "manipulation" of the frequency response takes place by means of so-called filters along the signal processing chain
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
627
Appendix
· unavoidably in all electrical, i.e. analog elements · manipulably in the digital, i.e. software elements
Filter can be subdivided according to their application and their implementation. On the one hand, filters are used to influence or change the signal in the time domain, for example to smooth signals or to remove the DC component. Frequency-selecting filters aim to separate certain frequency bands from one another. The above example with the RC circuit is a low-pass filter that allows low frequencies to pass through with almost no attenuation while strongly attenuating higher frequencies. In addition to low-pass filters there are other filter types, such as high-pass filter, band-pass filter and band-stop filter. Other user-defined filters can be designed for other applications that don't fit into these categories, or for complicated applications.
Filters can be constructed either as analog filters (active or passive) or as digital filters in software.
Filters are characterized by their response to certain signal types. Each linear filter has a pulse response or step response and a frequency and phase response. The step response describes the temporal amplitude curve when an (ideal) step is connected to the input; the frequency response describes the amplitude gain (or phase shift) between the output and input signal. If one of the three graphs is known, the other two graphs can be calculated from it.
With many filters, the -3 dB frequency indicates the signal frequency at which the signal is attenuated by -3 dB. As already indicated above, it is also referred to with certain filter types as a cut-off frequency, at which the output power has been halved and the amplitude has fallen to 1/2 = approx. 70% in comparison with the input amplitude, corresponding to a attenuation of approx. 30%.
Digital filters can be divided into two categories: FIR filters (finite impulse response filters) and IIR filters (infinite impulse response filters). As the names suggest, the two filter types differ by their pulse response in the time range. The following illustrations show the differences in the pulse response of the two filter types:
Fig. 300: Example Impulse response of two filters; top FIR filter, bottom IIR filter FIR filters are described by the mathematical equation
628
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Only input data x(nk) are used which are accordingly sampled amplitude and time discrete values. With an FIR filter, the impulse response becomes zero after a finite time, which ultimately means that it is always stable, since there is no feedback, and can exhibit a linear phase response. However, FIR filters require a higher filter order to achieve a performance similar to IIR filters, which results in a longer calculation time. "Higher order" means that more filters have to be calculated one after the other.
IIR filters are described by the following equation
In order to calculate the output value y(n), the previously calculated output data y(n-k) are used in addition to the input data x(n-k). The filter is therefore recursive. For that reason, IIR filters are also called recursive filters. The pulse response of an IIR filter is infinite and thus never settle to zero stationary. This can ultimately lead to instability.
A fundamental effect was mentioned here by the way: the more effect/costly a digital filter is, the higher its complexity and thus the longer its calculation time in the software. This leads in practice to a signal delay.
Nyquist, Shannon and false signals: "Aliasing"
The fundamental sampling theorem states that, if a measuring device samples an analog signal at a constant (steady) sampling rate that is more than twice the highest frequency component present in the signal, the original analog signal can be fully restored from the discrete data points.
(Note: the highest frequency present in the signal is referred to as the bandwidth of this signal.)
After all, this is the actual aim of an analog measurement, i.e. the original signal should be available digitally as accurately as possible ("correct") and complete in the control system for further processing in the program. However, a limit must be imposed here that only signal components (frequency ranges are meant here) that are essential for the further process need to be detected. Ideally, the user will make a conscious choice and reflect this limitation. Example: A slow temperature control must be insensitive to low-frequency signals, because this could disturb the controller.
In order to record the analog signal as accurately as possible, the signal bandwidth fsignal must be limited through suitable filtering (see chapter on "Filters") so that only the desired signal but no interfering signals pass through, and the sampling rate fsampling must be selected such that the signal can be restored from the data points as a true representation of the original signal. We therefore have to examine the relationship between the actual sampling rate fsampling and fsignal. (Note: each measurement takes place in the two dimensions time and measured variable. Here we concentrate on the temporal dimension, i.e. the sampling).
Theoretical considerations relating to the sampling theorem are illustrated with an analog signal and different sampling rates.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
629
Appendix
Fig. 301: Analog signal (cos) with a frequency of 1 Hz (blue line) sampled at 10 Hz (red circles)
The analog signal with f = 1 Hz was sampled with fsampling = 10 Hz. The largest (and only) frequency component in this sample is 1 Hz, therefore fsignal = 1 Hz and fsampling = 10fsignal. It is easy to see that the original analog signal can be reconstructed from the discrete values. For example, a fast Fourier transform (FFT) could be calculated from the above data. This would easily be possible, and the resulting spectrum would extend to fsampling/2 = 5 Hz, with a resolution of 0.2 Hz.
If the analog signal had not been a "pure" sine wave but had been harmonically distorted and noisy, then fsignal would no longer be 1 Hz but usually much larger due to the higher frequency components contained in it. In this case the chosen fsampling must be significantly greater than f, depending on the evaluation aim. This also applies in general terms, as will be explained a little later.
The next figure shows what happens if the fSignal = 1 Hz signal is sampled at fsampling = 2 Hz, i.e. fsampling = 2 · fSignal.
630
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Fig. 302: Analog signal (cos) with a frequency of 1 Hz (blue line), sampled at 2 Hz (red circles) and interpolated / "traced" (red line)
Since in this sample a specification resulting from the sampling theorem is just about met, it is still possible to detect the frequency and amplitude of the signal: fsampling is equal to 2 fSignal.
However, this is no longer possible in general, as the following problem becomes apparent here, if one imagines that the sampling moments would be randomly shifted by 90° relative to the signal. In this case the value of the signal at each sample point would be zero, and it would no longer be possible to detect the frequency or amplitude.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
631
Appendix
In practice, it is much more likely that the measuring points lie "somewhere" on the signal:
632
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
In this case, at least the frequency can still be determined due to the zero crossings, but the peak value (and thus very important signal information) cannot be determined because it is not clear where the measuring points are located on the original signal. In practice, however, neither fsampling nor fsignal will be highly constant, and longer observation will result in variable phasing and the peak value will still be caught "at some point". However, this is of little use with fast-moving industrial signals.
After these theoretical considerations, let us now look at a concrete real example: the induced voltage of a rotating gear wheel on a coil as speed sensor results in the following representation in TwinCAT ScopeView:
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
633
Appendix
Selecting a higher sampling frequency (sampling rate) would be advantageous here in order to be able to follow the amplitude curve better, because signals seem to overlap here. The zero crossings may be sufficient for speed observation.
The frequency
is also called the Nyquist frequency. If an analog signal contains frequency components equal to or greater than the Nyquist frequency, the original signal can no longer be reconstructed. In practice, the Nyquist frequency is selected to be at least a factor of two to three times greater than the bandwidth of the signal frequency fsignal. The resulting problem of the non-reconstructable original signal due to fsignal fNyquist was already hinted at in the previous example. The figure below illustrates the problem.
634
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Fig. 303: Analog signal (cos) with a frequency of 1 Hz (blue line), sampled at 1.1 Hz (red circles) and interpolated / "traced" (red line)
Here fsampling = 1.1 · fSignal. The frequency information of the original blue signal has been lost. From the control system point of view (which only "sees" the red measuring points), it appears that the measured red signal is a signal with a lower frequency. This effect is called aliasing because a different frequency is detected. It is a common problem when the fundamental sampling theorem (also called the Shannon-Nyquist sampling theorem) is violated. The apparently detected alias frequency in this case is falias = 0.1 Hz.
The Shannon-Nyquist theorem and alias effects focus solely on the question of whether the original analog signal can be reconstructed from the sampled values. This cannot be the sole criterion for selecting an analog input, but it is an essential one. In practice, there are situations where the sampling theorem is deliberately violated, e.g. in order to reliably detect fast signal changes. Since the user already knows a lot about the analog signal to be measured, such considerations are quite possible and in many cases help to optimize the measuring system.
Further effects
Further phenomena from the field of measurement of alternating variables such as noise, distortion, signal cross-talk and signal delay in detail will be further illuminated here in due time.
Reaction or recording? Or both?
Finally, from an application perspective, it is important to consider whether the application is a response task, a data recording task, or a mixture of both.
· Reaction: Example: a distance sensor with a 10 V analog output detects an object approaching on a conveyor belt at 10 m/s and, if 5 V is exceeded, a valve for a paint application should be opened in the shortest possible time. Another extreme example would be current control in a softwarecontrolled magnetic bearing.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
635
Appendix
The following would need to be selected: # an analog input with high sampling rate, open filter, possibly even DistributedClock timestamp function (although the reference to the absolute world time probably does not matter) # short EtherCAT cycle time and short PLC cycle time, if necessary 100 µs or less
Analog accuracy is secondary here; a long-term recording of the measured values will probably not be carried out either
· Data recording Example: a strain test lasting several days on a steel structure with slow movements in the seconds range. The following would need to be selected: # a precision analog input; important here are low noise and high temperature insensitivity, synchronization across multiple channels, possibly even absolute time synchronization to the GPS clock # slow EtherCAT cycle time, the analysis program in C/PLC/Matlab will probably demand quite a lot of the controller The sampling rate is probably secondary here. Signals with short rise and fall times as well as attenuation issues due to high frequencies are not expected
· In addition to the above extreme examples, most industrial applications are a mixed form of the two. That said, only the user can judge whether a reaction in the 100 µs range is "fast" in view of his problem: for temperature monitoring in the seconds range, this is "too fast", for laser monitoring "too slow".
At the end of the day, therefore, the analog and temporal characteristics of the Beckhoff analog devices have to be judged against the problem.
Effect on analog input devices and the design of the same
Depending on the intended application objective, some basic decisions have to be made by the manufacturer of analog inputs during the design phase. The different answers to the questions
· Attenuation: at what frequency does attenuation occur, how does it proceed? · Sampling rate: which signal frequency should be measured at all, and with what accuracy? · Delay: with what delay may the signal arrive in the controller?
have also been formulated at Beckhoff in the form of analog input devices. The user can find the right device for his application with the help of
· the Beckhoff documents (e.g. this manual) · Beckhoff Sales · and if necessary practical
tests.
NOTE kHz vs. kSps
Note: in order to avoid linguistic misunderstandings in documentation and sales meetings, the incoming signal frequency fsignal is described at Beckhoff with the unit [Hz], and the technical sampling rate fsampling of the analog input with (samples per second) or [kSps] (kilo samples per second).
Here is a rough classification for this:
· The EL30xx class with its 10 V/20 mA inputs is designed for simple measurements on slow signals with 12-bit resolution. Therefore, the hardware filter and the sampling rate are set very low.
· The EL31xx class (also: EP31xx, EJ31xx) with its 10 V/20 mA inputs with 16-bit resolution is designed for fast signals and reaction tasks. In order to promptly inform the controller of fast-changing signals, even the hardware filter is purposely selected higher than the sampling rate. However, this can lead to alias signals in measuring applications.
636
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
· The measuring terminals of the ELM3xxx class are consistently designed for signal correctness in recording applications; the hardware filter lies well below half the sampling rate with its -3 dB point. The ELM3x0x class "10 kSps" is more suitable for faster tasks, while the ELM3x4x class "1kSps" is more suitable for slower tasks.
· Moreover, key data that are suitable for the application area have been specially defined in the various special function terminals, which cannot all be listed here in detail. For example, the EL3632 / EPP3632 has variable hardware filters that can be adapted to the sampling rate.
9.10.4 Notes on analog aspects to EL3751/ ELM3xxx
Beyond the general instructions relating to analog technology, the following instructions apply for the EL3751 and ELM3xxx (as far as applicable):
· The internal GND of the analog terminal is connected to the connection point Uv. When several terminals are wired, the permitted CommonMode voltage among the terminals must not be exceeded.
· The "Uv"-points must not be connected with each other or with other another potential, although it can be helpful to use it to correct system-specific negative influences.
· Voltage measurement at the high-side shunt A high-side shunt is a shunt that is connected to the positive/upper potential, in which case the negative connection is generally used for switching, hence the term "negative switching".
In principle, it is possible to use mV measurement at a shunt for current determination with the differential U inputs of the EL3751/ELM3xxx. However, two important limitations must be considered
Ucm between the channels (common mode): For multi-channel terminals, Ucm,max (see technical data [} 17] in this documentation) between the channels must not be exceeded. With a 24 V supply of the loads, it is therefore not possible to use a high-side shunt at 24 V potential on a channel and a low-side shunt at 0 V potential on another channel, because the resulting internal reference ground Uv would assume a mean value such that Ucm is exceeded. Therefore, only high-side shunts or only low-side shunts should be used at a terminal.
Dynamic processes through pulsed current: In general, the current is controlled through pulsing/ PWM. Depending on the inductance in the load circuit, this can lead to sudden current changes and therefore voltage changes over the shunt. Ucm at the differential inputs changes accordingly. The channel (this therefore also applies to the single-channel EL3751) is LC-coupled to the internal reference ground Uv, and the sudden increase in Ucm results in an increase in Uv. During this transient (several ms), measurement errors may occur when exceeding Ucm,max. PWM current measurement with a high-side shunt in 24 V networks is only possible in the 30 V measuring range.
9.10.5 Note on Beckhoff calibration certificates
Basically every Beckhoff analogue device (input or output) will be justified i.e. will be calibrated during production. This procedure won't be documented unique. This documentation as a calibration certificate is only provided for devices that are expressly delivered with a certificate.
The calibration certificate (or German: "Kalibrierschein") entitles the residual error after compensation/ adjustment to the used standard (reference device). The calibration certificate (pdf formatted) can be unique allocated to the device via the ID number. It is therefore not a statement about a device class such as e.g. an approval, but always only applies to a single, named device. It is available for download.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
637
Appendix
By its nature this certificate documents the accuracy of measurement at the time of certificate creation, it contains no assertion about the behavior or change of the measurement accuracy in the future. A calibration certificate acts as a backtracking view to the previous time of usage. By reiterated certification procedures over years (without justification) it allows making conclusions about its ageing behavior, so called calibrate history.
Different "qualities" of a calibration certificate are common:
· Beckhoff calibration certificates Such IP20 terminals can be identified by the product suffix -0020. The certificate is issued in Beckhoff production as pdf. The terminals can be obtained from Beckhoff and recalibrated by the Beckhoff service department.
· ISO17025 calibration certificates Such IP20 terminals can be identified by the product suffix -0030. The certificate is issued by a service provider on behalf of Beckhoff as a part of Beckhoff production. The terminals can be obtained from Beckhoff and recalibrated by the Beckhoff service department.
· DAkkS calibration certificates (German: "Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle GmbH") Such IP20 terminals can be identified by the product suffix -0030. The certificate is issued by a accredited service provider on behalf of Beckhoff as a part of Beckhoff production. The terminals can be obtained from Beckhoff and recalibrated by the Beckhoff service department.
Beckhoff produces a wide range of analog input/output devices as IP20 terminal or IP67 box. A selection of these is also available with factory/ISO/DAkkS calibration certificates. For specific details, see the technical data of the devices or contact Beckhoff Sales.
Linguistic note
In American English, "calibration" or "alignment" is understood to mean compensation/adjustment, thus a modifying effect on the device. "Verification", on the other hand, refers to observational determination and documentation of the residual error, referred in German language use as "Kalibrierung".
9.10.6 Readjusting the specification
The analog input terminal is a function block of the modular DIN rail-mountable IP20 system. It follows that there is an almost infinite number of combination options for terminals on the DIN rail, size of the terminal segment, and also a wide range of applications at different ambient temperatures, control cabinet configurations or packing densities. Other influencing factors affecting an analog input terminal as measuring device include cable routing, EMC and earthing measures, the ventilation situation and contamination. In order to ensure reliable replication of the assured specification, despite this variety of factors, a reference configuration is defined below, which should be used as reference environment for verifying the properties of one or several terminals.
NOTE: This does NOT mean that the terminal specification can only be met with this exact configuration. The reference configuration should only be used as an aid for creating a uniform environment for Beckhoff and customer hardware, in order to ensure comparability of the measurement results and simplify the analog communication. This configuration enables undesirable interference in the real system to be separated from the terminal, to facilitate troubleshooting of the system.
The configuration is within the definition space of IEC 61131-2 and essentially follows the rules of EMCcompliant control cabinet construction.
Definition of the environment
· The terminals to be examined should be self-cooling through unobstructed natural convection. All further details are based on this premise
· The terminals are installed in an enclosed control cabinet. This control cabinet is located in a temperature-controlled environment, e.g. a temperature chamber. The control cabinet should have the following dimensions: 600 mm x 600 mm x 350 mm (width x depth x height). The lid must open to the front.
638
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Fig. 304: Representation the mounting position of the DIN rail · A 35 mm x 15 mm DIN rail according to EN 50022 is used for the mounting. This rail is mounted horizontally at the rear panel of the control cabinet. It must extend over the entire width of the control cabinet. The DIN rail must be installed such that the terminals are positioned vertically and exactly centrally in the control cabinet. The terminals should also be centered horizontally. · The DIN rail must conductively connected to the control cabinet. The DIN rail is earthed with a cable (low-interference PE). Ensure the door is properly connected. · The supply lines to the devices under test and the power feed terminals should exit at the front. The space above and below the terminals must be clear. The supply lines should be bundled such that convection in the control cabinet is obstructed as little as possible.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
639
Appendix
Fig. 305: Arrangement of the supply lines to and from the device under test in the control cabinet
· The control cabinet temperature is measured according to IEC 61131-2 at the indicated position at the air inlet point upstream of the terminal when the unit is ventilated. The ambient temperature must be measured with a (verifiable) accuracy of better than ±0.2 °C. The temperature sensor must be mounted horizontally. The temperature outside the control cabinet must be controlled such that the temperature at the measuring point is a constant 23°C.
640
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
Appendix
Fig. 306: Dimensions and installation in the control cabinet
· The control cabinet must be empty, except the terminals that are part of the measurement configuration, the supply lines and the temperature sensor.
· Any other terminals that may be required must be installed outside the control cabinet. The control cabinet feed-through should match the supply lines.
· Shielded cables should be used for the signal lines. The shield should be connected to the DIN rail. State of the art shielding should be used; cf. widely available documents, e.g. from ZVEI. Components from the Beckhoff shielding connection system (ZB8500, ZB8510, ZB8520) should be used for this purpose. The shielding should be connected on one side to the devices under test and the control cabinet.
Definition of the configuration · The following terminals are required for the measurement configuration as a minimum; the configuration can include 2-10 devices under test. Configuration as follows, based on two devices under test as an example: 1x Bus Coupler EK1100 2x terminals to be measured ("devices under test") 4x EBUS/KBUS power feed terminal EL9410 1x bus end cap/end terminal EL9011 · The terminals are then lined up as shown below (for 2 devices under test):
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
641
Appendix
Fig. 307: Schematic diagram of the test configuration
· For thermal reasons, 2x EL9410 are connected at the end of the terminal segment. These ensure that the preceding EL3751 is operated in a way that is thermally similar to a center position in the terminal segment.
· The internal terminal temperature in CoE 0x9000:01 should be regarded as a guide. In the environment referred to above, the internal temperature of the EL3751 is expected to be around 52 ±2 °C. Otherwise, the ambient temperature should be adjusted accordingly.
· Both supply voltages (Us and Up) must be connected to the Bus Coupler and all power feed terminals. The operating voltage must be +24 V ±0.5 V, unless an individual terminal requires a different Up voltage.
· The ground connections of Us and Up may be short-circuited. The PE connections of the Bus Coupler and the power feed terminals do not have to be connected.
· If the devices under test have shielding (functional earth) at a terminal point, this must not be connected, since the terminals have a shield spring on the DIN rail at the rear.
9.11 Support and Service
Beckhoff and their partners around the world offer comprehensive support and service, making available fast and competent assistance with all questions related to Beckhoff products and system solutions.
Beckhoff's branch offices and representatives
Please contact your Beckhoff branch office or representative for local support and service on Beckhoff products!
The addresses of Beckhoff's branch offices and representatives round the world can be found on her internet pages: https://www.beckhoff.com
You will also find further documentation for Beckhoff components there.
Beckhoff Support
Support offers you comprehensive technical assistance, helping you not only with the application of individual Beckhoff products, but also with other, wide-ranging services:
· support · design, programming and commissioning of complex automation systems
642
Version: 2.6
ELM3xxx
· and extensive training program for Beckhoff system components
Hotline: Fax: e-mail:
+49 5246 963 157 +49 5246 963 9157 support@beckhoff.com
Beckhoff Service
The Beckhoff Service Center supports you in all matters of after-sales service: · on-site service · repair service · spare parts service · hotline service
Hotline: Fax: e-mail:
+49 5246 963 460 +49 5246 963 479 service@beckhoff.com
Beckhoff Headquarters
Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG
Huelshorstweg 20 33415 Verl Germany
Phone: Fax: e-mail: web:
+49 5246 963 0 +49 5246 963 198 info@beckhoff.com https://www.beckhoff.com
Appendix
9.12 Reshipment and return
This product is individually packed and sealed. Unless otherwise agreed, Beckhoff can only accept returns in unopened original packaging with the seal intact.
ELM3xxx
Version: 2.6
643
More Information: www.beckhoff.com/measurement/
Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG Hülshorstweg 20 33415 Verl Germany Phone: +49 5246 9630 info@beckhoff.com www.beckhoff.com
ST4 PDF Engine (Build 10.0.3.0)